.  Methods  and  Players  of 
Modern  Lawn  Tennis 


BY 
J.  PARMLY  PARET 


With  Opinions  on  Disputed  Points  of 
Technique  from  Many  Expert  Players 


EDITED  BY    .   ,     . 

S.  WALLIS  MERRIHEW 


AMERICAN  LAWN  TENNIS 
SINGER  BUILDING,  NEW  YORK 

1915 


COPYRIGHT,  1915 

BY 

J.  PARMLY  PARET  AND  S.  WALLIS  MERRIHEW 


FIRST  EDITION 
PUBLISHED,  AUGUST  i>  1915 


Opinions  on  Many  Disputed  Points  of  Technique 

BY 

R.  NORRIS  WILLIAMS,  2ND, 

Champion  of  America  in  Singles  and  Member  of  the  1913   and   1914   Davis  Cup 
International  teams. 

THOMAS  C.  BUNDY, 

Champion  of  America  in  Doubles  in  1912,  1913  and  1914,  and  Member  of  the  1911 
and   1914  Davis  Cup  International  teams. 

KARL  H.  BEHR, 

Member  of  the  Davis  Cup  International  teams  of  1907  and  1914. 

FREDERICK  B.  ALEXANDER, 

Champion  of  America  in  Doubles  in  1907,  1908,  1909  and  1910,  and  Member  of  the 
Davis  Cup  International  Team  of  1908. 

RAYMOND  D.  LITTLE, 

Champion  of  America  in  Doubles  for  1911,  and  Member  of  the  Davis  Cup  Inter- 
national teams  of  1906,   1909  and   1911. 

HAROLD  H.  HACKETT, 

Champion   of  America  in  Doubles  for  1907,  1908,   1909   and  1910,  and  Member  of 
the  Davis  Cup  International  teams  of  1908,  1909  and  1913. 

BEALS  C.  WRIGHT, 

Champion   of  America  in  Singles  for   1905,   in  Doubles  for   1904,   1905   and   1906 
and  Member  of  the  Davis  Clip  International  teams  of  1905,  1907,  1908  and  1911. 

JAMES  C.  PARKE, 

Member    of    Enalish    Davis    Cup    International    teams    of    1908,    1909,    1912,    1913 

and  1914. 

CHARLES  P.  DIXON, 

Champion  of  All-England  in  Doubles  for  1912  and  1913,  and  Member  of  English 
Davis  Cup  International  teams  of  1909,  1911,  1912  and  1913. 

R.  LINDLEY  MURRAY  GEORGE  M.  CHURCH 

WATSON  M.  WASH  BURN  ELI  A  F.  FOTTRELL 

CLARENCE  HOBART  ALFRED  S.  DABNEY 

G.  PEABODY  GARDNER,  JR.  FREDERICK  C.  INMAN 

NATHANIEL  W.  NILES  WALLACE  F.  JOHNSON 

ROBERT  LEROY  THEODORE  R.  PELL 

GUSTAVE   F.   TOUCHARD  ALEXANDER  M.   SQUAIR 

EDWARD  B.  DEW  HURST  JOSEPH  J.  ARMSTRONG 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN  JOHN  R.  STRACHAN 

RICHARD  HARTE  W.  MERRILL  HALL 

R.  CHAUNCEY  SEAVER  DEAN  MATHEY 

S.  HOWARD  VOSHELL  G.  CARLTON  SHAFER 

IRVING  C.  WRIGHT  EDWARD  H.  WHITNEY 

WYLIE  C.  GRANT  CARL  R.  GARDNER 


333694 


With  the  Deepest  Appreciation  of 
a  Life-Long  Student  of  the  Game 


THIS  BOOK  Is  DEDICATED 

TO 
THE  AMERICAN  LAWN  TENNIS  PLAYER 

Who  Has  Put  Into  the  Sport  the  Finest  Points 
of  Skill  that  It  has  To-Day 

TO 

HOLCOMBE  WARD 

who  gave  us  the  American  Twist  Service 

TO 

ROBERT  WRENN 

who  developed  the  best  match-play  tactics 

TO 

WILLIAM  LARNED 

who  perfected  ground-strokes  to  their  highest  standard 

TO 

MAURICE  McLouGHLiN 

whose  overhead  attack  has  taught  the  world  a  new  lesson 

and  last  but  not  least 
TO 

DWIGHT  DAVIS 

who  gave  us  the  Davis  Cup  for  International  Competition 


THE     EDITOR'S     PREFACE 

I  HAVE  no  patience  with  the  players  who  say :  "I  do  not  read  books 
on  lawn  tennis,  and  have  no  use  for  fine-spun  theories."  Mediocrity 
is  almost  always  their  portion.  Their  enjoyment  of  the  game 
suffers  because  they  neither  theorise  themselves  nor  study  the  theories 
evolved  by  others. 

When,  about  fifteen  years  ago,  I  began  to  play  lawn  tennis  with  some 
seriousness,  my  first  thought  was  to  secure  instruction  from  the  leading 
writers  on  the  game.  To  a  close  study  of  the  rules  for  rudimentary  play 
laid  down  by,  singularly  enough,  J.  Parmly  Paret  in  the  Spalding  Guide 
of  that  day,  I  owe,  in  considerable  measure,  what  small  portion  of  skill  I 
have  managed  to  accumulate.  In  particular,  my  possession  of  a  backhand 
that  is  passable  is  due  directly  to  Paret's  admonitions  on  this  subject. 

An  understanding  of  my  own  needs  has  taught  me  what  other  players 
need.  Furthermore,  as  publisher  of  "American  Lawn  Tennis"  I  have 
sold  thousands  of  books  on  the  game,  which  has  made  it  possible  for  me 
to  learn  what  the  average  player  wants  in  a  book.  Out  of  this  knowl- 
edge grew  the  determination  to  produce  such  a  book,  and  the  present 
volume  is  the  result  of  that  determination.  Its  title,  "Methods  and  Players 
of  Modern  Lawn  Tennis,"  designates  it  exactly.  It  deals  with  methods 
and  players  exclusively,  and  is  designed  to  be  a  textbook  for  players 
desirous  of  improving  their  play.  That  it  will  accomplish  this  purpose, 
if  closely  and  intelligently  studied,  I  am  absolutely  convinced. 

I  have  been  profoundly  impressed  with  the  success  of  the  efforts  the 
author  has  made  to  produce  a  book  that  would  make  a  three-fold  appeal 
—to  the  beginner,  to  the  average  player  and  to  the  expert.  The  beginner 
will  find  in  these  pages  a  work  that  will  start  him  right  on  the  path  to 
proficiency  and  ground  him  in  the  elements  of  the  game.  The  average 
player  will  have  before  him  a  textbook  that  deals  exhaustively  with  the 
production  of  strokes  and  their  uses  and  the  employment  of  proper  tactics 
and  generalship  on  the  court.  The  expert,  finally,  will  discover  here  much 
food  for  thought,  no  matter  how  thoroughly  he  may  know  the  game. 

The  book  contains  the  most  wonderful  compilation  of  expert  opinions 
that  has  ever  been  made.  In  laying  the  structure  of  the  work,  a  series 
of  over  forty  questions  was  drawn  up,  each  dealing  with  some  disputed 
point  of  play.  These  questions  were  submitted  to  all  the  foremost  players 

IX 


x         METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 

of  the  past  decade,  both  here  and  abroad,  and  the  number  of  replies 
received  exceeded  expectations,  while  their  nature  was  little  short  of 
amazing.  No  player  knew  what  any  other  had  to  say  in  answer,  and 
each  reply  is  reproduced  verbatim,  without  comment  of  any  kind. 

The  great  European  war  has  prevented  the  inclusion  of  as  many 
foreign  players  as  was  desired,  but  although  Brookes  and  Wilding, 
Froitzheim  and  Kreuzer,  Gobert  and  Decugis  could  not  be  reached,  Parke 
and  Dixon  have  replied.  Their  handling  of  the  questions  reveals  careful 
thought,  wide  experience  and  strong  convictions. 

Among  the  Americans,  there  are  members  of  every  International 
team  for  the  last  ten  years,  many  national  champions  and  no  fewer  than 
twenty-six  of  the  first  thirty  players  of  the  country,  according  to  the 
official  ranking  of  1914.  No  consensus  of  opinion  could  be  more  complete 
or  more  authoritative. 

There  are  in  existence  innumerable  photographs  of  lawn  tennis 
players  in  action,  but  from  this  great  mass  of  material  the  author  has 
weeded  out  only  the  most  valuable  instantaneous  snap-shots  of  the  best 
players,  and  I  believe  that  these  pages  are  better  illustrated  than  any 
previous  work  on  the  game.  The  photographers  deserve  recognition  for 
such  clever  work,  and  as  far  as  possible  it  has  been  given  in  the  index 
to  illustrations. 

S.  WALLIS  MERRIHEW. 


CONTENTS 


I. — AN  INTRODUCTION  TO  THE  GAME    -  i 

Difficulty  of  defining  good  form — Weaknesses  of  some  of  the  great  masters — 
Something  else  than  good  form  needed — What  is  this  precious  jewel?— Constant  prac- 
tice will  work  miracles — Principles  of  good  form  remain  steadfast— Necessity  of 
beginning  right — Force  of  example  very  powerful — Value  of  written  instruction — 
Opinions  of  the  leading  experts— Some  of  the  ground  books  have  covered— The 
Dohcrtys'  book  on  the  game— Meyers'  book  broad  and  thorough— Dewhurst  concise 
and  direct — Paret's  first  book  requires  few  corrections — Increased  value  of  American 
service — Vaile's  work  handicapped  by  prejudice — Payn's  three  attacks  on  Vaile — 
Kidson  sheds  light  from  Australia— Little's  the  best  book  for  experts— Wilding  more 
personal  than  instructive — Order  in  which  points  should  be  taken  up — Breadth  of 
the  game's  possibilities— Perfect  balance  of  the  strokes— Any  guide  will  teach  the 
rules. 

II. — FIRST  PRINCIPLES  OF  PLAY      -  -     10 

Study  the  rudiments  first — Select  a  new  racket  carefully — Grip  the  racket  tight 
at  the  end — Keep  the  playing  arm  well  clear  of  the  body — Give  the  ball  plenty  of 
room — Loosen  up  and  don't  use  the  muscles  too  much — Stroke  should  be  like  the 
lash  of  a  whip — Names  of  the  different  strokes — Difference  between  forehand  and 
backhand — Different  kinds  of  volley  strokes — The  smash  and  the  stop-volley — Swing 
around  and  face  the  ball — Hit  the  ball  between  knee  and  hip — Swing  back  long 
before  you  strike — Bend  forward  on  the  toes  to  meet  the  ball — Don't  stand  and  watch 
your  shot — Prepare  for  the  next  stroke  always — Don't  try  to  hit  the  ball  hard  at  first 
— Improve  your  weakness  by  practice — Learn  to  lob  at  once  for  defence — Perfect 
ground-strokes  before  you  try  voWey — Don't  try  to  kill  every  ball  you  reach — 
Anticipate  your  opponent's  next  play — Simplest  strokes  are  most  effective — Above  all, 
have  patience  and  persevere. 

III. — GRIP  OF  THE  RACKET      -  -     19 

Cardinal  points  to  keep  in  mind — Two  schools  of  the  crip  and  much  con- 
troversy— Some  holds  good  for  only  one  stroke — Should  the  grip  be  shifted  for  the 
backhand? — Baddeley's  unchanged  grasp — Doherty  brothers  favored  the  shift — 
Change  becomes  almost  mechanical — Shift  about  one-quarter  of  a  circle — Should  the 
thumb  support  the  handle? — Brookes  does  not  use  his  thumb  up — English  arms  bent 
like  scythes — They  are  gradually  coming  to  use  the  thumb — The  Dohertys  used  their 
thumbs  up — Vaile  criticises  English  backhand — Wrapping  the  thumb  gives  a  tighter 
grasp — Grip  lacks  resistance  without  thumb — Bent  elbow  or  wrist  only  alternative — 
Wrist  flexibility  comes  with  thumb  up — Delicate  placing  greatly  helped — English 
backhand  safer  but  gives  back-spin — Better  to  keep  racket  "open"  at  all  times — 
Extend  handle  as  far  as  possible — Weakness  of  the  short  grasp — Wilding's  sage 
conclusion — Few  experts  recommend  loose  grip — Tight  hold  imperative  as  ball  is  hit — 
Lowe's  eccentric  hold — Peculiar  grips  for  the  different  services — Artificial  grips  a 
matter  of  taste — Wrapping  the  handle  often  done — Natural  cedar  handle  generally 
best. 

XI 


xii       METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


PAGE 

OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS: — Should  the  grip  be  tight  or  loose? — Few  favor  loose 
grip — Some  tighten  up  as  they  strike — Necessary  to  prevent  slipping — On  which 
strokes  should  you  relax? — Most  players  relax  on  stop-volleys — Seaver  relaxes  OH 
backhand — Bundy  uses  a  shortened  handle — Church  uses  short  grip,  but  admits 
error — Most  players  touch  the  leather  at  end — Hall  shortens  grip  for  the  volleys — 
Should  the  grip  be  changed? — Englishmen  report  unchanged  grip — Nearly  every 
American  player  shifts — Mathey  in  doubt  about  the  shift — Thumbs  up  or  thumbs 
down? — Large  majority  use  the  thumb  up  handle — LeRoy  very  positive  on  this  point 
— Difficult  to  describe  grip — What  is  an  "ordinary  American  grip"? — Dabney's  good 
description — Fingers  and  thumb  parallel  for  forehand — Several  try  to  copy  Pell's 
backhand  grip — Whitney  aims  to  keep  the  racket  and  arm  in  the  same  plane — Most 
experts  shift  about  one-quarter  of  a  circle — Dewhurst  disagrees  with  most  others — 
Many  opinions  on  this  point. 


IV. — EYES  ON  THE  BALL  39 

Cardinal  points  to  keep  in  mind — Impossible  to  watch  the  ball  all  the  time — 
Necessary  to  watch  your  opponent — Bait  must  be  followed  as  it  approaches — When 
should  the  player  lift  his  eyes? — Closer  aim  needed  than  in  golf — Inconsistency  of 
written  rules — Few  experts  see  the  ball  struck — Many  experiments  confirm  theory — 
Beginner  must  not  look  up — Inexperience  demands  close  attention — Experts  suffer 
most  from  bad  bounds — Uncertain  bounds  keep  eyes  from  looking  up — Advantage 
earned  by  looking  up — Baseball  and  golf  are  different — Most  players  look  at  their 
targets — Whitman  an  exception  to  the  custom — Experts  read  opponents'  eyes — His 
eyes  show  direction — This  theory  proven  in  several  ways — Hovey's  clever  little  ruse — 
Almost  always  good  for  an  ace — Wright  deceived  by  Nisbet — Ware's  variation  of  the 
same  device — McLoughlin  read  the  eyes  of  Brookes — Watch  the  ball  till  expert — 
Easy  to  miss  centre  of  racket — Second  stage  of  learning  the  game — Difficult  to  keep 
direction — If  "off  your  stroke,"  go  back  to  first  principles — Time  to  lift  eyes  varies 

In  smashing,  ball  can  be  watched  longer — Dewhurst's  opinion  sound  but  misleading 

— Rushing  opponent  must  not  disconcert — Dohertys  dwell  on  this  point — Vaile's 
impossible  advice — Cannot  watch  part  of  a  flying  ball. 

OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS: — Some  of  the  best  players  raise  their  eyes — LeRoy 
looks  up  first — Unconsciously  raises  eyes,  says  Whitney — Williams  reads  the  other 
man's  eyes — Few  others  say  they  do — Squair  tells  his  method  of  anticipation — 
What  first  shows  direction? — Hackett  says  intuition  guides  him — Dabney  makes  a 
"psychological  guess" — Touchard  says  there  is  an  obvious  place  for  every  shot. 

V. — FOOTWORK  56 

Cardinal  points  to  keep  in  mind — Up  on  your  toes  all  the  time — Bending  the 
knees  adds  fire  to  action — The  waiting  position  of  expectancy — Many  good  players 
do  not  stand  right — Feet  should  not  parallel  the  net — Moving  backward  facilitated — 
How  the  position  works  out — Getting  back  from  the  net  for  a  lob — Just  as  bad  at  the 
base-line — Diagonal  position  seems  to  favor  forehand — Feet  must  be  in  line  with  flight 
during  stroke — Foot-faults  as  troublesome  as  ever — Simply  a  matter  of  which  happens 
first — Carelessness  causes  many  foot-faults — One  common  fault  of  beginners. 

OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS:— The  question  of  bending  the  knees— Parke  says  all 
foot-work  must  be  done  on  the  toes — How  can  a  player  balance  on  heels? — Feet 
parallel  with  net  or  diagonal? — Majority  favor  parallel  stance — LeRoy  strong  in 
foot-work. 


CONTENTS  xm 

PAGE 

VI. — THE  SWING  AND  HITTING  THE  BALL  -    65 

Cardinal  points  to  keep  in  mind — Entirely  aside  from  making  the  stroke — Tkree 
distinct  actions  run  into  one — Starting  the  back-swing  early — Novices  find  this 
•difficult — Far  better  too  early  than  too  late — Pause  helps  to  steady  the  stroke — Avoid 
side  motion  in  back-swing — Increasing  the  arc  of  the  arm's  swing — Making  the 
actual  stroke — The  all-important  follow-through — Body  should  swing  after  the  ball — 
Forward  step  will  recover  balance — Dangerous  in  the  front  of  the  court — Every 
motion  in  line  witk  balL's  flight — Body  must  not  bend  backward — Timing  the  biggest 
factor  for  speed — Keeping  away  from  the  ball — Elbow  skould  be  level  with  the  ball. 

OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS: — Should  the  stroke  be  made  with  a  full  swing? — 
Hobart  thinks  short  swing  best — Checking  the  swing  to  make  the  ball  drop — Most 
players  favor  full  swing. 

VII. — THE  FOREHAND   STROKE       -  -    74 

Cardinal  points  to  keep  in  mind — Importance  of  the  forehand  ground-stroke — 
Three  ways  to  hit  the  ball — Undercut  and  top-spin  strokes — The  original  Lawfprd 
stroke — As  the  famous  Englishman  made  it^How  tke  American  drop-stroke  differs — 
End  of  the  swing  most  important — Extreme  drop-strokes  not  reliable — Violence 
exhausts  the  player — Best  way  of  playing  this  sroke — English  method  of  putting  on 
the  twist — Diagrams  show  both  methods — Rough  strings  grip  ball's  surface — Top- 
spin  most  useful  against  a  volleyer — Net  player  always  troubled  by  it — Ineffective 
against  opponent  at  base-line — Alexander's  style  the  best  model — LeRoy's  short  swing 
conceals  direction — Difficult  to  play  both  twists — Under-cut  reverses  the  points  in  its 
favor — Hard  to  handle  from  the  bound — English  use  of  the  wrist — W.  Johnson  devel- 
oped long  swing  for  under-cut — Beals  Wright's  skill  with  the  chop — Half -arm  jabs 
and  push  strokes — Straight  stroke  the  best  for  driving — Little  change  needed  to  get 
the  drop — Straight  and  drop-strokes  work  well  together — Chances  of  getting  to  the 
net — Use  of  the  forcing  stroke — Larned's  skill  at  this  play — A  high,  deep  drive  often 
best — When  to  use  the  fast,  low  stroke — Speed  and  drop  needed  for  small  openings — 
Changing  the  pace  a  puzzling  defence — Varying  the  length  for  attack. 

OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS: — Top-spin,  under-cut  or  straight  stroke? — Most 
experts  favor  top-spin — Washburn  prefers  straight  stroke  on  grass — Depends  on  the 
opponent,  Gardner  thinks — For  grass,  Williams's  style  preferred  to  McLoughlin's — 
LeRoy's  opinion  instructive — Top-spin  made  quickly,  more  deceptive  than  when  made 
slow — Gives  instant's  advantage  by  concealing  direction — Little's  style  recom- 
mended— Seaver  favors  straight  stroke. 

VIII. — THE  BACKHAND  STROKE      -  -    92 

Cardinal  points  to  keep  in  mind — Backhand  position  is  awkward — Power  ahead 
of  the  ball,  not  behind — Englisk  style  turns  the  body  at  end — Different  grips  influence 
the  stroke — Difficult  to  avoid  back-spin  with  English  grip — Thumb-around  grasp 
weakens  driving  power — Rigid  joints  limit  shift  in  direction — Elbow  can  be  too 
higk  as  well  as  too  low — En-dless  variations  of  both  styles — Body  must  be  swung 
around  to  face  ball — Left  foot  should  never  be  forward — Flexible  wrist  a  great 
advantage — Under-cut  ball  easy  to  volley — Pell's  a  model  backhand  stroke — Little 
gets  top-spin  on  both  sides — Back-swing  should  be  extended — Racket  must  finish  low 
for  under-cut — Larned's  perfect  backhand — Same  twist  for  both  strokes  best — 
Dohertys  almost  turned  their  backs  to  net — Difficult  to  direct  stroke  this  way. 

OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS: — English  or  American  style? — Parkc  and  Dixon 
prefer  their  own  style — Dabney  uses  all  styles — Most  Americans  prefer  high  elbow 
— Mathey  has  followed  the  Dohertys. 


xiv      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


IX. — VOLLEYING      -  -  103 

Cardinal  points  to  keep  in  mind — Origin  of  the  volley  stroke — The  Renshaws 
invented  the  stroke — Time  and  wider  angle  gained — Element  of  time  of  great 
importance — Both  sides  cannot  live  at  the  net — Blind  net-rushing  is  foolhardy — 
Volley  should  be  made  from  above  the  top  of  the  net — English  school  of  low  volley- 
ing— Deep  position  condemned — How  close  should  you  come  up? — Half  swing  for  a 
horizontal  volley — Face  of  the  racket  should  be  beveled  back — The  short  cross-court 
volley — A  slight  downward  motion  needed — Easier  to  volley  under-cut  ball — Little 
arm  motion  needed — Lifting  volley  a  defensive  stroke — How  it  is  made — Behr's  odd 
drive-volley — Most  Americans  overdo  the  smash — H.  Doherty  the  best  at  killing 
without  it — Judicious  mixture  of  two  styles — Overhead  volley  comparatively  easy — 
Clothier  fine  on  high  volleys — Short  smashes  should  never  be  missed — Never  ease 
up  on  this  stroke — Balance  must  be  recovered  quickly — Fullest  action  required  to 
smash  well — Use  an  "open"  racket  and  no  twist — Placing  a  killing  smash — Handling 
a  deep  lob — Chances  for  success  in  smashing  from  different  distances — Better  use 
volley  on  deep  balls — Stop-volley  not  well  used — How  to  make  the  stroke — Grip 
should  be  relaxed  a  trifle — Weight  must  never  move  backward — Lob-volley  occasion- 
ally used — Half-volley  always  a  tactical  blunder — A  common  stroke  in  England — 
Eaves  and  Caridia  attacked  by  half-volley — Sometimes  used  as  a  step  toward  the  net. 

OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS: — Is  it  sound  to  volley  from  service-line? — Very  few 
find  it  so — Is  half-volleying  ever  aggressive? — As  Williams  does  it,  yes — Few 
recommend  the  stroke — Is  underhand  volleying  aggressive? — Parke  and  Dixon  both 
say  "No" — Many  opinions  differ — Clothier's  style  commended — Majority  againts  it — 
Grant  thinks  it  prevents  lobbing. 

X.— THE  SERVICE  -  -  125 

Cardinal  points  to  keep  in  mind — Wonderful  accuracy  of  the  service — Narrow 
space  available — Many  variations  of  service — How  high  to  throw  up  the  ball — 
Height  must  be  governed  by  preference — Bending  backward  depends  on  twist — The 
need  of  twist  in  all  services — Overhead  out-twists  most  useful — Service  used  to  be 
made  on  the  run — Weak  second  service  a  deadly  sin — Two  average  deliveries  the 
best — Practice  until  double  faults  eliminated — Placing  the  service — Selecting  the  best 
point  for  attack — Outwitting  the  man  who  gets  "set" — Serving  to  the  unexpected 
side — When  running  in  with  the  service — Anticipating  a  certain  favored  return — 
Centre  theory  helps  the  server — Serving  down  the  centre  of  the  court — Point  of 
attack  must  be  varied — Backhand  weakness  offers  openings — Serving  from  the 
extreme  corner — Valu-  of  the  American  twist — Little's  opinion  against  it — McLough- 
lin  also  limits  its  value — Twists  lose  their  terrors  when  understood— Ward's  discovery 
partly  accidental— New  spin  made  ball  act  strangely— Weakness  of  the  reverse 
twist — How  the  American  service  is  made — Rapid  spin  makes  ball  drop — Another 
swerve  to  contend  with — Break  worse  bo  handle  than  the  curve — How  the  ball 
bends  in  the  air— Diagrams  show  the  curves  of  the  ball— Side  spin  makes  the  erratic 
bound— Like  the  "English"  of  billiards— Easing  up  in  the  swing  changes  effect— 
McLoughlin  clever  at  this  change— Long,  deep  bound  an  advantage— Better  to  let 
ball  spin  itself  out — Action  reversed  by  a  left-handed  player — Same  effects  in  the 
reverse  twists — Cross  motion  checks  speed — Length  of  great  value  in  all  service — 
Short  service  must  have  a  low  bound. 

OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS:— Does  American  twist  pay  average  player?— Church 
thinks  it  does  not— Niles  thinks  fast  top  service  better— Reverse  better  for  left-handed 
player— Should  second  service  be  omitted?— Most  players  oppose  such  a  change— 
Dewhurst  has  another  suggestion — Brilliant  services  add  interest  to  the  game — 
Grant  thinks  change  would  be  wise. 


CONTENTS  xv 


XL— THE  FIRST  RETURN  -  147 

Cardinal  points  to  keep  in  mind — First  return  closely  restricted  by  rules — 
Difficulty  increased  by  new  services — Four  plays  open  when  server  runs  in — Pass 
down  right  line  easiest — From  the  centre  a  dropping  ball  the  best — Short  cross-court 
pass  is  useful — Valuable  as  a  surprise — Brings  volleyer  back  to  centre  of  court — 
Beals  Wright  best  at  the  dropping  attack — The  lob  is  often  a  good  attack — Keeps  the 
server  from  creeping  up  close — Lobbing  better  at  end  of  match — Williams  plays  the 
ball  as  it  rises — Is  this  style  practicable? — Timing  must  be  perfect  for  success — 
Champion's  fault  in  the  internationals — Danger  of  standing  in  close — New  services 
might  stop  such  play — McLoughlin  points  out  disadvantages — Collins  used  this  style 
in  doubles — In  doubles,  first  return  depends  on  "formation" — First  drive  must  be 
low  and  cross-court — Sharp  top-spin  makes  ball  "duck"— Pass  in  front  of  servers 
who  kang  back — Lob  valuable  in  doubles. 

XII. — THE  TWIST  OF  THE  BALL      -  -  157 

Cardinal  points  to  keep  in  mind — Few  realize  importance  of  twist — Almost  impos- 
sible to  hit  ball  without  it — Even  the  earth  revolves  on  its  own  axis — Some  twist 
necessary  in  tennis — More  air  resistance  on  side  moving  forward — Old  carriage 
wheel  problem  again — Theory  of  rotation — Baseball  first  game  to  curve  the  ball — 
Rough  tennis  ball  curves  easier — Lawford  used  a  sharp  twist — Under-cut  ball  carries 
rapid  spin — Right  and  left  side-twists  also — Glancing  blow  makes  ball  revolve — 
Rough  stringing  tried  to  increase  twists — Loose  strings  increase  spin — Drop-stroke 
like  billiard  follow-shot — Spin  -drags  ball  forward  from  bound — Difficult  to  volley 
top-spinning  ball — Diagrams  show  effect  of  twists  on  flight — Under-cut  ball  reverse  of 
drop-stroke — Spin  resist  gravitation — Mean  bound  from  chop-stroke — Vertical  twists 
can  also  be  used — Rule  that  governs  curves  and  breaks — Watch  path  of  racket  for 
secret — Both  vertical  and  horizontal  twists  in  service — Effect  of  the  altered  rotation 
— Sudden  drop  and  sharp  upbound. 

OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS: — Should  every  ball  carry  twist? — Majority  think  not 
— Second  service  carries  most — Do  speed  and  control  go  with  the  twist? — Washburn 
has  never  seen  a  ball  without  twist — Twist  gives  less  speed,  more  control — Nearly  all 
agree  on  this  point — Which  ball  offers  best  attack? — Parke  and  Dixon  both  favor 
top-spin — Beals  Wright  only  man  with  under-cut  attack — Most  favor  top-spin  against 
net  player,  under-cut  against  base-liner — Some  believe  straight  ball  best  against 
back-court  player — Whitney  differs  from  the  others- — Which  ball  is  easier  to  volley? — 
All  look  alike  to  Church — Majority  find  under-cut  ball  easier — A  few  think  they  arc 
about  equal. 

XIII. — LOBBING       -  -  174 

Cardinal  points  to  keep  in  mind — Legitimate  value  of  the  lob — A  safe  answer 
to  the  net  attack — Also  an  attack  in  itself  in  some  cases — Balance  of  power  very 
delicate — Tiresome  work  smashing  lob  after  lob — Lobbing  to  make  the  other  man 
miss — Foote  wore  down  his  opponents  this  way — Lob  a  dangerous  attack  in  doubles — 
More  need  for  it  than  in  singles — Can  be  made  very  aggressive — "Irish  lob"  is  often 
the  best — Net-rushing  tactics  can  be  stopped — Keeping  a  volleyer  back  opens  fresh 
koles — A  clean  ace  sometimes  scored  by  low  lob — Ware's  skill  at  covering  the  lob — 
Selecting  the  backhand  corner — Lobbing  to  gain  time — When  out  of  breath,  lob 
saves  the  day — Its  constant  use  will  kill  its  value — Must  keep  your  opponent  guess- 
ing— Beals  Wright's  clever  use  of  the  lob — The  lob-volley  is  rarely  used. 

OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS: — Is  the  lob  used  to  attack? — Most  experts  use  it, 
more  or  less — Seaver  says  it  wears  the  other  man  out — Is  persistent  lobbing  good 
sportsmanship? — Most  players  approve  of  it — Any  stroke  of  the  game  legitimate — A 
few  against  it — Do  experts  place  lobs  on  backhand? — Murray  does  not,  but  ought  to 
— Majority  favor  this  attack — Mathey  thinks  most  players  expect  it. 


xvi      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


XIV.— POSITION  PLAY    -  -  188 

Cardinal  points  to  keep  in  mind — Base-line  play  vs.  volleying — Purely  an 
academic  question — The  ideal  player  combines  both  styles — Sound  principles  and 
known  angles  involved — Position  depends  on  fixed  rules — Basis  of  the  centre  theory 
— Angles  at  the  disposal  of  the  adversary — Speed  greatest  on  side-line  shots — Cross- 
court  shots  must  be  slow — Fast  balls  go  out  of  court — Diagrams  explain  the  centre 
theory — Angles  shorter  when  opponent  is  in  close — It  is  dangerous  to  play  short  at 
the  side — Volleyer  in  trouble  after  such  a  shot — How  to  apply  the  centre  theory — A 
distinct  help  for  defence — To  force  an  adversary  to  come  in — No  value  against  a 
volleyer — Most  useful  for  safety  in  net  attack — Drive  to  centre  of  base-line — When 
up,  a  good  defence  of  net  position — Sharp  angles  always  full  of  danger — Centre 
principle  used  without  the  name — Definition  of  the  forcing  stroke — Keeping  tke  otker 
man  in  trouble — Volleyer  need  not  always  play  for  an  ace — If  no  opening  to  kill,  use 
forcing  stroke — Correct  position  for  volleying — English  ideas  are  changing — Advan- 
tage of  the  dlose  net  position — Drawbacks  against  it — Willams's  weakness  at  the  net — 
Volleyer  must  always  be  ready  to  get  back — Length  limits  the  power  of  the  attack — 
Great  possibilties  in  the  front  of  the  court — Winning  openings  in  short  volleys — 
Two  bases  for  play  advisable — Baddeley's  forbidden  zone — Maintaining  position  side- 
wise — How  a  weak  backhand  loses  many  points — Running  around  the  ball  poor 
tactics — A  secondary  defence  at  best — McLoughlin's  success  no  criterion — Attacking 
weakness  through  strength — Two  critical  moments  in  position  play — Seize  the  net 
position  without  delay — Do  not  play  into  the  other  man's  hands — Make  him  play 
the  strokes  he  likes  least — Playing  for  the  smaller  opening — Catching  the  opponent 
off  his  balance. 

OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS: — Stay  up  or  back  against  a  lobber? — Smash  him  out, 
says  Murray — Pell  thinks  a  good  lobber  would  drive  smasher  back — Most  others 
advise  staying  up — Which  is  the  stronger  game,  base-line  or  net? — Hobart  believes 
in  the  base-line  game — Smith  might  beat  any  volleyer — Most  Americans  favor  the 
volley  game — Don't  crowd  the  net  rashly,  says  JMiafer — Will  combination  of  both 
beat  either? — Church  thinks  not — Most  other  players  say  it  will — Are  there  more 
possibilities  in  the  front  court? — Ward  said  to  have  done  all  possible — Much  differ- 
ence in  views  on  this  question — Johnston  believes  there  is  always  room  for  improve- 
ments— Indeed  there  are,  says  LeRoy — Whitney  does  not  think  so — Do  all  experts 
use  centre  theory? — Both  Englishmen  favor  it — Strachan  runs  up  in  the  centre — 
Says  Armstrong:  "No  theories  for  me." 

XV.— MATCH  PLAY  TACTICS  -  -  215 

Cardinal  points  to  keep  in  mind — Little's  book  on  "inside  tennis" — Mental  atti- 
tude appealed  to — You  know  what  you  can  do  but  not  your  opponent — Feeling  out 
the  other  man's  strokes — Hammer  away  at  his  weakness — A  weak  backhand  furnishes 
a  target — A  story  illustrates  the  point — Protecting  backhand  exposes  forehand — 
Uncertainty  spells  success — Running  around  weakness  to  cover  up — How  this  worked 
out  against  Ward — Surprising  a  player  in  a  set  position — Catching  your  opponent  off 
his  balance — Covering  the  stroke  to  increase  attack — A  low  lob  catches  close  net 
player — One  small  point  that  won  the  all-comers' — Davis  could  not  pass  cross-court 
with  his  backhand — Lack  of  endurance  costs  many  a  match — Condition  wins  the 
victory — Lobbing  to  a  player  who  couldn't  kill  lobs — Pim  ignored  the  adversary — 
Larned's  weakness  in  defence — Luring  an  opponent  away  from  the  centre — Saving 
an  attack  for  the  critical  points — Finesse  is  valuable  in  tournament  play — Difficult 
"saves"  may  win  one  in  ten  points — Turning  your  back  on  a  short  lob — Gallery  play 
should  be  tabooed — Don't  hurry  your  play  unduly — Lob  high  and  deep  when  out  of 
breath — Keep  up  winning  play,  shift  when  losing — Playing  to  the  score  helpful — 
How  to  give  and  take  handicaps. 


CONTENTS  xvn 


PAGE 

XVI.— DOUBLES  PLAY     -  -  228 

Cardinal  points  to  keep  in  mind — Team-work  the  keynote  of  success — Personal 
glory  weakens  any  team — Tennis  team  little  stronger  than  its  weakest  link — Choose 
your  partner  carefully — Play  the  net  first,  last  and  always — Server  must  always  run 
up — Two  partners  should  be  abreast — Never  one  up,  and  one  back — Diagram  shows 
the  "open  diagonal" — Its  weakness  apparent  at  once — Net  player  stranded — Adver- 
sary can  smash  right  "through"  him — Attack  and  defence  in  doubles — Constant 
struggle  to  "break  through"  the  service — Changes  in  the  rules  suggested  to  equalize 
— Lobbing  to  stop  fast  services — English  formation  of  the  strikers — It  has  won 
despite  criticism — Often  carries  all  four  into  volleying  duel — American  formation 
works  for  the  servers — Partner  stands  at  centre  of  net — Shuts  out  cross-court 
drive — Diagrams  illustrate  both  formations — Throws  striker  off  usual  return — Wright 
says  play  should  be  used  only  on  one  side — Handling  doubtful  balls — Forehand 
should  be  given  preference — Poaching  a  short-sighted  policy — A'  sample  of  it  illus- 
trated— How  to  fool  the  poaching  net  man — A  low  lob  finds  him  "anchored" — Driving 
at  the  net  man  poor  tactics — Both  partners  get  back  under  lob — Rush  in  if  your  own 
lob  is  not  smashed — Better  not  to  let  a  lob  drop — Quick  recovery  on  a  deep  lob — 
Baddeley's  zone  forbidden  in  doubles,  too. 

OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS: — Is  the  English  formation  sound? — Parke  says  he 
has  never  seen  it — Dewhurst  thinks  it  sound — Large  majority  against  it — Has  Ameri- 
can formation  advantages? — Wright  explains  common  error — Lob  over  net  man 
will  break  it  up — Many  experts  favor  it — Stops  cross-court  shots  over  low  centre  of 
net — Worries  opponents,  says  Seaver — Should  second  service  be  cut  out? — Behr, 
Little  and  Wright  think  it  would  help — Many  others  against  it— Hall  thinks  receivers 
would  be  too  strong — Would  it  do  to  widen  the  alleys? — Wright  favors  this  too,  but 
not  hoth — Many  different  opinions  on  this — Scheme  tried  at  Seabright — Some  think 
strikers  would  have  advantage. 

XVII. — MIXED  DOUBLES  -  250 

Mixed  doubles  different  from  other  games — Women  must  play  at  the  net — 
English  prefer  man  at  the  net — Parke  and  Dixon  have  come  to  American  ideas — Man 
can  sometimes  join  partner  at  net — Difficult  to  get  there  when  she  serves — Woman 
should  cross  over  sometimes — With  both  women  at  net,  better  tennis  wins — Men 
drive  diagonally  to  each  other — A  variation  with  a  lob — Often  drives  opponents  out 
of  position — Have  partner  cross  under  lob — Leaves  court  open  for  a  kill — Success 
hangs  on  getting  woman  up  to  net. 

OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS: — Should  woman  play  at  the  net? — English  combina- 
tions find  this  an  advantage — Niles  mixes  gallantry  with  tennis — Nearly  all  favor 
net  position — "Depends  on  the  dame,"  says  Mathey — Should  woman  get  easier 
service? — Nearly  all  agree  that  she  should  not — Harte  and  Whitney  differ  from  the 
others. 

XVIII. — ETHICS  AND  ETIQUETTE    -  -  260 

Healthy  respect  for  an  honorable  opponent — Learning  something  from  the  other 
man — Win  or  lose,  there  should  be  no  rancour — The  few  backsliders  ostracized — 
One  man's  method  of  winning — Minor  ways  of  dishonesty — An  instance  of  bad 
methods — Not  fair  to  hurry  opponents — You  are  entitled  to  play  deliberately — 
Knocking  back  idle  balls — Some  doubtful  points  in  ethics — Lob  in  the  sun,  if  the 
other  man  does — This  state  of  min-d  bothers  many — Most  tournament  players  frankly 
do  so — Entitled  to  advantage  of  sun  or  wind — Other  weak  points  always  attacked — 
Playing  to  tire  out  the  adversary — The  case  of  Doherty  vs.  Ward — Exhaustion  beat 
the  American — Wise  generalship  to  husband  your  strength — Big  men  tire  in  long 


xvni      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 

PAGE 

matches — Deception  in  play  perfectly  legitimate — How  far  should  deception  be 
carried? — Serving  to  the  woman  in  mixed  doubles — Attacking  the  woman  opponent — 
The  question  of  postponing  matches — Delay  should  not  be  granted  for  rest — Refusing 
to  take  a  hollow  victory — A  test  case  of  postponement — When  should  a  let  be 
claimed? — Never  try  for  point  and  then  claim  a  let — Ethics  as  important  in  practice 
as  match  play — How  shouH  one  take  an  umpire's  wrong  decision? — Most  embar- 
rassing when  in  your  favor — A  sample  of  fine  sportsmanship — Highest  ethics  of 
iiie  game. 

OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS: — Should  you  lob  in  the  face  of  the  sun? — Nearly 
all  agree  that  you  should — Harte  says  play  as  if  there  were  no  sun — Skould  you  lob 
to  a  bad  smasher? — Again,  the  experts  agree,  Williams  dissenting — Champion's  is  the 
only  negative  answer — Should  you  try  to  exhaust  an  opponent? — Parke  and  Dixon 
disagree  here — All  but  Parke  agree  that  it  is  fair — Opponent  deserves  to  lose  if  he 
can't  stand  strain. 

XIX. — RACKETS,  BALLS,  SHOES,  ETC.      -  r  278 

Importance  of  selecting  a  go»d  racket — Cut  strokes  require  an  open  mesh — 
Coarser  gut  for  dirt  court  play — Best  weight  for  a  racket — Weight  should  be  evenly 
balanced — Size  of  handle  important — Large  handle  weakens  the  grasp — Beware  of 
fancy  grips — Balls  should  be  right  in  size  and  weight — Nets  should  be  always  correct 
height — Never  play  on  courts  that  are  marked  wrong — Difference  of  opinion  as  to 
shoes — "Sneakers"  save  much  weight — Other  wearing  apparel — Flopping  shirt- 
sleeves bothersome. 

OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS:— What  size  and  weight  for  racket? — From  14  to 
14  ya  oz.  tke  general  rule — Handles  generally  5^  inches  around — Should  average 
player  use  large  or  small  handle? — Gardner  thinks  it  depends  on  what  he  likes — 
Large  for  net  play,  small  for  back-court — Which  are  best:  "Sneakers"  or  thick 
soles? — Opinions  evenly  divided  on  this — "Sneakers"  for  match  play  only. 

XX. — LAWN  TENNIS  THEORIES  -  288 

Good  practice  must  be  based  on  sound  theory — Vaile's  ideas  not  all  original — 
More  than  one  way  to  play  the  backhand— Where  did  the  centre  theory  originate?— 
British  ideas  on  th«  subject — Payn's  views  narrowly  English — Five  points  -disputed — 
Decugis  controverts  Payn's  claim — Value  of  American  twist  service — Drop-stroke 
does  permit  greater  speed — Payn  swamped  on  the  mixed  doubles  question — Even 
English  ideas  now  do  not  support  him — Soundness  of  doubles  formation  still  in 
dispute — Vaile  believes  the  English  position  unsound — Recent  results  do  not 
strengthen  this  contention — New  theory  on  looking  away  from  the  ball — McLoughlin's 
book  supports  tkis  principle — Does  success  vindicate  bad  methods? — The  ideal  styles 
to  follow — Action  photographs  often  deceptive. 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS: 

FACING 
PAGE 

RICHARD  NORRIS  WILLIAMS,  2ND,  NATIONAL  CHAMPION Frontispiece 

Photogravure  Portrait Underwood  &  Underwood 

THE  WAITING  POSITION  OF  Two  OLD  MASTERS 8 

Beals  C.  Wright  Waiting  for  a  Service. 
Robert  D.  Wrenn  Waiting  for  a  Volley. 

GOOD  AND  BAD  FORM  CONTRASTED  IN  THE  SAME  STROKE.  .  Q 


R.  Norris  Williams,  2nd,  in  Forehand  Stroke Paul  Thompson 

Frederick  G.  Anderson  in  Forehand  Stroke. 

Two  EXAMPLES  OF  BROOKES'  BAD  FORM  IN  PLAY 12 

End  of  the  Backhand  Stroke Edwin  Levick 

End  of  the  Forehand  Stroke Brown  Brothers 

FINISH  OF  CHAMPION  WILLIAMS'  GROUND-STROKES 13 

End  of  the  Forehand   Stroke Underwood  &  Underwood 

End  of  the  Backhand  Stroke Underwood  6-  Underwood 

FOREHAND  AND  BACKHAND  GRIPS  FOR  AMERICAN  STROKE 20 

FOREHAND  AND  BACKHAND  GRIPS  FOR  ENGLISH  STROKE 20 

GRIPS  FOR  THREE  DISTINCTIVE  SERVICES 21 

THREE  WAYS  TO  USE  THE  THUMB  IN  THE  BACKHAND  STROKE 24 

Two  METHODS  OF  RETURNING  THE  SERVICE 25 

Thomas  C.  Bundy's  Peculiar  Style. 

W.  Merrill  Hall's  Orthodox  Method Arthur  E.  Dunn 

NORMAN  BROOKES  MAKING  FOREHAND  STROKE 28 

Start  of  the  Stroke. 

Just  After  Hitting  the  Ball Edwin  Levick 

MAURICE  E.  MCLOUGHLIN'S  PECULIAR  FOREHAND  STROKE 29 

Hitting  the  Ball New  Zealand 

Finish  of  the  Swing New  Zealand 

THE  CHOP-STROKE  AS  PLAYED  BY  AN  EXPERT 36 

Thomas  C.  Bundy  About  to  Hit  the  Ball.  .Underwood  6-  Underwood 

XIX 


xx          METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 

FACING 
PAGE 

FOREHAND  STROKE  WITH  MODERATE  TOP-SPIN 37 

William  J.  Clothier  at  the  End  of  the  Stroke Paul  Thompson 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER'S  STYLE  OF  FOREHAND  GROUND-STROKE, 

Underwood  &  Underwood      AQ 

END  OF  FOREHAND  DROP-STROKE 4T 

Maurice  McLoughlin  at  the  End  of  His  Drive Edwin  Levick 

Holcombe  Ward  Finishing  Drop-Stroke H.  M.  Smith 

J.  C.  PARKS' s  STYLE  OF  GROUND-STROKES 56 

Beginning  of  the  Forehand  Stroke Paul  Thompson 

End  of  the  Forehand  Stroke Paul  Thompson 

C.  P.  DIXON'S  TYPICAL  ENGLISH  STYLE 57 

End  of  the  Forehand  Stroke Paul  Thompson 

End  of  the  Backhand    Stroke Paul  Thompson 

PERFECT  END  OF  A  STRAIGHT  FOREHAND  DRIVE 72 

William  A.  Larned  Making  the  Stroke. 

BODY-SWING  INCREASING  THE  FOLLOW-THROUGH 73 

William  M.  Johnston  Making  Forehand  Stroke, 

Underwood  &  Underwood 

ANTHONY  WILDING'S  FINE  BACKHAND  STROKE 88 

Start  of  the  Stroke Brown  Brothers 

Finish  of  the  Swing Edwin  Levick 

THEODORE  PELL'S  ROLLING  BACKHAND  STROKE 89 

Hitting  the  Ball Brown  Brothers 

Finish  of  the  Swing Edwin  Levick 

A  FINE  EXAMPLE  OF  FREE  BODY  ACTION  IN  BACKHAND  PLAY 92 

Harold  H.  Hackett  About  to  Hit  the  Ball. Underwood  &  Underwood 

END  OF  THE  CHAMPION'S  BACKHAND  STROKE 93 

R.  Norris  Williams,  2nd,  at  the  End  of  His  Swing Edwin  Levick 

MAURICE  MCLAUGHLIN'S  CRAMPED  BACKHAND  STROKE 100 

Start  of  the  Stroke Brozvn  Brothers 

End  of  the  Swing Brown  Brothers 

Two  DISTINCTIVE  STYLES  OF  BACKHAND  STROKE 101 

Raymond  D.  Little  at  the  End  of  His  Stroke Edwin  Levick 

Malcolm  D.  Whitman  Hitting  the  Ball. 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS  xxi 

FACING 
PAGE 

Low  FOREHAND  VOLLEY  OF  A  DROPPING  BALL 108 

F.  B.  Alexander  Stepping  in  to  Meet  a  Low  Ball H.  M.  Smith 

HORIZONTAL  BACKHAND  VOLLEY  FROM  NEAR  THE  NET 109 

R.  Norris  Williams,  2nd,  Reaching  Out  for  a  Pass . . .  Edwin  Levick 

A  FINE  STOP- VOLLEY  AT  THE  NET 116 

William  A.  Larned  About  to  Drop  the  Ball  Short... Paul  Thompson 

BACKHAND  HALF- VOLLEY  OF  A  SHORT  BALL 117 

Gustave  F.  Touchard  About  to  Make  the  Stroke. 

EXTREME  AMERICAN  TWIST  SERVICE 124 

Maurice   E.    McLoughlin    Starting   the    Stroke, 

Underwood  &  Underwood 

REVERSE  TWIST  AMERICAN  SERVICE 125 

Thomas  C.  Bundy  Serving  This  Difficult  Delivery. ..  .Edwin  Levick 

Two  VIEWS  OF  MCLOUGHLIN'S  WONDERFUL  SERVICE 132 

Start  of  the  Stroke Edwin  Levick 

End  of  the  Swing .Brown  Brothers 

Two  EXTREME  STYLES  OF  SERVICE  DELIVERY 133 

M.  E.  McLoughlin  in  American  Twist New  Zealand 

H.  L.  Doherty  Making  His  Easy  Delivery /.  C.  Hemment 

R.  LINDLEY  MURRAY'S  AMERICAN  SERVICE 136 

Underwood  &  Underwood 

CHAMPION  WILLIAMS  SERVING  AMERICAN  TWIST 137 

R.  Norris  Williams,  2nd,  About  to  Hit  the  Ball. 

ENGLISH  STYLE  OF  VOLLEYING  WITH  ELBOW  Low 152 

Dean  Mathey  Making  Backhand  Volley.  .Underwood  &  Underwood 

AMERICAN  AND  ENGLISH  END  OF  BACKHAND  STROKES 153 

Oscar  Kreutzer  at  the  End  of  His  Stroke Paul  Thompson 

R.  Lindley  Murray  at  the  End  of  His  Stroke Paul  Thompson 

A  REAR  VIEW  OF  THE  AMERICAN  TWIST  SERVICE 168 

Theodore  R.  Pell  Serving Brown  Brothers 

WILDING'S  STYLE  OF  SERVICE 169 

A.  F.  Wilding  Throwing  Up  the  Ball. 


xxii        METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 

FACING 
PAGE 

ENGLISH  FORMATION  FOR  DOUBLES 184 

International   Match  of   1914 Brown  Brothers 

ENGLISH  DOUBLES  AGAINST  AUSTRALIANS 185 

International  Match  of  1912 Paul  Thompson 

Two  STYLES  OF  BACKHAND  VOLLEYING 200 

Karl  H.  Behr  Blocking  a  Low  Volley. 

R.  Lindley  Murray  Hitting  a  Horizontal  Ball. 

Two  STYLES  OF  NET  PLAY 201 

A.  F.  Wilding  in  Low  Forehand  Volley. 

Dwight  F.  Davis  in  Hard  Overhead  Smash /.  C.  H  eminent 

MODERATE  SMASH  OF  A  LOB 216 

W.  A.  Larned  Volleying  a  Dropping  Ball H.  M.  Smith 

WAITING  FOR  AN  OVERHEAD  SMASH 217 

A.  F.  Wilding  Ready  to  Kill  a  High  Lob. 

AN  ENGLISH  DOUBLES  FINAL  AT  EASTBOURNE 232 

Striker-Out's  Partner  at  the  Service-Line. 

ENGLISH  DOUBLES  WITH  ALL  FOUR  PLAYERS  VOLLEYING 233 

All-England  Challenge  Match  at  Wimbledon Mayall 

BAD  TEAM  PLAY  IN  DOUBLES 248 

Touchard  Crowding  Washburn  Off  the  Court. 

VOLLEYING  FROM  THE  SERVICE-LINE 249 

Doust  vs.   McLoughlin,   Internationals  of   1913, 

Underwood  &  Underzvood 


AN  INTRODUCTION  TO  THE  GAME 


AN  INTRODUCTION  TO  THE  GAME 

AFTER  the  remarkable  season  of  1914,  with 
its  difficult  lessons,  it  is  perhaps  more 
than  ever  before  a  precarious  undertak- 
ing to  define  what  constitutes  good  form  in  lawn 
tennis.  Never  has  more  success  been  won  with 
apparently  bad  form,  and  this  has  increased  im- 
mensely the  difficulty  in  describing  the  best  way 
to  play. 

Of  the  five  really  great  masters  of  the  game 
at  this  time,  McLoughlin,  Brookes,  Wilding,  Wil- 
liams and  Parke,  certainly  two  and  perhaps  three 
do  not  play  in  the  orthodox  form  which  has  been 
accepted  for  decades  past  by  the  best  authorities. 

Would  any  one  dare  to  advise  Brookes's  grip 
or  his  forehand  stroke  to  a  beginner  ?  Could  Mc- 
Loughlin's  backhand  be  recommended  to  an  am- 
bitious novice?  Does  not  Williams's  foot  work 
constitute  a  distinct  weakness  to  his  play?  Wild- 
ing, perhaps,  might  be  held  up  as  a  model  of  good 
form,  and  surely  he  is  the  nearest  to  orthodox  in 
all  his  play.  In  his  international  matches  last 
year,  McLoughlin  deliberately  ran  around  very 
many  balls  that  should  have  been  returned  back- 
handed, freely  admitting  his  weakness  at  this 
point  of  the  game. 

These  men  have  proven  themselves  to  be  the 


Difficulty  of 
Defining  Good 
Form 


Weaknesses  of 
Some  of  the 
Great  Masters 


METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Something 
Else  Than 
Good  Form 
Needed 


What  is 
This  Precious 
Jewel? 


Constant 
Practice  Will 
Work  Miracles 


best  masters  of  the  tennis  world,  but  does  that  in 
itself  vindicate  their  methods?  I  should  be  in- 
clined to  doubt  it. 

There  seems  to  be  something  even  above  and 
beyond  merely  good  form  that  makes  for  winning 
in  lawn  tennis.  The  best  players,  as  we  have  seen, 
have  won  despite  elements  of  bad  form,  and  we 
have  all  seen  hosts  of  instances  of  players  who 
showed  almost  perfect  technical  skill  in  their  play, 
and  still  lost  to  men  who  seemed  far  their  in- 
feriors. 

There  is  something  in  the  temper,  the  fight- 
ing spirit,  and  the  dogged  tenacity  of  one  human 
being  that  helps  him  to  conquer  another  in  many 
a  struggle,  whether  it  be  for  mere  sport  or  a  more 
serious  phase  of  life.  This  indefinable  something 
in  the  human  make-up  that  gives  "sting"  to  his 
attack  is  what  the  winners  have  and  the  losers 
lack.  It  isn't  strength  alone,  for  Brookes  lacked 
that ;  it  cannot  be  only  speed  and  agility,  for  Wild- 
ing was  almost  without  them,  nor  can  it  be  a  qual- 
ity of  the  eye. 

Yet,  whatever  it  may  be,  it  is  not  enough 
alone,  and  for  the  encouragement  of  those  who 
doubt  their  possession  of  the  priceless  jewel,  let  me 
say  that  untiring,  persistent,  constant  practice  un- 
der reasonably  favorable  conditions  will  work 
miracles,  will  remove  mountains  in  the  path  of 
lawn  tennis  skill.  To  be  sure,  some  players  are 
born  to  the  purple — Larned,  Pirn,  Williams,  Behr, 
and  a  lot  of  others — but  don't  forget  that  Mc- 
Loughlin,  Doherty,  Whitman,  Wrenn,  Ward  and 
as  many  more,  were  "dragged  up  by  hand."  It 


AN  INTRODUCTION  TO  THE  GAME 


3 


takes  ten  years  of  hard  work  to  reach  champion- 
ship form,  except  in  isolated  rare  cases. 

But  the  principles  of  good  form  have  re- 
mained steadfast  even  after  last  season's  on- 
slaught, and  they  require  very  little  alteration  be- 
cause of  the  successes  of  McLoughlin  or  Brookes. 
These  men  are  of  the  minority  and  they  consti- 
tute brilliant  exceptions  to  the  proven  rules  of 
correct  play  as  shown  by  the  style  used  by  the 
great  majority  of  the  successful  players. 

It  is  of  vital  necessity  that  those  who  would 
learn  to  play  the  game  well  should  study  the  fixed 
principles  of  good  form  and  apply  them  closely  in 
practice.  It  is  particularly  important  to  begin 
right,  for  the  faulty  habits  contracted  early  are 
very  difficult  to  correct  even  with  the  best  in- 
struction later  on. 

The  force  of  example  is  very  powerful  in  ten- 
nis. Every  successful  player  is  almost  invariably 
followed  by  a  school  of  worshippers  who  imitate 
the  strokes  of  their  model,  no  matter  whether  they 
be  good  or  bad.  Success  vindicates  his  methods 
in  their  eyes.  But  for  every  one  who  succeeds 
with  bad  form  there  are  a  hundred  followers  of 
the  same  style  who  fail  with  it  because  it  is  faulty 
in  theory.  Lucky  is  the  young  player  who  has 
the  good  fortune  to  live  near  and  study  the  style 
of  a  successful  player  who  has  good  form.  And 
lucky  is  his  club,  too,  for  it  will  almost  surely 
turn  out  a  lot  of  others  from  the  same  mould 
whose  chances  for  success  will  be  increased  ten- 
fold because  their  basic  principles  are  sound. 

If  good  models  or  competent  instructors  are 


Principles  of 
Good  Form 
Remain 
Steadfast 


Necessity  of 

Beginning 

Right 


Force  of 
Example  Very 
Powerful 


4 


METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Value  of 

Written 

Instruction 


Opinions  of 
the  Leading 
Experts 


Some  of  the 
Ground  Books 
Have  Covered 


not  to  be  had,  written  instruction  is  the  next  re- 
source, and  it  is  with  the  hope  of  filling  the  gap 
at  this  point  that  the  present  volume  has  been  pre- 
pared. To  take  the  broadest  possible  view  of  the 
subject,  the  author  has  intended  to  give  his  own 
views  for  what  they  may  be  worth,  and  to  quote 
from  other  competent  authorities  who  have  writ- 
ten on  the  game,  placing  their  opinions  on  dis- 
puted points  before  the  reader  so  that  he  may  form 
his  own  conclusion  with  a  full  knowledge  of  the 
arguments  from  all  sides. 

Finally,  that  the  subject  may  be  completely 
covered,  an  effort  has  been  made  to  secure  the 
opinions  of  all  the  leading  players  of  the  pres- 
ent day,  and  some  of  the  masters  of  recent  gener- 
ations. With  such  a  consensus  of  expert  opinion 
before  him,  the  reader  should  have  the  best  help 
that  written  instruction  on  the  game  can  fur- 
nish. 

There  have  been  many  books  written  on  lawn 
tennis,  but  few  of  them  have  contained  any  very 
complete  instruction  on  the  methods  of  playing 
the  game.  We  have  had  plenty  of  its  history  and 
its  records  of  champions — this  ground  has  been 
fully  covered.  There  have  also  been  a  number 
of  books  for  beginners  on  the  rudimentary  prin- 
ciples of  play,  and  one  or  two  for  advanced  play- 
ers, but  these  are  rare,  and  there  are  practically  no 
works  that  include  both  the  novice  and  the  expert. 
It  is  intended  that  this  volume  shall  fill  this  gap  if 
possible. 

R.  F.  and  H.  L.  Doherty  published  in  both 
England  and  America  a  rather  instructive  volume, 


AN  INTRODUCTION  TO  THE  GAME 


but  it  was  far  from  complete.  They  treated  the 
subject  very  generally  and  modestly  stated  their 
own  preferences,  laying  down  some  rules  with- 
out expounding  theories  or  explaining  principles. 
Even  the  Dohertys  themselves  differed  on  many 
points,  and  their  book  is  curiously  divided  against 
itself,  expressing  two  individual  opinions  on  some 
disputed  points. 

"The  Complete  Lawn  Tennis  Player,"  pub- 
lished in  London  by  A.  Wallis  Meyers,  fully  bears 
out  its  title  and  treats  the  subject  more  exhaust- 
ively than  any  other  volume  in  our  libraries.  Mr. 
Meyers  goes  into  the  subject  thoroughly  and  with 
technical  knowledge  and  breadth  of  view  that  is 
very  instructive.  His  views  are  both  sound  and 
broad,  and  his  viewpoint  is  not  confined  to  English 
theories. 

In  America,  the  best  books  have  been  Dr.  E. 
B.  Dewhurst's  "Science  of  Lawn  Tennis/'  and  a 
previous  volume  on  "Lawn  Tennis"  by  the  present 
writer.    Dr.  Dewhurst's  volume  is  very  readable 
and  instructive,  furnishing  a  more  concise  hand- 
book on  the  game  than  anything  else  published  on 
this  side  of  the  water.   He  is  short,  crisp,  to  the 
>oint  and  wastes  no  words  in  showing  the  young 
)layer  how  to  learn  the  intricacies  of  the  game. 

The  previous  volume  of  mine,  published  in 
1904,  was  rather  a  complete  treatise,  including 
historical,  instructive  and  statistical  chapters  on 
the  game  in  all  parts  of  the  world.  Methods  and 
players  have  changed  during  the  last  decade  in 
many  respects  and  ideas  are  likely  to  alter  in  such 
a  period.  However,  though  a  close  student  of 


The  Dohertys' 
Book  on  the 
Game 


Meyers'  Book 
Broad  and 
Thorough 


Dewhurst 
Concise  and 
Direct 


METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Paret's  First 
Book  Requires 
Few 
Corrections 


Increased 
Value  of 
American 
Service 


Voile's  Work 
Handicapped 
by  Prejudice 


lawn  tennis  at  all  times  during  the  interim  and  for 
fifteen  years  before  the  first  book  appeared,  I  have 
not  found  many  points  of  instruction  that  require 
material  correction.  If  I  repeat  many  of  the  same 
ideas  and  theories  in  the  present  volume  it  is 
only  because  I  believe  them  to  be  as  sound  to- 
day as  they  were  ten  years  ago. 

The  value  of  the  American  twist  service  has 
heavily  increased  since  its  early  days,  and  on  fur- 
ther study  I  should  be  inclined  now  to  modify  the 
advice  given  in  my  first  book  for  a  young  player 
not  to  be  diverted  into  too  much  devotion  to  that 
particular  play.  But  I  still  doubt  the  wisdom  of 
sacrificing  any  great  efforts  in  acquiring  the  de- 
livery, since  it  is  becoming  so  commonly  used 
that  its  novelty  is  wearing  off,  and  the  attack  loses 
much  of  its  terror  when  its  secret  is  well  under- 
stood. 

P.  A.  Vaile  has  published  several  books  on 
the  game  both  here  and  in  England,  but  the  value 
of  his  work  has  been  seriously  handicapped  by  the 
extremes  to  which  he  carries  the  particular  prej- 
udices he  has  formed,  notably  his  aversion  to  the 
English  grip  and  preference  for  the  rolling  back- 
hand lift  stroke  used  more  here  than  abroad.  Per- 
sonal egotism  and  a  narrow  point  of  view  has  rob- 
bed his  writings  of  much  of  the  good  they  might 
otherwise  have  had. 

Mr.  Vaile's  rash  indulgence  in  the  once 
popular  pastime  of  "twisting  the  lion's  tail"  en- 
gendered many  enemies  in  England,  and  F. 
W.  Payn,  an  English  player  of  no  mean  skill  both 
in  literature  and  on  the  court,  published  three 


AN  INTRODUCTION  TO  THE  GAME 


separate  volumes  aimed  at  refuting  Mr.  Vaile's 
criticisms  and  upholding  the  orthodox  English 
traditions.  Unfortunately,  Mr.  Payn  rushed  to 
the  other  extreme.  He  took  only  the  English 
point  of  view,  ignoring  entirely  American  and 
Australian  ideas  that  have  been  accepted  as  sound 
by  other  English  authorities.  His  work  was  re- 
troactive, all  modern  progressive  ideas  except  the 
American  service  being  discarded  and  disap- 
proved. 

"Lawn  Tennis  in  Australia/7  by  R.  M.  Kid- 
son,  contains  much  sound  light  on  the  game  from 
an  expert  who  has  seen  it  played  in  all  sections 
of  the  world.  Without  denying  English  and 
Americans  their  full  share  in  the  development  of 
the  game,  Mr.  Kidson  still  believes  the  Aus- 
tralasian experts  to  be  the  king  pins  of  the  court, 
and  possibly  not  without  good  reason. 

There  have  been  many  books  of  varying  value 
for  the  beginner,  but  the  literature  for  the  tourna- 
ment player  of  experience  amounts  to  little  or 
nothing.  Fortunately,  what  it  lacks  in  quantity  is 
more  than  made  up  in  quality.  For  any  expe- 
rienced player  who  wants  to  advance  his  skill  by 
studying  the  finer  points  of  the  game  as  laid  down 
by  an  expert,  I  could  not  do  better  than  recom- 
mend Raymond  D.  Little's  "Tennis  Tactics." 
Without  exception,  this  is  the  best  work  on  the 
advanced  principles  of  the  game  that  has  been 
published,  and  although  rather  a  small  volume, 
it  contains  a  more  liberal  education  in  advanced 
methods  of  play  than  all  the  rest  of  tennis  litera- 
ture put  together.  Little  gives  scant  attention  to 


Payn's  Three 
Attacks  on 
Vaile 


Kidson  Sheds 
Light  from 
Australia 


Little's  the 
Best  Book 
for  Experts 


8 


METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Wilding  More 
Personal  Than 
Instructive 


Order  in 
Which  Points 
Should  Be 
Taken  Up 


Breadth  of  the 

Game's 

Possibilities 


Perfect  Balance 
of  the  Strokes 


first  principles,  and  his  book  is  only  for  expe- 
rienced players. 

A.  F.  Wilding  published  a  book  entitled  "On 
the  Court  and  Off"  a  few  years  ago  that  included 
some  valuable  instruction  in  its  pages,  but  it  was 
largely  taken  up  with  reminiscences  of  the  author 
and  general  comments  on  play  rather  than  a  sys- 
tematic effort  to  furnish  instruction. 

The  oft-repeated  advice  to  "get  the  ball  back 
over  the  net"  appears  very  wise  and  may  furnish 
a  good  maxim  for  beginners,  but  it  sounds  the 
key-note  for  only  one  phase  of  the  play.  To 
learn  the  game  in  correct  order,  one  should  take 
up  (1)  the  grip  of  the  racket,  (2)  making  the 
strokes,  (3)  use  of  the  feet,  legs,  eyes,  arms  and 
body  weight,  (4)  placing  the  ball,  (5)  technique 
of  the  twist  or  rotation  of  the  ball,  (6)  position 
in  court,  (7)  angles  of  attack  and  defence,  (8) 
strategy,  and  (9)  deception  and  counter  decep- 
tion. 

The  deeper  one  goes  into  the  game,  the  more 
fascinated  will  he  become  by  the  range  of  pos- 
sibilities offered  for  healthy  exercise,  even  to  ex- 
haustive effort  if  it  is  preferred;  for  foot  work, 
arm  work,  body  work  and  for  headwork.  Every 
muscle  of  the  human  body  is  called  on.  Yet  it  is 
not  a  game  of  physical  effort  only;  the  mind 
should  be  as  active  as  the  body  when  playing  a 
close  match. 

This  is  largely  due  to  the  perfect  balance  of 
power  which  exists  among  skillful  players.  As 
between  net-play  and  base-line  play,  between  the 
smash  and  the  lob,  the  pass  and  the  volley,  the 


AN  INTRODUCTION  TO  THE  GAME 


service  and  the  first  return,  even  as  between  player 
and  player  the  balance  is  so  evenly  divided  that  it 
takes  only  the  slightest  tilt  of  the  scales  to  throw 
victory  to  one  side  or  the  other. 

I  have  assumed  that  the  beginner  who  takes 
up  this  volume  as  a  mentor  for  his  first  lessons  in 
the  game  is  already  familiar  with  the  rules  and 
system  of  scoring.  Any  paper-covered  guide  will 
furnish  these  and  they  should  be  familiarized  be- 
fore the  effort  to  learn  the  strokes  of  the  game  is 
begun. 


Any  Guide 
mil  Teach 
the  Rules 


10 


METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


II. 


Study  the 

Rudiments 

First 


Select  a 
New  Racket 
Carefully 


Grip  the 
Racket  Tight 
and  at  the  End 


F 


FIRST  PRINCIPLES  OF  PLAY 

OR  THE  BEGINNER,  the  novice  who  is 
taking  up  the  game  from  the  start,  a  few 
words  of  introductory  advice  will  be  use- 
ful, and  this  chapter  should  be  read  carefully 
by  all  young  players  before  passing  on  to  the 
more  serious  study  of  the  game's  intricacies  that 
are  covered  in  the  other  pages. 

In  selecting  a  racket,  choose  one  with  a 
small  handle  and  preferably  light  in  weight. 
Fourteen  ounces  is  perhaps  the  best  weight  for 
a  beginner,  although  a  small  man  or  a  woman 
should  learn  the  strokes  with  one  weighing  not 
over  thirteen  and  one-half  ounces,  while  a  power- 
ful man  might  prefer  an  ounce  heavier  even  at 
the  start.  It  is  a  simple  matter  to  increase  the 
weight  of  your  first  racket  half  an  ounce  or  so 
when  you  are  able  to  play  the  rudimentary 
strokes  fairly  well,  and  come  to  select  your 
second  racket.  It  will  be  found  much  easier  to 
handle  the  lighter  weight  while  learning  the 
game.  '  %J 

Always  grip  the  racket  tightly  while  in- play- 
and  hold  it  by  the  extreme  end.  The  manner 
in  which  to  grip  the  racket  is  fully  covered  in 
the  next  chapter  and  it  is  unnecessary  to  go  over 
the  same  ground  here.  Keep  your  eye  always 


FIRST  PRINCIPLES  OF  PLAY 


11 


on  the  ball,  and  watch  it  all  the  time  in  its  flight. 
There  are  exceptions  to  this  rule,  to  be  sure,  but 
they  are  only  for  experienced  players. 

Keep  your  playing  arm  well  clear  of  the 
body,  and  avoid  contracting  the  dangerous  habit 
of  playing  with  a  bent  elbow  that  brings  your 
arm  in  close  to  the  side.  This  fault  cramps  the 
swing  of  the  racket,  it  cuts  off  the  "follow- 
through"  with  the  weight  of  the  body,  and  it  pre- 
vents the  player  from  shortening  his  reach  if  the 
ball  should  bound  slightly  more  in  toward  him 
than  he  expected. 

Keep  away  from  the  ball  also;  give  it  plenty 
of  room  and  then  bend  forward  and  out  to 
meet  it.  Never  make  a  stroke  while  moving 
backward,  as  this  takes  all  the  power  out  of  the 
blow.  Preferably,  spring  forward  to  meet  the 
ball,  and,  bending  with  the  swing  of  the  arm, 
allow  the  body  to  "lean"  against  the  ball,  so  as 
to  add  the  body's  weight  to  the  power  of  the 
stroke.  Be  moving  forward  when  you  actually 
hit  the  ball  and  keep  every  motion  of  the  racket, 
arm  and  body  in  line  with  the  ball's  flight.  All 
add  to  the  power  of  the  stroke,  and  help  to  make 
the  ball  go  in  the  direction  you  want  it  to  travel. 

Loosen  up  the  joints  in  making  the  swing. 
The  stiffness  shown  in  most  of  the  poor  strokes 
made  by  beginners  comes  generally  from  the  very 
apparent  effort  to  use  the  muscles  too  much. 
Good  tennis  players  do  not  get  their  speed  from 
extra  muscular  effort  but  from  timing  the  swing 
properly,  so  that  the  momentum  of  the  racket, 
rather  :than  the  muscular  force  back  of  it,  drives 


Keep  the 
Playing  Arm 
Well  Clear  of 
the  Body 


Give  the  Ball 
Plenty  of 
Room 


Loosen  Up 
and  Don't  Use 
the  Muscles 
Too  Much 


12 


METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Stroke  Should 
Be  Like  the 
Lash  of  a 
Whip 


Names  of  the 

Different 

Strokes 


Difference 
Between 
Forehand  and 
Backhand 


the  ball  harder.  Compare  the  tennis  stroke  with 
the  lash  of  a  whip  and  you  will  get  a  fair  idea 
of  it.  Extra  strength  does  not  make  the  whip 
strike  a  harder  blow;  momentum  gives  it  the 
power. 

Certain  names  have  been  given  to  the  dif- 
ferent strokes  of  the  game  which  may  not  be  un- 
derstood by  the  beginner.  A  few  words  therefore 
may  prevent  a  confusion  of  terms  later  on,  and 
make  the  explanations  clearer. 

The  "ground-stroke"  is  made  by  striking 
the  ball  after  it  has  bounded  from  the  ground, 
and  the  "volley"  before  it  has  touched  the  ground, 
or  "on  the  fly"  as  the  baseball  players  say. 
Ground-strokes  and  volleys  are  divided  into  two 
general  classes  as  "forehand"  or  "backhand,"  ac- 
cording to  whether  the  ball  is  struck  on  the  right 
side  (by  a  right-handed  player)  or  the  left  side. 

Forehand  strokes  are  made  with  the  strik- 
ing-arm, or  at  least  its  shoulder,  behind  the  ball 
when  it  is  hit,  and  backhand  strokes  with  the 
shoulder  ahead  of  it,  requiring  a  different  position 
of  the  body  and  arm,  and  a  different  grip  of  the 
racket.  In  backhand  play,  the  arm  crosses  some- 
what in  front  of  the  body  in  making  the  stroke 
while  it  is  entirely  free  in  forehand  play,  which 
explains  why  it  is  almost  invariably  more  difficult 
to  make  a  backhand  than  a  forehand  stroke. 

There  are  a  number  of  other  sub-divisions  of 
the  principle  strokes.  A  "drive"  is  simply  a 
ground-stroke  made  fast  and  low,  and  a  "lob"  the 
reverse  of  this,  since  it  tosses  the  ball  high  up  in 
the  air  and  necessarily  slow  in  order  to  fall  inside 


H        <u 


CO 


i 


73   ~  J2  +J 

s  <*   s 

r-<        flj        O 

O    !•£   j; 

O  Jal 


' 


FIRST  PRINCIPLES  OP  PLAY 


18 


the  court.  The  lob  can  be  made  with  either  a 
ground-stroke  or  a  volley,  but  it  is  almost  invari- 
ably a  ground-stroke. 

Among  the  different  kinds  of  volleys  are  the 
"service,"  which  is  the  first  stroke  in  each  series, 
made  with  a  volley  to  put  the  ball  into  play;  the 
"smash,"  the  "stop-volley,"  and  the  "half-volley," 
which  is,  correctly  speaking,  not  a  volley  at  all, 
but  a  ground-stroke.  The  half-volley  is  made  by 
striking  the  ball  just  after  it  rises  from  the 
ground,  and  as  the  ball  has  bounded  it  is  really 
a  ground-stroke. 

__The  smash  is  a  very  hard  volley  made  from 
a  dropping  ball  which  is  intended  to  "kill"  the 
ball  (or  put  it  out  of  play)  by  winning  the  point 
by  speed  rather  than  direction.  The  stop-volley 
is  made  by  simply  stopping  the  ball  with  the 
racket,  instead  of  hitting  it,  and  must  be  played 
from  a  position  close  to  the  net.  There  are  many 
kinds  of  services,  but  these  will  be  treated  in  a 
special  chapter  on  this  stroke,  and  the  variations 
of  the  other  strokes,  as  well  as  the  methods  of 
making  them  are  fully  treated  further  on  in  this 
volume. 

No  matter  on  which  side  you  make  the  stroke, 
you  should  swing  around  and  face  the  ball,  not  the 
net.  Assuming  that  you  are  right-handed,  your 
right  foot  should  be  forward  for  a  backhand 
stroke,  and  your  left  foot  for  the  forehand  stroke. 
The  feet  should  be  generally  in  the  line  that  you 
are  .playing,  not  parallel  with  the  net.  In  back- 
hand strokes,  never  let  the  racket  extend  across 
in  front  of  the  body.  Rather  turn  around  to 


Different  Kinds 
of  Volley 
Strokes 


The  Smash 
and  the 
Stop-Volley 


Swing  Around 
and  Face 
the  Ball 


14       METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Hit  the  Ball 
Between  Knee 
and  Hip 


Swing  Back 
Long  Before 
You  Strike 


Bend  Forward 
on  the  Toes 
to  Meet 
the  Ball 


face  the  ball  and  keep  the  right  shoulder  out  free 
for  a  full  swing. 

Wait  until  the  ball  reaches  a  height  be- 
tween the  knee  and  the  hip  to  hit  it ;  if  it  bounds 
higher,  move  back  a  little  and  wait  for  it  to  come 
down  to  the  better  level  to  strike.  Never  hit  the 
ball  straight  in  front  of  you  either;  preferably 
keep  it  well  off  to  one  side  or  the  other,  or  rather 
keep  yourself  oft"  to  one  side  of  the  ball. 

Above  all  else,  swing  back  well  before  you 
are  ready  to  hit.  Eighty  per  cent,  of  the  poor 
strokes  of  beginners  are  spoiled  by  waiting  until 

ball  has  bounded  before  drawing  back  the 
racket,  and  then  making  a  half  stroke,  like  a  push 
or  a  jab  at  the  ball,  to  make  up  for  lost  time. 
Always  swing  the  racket  back  before  you  think 
it  is  necessary,  and  keep  swinging  back  earlier 
until  you  find  a  distinct  pause  at  the  end  of  the 
back-swing  before  beginning  the  stroke.  It  is 
better  to  err  at  this  end  than  to  cut  the  swing 
short  by  beginning  too  late. 

Avoid  standing  too  upright  in  play.  It  is 
better  to  bend  the  body  forward  a  good  deal. 
The  knees  should  be  bent  and  the  weight  carried 
on  the  toes  all  the  time  while  the  ball  is  in  play. 
While  waiting  for  the  next  stroke,  crouch  slight- 
ly so  as  to  be  ready  to  spring  instantly  in  any 
direction,  and  balance  the  racket  across  in  front 
of  the  body,  holding  the  "splice"  of  the  frame  in 
the  idle  hand,  so  as  to  start  the  swing  quicker 
when  it  is  known  where  the  next  stroke  is  to  be 
made. 

Don't  stand  still  to  watch  the  result  of  a 


FIRST  PRINCIPLES  OP  PLAY 


15 


stroke  after  hitting  the  ball,  but  start  at  once  to 
get  back  to  the  safest  position  for  the  next  shot. 
It  is  very  easy  to  be  caught  out  of  position  in 
this  way,  and  the  ball  can  easily  be  placed  out 
of  reach  by  your  opponent  if  this  rule  is  not  care- 
fully observed.  Go  back  to  the  center  of  the  base- 
line after  each  stroke  is  made,  until  you  have 
learned  something  of  the  principles  of  position 
play  and  court  tactics. 

No  matter  how  well  you  may  have  made  your 
stroke,  even  though  it  ought  to  end  the  play,  al- 
ways assume  that  the  ball  is  coming  back  again, 
and  prepare  for  the  next  stroke.  It  is  one  of  the 
most  frequent  errors  of  beginners  to  watch  the 
result  of  a  good  stroke  from  the  side  of  the  court 
and  an  unexpected  return  catches  them  napping. 

Don't  try  to  hit  the  ball  hard  at  the  start.  Be 
content  to  hit  it  slowly  at  first  until  you  are  able 
to  keep  it  in  court  regularly  and  not  put  too  many 
returns  into  the  net  and  beyond  the  lines.  Don't 
try  to  volley  until  the  ground  strokes  are  well 
understood.  Play  the  ball  into  the  back  of  the 
other  court  in  preference,  and  practice  this 
"length,"  as  the  experienced  players  call  it,  until 
you  are  able  to  keep  your  returns  always  back 
of  the  service-line  of  the  other  court. 

Taking  the  steps  in  proper  order,  first  learn 
to  play  the  forehand  stroke,  and  then  the  back- 
hand stroke.  When  both  of  these  are  mastered, 
practice  them  until  you  are  able  to  make  the  ball 
bound  back  of  the  opposite  service-line  nearly 
every  time.  Then  practice  directing  your  strokes 
toward  one  side  or  the  other,  which  is  the  art  of 


Don't  Stand 
and  Watch 
Your  Shot 


Prepare  for 
the  Next 
Stroke 
Always 


Don't  Try  to 
Hit  the  Ball 
Hard  at  First 


16       METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Correct  Your 
Weakness  by 
Practice 


Learn  to 
Lob  at  Once 
for  Defence 


Perfect  Ground 
Strokes  Before 
You  Try  Volley 


placing,  until  you  can  direct  the  ball  fairly  well 
toward  either  side  selected. 

Most  players  are  weaker  in  making  backhand 
strokes  than  in  forehand  play,  and  this  generally 
comes  from  neglecting  to  develop  the  backhand. 
In  the  early  stages,  the  bad  habit  is  contracted 
of  running  around  a  doubtful  ball  so  as  to  play  it 
on  the  easier  forehand  side,  when  it  would  have 
been  better  to  use  a  backhand  stroke  for  the  shot. 
Avoid  this  error,  and  select  for  every  stroke  the 
style  that  is  most  convenient,  even  though  it  be 
the  more  difficult  way  to  hit  the  ball.  Above  all 
else,  practice  the  backhand  stroke  intentionally  to 
overcome  this  common  weakness  and  you  will  be 
doubly  rewarded  later  on,  as  a  study  of  the  chap- 
ter on  position  play  will  convince  any  student  of 
the  game. 

Next,  learn  to  lob.  If  the  opponent  tries  to 
run  up  to  the  net  to  volley  the  ball,  it  is  best  to 
lob  the  ball  over  his  head  until  you  become  expert 
enough  to  hit  the  ground-strokes  fast  and  accur- 
ately, and  then  you  can  learn  to  pass  him  at  the 
sides  without  playing  out  of  court. 

Volleying  can  be  taken  up  after  the  ground- 
strokes  are  fairly  well  controlled.  Running  up 
to  the  net  successfully  is  a  very  difficult  part  of 
the  game  and  it  is  better  not  to  run  in  at  all  unless 
it  is  done  intelligently.  Study  the  theory  of  the 
game  and  learn  when  it  is  safe  to  volley  before 
you  try  it,  and  even  then  do  not  overdo  the  matter 
by  trying  to  volley  all  the  time.  The  average  be- 
ginner thinks  that  every  volley  should  be  a  smash, 
which  is  far  from  correct.  Hit  even  the  volley 


FIRST  PRINCIPLES  OF  PLAY 


17 


strokes  slow  until  you  have  become  fairly  expert 
at  the  game. 

Don't  try  to  kill  everything  you  get  your 
racket  on;  the  best  players  are  content  to  keep 
the  ball  going  back  fast  into  the  other  man's 
court,  and  kill  only  occasionally.  Safe  play  is 
always  the  best  for  young  players,  and  generally 
the  winning  style  for  all  but  the  most  expert 
tournament  players  at  that. 

Try  to  anticipate  the  opponent's  intentions, 
and  learn  in  advance  where  the  next  ball  will  be 
played.  If  you  watch  his  movements  closely, 
you  will  soon  learn  to  anticipate  the  next  play, 
and  start  in  the  right  direction  to  meet  the  ball 
the  instant  it  has  left  your  opponent's  racket.  Be 
ready  to  start  at  once  and  do  not  hesitate  which 
way  to  turn  until  it  is  too  late  to  reach  the  ball 
and  return  it. 

Don't  waste  your  time  and  ruin  your  play 
by  trying  fancy  strokes.  The  simplest  are  the 
most  effective,  and  the  young  player  who  wants 
to  make  slashing  strokes  and  hit  the  ball  hard 
all  the  time  is  sure  to  make  a  failure  of  it  quickly. 
Remember,  it  takes  many  years  to  learn  to  play 
the  game  really  well,  and  learn  to  walk  before 
you  try  to  run.  The  man  who  keeps  the  ball  com- 
ing back  over  the  net  and  does  not  make  errors 
will  win  every  time  from  him  who  tries  to  "show 
off"  to  the  gallery  constantly. 

Above  all,  be  patient  and  persevering.  It  takes 
many  thousands  of  practice  strokes  to  learn  to 
play  one  properly.  The  best  way  to  get  this  prac- 
tice is  to  find  a  barn  door  or  a  blank  wall  of  some 


Don't  Try  to 
Kill  Every 
Ball  in  Reach 


Anticipate 
Your 

Opponent's 
Next  Play 


Simplest 
Strokes  Are 
Most  Effective 


18       METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 
Above  All,          kind  with  a  fairly  level  stretch  of  ground  in  front 

Have  Patience  r   .,  ,   ,          «     ,,       .     ,,  .          A*  .     , 

and  Persevere  °*  lt:>  an(^  ™ock  tne  ball  up  against  this  by  the 
hour.  This  will  give  the  best  possible  practice 
in  learning  strokes  and  will  also  teach  the  begin- 
ner a  lot  about  the  bound  of  the  ball  and  its  flight 
through  the  air.  Even  expert  players  find  this 
a  splendid  method  of  training  the  eye. 


GRIP  OP  THE  RACKET 


19 


III. 

GRIP  OF  THE  RACKET 
FIVE  CARDINAL  POINTS  TO  REMEMBER: 

1 — Always  hold  the  racket  tight  in  the  hand;  as 
the  stroke  is  made,  increase  the  tightness  of 
this  grasp. 

2 — Hold  the  racket  as  near  the  end  as  possible. 

3 — The  grip  should  allow  the  face  of  the  racket 
always  to  be  at  right  angles  with  the  flight 
of  the  ball,  both  sidewise  and  endwise. 

4 — -The  grip  should  be  shifted  through  one-quar- 
ter of  a  circle  for  the  backhand,  and  the 
thumb  should  then  be  braced  against  the 
handle  parallel  with  it. 

5 — Use  a  small-handled  racket  and  avoid  artificial 
grips  on  the  handle. 

THERE  has  been  controversy  over  the  best 
methods  of  gripping  the  racket  almost 
since  the  birth  of  the  game.     There  have 
been  two  distinct  schools,  each  of  which  has  its 
merits,  and  beyond  these  a  half  dozen  eccentric 
styles  of  holding  the  racket  have  earned  more  or 
less  success. 

But  while  we  find  that  certain  methods  of 
gripping  have  apparent  advantages  for  certain 
strokes,  they  lose  in  other  strokes  as  much  or  more 
than  is  gained.  It  is  not  practicable  to  change  the 


The  Cardinal 
Points  to  Keep 
in  Mind 


Two  Schools 
of  the  Grip 
and  Much 
Controversy 


20 


METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Some  Holds 
Good  for 
Only  One 
Stroke 


Should  the 
Grip  Be  Shifted 
for  the 
Backhand? 


Baddeley's 
Unchanged 
Grasp 


hold  for  every  stroke,  so  some  set  style  must  be 
adopted  that  gives  the  most  advantage  for  all  the 
strokes  required. 

A  slight  shifting,  for  instance,  in  the  posi- 
tion of  the  hand  gives  a  much  better  hold  for  the 
rolling  backhand  drive,  but  only  for  this  stroke, 
and  so  it  is  available  only  for  those  players  who 
use  this  stroke  regularly.  If  this  is  adopted,  then 
other  strokes  on  the  backhand  side  must  be 
adapted  to  this  hold  or  suffer  in  consequence. 

The  first  mark  of  divergence  in  the  two 
theories,  which  have  been  generally  referred  to  as 
the  English  and  American  schools,  comes  in  the 
question  of  whether  the  grip  should  or  should  not 
be  changed  for  the  backhand  stroke  —  that  is, 
whether  the  grip  of  the  handle  should  remain  un- 
changed when  the  arm  is  shifted  from  one  side 
of  the  body  to  the  other. 

Wilfred  Baddeley,  one  of  the  early  English 
masters  of  the  game,  and  one  of  the  earliest  of 
the  English  writers  whose  work  became  authorita- 
tive, played  himself  and  advocated  others  playing 
with  an  unchanged  grip.  Heathcote  also  held  the 
same  views  and  this  style  was  at  first  followed  by 
a  large  proportion  of  the  British  players.  It  is 
still  upheld  to  this  day  by  some  of  the  present  ex- 
perts on  the  other  side. 

However,  American  ideas  differ  here,  the  be- 
lief on  this  side  of  the  Atlantic  being  that  a 
shifting  of  the  grip  in  playing  the  backhand  stroke 
is  an  advantage.  This  theory  is  firmly  held  in  this 
country  by  practically  all  of  our  best  players,  very 
few  holding  the  English  views. 


s. 


e 

rt 
^o 

'C 
<u 

< 


C/3 

<U 
O 

£ 

C/3 


i 


s      O 


.§• 
O 


I 
H 


GRIP  OF  THE  RACKET 


21 


Indeed,  the  same  ideas  have  become  almost 
universal  in  Australia,  and  English  players  are 
also  coming  steadily  around  to  this  view,  a  large 
proportion  of  them  even  now  using  the  shifting 
grip.  The  Dohertys  in  their  book  declare  that 
"there  is  no  doubt  that  it  is  better  to  change  the 
grip  a  little  at  lawn  tennis"  but  "the  less  change 
the  better."  Yet  even  the  Dohertys  themselves 
differed  as  to  how  much  change  there  should  be, 
and  they  did  not  grip  the  racket  in  the  same  way. 

When  two  such  masters  as  this,  playing  to- 
gether constantly,  disagree  on  such  a  vital  point, 
how  shall  anyone  decide  it? 

The  shifting  of  the  grip  from  the  forehand 
to  the  backhand  position  and  back  again  seems  a 
bigger  undertaking  than  it  really  amounts  to  in 
actual  play.  To  the  novice  this  appears  to  require 
close  attention,  but  he  will  soon  find  that  he  never 
has  to  look  at  the  racket  as  the  shift  is  made.  In 
waiting  for  the  ball  anyway,  the  splice  of  the 
racket  should  be  balanced  in  the  left  hand  and 
the  touch  of  the  left  fingers  always  shows  which 
way  the  head  is  turned,  if  any  doubt  could  exist  as 
to  this. 

In  a  previous  volume  on  the  game,  the  present 
author  stated  that  the  change  in  the  hold  of  the 
racket  should  be  almost  if  not  quite  a  quarter  of  a 
circle.  It  is  possible  that  this  may  be  a  trifle  too 
much,  but  among  the  best  players,  certainly  those 
on  this  side  of  the  Atlantic,  the  shift  is  very  nearly 
this  amount.  A  glance  at  the  answers  of  the  lead- 
ing players  ^(a  few  pages  further  on)  to  the  test 


Doherty 
Brothers 
Favored  the 
Shift 


Change 
Becomes 
Almost 
Mechanical 


Shift  About 
One-Quarter 
of  a  Circle 


22        METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Should  the 
Thumb 
Support  the 
Handle? 


Brookes  Does 
Not  Use  His 
Thumb  Up 


English  Arms 
Bent  Like 
Scythes 


question  covering  this  point  will  convince  any 
doubter  of  this. 

The  next  point  of  divergence  among  those 
who  do  shift  the  grip  raises  the  question  whether 
the  thumb  should  be  used  up  the  handle  in  back- 
hand play  or  not.  Among  the  players  who  show 
the  best  form,  the  great  majority  do  use  their 
thumbs  as  a  support  in  making  the  backhand 
stroke,  and  I  cannot  doubt  the  wisdom  of  recom- 
mending this  style. 

Against  this  opinion,  however,  which  is  held 
by  Wilding,  by  the  Dohertys,  by  Williams,  by 
Larned,  and  by  the  great  majority  of  other  ex- 
pert players,  we  find  Brookes,  with  his  eccentric 
grip  which  no  authority  recommends  (not  even 
Wilding  or  Kidson,  of  Australia),  McLoughlin 
and  a  few  others. 

Agreed  then  that  the  best  advice  favors  shift- 
ing the  grip  and  using  the  thumb  up  the  handle, 
what  then  should  be  the  actual  grasp  for  the 
greatest  power  and  freedom? 

The  distinction  between  the  English  and  the 
American  strokes  is  most  noticeable  in  the  posi- 
tion of  the  elbow  and  wrist.  What  may  be  dis- 
tinctively called  the  English  grip  requires  a  low 
elbow  and  the  racket  head  above  the  wrist.  The 
position  of  the  hand  as  it  holds  the  racket  forces 
this  position  of  the  arm  and  the  rigid,  bent  elbow, 
while  the  whole  arm  moves  as  one  crooked  handle, 
like  a  scythe. 

While  the  position  of  the  arm  and  wrist  can- 
not truly  be  called  the  grip  of  the  racket,  neverthe- 
less they  have  been  the  direct  result  of  the  grip. 


GRIP  OF  THE  RACKET 


23 


Originally,  the  English  held  their  rackets  with 
an  unchanged  grip  for  the  backhand  stroke,  with 
the  thumb  wrapped  around  the  handle,  and  this 
grip  has  forced  on  them  this  awkward  position  of 
the  arm.  More  recently,  English  experts  have  ac- 
cepted American  ideas  and  there  has  been  a  steady 
change  going  on  for  the  last  ten  or  fifteen  years 
in  favor  of  shifting  the  grasp  and  using  the  thumb 
up  the  handle,  either  straight  or  diagonally,  for 
the  backhand  stroke. 

But  this  use  of  the  thumb  has  not  altered  the 
arm  position  entirely  in  England,  and  we  find  that 
the  Doherty  brothers  and  other  advanced  players 
have  shifted  their  grips  and  used  their  thumbs  up 
their  handles  for  the  backhand  strokes,  and  yet 
with  their  rackets  held  in  the  typical  old  English 
position  with  the  elbow  and  wrist  low. 

Vaile  criticised  this  angle  persistently  and 
contended  that  the  English  style  had  ruined  all 
the  backhand  strokes  seen  in  Britain  because  of  its 
lack  of  flexibility  and  freedom.  He  did  not  take 
any  strong  position,  however,  regarding  the  use 
of  the  thumb.  More  recently  over  here,  Douglass, 
an  American  professional,  has  publicly  advocated 
a  return  to  the  original  method  of  wrapping  the 
thumb  around  the  handle  of  the  racket  for  the 
backhand  in  order  to  secure  greater  control  and 
accuracy  in  the  stroke. 

One  strong  argument  is  advanced  against 
using  the  thumb  up  the  handle  which  must  be  ad- 
mitted to  be  sound.  In  using  this  grip,  we  un- 
questionably leave  an  opening  between  the  tips 
of  the  fingers  and  thumb,  which  has  a  tendency 


They  Are 
Gradually 
Coming  to  Use 
the  Thumb 


The  Dohertys 
Used  Their 
Thumbs  Up 


Vaile 
Criticises 
English 
Backhand 


24       METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Wrapping  the 
Thumb  Gives  a 
Tighter  Grasp 


Grip  Lacks 
Resistance 
Without 
Thumb 


Bent  Elbow 
or  Wrist 
Only 
Alternative 


to  permit  the  racket  to  turn  in  the  grasp  when 
it  is  hit  slightly  off  the  centre  by  a  fast  flying 
ball.  It  is  true  that  the  grasp  is  much  firmer 
and  better  able  to  resist  this  turning  pressure 
when  the  thumb  is  wrapped  around  the  handle, 
overlapping  the  fingers,  and  the  large  muscles  of 
the  fleshy  part  of  the  hand  are  brought  to  bear 
on  its  surface. 

But  against  this  advantage  that  Brookes 
gains  by  his  hold  there  are  two  or  three  distinct 
disadvantages  which  cannot  be  overlooked.  When 
weighed  against  the  single  advantage  conceded 
to  the  other  style,  one  cannot  help  feeling  that 
they  compel  the  selection  of  the  prevailing  method 
of  the  great  majority  of  the  best  players  today. 

If  the  thumb  is  wrapped  around  the  handle, 
the  racket  loses  much  of  its  powerful  resistance 
to  the  impact  of  the  ball  in  playing  a  fast 
backhand  stroke.  Hold  the  racket  with  the 
thumb  up  and  press  against  it  with  the  other 
hand  as  though  a  ball  were  striking  its  face, 
and  then  try  the  same  experiment  with  the 
thumb  wrapped  around  the  handle,  and  you  will 
see  at  once  the  difference  in  the  resistance  of- 
fered to  the  flight  of  the  ball.  The  handle  settles 
back  naturally  into  the  weak  crotch  between  the 
thumb  and  first  finger,  unless  the  thumb  supports 
it  along  the  handle,  or  with  side  pressure  that  can 
be  used  when  the  elbow  swings  low. 

Without  this  support  the  English  position 
of  the  arm  is  almost  unavoidably  forced  on  you. 
The  elbow  must  be  dropped  lower,  the  wrist  stif- 
fened to  brace  against  the  blow,  and  all  flexibility 


Thumb  Straight  Up  the  Handle 


Thumb  Across  the  Handle 


Thumb  Around  the  Handle 
Three  Grips  for  the  Backhand 


>  .2? 

j-i  ~ 
I) 

CO  -^ 

a 


G  -S  u 

j-i  ^  <o 

^  i—i 

5  3J 


O    -3 


GRIP  OF  THE  RACKET 


25 


is  gone.  An  unnatural  bend  in  the  wrist  is  the 
only  other  alternative  to  the  low  elbow  to  over- 
come the  weakness  of  this  grip,  and  in  either 
case,  you  have  a  stroke  handicapped  by  a  bend  in 
the  striking  arm  that  weakens  the  power  of  the 
blow.  There  can  hardly  be  a  question  that  the 
straighter  the  arm,  wrist  and  handle  the  more 
direct  will  be  the  blow. 

In  addition  to  this  drawback  to  the  thumb- 
around-the-handle  grip  for  the  backhand,  there  is 
also  the  lack  of  flexibility  that  goes  with  it.  With 
the  thumb  support,  the  wrist  is  free  for  the  most 
delicate  and  flexible  movements  that  control  the 
direction  of  the  ball  during  the  stroke.  The  high- 
est art  of  placing  depends  on  this  fine  control,  and 
it  is  generally  increased  by  the  flexible  wrist  that 
the  thumb-grip  permits. 

In  the  last  fraction  of  a  second  before  the 
stroke  is  completed,  you  often  find  the  opponent 
shifting  his  position  or  you  have  other  reason  to 
alter  slightly  the  direction  of  a  delicately  placed 
stroke,  perhaps  an  effort  to  pass  a  dangerous  vol- 
leyer  at  the  net.  Then  the  thumb-up  grip  is  a  won- 
derful help  in  this  control,  while  if  the  thumb  is 
wrapped  around  the  handle  and  the  elbow  is  car- 
ried low  or  the  wrist  bent  in  consequence,  it  is 
very  much  more  difficult  to  change  the  direction 
without  exposing  the  intention  and  advertising  the 
plan  to  a  watchful  antagonist. 

For  defensive  play,  for  sheer  safety,  the 
thumb-around  plan,  even  with  its  consequent  arm 
position,  is  safer  and  more  reliable,  but  it  limits 
the  attack,  and  allows  no  such  brilliant  possibilities 


Wrist 
Flexibility 
Comes  With 
Thumb  Up 


Delicate 
Placing 
Greatly  Helped 


English 
Backhand 
Safer,  but 
Gives 
Back-Spin 


26 


METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Better  to  Keep 
Racket  "Open" 
at  All  Times 


Extend  Handle 
as  Far  as 
Possible 


Weakness 
of  the 
Short  Grasp 


of  control  in  the  attacking  strokes  as  the  other 
style.  The  tendency  of  this  grip  is  also  to  bevel 
back  the  face  of  the  racket,  giving  the  ball  a  back- 
ward spin  or  "drag"  which  is  inclined  to  slow 
down  its  flight.  The  thumb  is  used  with  side  pres- 
sure to  increase  the  power  of  the  blow  but  it  can- 
not guide  the  racket  so  well  in  this  way. 

The  prevalent  style,  however,  keeps  the  face 
of  the  racket  "open" — that  is,  not  bevelled — when 
the  stroke  is  made,  and  personally  I  would  advise 
all  young  players  to  grip  the  racket  during  the 
swing  so  that  its  face  is  always  at  right  angles 
to  the  flight  intended  for  the  ball,  both  as  regards 
the  latitude  and  the  longitude  of  the  racket's  head. 

As  to  the  position  of  the  hand  on  the  racket, 
I  should  always  advise  as  long  a  handle  as  pos- 
sible. The  racket  should  be  extended  as  far  as 
possible  from  the  wrist,  and  the  best  players 
allow  the  leather  at  the  end  to  come  snug  up 
against  the  back  of  the  hand.  Personally,  I  have 
found  it  a  great  help  to  depend  on  this  bulge  of 
the  leather  to  keep  the  racket  from  slipping  in  the 
grasp. 

Here  again,  Brookes's  style  is  unorthodox 
and  eccentric,  since  he  uses  a  much  shorter  grip 
than  other  experts.  Beside  lessening  the  leverage 
that  is  secured  for  the  stroke  by  shortening  the 
length  of  the  handle,  there  is  also  the  danger  that 
the  end  of  the  racket  extending  out  behind  the 
hand  will  interfere  with  the  free  play  of  the 
wrist  in  making  the  stroke. 

The  more  one  studies  the  intricate  question 
of  grips  in  lawn  tennis,  the  more  he  may  be  forced 


GRIP  OP  THE  RACKET 


27 


to  the  sage  conclusion  of  Wilding,  who  remarks 
in  his  book :  "For  the  man  who  says  that  only  one 
grip  is  right  and  all  the  others  are  wrong  I  have 
little  use.  Dynamic  essays  and  diagrams  which  af- 
fect to  demonstrate  the  futility  of  that  hold  or  the 
absolute  perfection  of  this  only  bore  me.  I've 
played  against  too  many  players  in  all  parts  of  the 
world,  players  who  employ  distinctive  grips  and 
make  fine  shots  with  them,  not  to  realize  how  ab- 
surd it  is  to  be  dogmatic  in  this  matter." 

There  is  also  some  divergence  of  opinion  as 
to  the  tightness  of  the  grip.  Some  few  experts 
have  recommended  a  comparatively  loose  grip,  but 
I  cannot  agree  with  such  advice.  Meyers  says  that 
the  grip  should  be  relaxed  until  the  last  second  be- 
fore the  impact  is  made,  and  thinks  that  a  con- 
tinuously tight  grip  tends  to  shorten  the  back- 
swing.  Mahony  believed  in  a  comparatively  loose 
grip  also,  but  the  weight  of  opinion  is  against 
these  two  experts. 

It  seems  to  me  imperative  to  maintain  a  tight 
hold  on  the  racket  at  all  times,  and  I  doubt  if  it  is 
any  more  difficult  to  shift  the  grip,  as  some  be- 
lieve, if  the  grasp  is  tight  before  the  shift  is  made. 
A  loose  grip  is  a  source  of  constant  trouble.  The 
racket  has  a  tendency  to  turn  in  the  hand  slightly 
and  it  is  a  very  difficult  matter  to  twist  it  back 
straight  again  while  making  the  stroke. 

In  any  case,  the  grip  must  be  very  tight  at 
the  instant  the  stroke  is  made,  for,  even  with  the 
best  of  aim,  it  is  not  unusual  even  with  good  play- 
ers to  hit  the  ball  slightly  off  the  centre  of  the 
stringing.  When  this  occurs,  there  is  a  distinct 


Wilding's 

Sage 

Conclusion 


Few  Experts 
Recommend 
Loose  Grip 


Tight  Hold 
Imperative  as 
Ball  Is  Hit 


28       METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Lowe's 

Eccentric 

Hold 


Peculiar  Grips 
for  the 
Different 
Services 


Large  Handles 
Prevent  a 
Tight  Grasp 


tendency  to  turn  the  racket  in  the  grasp,  and  of 
course  this  ruins  the  stroke  unless  the  hold  is 
tight  enough  to  offset  this  tendency  and  to  pre- 
vent the  slightest  relaxation  in  the  firmness  of 
the  striking  surface  when  the  blow  is  delivered. 

Some  eccentric  styles  of  gripping  the  racket 
are  overcome  by  an  unnatural  position  of  arm  or 
body  during  the  stroke,  but  this  seems  like  cor- 
recting an  error  by  another  error.  Arthur  H. 
Lowe,  one  of  the  English  International  players 
grips  his  racket  in  such  a  peculiar  way  that  the 
conventional  style  of  hitting  the  ball  was  quite 
out  of  the  question.  This  was  overcome  by  a  bend 
of  the  body  and  a  twist  of  the  arm  that  was  most 
ungainly. 

For  the  service,  new  problems  come  into  view. 
Here  somewhat  different  grips  are  required  for 
the  twist  services,  which  are  the  natural  result  of 
the  angle  needed  to  impart  the  twist  called  for  by 
these  deliveries.  The  American  twist  and  the  re- 
verse American  deliveries  have  each  peculiar 
holds  of  their  own  which  will  be  treated  in  an- 
other chapter  under  the  head  of  the  service. 

It  is  most  important  that  the  racket  selected 
by  a  beginner  should  not  be  too  large  in  the 
handle.  Large  handles  make  it  difficult  to  grip 
the  racket  as  tightly  as  it  should  be  held,  and  the 
tendency  to  turn  in  the  grasp,  especially  in  back- 
hand play,  generally  indicates  that  the  handle  is 
too  large.  Just  what  the  best  size  is  must  be 
governed  of  course  by  the  size  of  the  hand  that  is 
to  grip  it.  It  is  safe  to  say,  however,  that  the 
handle  should  be  small  enough  at  least  for  the 


bfl  i> 


pq  .c 

3  " 

'  <u    - 

o  ^j  -^ 

2  O 


3 
O 

<u    3  c 


GRIP  OP  THE  RACKET 


29 


grip  to  reach  completely  around,  and  the  thumb 
to  overlap  the  middle  finger  enough  to  cover  the 
entire  first  joint.  If  your  racket  will  not  allow 
this  much  overlap  it  is  too  large  to  handle  prop- 
erly. 

Many  artificial  grips  have  been  made  for 
lawn  tennis  rackets,  and  their  use  is  more  a  mat- 
ter of  taste  than  precept.  If  your  hand  perspires 
freely  while  you  are  playing,  the  handle  may  be- 
come too  slippery  to  be  tightly  held,  but  there 
should  be  a  slight  moisture  in  the  hand  on  a  plain 
wood  handle  to  prevent  its  slipping.  The  general 
custom  is  to  roughen  or  "comb"  a  cedar  handle 
and  this  usually  furnishes  the  best  grip. 

The  use  of  adhesive  plaster  or  tire-tape  wrap- 
ped around  the  handle  has  been  favored  by  many 
expert  players,  as  this  furnishes  an  additional 
roughness,  and  when  the  hand  becomes  warm 
with  play  the  tape  softens  enough  to  offer  a  firm 
grasp.  Sometimes,  however,  this  becomes  too 
sticky  in  hot  weather,  and  I  have  seen  some 
players  severely  handicapped  during  match 
play  because  a  handle  wrapped  in  such  a  way 
stuck  to  the  hand  and  made  it  difficult  to  shift 
hastily  for  the  backhand  stroke  without  close 
attention  to  the  movement. 

Resin,  twine-wrapping  and  even  cork  and 
rubber  covers  for  the  handle  have  been  tried,  but 
as  a  rule  experienced  players  have  discarded  all 
of  these  devices  and  gone  back  to  the  rough- 
combed  cedar  handles  as  the  best  for  all  purposes. 


Artificial  Grips 
a  Matter  of 
Taste 


Wrapping  the 
Handle 
Often  Done 


Natural  Cedar 
Handle 
Generally  Best 


30       METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Should  the 
Grip  Be  Tight 
or  Loose? 


Few  Favor 
Loose  Grip 


Some  Tighten 
Up  03  They 
Strike 


OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS. 
Do  you  advocate  tight  or  loose  grip  of  racket? 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND:    Grip  varies. 

T.  C.  BUNDY  :     Tight  at  moment  of  impact. 

K.  H.  BEHR:     Fairly  tight. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER:     Loose  grip  except  at  moment 
of  impact  of  ball  on  racket. 

R.  D.  LITTLE  :    Firm. 

H.  H.  HACKETT:    Tight. 

J.  C.  PARKE  :    Tight. 

C.  P.  DIXON  :     Tight  as  a  rule. 

R.  L.  MURRAY:    Tight. 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :     Loose  grip. 

W.  M.  WASHBURN:     Grip  tight  at  moment  of  im- 
pact. 

ELIA  FOTTRELL:    Loose. 
CLARENCE  HOBART:   Quite  tight. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST  :    Tight. 

J.  R.  STRACHAN  :     Tight  grip. 

C.  R.  GARDNER:    Tight. 

A.  S.  DABNEY  :    Tight. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :     Not  too  tight. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :    Tight. 
W.  F.  JOHNSON  :    Loose. 
N.  W.  NILES:     Medium. 
T.  R.  PELL:    Tight. 
ROBERT  LEROY:    Tight. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR  :     Firm  but  not  squeezing  during  the 
stroke.     Loose  between  strokes. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD  :     Loose  until  moment  of  impact. 
J.  J.  ARMSTRONG:    Varies. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :  Moderately  tight. 
W.  M.  HALL:    Tight. 


GRIP  OP  THE  RACKET  31 

RICHARD     HARTE  :     Mediumly     tight     to     prevent     Necessary  to 
slipping.  Prevent 

DEAN  MATHEY  :    Tight  grip.  Slipping 

R.  C.  SEAVER:     Fairly  tight. 

G.  C.  SHAFER:     Tighten. 

S.   H.   VOSHELL:    Loose   until   contact   with   ball; 
then  firm. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY:    Loose  until  ball  is  struck. 
I.  C.  WRIGHT:    Tight. 

W.  C.  GRANT:    Tight  at  second  of  impact. 

//  your  grip  varies,  on  which  strokes  do  you  relax? 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND:   Service.  On  Which 

K.  H.  BEHR  :     On  short  angle  shots  off  the  ground.  Strokes  Do 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER  :   Service  and  sometimes  on  volley.  You  Re^x? 
H.  H.  HACKETT:     Stop  volley  only. 

J.  C.  PARKE:     No  variation.  ,x, 

C.  P.  DIXON:    Varies  very  little  if  anything;  relax  »9 

on  short  cross  strokes. 

R.  L.  MURRAY  :     Relax  on  stop  volleys  at  the  net  ^ 

and  when  changing  grip. 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :    Stop  volleys.  W 
W.  M.  WASHBURN  :     None.  ^  Q , 
CLARENCE  HOBART:    Doesn't.  lO 

E.  B.  DEWHURST  :    Only  for  drop  volley.  -  " 
A.  S.  DABNEY:     Serving  (a  bit  looser). 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :    Loosest  on  serve. 

F.  C.  INMAN:  None. 

W.  F.  JOHNSON  :     To  opponent's  forehand. 

N.  W.  NILES  :     Somewhat  tighter  on  volleys  except     Most  piayers 
stop  volleys.  Reiax  on 

T.  R.  PELL:     None.  Stop  Volleys 

ROBERT  LEROY:     On  gentle  drives  and  lobs. 
A.  M.  SQUAIR:     Firm  on  all  strokes. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD  :     It  doesn't  vary  appreciably. 
J.  J.  ARMSTRONG:    Volley. 

LEONARD   BEEKMAN:     Soft   block   shots   and   slow 
passing  strokes. 


32       METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 

Sewer  W.  M.  HALL:     Chops  short  over  net. 

Rela*es  RICHARD  HARTE  :     Certain  net  chops. 

DEAN  MATHEY  :     Relax  only  on  stop  volleys. 

R.  C.  SEAVER  :     On  my  backhand. 

G.  C.  SHAFER:     Tighten  on  all. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL  :     Little  tighter  on  overhead. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY:     Relax  on  all  chop  strokes. 
I.  C.  WRIGHT:     None. 

How  near  the  end  of  the  handle  does  the  ball  of 
your  hand  rest? 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND :  End  of  handle  on  outer  part 
of  the  ball  of  the  hand  (majority  of  strokes)  ;  sometimes 
slightly  shorter. 

Bundy  Uses  a  T.    C.    BUNDY  :     I   use   a   racket   shortened   three- 

Shortened  quarters  of  an  inch,  hence  grip  at  extreme  end. 

Handle  K.  H.  BEHR:     I  hold  my  racket  at  the  very  end,  ex- 

cept for  some  volleys. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER:    Against  leather. 

R.  D.  LITTLE:  My  hand  rests  against  the  leather 
guard  at  the  end  of  handle. 

H.  H.  HACKETT:     At  the  extreme  end. 

I.  C.  WRIGHT:    One-half  inch. 

J.  C.  PARKE:     Touching  the  leather. 

C.  P.  DIXON  :    About  two  inches. 

R.  L.  MURRAY  :    Almost  at  the  end. 

Church  Uses  G.  M.  CHURCH  :     About  three  inches  from  the  end* 

Short  Grip,  but      DUt  I  consider  that  my  grip  is  wrong  and  that  the  nearer 
Admits  Error        the  grip  is  to  the  end  of  the  handle  the  better. 

W.  M.  WASHBURN  :  The  heel  of  my  hand  rests  on 
the  butt  of  the  racket. 

ELIA  FOTTRELL:     On  the  leather  on  end  of  handle. 

CLARENCE  HOBART  :     Extreme  end. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST:  The  leather  piece  is  well  clear 
of  the  hand. 

J.  R.  STRACHAN  :     About  half  an  inch. 

C.  R.  GARDNER:    At  the  very  end. 


GRIP  OP  THE  RACKET 


33 


A.  S.  DABNEY  :  About  two  inches.  This  gives  more 
control. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,,  JR.  :     About  one-half  inch. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :    Firm  grip  close  to  the  leather. 
W.  F.  JOHNSON  :  One  inch. 

N.  W.  NILES:  On  the  leather  end,  except  in  serv- 
ing, when  over  the  end. 

T.  R.  PELL  :     About  two  inches. 

ROBERT  LERov:  Just  touching  the  leather  band 
round  the  end  of  the  handle. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR:  My  whole  hand  is  just  above  the 
leather  button. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:     The  extreme  end. 

J.  J.  ARMSTRONG  :     One-half  inch  from  end  of  racket. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :  I  should  say  about  two  inches 
from  end. 

W.  M.  HALL:  Touching,  except  for  volleying  and 
sometimes  serving ;  then  about  one  and  one-half  inches  up. 

RICHARD  HARTE  :  Heel  resting  against  the  edge  of 
the  leather. 

DEAN  MATHEY:  I  hold  my  racket  within  one-half 
inch  to  one  inch  from  end. 

R.  C.  SEAVER  :  At  the  end  always,  but  this  I  believe 
is  not  correct  when  playing  net. 

G.  C.  SHAFER  :  I  leave  about  an  inch  of  handle  free, 
i.  e.,  I  choke  the  bat. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL:     On  the  leather  end  of  handle. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY  :  The  ball  of  my  hand  is  about  an 
inch  and  a  half  from  end.  My  grip  is  very  near  the  end 
of  the  racket. 

Do  you  change  your  grip  for  the  forehand  and 
backhand? 


R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND:    Yes. 
T.  C.  BUNDY:    Yes. 
F.  B.  ALEXANDER  :    Yes. 
R.  D.  LITTLE:    Yes. 
H.  H.  HACKETT:    Yes. 


Most  Players 
Touch  the 
Leather  at  End 


Hall  Shortens 
Grip  for  the 
Volley 


Should 
Grip  Be 
Changed? 


34       METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Englishmen 
Report 
Unchanged 
Grif> 


Nearly  Every 
American 
Player  Shifts 


Mathey  in 
Doubt  About 
the  Shift 


J.  C.  PARKE  :     No. 
C.  P.  DIXON  :     No. 
R.  L.  MURRAY  :    Yes. 
G.  M.  CHURCH  :    Yes. 
W.  M.  WASHBURN:    Yes. 
ELIA  FOTTRELL:    Yes. 
CLARENCE  HOBART:    Yes. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST:    Yes. 
J.  R.  STRACHAN  :    Yes. 
C.  R.  GARDNER  :     Yes. 
A.  S.  DABNEY:    Yes. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :   Yes. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :    A  little. 
W.  F.  JOHNSON  :    Yes. 
N.  W.  NILES:    Yes. 
T.  R.  PELL:    Yes. 
ROBERT  LEROY:    Always. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR  :     Very  slightly. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD  :    Yes. 

J.  J.  ARMSTRONG:     Sometimes. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :    Yes. 

W.  M.  HALL:    Yes. 

RICHARD  HARTE  :    Yes. 

DEAN  MATHEY:  I  am  myself  debating  whether  to 
change  grips  or  not.  Until  last  year  I  did  not  change  at 
all. 

R.  C.  SEAVER:    Yes. 

G.  C.  SHAFER:    Yes. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL:    Yes. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY:    Yes. 

I.C.WRIGHT:    Yes. 

W.  C.  GRANT:    Yes. 

Do  you  use  your  thumb  up  the  handle  on  the  back- 
hand? 


Thumbs  Up 

or 

Thumbs  Down? 


R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND :    Yes. 

T.  C.  BUNDY:    No. 

K.  H.  BEHR:     For  some  strokes  and  others  not. 


GRIP  OP  THE  RACKET  35 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER :     No.  Large  Majority 
R.  D.  LITTLE  :     Yes.  Use  the 

H.  H.  HACKETT:    Yes.  Thumb 

J.  C.  PARKE:     No.  Up  Handle 

C.  P.  DIXON  :     No. 
R.  L.  MURRAY:    Yes. 

G.  M.  CHURCH:     No. 
W.  M.  WASHBURN  :     No. 
ELIA  FOTTRELL:    Yes. 
CLARENCE  HOBART:    Yes. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST:    Yes. 
J.  R.  STRACHAN:    No. 
C.  R.  GARDNER  :     Yes. 
A.  S.  DABNEY:    Yes. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :    Yes. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :    No. 
W.  F.  JOHNSON:    Yes. 
N.  W.  NILES:    Yes. 
T.  R.  PELL:    Yes. 

ROBERT  LEROY:    Yes,  decidedly.  LeRoy  Very 

A.  M.  SQUAIR  :    No.  Positive  on 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD  :    No.  this  Point 
J.  J.  ARMSTRONG:    Yes. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :     No. 
W.  M.  HALL:    Yes. 
RICHARD  HARTE:    Yes. 
R.  C.  SEAVER:    No. 
G.  C.  SHAFER:    Yes. 
S.  H.  VOSHELL:    Yes. 
E.  H.  WHITNEY:    Yes. 
I.  C.  WRIGHT:    No. 
W.  C.  GRANT:    Yes. 

Describe  the  grip  you  use  for  forehand  and  back- 
hand. 

R,  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND :     Face  of  racket  perpendicular  DiiHcult  to 

to  ground,  that  is,  face  of  racket  is  up  and  down.    I  hit  Describe 

the  ball  straight  in  the  middle  of  racket  and  don't  cover  Grip 
the  ball  like  Mac.     (Maurice  E.  McLoughlin — ED.) 


36 


METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


What  is  an 
"Ordinary 
American 
Grip"? 


Dabney's 

Good 

Description 


Fingers  and 
Thumb  Parallel 
for  Forehand 


T.  C.  BUNDY:     Cannot  state  without  photograph. 

K.  H.  BEHR:     Impossible. 

R.  D.  LITTLE:  Front  of  hand  facing  forward  for 
forehand.  Side  of  hand  for  backhand.  Thumb  back  of 
handle. 

H.  H.  HACKETT:     Ordinary  American  grip. 

J.  C.  PARKE:  Oval-shaped  handle  set  firmly  into 
V  between  thumb  and  forefinger. 

C.  P.  DIXON:     Thumb  over. 

R.  L.  MURRAY:  In  backhand,  I  support  the  racket 
with  my  thumb  along  the  handle. 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :  Rather  loose  grip  with  the  back- 
hand a  little  looser,  thumb  across  in  both  cases. 

J.  R.  STRACHAN  :  In  making  a  forehand  stroke,  the 
ball  of  my  hand  is  on  the  wide  part  of  the  handle  and 
in  making  a  backhand,  it  is  on  the  narrow  part. 

C.  R.  GARDNER:     A  la  Pell,  I  think. 

A.  S.  DABNEY:  For  forehand,  grasp  the  racket 
naturally  as  you  would  grasp  a  hand  mirror.  Have  the 
fingers  slightly  separated,  the  forefinger  more  so  than 
the  others.  The  web  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger 
about  in  line  with  the  side  of  the  racket.  Backhand: 
Thumb  up  the  handle,  fingers  close  together. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :  Firm,  comfortable  grip,  a  slight  shift 
from  fore  to  backhand. 

W.  F.  JOHNSON  :  Forehand :  Fingers  on  top  of 
handle  with  thumb  over  forefinger.  Backhand :  Knuckles 
on  top  with  thumb  stretched  up  handle. 

N.  W.  NILES:  Forehand:  Fingers  around  with 
forefinger  somewhat  along  handle  from  others.  Second 
knuckle  of  thumb  about  the  back  or  outside  corner  edge 
of  handle.  Backhand:  Fingers  around  handle  except 
thumb,  latter  flat  along  back  of  handle,  pointed  slightly 
down. 

ROBERT  LsRoY :  My  forehand  grip  has  the  fingers 
and  thumb  parallel,  which  is  held  with  the  face  at  right 
angles  to  the  ground.  The  head  of  the  racket  is  held 
only  a  trifle  lower  than  the  handle.  As  I  hit  my  grip  be- 


Copyright  by  Underwood  &   Underwood 


THOMAS  C.  BUNDY 
The  Chop-Stroke  Played  by  an  Expert. 

This  shows  a  splendid  example  of  the  chop-stroke  as  played  by  one  of 
its  strongest  exponents.  Note  the  downward  angle  of  the  blow  from  above 
the  shoulder,  the  crouched  position  and  the  cramped  stance  that  limits 
the  body  swing.  Bundy  and  Wallace  Johnson  are  the  best  players  yet 
produced  of  this  type. 


WILLIAM  J.  CLOTHIER 
Forehand  Stroke  With  Moderate  Top-Spin. 

With  the  racket  finishing  over  the  right  shoulder,  as  shown  in  this  picture, 
the  ball  gets  a  moderate  forward  twist.  This  is  the  happy  medium  be- 
tween the  straighter  strokes  of  Larned  and  the  extreme  top- spin  shown 

by  McLoughlin. 


GRIP  OF  THE  RACKET 


37 


comes  tighter.  Backhand  grip  much  the  same  except  for 
the  position  of  the  thumb. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:  The  only  difference  is  in  the 
position  of  the  thumb  which  is  midway  between  up  and 
down  and  around  the  handle. 

J.  J.  ARMSTRONG:     Impossible  to  describe  on  paper. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :  Forehand :  Racket  slightly 
bent  forward.  Backhand:  Try  to  copy  Pell's,  the  face 
of  handle  against  the  part  of  hand  between  thumb  and 
first  finger. 

W.  M.  HALL:     Racket  and  arm  in  straight  line. 

RICHARD  HARTE:  My  hand  is  well  spread  out,  the 
forefinger  seeming  to  point  the  direction. 

R.  C.  SEAVER:  Hold  the  racket  tight  for  forehand, 
and  in  changing  to  backhand,  turn  racket  and  hold  loosely. 

G.  C.  SHAFER:  Thumb  free  on  forehand,  in  use  on 
backhand. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL:     Backhand  thumb  up  handle. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY:  I  hold  my  racket  so  that  racket 
and  arm  are  both  in  the  same  plane.  In  changing  from 
forehand  to  backhand,  I  turn  the  racket  over  half  way 
that  both  sides  of  the  racket  are  used. 

W.  C.  GRANT:  Thumb  wrapped  around  handle  for 
forehand.  Thumb  up  handle  for  backhand. 

Does  your  grip  shift  from  forehand  to  backhand 
more  or  less  than  one-quarter  circle?  How 
much  less  or  more? 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND :     More. 

T.  C.  BUNDY  :     Little  more. 

K.  H.  BEHR  :     Don't  know. 

R.  D.  LITTLE:     About  one-quarter  circle. 

H.  H.  HACKETT  :     About  that. 

C.  P.  DIXON  :  Should  say  about  one-eighth  more. 
I  take  the  ball  rather  low  on  backhand  and  with  check 
cut. 

R.  L.  MURRAY:     Just  about  one-quarter. 


Several  Try  to 
Copy  Pell's 
Backhand  Grip 


Whitney  Aims 
to  Keep  in  the 
Same  Plane 


Most  Experts 
Shift  About 
One-Quarter 
of  a  Circle 


38 


METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Dcwhurst 
Disagrees  with 
Most  Others 


Many  Opinions 
on  this  Point 


G.  M.  CHURCH  :  A  little  more  than  one-quarter 
circle. 

W.  M.  WASHBURN:  It  shifts  about  three-eighths 
of  a  circle,  perhaps  a  little  less. 

ELIA  FOTTRELL:    I  think  about  one-quarter  circle. 

CLARENCE  HOBART:    It  shifts  about  one-eighth. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST  :     About  one-eighth  of  a  circle,  45 
degrees.     One-quarter  of  a  circle  is  a  right  angle.     No 
one  changes  this  much. 

J.  R.  STRACHAN  :     Just  about  90  degrees. 
C.  R.  GARDNER  :     About  one-quarter. 
A.  S.  DABNEY  :     Yes,  about  three-quarters  of  an  inch 
in  all. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :    Yes,  little  less  than  y^  circle. 
W.  F.  JOHNSON  :     Grip  changes  very  little. 

N.  W.  NILES:  Slightly  more,  barely  enough  to  be 
called  "more;"  second  knuckle  of  thumb  is  on  corner  in 
forehand  and  just  over  corner  in  backhand. 

T.  R.  PELL:     One-half  circle,  I  think. 

ROBERT  LsRoY :  Almost  a  full  quarter  circle.  Fore- 
hand, the  back  of  my  hand  is  at  almost  right  angles  to 
the  ground.  Backhand,  it  is  exactly  parallel  with  the 
ground. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR  :  Less  than  one-quarter  circle.  Practi- 
cally more  on  backhand  ground-strokes.  Less  than  one- 
quarter  on  low  backhand  volleys,  in  fact  not  more  than 
one-eighth  on  any  backhand. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:     If  the  smooth  side  is  used  for 
forehand  the  rough  side  will  be  out  for  backhand. 

J.  J.  ARMSTRONG  :    About  same. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :    Just  about  a  fourth. 

W.  M.  HALL:    About  one-third. 

RICHARD  HARTE:     Slightly  more. 

R.  C.  SEAVER:    Full  half  circle. 

G.  C.  SHAFER  :     One-eighth  of  circle. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL  :    Just  one-quarter. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY:    More. 

I.  C.  WRIGHT:    One-quarter  circle. 

W.  C.  GRANT:    No. 


EYES  ON  THE  BALL 


39 


IV. 


EYES  ON  THE  BALL 


FOUR  CARDINAL  POINTS  TO  REMEMBER 


1 — Keep  your  eyes  on  the  ball  from  the  beginning 
of  the  forward  swing  until  the  ball  has 
been  hit. 

2 — Look  azvay  from  the  ball  during  the  stroke 
only  after  you  have  become  a  proficient 
player,  and  then  only  when  in  good  prac- 
tice. 

3 — Look  back  at  the  ball  even  then  if  you  find 
you  are  hitting  badly. 

4 — Against  an  expert,  watch  his  eyes  closely  to 
discover  which  way  he  is  aiming  the  ball. 

IT  IS  obvious  that  it  is  impossible  to  keep  your 
eyes  on  the  ball  all  of  the  time  during  play, 

because  you  must  devote  some  attention  to 
your  opponent's  position  in  court.  It  is  necessary 
to  glance  up  occasionally,  especially  when  moving 
about  the  court  rapidly,  in  order  to  keep  the  height 
of  the  net  clearly  in  mind,  its  distance  from  you, 
and'the  relative  position  of  the  lines  of  the  court. 

Without  these  details,  you  will  be  all  at  sea 
in  placing  the  ball,  and  sometimes  even  in  getting 
it  over  the  net.  If  the  other  man  runs  up  to  vol- 
ley the  next  return,  you  must  know  of  his  move- 
ments to  make  your  next  stroke  a  passing  at- 


Cardinal 
Points  to 
Keep  in  Mind 


Impossible  to 
Watch  the  Ball 
All  the  Time 


40 


METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Necessary  to 
Watch  Your 
Opponent 


Ball  Must  Be 
Followed  as  It 
Approaches 


When  Should 
the  Player 
Lift  His  Eyes? 


tempt  or  a  lob ;  if  he  shifts  his  position  far  to  one 
side  or  the  other,  that  will  govern  the  direction  of 
your  next  stroke. 

It  is  apparent  therefore  that  you  must  look 
away  from  the  ball  frequently  during  play,  and 
the  question  naturally  arises  just  when  you  must 
centre  all  of  the  attention  on  the  flying  sphere  so 
as  to  make  a  perfect  stroke. 

As  the  ball  approaches  you,  it  must  be 
watched  closely  until  you  are  moderately  certain 
where  it  will  strike  and  have  made  your  calcula- 
tion as  to  where  you  should  stand  to  meet  it.  At 
this  point,  many  players  take  a  quick  glance  at 
the  opponent  to  get  a  last  bulletin  as  to  his  move- 
ments and  to  finally  adjust  their  own  compass  be- 
fore steering  the  next  stroke. 

A  fraction  of  a  second  is  long  enough  to  get 
this  information  and  then  all  attention  should  be 
centered  on  the  ball  again  to  make  the  stroke  you 
have  resolved  to  try  under  the  circumstances. 
Often  it  is  necessary  to  make  a  final  correction 
in  the  angle  of  the  swing  and  the  stroke. 
The  ball  rises  on  the  bound,  the  racket  comes  for- 
ward to  meet  it,  and  the  stroke  is  made. 

Now,  when  should  the  player  lift  his  eyes? 

In  golf,  we  are  told  by  every  master  of  the 
game,  and  repeatedly  warned  of  the  inviolability 
of  this  rule,  that  the  ball  must  be  clear  away 
from  the  club  before  the  eyes  can  be  lifted,  and 
most  instructors  demand  that  the  eyes  should 
watch  the  tee  even  after  the  ball  has  left  it. 

But  in  tennis,  we  shoot  with  closer  aim  than 
in  golf.  We  have  a  broader  striking  surface  and 


F.  B.  Alexander's  Style  of  Forehand  Ground-Stroke. 

The  position  of  the  feet  is  rather  unfortunate  in  this  picture,  the  player 
evidently  backing  away  from  a  close  ball,  but  it  illustrates  well  the 
peculiar  style  of  swing  used  by  Alexander.  The  racket  drops  low  and 
far  behind  the  player,  whipping  forward  with  a  marked  follow-through 
that  gives  the  ball  great  speed,  while  its  hidden  back-swing  conceals  the 

direction  well. 


EYES  ON  THE  BALL 


41 


we  calculate  more  closely  on  the  flight  of  the  ball. 
It  is  very  often  a  matter  of  inches  rather  than 
feet  between  success  and  failure  in  passing  an 
opponent  at  the  net.  It  seems  almost  impossible 
to  calculate  so  nicely  without  looking  at  the  spot 
aimed  at,  and  I  doubt  if  it  can  be  or  is  done  by 
experts. 

There  is  a  curious  inconsistency  in  all  the 
written  works  of  instruction  on  the  game  that  I 
have  never  seen  fully  explained,  yet  which  is 
quite  reconcilable.  Every  authority  with  whose 
work  I  am  familiar  advises  players  to  keep  their 
eyes  on  the  ball  and  makes  no  exception  to  this 
rule.  Most  of  them  lay  great  stress  on  this  car- 
dinal point,  and  perhaps  with  good  reason —  cer- 
tainly so,  in  so  far  as  they  are  prescribing  for 
beginners  at  the  game. 

But  the  fact  remains  that  hardly  one  expert 
player  in  a  dozen  follows  the  very  rule  that  is 
urged  so  strongly,  and  this  fact  makes  the  begin- 
ner doubt  the  soundness  of  the  advice  he  has  just 
read.  Instantaneous  photographs  of  the  best 
players  in  action,  if  they  be  taken  at  the  right 
point  during  the  stroke,  generally  show  the  eyes 
lifted  and  looking  in  the  direction  that  the  ball  is 
intended  to  take. 

I  have  made  a  hundred  experiments  to  prove 
the  correctness  of  this  theory,  which  seems 
startling  at  first  to  most  students  of  the  game, 
who  have  been  drilled  from  infancy  to  the  theory 
of  watching  the  ball  at  all  times,  and  with 
scarcely  an  exception  they  have  all  verified  my 
contention. 


Closer  Aim 
Needed  Than 
in  Golf 


Inconsistency 
of  Written 
Rules 


Few  Experts 
See  the  Ball 
Struck 


Many 

Experiments 
Confirm 
Theory 


42       METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Beginner 
Must  Not 
Look  Up 


Inexperience 
Demands  Close 
Attention 


Experts  Suffer 
Most  from 
Bad  Bounds 


For  the  beginner,  it  is  absolutely  essential 
that  he  watch  the  ball  up  to  the  very  instant  of 
impact.  The  chief  anxiety  in  the  early  stages  of 
learning  lawn  tennis  is  to  hit  the  ball  in  the  cen- 
tre of  the  racket,  to  get  away  a  clean  stroke. 

If  the  preliminary  calculation  to  anticipate 
the  bound  of  the  ball  has  to  be  altered  even  slight- 
ly because  of  an  uneven  rebound  or  simply  from 
the  inexperience  which  has  not  yet  taught  the 
player  to  anticipate  its  flight  with  perfect 
accuracy,  then  it  is  only  apparent  at  the  last  frac- 
tion of  the  second  in  which  the  ball  is  struck,  and 
the  sweep  of  the  racket  must  be  altered  quickly. 

As  the  novice  grows  more  accustomed  to 
this  anticipation  of  the  ball's  flight,  he  becomes 
more  certain  to  hit  the  ball  with  the  centre  of  his 
racket,  and  gradually  finds  himself  able  to  look 
away  from  it  a  fraction  of  a  second  before  the 
impact.  Then  and  not  till  then  will  his  game  im- 
prove in  the  next  point  of  advancement,  the  abil- 
ity to  place  the  ball  at  will  where  he  wishes. 

In  itself,  watching  the  ball  closely  limits  the 
power  of  attack,  and  this  is  true  of  experts  as 
well  as  beginners.  Few  students  of  the  game 
ever  realize  why  it  is  that  an  expert  player  is 
more  affected  by  uneven  court  surface  and  poor 
playing  conditions  than  a  novice,  but  I  think 
they  will  find  this  in  the  habit  he  has  formed  of 
looking  away  from  the  ball  before  he  strikes  it. 

Put  your  tournament  expert  on  a  poor  court 
and  the  eccentric  bound  of  the  ball  will  make  him 
concentrate  his  attention  on  the  ball  until  the  last 
second  and  his  placing  will  suffer  materially. 


EYES  ON  THE  BALL 


43 


Ask  any  experienced  player  if  he  does  not  ease 
up  on  his  stroke  a  little  when  he  anticipates  or 
gets  a  bad  bound ;  ask  him  why  he  does  that  and 
he  will  tell  you  that  the  uncertainty  throws  him 
off. 

Well,  that  uncertainty  kept  his  eyes  longer 
on  the  ball  than  usual,  and  instead  of  placing  his 
return  within  a  foot  of  the  side-line  and  six 
inches  above  the  net,  his  concentration  on  the  ball 
itself  left  him  a  little  less  certain  of  the  direction 
of  the  side-line  and  the  exact  height  of  the  net, 
so  he  was  forced  to  play  a  little  safer,  letting  the 
ball  sail  two  feet  over  the  net  and  three  feet  inside 
of  the  edge  of  the  court. 

If  the  player  learns  to  take  his  eyes  away 
from  the  ball  before  striking,  he  earns  the  great 
advantage  of  looking  at  the  mark  he  is  shooting 
for  just  as  he  strikes.  The  final  twist  of  the  wrist 
and  the  slight  deflection  of  the  muscles  that  let 
him  control  the  ball  with  great  accuracy,  are  only 
possible  with  the  eye  on  the  exact  point  at  which 
he  is  directing  his  shot. 

Does  a  billiard  player  look  at  the  cue  ball  or 
the  object  ball?  Does  the  bowler  look  at  his  ball 
or  the  head  pin  he  is  aiming  for?  Does  your 
wing-shot  look  at  the  game  or  his  gun?  Does 
your  baseball  pitcher  look  at  the  ball  he  is  throw- 
ing? 

The  batter  in  baseball  does  look  at  the  ball, 
and  the  golf  player  keeps  his  eye  close  on  the 
little  sphere,  but  neither  of  these  tries  to  place 
the  ball  with  such  accuracy  as  does  the  tennis 
player,  and  if  either  could  learn  to  look  away 


Uncertain 
Bounds  Keep 
Eyes  from 
Looking  Up 


Advantage 
Earned  by 
Looking  Up 


Baseball  and 
Golf  Are 
Different 


44       METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Most  Players 
Look  at 
Their  Targets 


Whitman 
an  Exception 
to  the  Custom 


Experts  Read 

Opponents' 

Eyes 


from  the  ball,  he  would  be  better  able  to  do  so. 

In  golf,  the  player  has  no  such  control  of  the 
striking  weapon,  no  such  broad  striking  space 
and  short  handle  as  in  tennis,  while  in  baseball 
the  blow  must  be  much  more  closely  aimed  than 
in  either  of  the  other  games.  An  inch  off  in  the 
line  of  the  bat's  swing  and  the  blow  is  ruined, 
while  to  add  to  the  batsman's  difficulties  he  is 
matched  against  the  most  expert  control  of  an 
opposing  pitcher,  who  is  trying  his  best  with  al- 
most marvelous  skill  to  make  the  ball  shoot  in 
unknown  and  unnatural  angles  to  avoid  the  bat. 
This  accounts  for  the  many  missed  efforts  to  hit 
the  ball,  or  "strikes." 

Perhaps  the  only  really  successful  exception 
to  the  general  custom  of  looking  away  from  the 
ball  among  expert  tennis  players  was  Malcolm 
D.  Whitman.  He  came  nearer  to  keeping  his 
eyes  on  the  ball,  or  rather  did  keep  them  on  the 
ball  longer,  than  any  other  really  great  player 
whom  I  have  seen.  But  Whitman's  attack  was 
far  below  his  defence  at  all  times.  He  did  watch 
the  ball  almost  to  the  point  of  impact,  if  not  en- 
tirely so,  and  this  fact  made  it  extremely  difficult 
to  anticipate  the  direction  of  his  passing  strokes, 
although  they  were  seldom  so  fast  or  so  aggres- 
sively directed  as  the  other  great  players  of  his 
time. 

Now  we  come  to  the  result  of  this  looking 
up  before  hitting  which  takes  place  among  ex- 
perts. Few  tournament  players  attempt  to  antic- 
ipate the  direction  of  their  antagonists'  placing  by 


EYES  ON  THE  BALL 


45 


watching  the  motions  of  the  arm  or  of  the  racket 
alone. 

On  the  contrary,  they  read  the  eyes  of  the 
other  player. 

The  direction  in  which  your  opponent  looks 
as  he  makes  his  stroke  will  almost  always  give 
you  a  better  line  on  where  to  expect  the  next  at- 
tack than  any  motion  of  his  racket  or  his  arm. 
Long  before  the  ball  has  left  his  racket  the  tell- 
tale eyes  will  almost  invariably  reveal  his  secret. 
Among  expert  players  this  is  even  more  the  rule 
than  among  ordinary  players  who  watch  the  ball 
longer. 

The  average  reader  will  doubt  this  state- 
ment, I  anticipate,  and  I  am  therefore  prepared  to 
offer  proof  of  it  in  advance  of  his  distrust.  Per- 
haps the  most  perfect  proof  that  good  players 
watch  the  eyes  of  their  opponents,  not  their  rack- 
ets, was  furnished  by  Fred  H.  Hovey,  who 
adopted  a  most  skilful  deception  that  conclusively 
proved  this  point. 

When  drawn  in  toward  the  middle  of  the 
court  on  a  short  ball,  with  his  opponent  at  the 
net,  Hovey  found  it  very  easy  to  pass  his  man  by 
the  simple  ruse  of  looking  in  one  direction  and 
placing  the  opposite  way.  The  other  man  invari- 
ably jumped  in  the  direction  he  looked  and  the 
ball  sailed  serenely  past  him  on  the  opposite  side. 

The  effect  of  this  play  is  almost  uncanny,  as 
I  discovered  in  playing  against  it  many  times. 
Even  though  I  knew  the  deception,  the  strength 
of  habit  was  so  strong  that  the  instant  the  eyes 
looked  up  toward  the  right,  I  found  it  impossible 


His 


Direction 


This  Theory 
Proven  in 
Several  Ways 


Hovey's  Clever 
Little  Ruse 


46       METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Almost 
Always  Good 
for  an  Ace 


Wright 
Deceived 
by  Nlsbet 


Ware's 
Variation 
of  the  Same 
Device 


to  avoid  starting  in  that  direction,  and  a  dozen 
times  the  ball  went  past  me  on  the  other  side. 

Personally,  1  learned  to  use  that  little  ruse 
and  found  it  almost  invariably  good  for  an  ace 
under  conditions  that  allowed  an  easy  pass,  un- 
less the  opponent  at  the  net  guessed  properly  the 
direction  of  my  attempt  and  jumped  that  way  be- 
fore the  ball  started.  Playing  the  opposite  way 
made  the  stroke  less  fast  and  close  to  the  net  and 
side-lines,  but  there  was  always  plenty  of  room 
on  that  side  for  a  slow  pass. 

Another  proof  that  the  expert  player  looks 
up  before  he  strikes  was  furnished  by  Beals 
Wright  in  his  matches  with  the  English  expert, 
H.  A.  Nisbet,  when  he  was  in  this  country. 
Nisbet  when  at  the  net  trying  tc  anticipate  an  op- 
ponent's pass  would  jump  quickly  to  the  right  or 
left  just  before  his  opponent  made  his  stroke,  and 
instantly  jump  back  again  in  the  opposite  direc- 
tion. 

Wright  declared  that  he  had  lost  so  many 
aces  by  this  manoeuvre  that  he  came  to  expect 
it  every  time  the  relative  positions  recurred,  yet 
with  the  idea  clearly  in  his  mind  he  found  that 
he  invariably  looked  up  before  striking,  saw  Nis- 
bet jump  and  involuntarily  turned  his  stroke  in 
the  opposite  direction  and  lost. 

Leo  Ware  with  an  opponent  at  the  net  would 
look  straight  at  him  as  though  to  drive  the  ball 
through  him  by  sheer  speed,  and  then  turn  his 
wrist  in  making  the  stroke  and  lob  the  ball  over 
his  head,  with  the  frequent  result  of  earning  an 
ace  on  the  lob,  as  his  opponent  would  misread  his 


EYES  ON  THE  BALL 


47 


eyes  and  keep  his  weight  forward  to  meet  a  drive 
until  too  late  to  allow  him  to  get  back  for  the  lob. 

McLoughlin  in  his  recent  book,  cites  a  clear 
case  of  reading  the  opponent's  eyes,  telling 
(on  p.  124)  how  he  first  learned  the  direction  of 
Brookes's  service  by  watching  his  eyes.  Before 
he  discovered  this  source  of  information,  he 
couldn't  tell  where  the  ball  was  coming. 

But  I  should  be  sorry  after  all  this  to  have 
it  thought  for  a  moment  that  I  advocate  taking 
the  eyes  off  the  ball  by  a  man  who  is  learning 
to  play  lawn  tennis.  On  the  contrary,  I  cannot 
emphasize  too  strongly  the  necessity  of  everlast- 
ingly keeping  your  eyes  on  the  ball.  It  is  the  most 
essential  point  in  learning  to  hit  the  ball. 

Watch  it  as  closely  as  you  can  until  you  not 
only  have  learned  to  hit  it,  but  to  hit  it  ninety- 
nine  times  out  of  a  hundred  in  the  centre  of  the 
racket.  Even  past  that,  it  is  necessary  to  watch 
the  ball  until  you  have  learned  to  hit  it  with 
the  centre  of  the  racket  in  all  the  varying  posi- 
tions and  with  each  of  the  many  styles  of  strokes 
that  you  are  expected  to  play. 

The  playing  centre  of  the  tennis  racket  is 
very  much  smaller  than  it  seems.  The  catgut 
strings  are  highly  resilient  in  the  very  centre  and 
for  a  few  square  inches  around  this  central  strik- 
ing-point. This  resiliency  decreases  rapidly  as 
the  strings  approach  the  edge  until  they  reach 
the  wood,  which  is  the  point  of  absolute  non-resil- 
iency. Eighty  per  cent,  of  the  ruined  strokes  of 
the  beginner  come  from  missing  the  centre  of  the 
racket. 


McLoughlin 
Read  the  Eyes 
of  Brookes 


Watch  the 
Ball  Till 
Expert 


Easy  to 
Miss  Centre 
of  Racket 


48       METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Second  Stage 
of  Learning 
the  Game 


Difficult 
to  Keep 
Direction 


If  "Off  Your 
Stroke,"  Go 
Back  to 
First  Principles 


One  should  not  make  an  effort  to  look  away 
from  the  ball  in  striking ;  he  should  always  try  to 
look  at  it.  But  soon  after  the  principles  of  mak- 
ing the  stroke  are  mastered  and  the  novice  has 
learned  to  hit  the  ball  well,  he  will  unconsciously 
graduate  to  the  second  stage  of  learning  tennis, 
which  is  in  placing  or  controlling  the  direction  of 
the  ball.  Then  when  he  begins  to  place  more  ac- 
curately he  will  find  that  he  loses  the  sense  of  his 
own  location,  and  the  accurate  direction  of  the 
opponent's  court  and  height  of  the  net,  un- 
less he  looks  up  constantly  to  keep  these  details 
clearly  in  mind. 

The  player  runs  about  the  court  so  much, 
twists  and  turns  and  shifts  his  own  position  so 
often,  that  it  is  constantly  necessary  to  look  in  the 
direction  he  is  playing  to  correct  his  steering  com- 
pass, so  to  speak,  and  to  get  his  bearings  adjusted 
frequently.  Soon  the  desire  will  follow  to  place 
closer  to  the  lines  and  to  hit  the  ball  faster 
and  closer  to  the  net  in  consequence,  and  then  this 
need  to  look  up  as  the  stroke  is  being  made  will 
force  itself  upon  you  unconsciously — and  it  need 
not  be  resisted  as  in  golf  unless  it  tends  to  make 
you  miss  hitting  the  ball  properly. 

But  before  all  things  else,  learn  to  walk  be- 
fore you  try  to  run.  Do  not  begin  with  the  eyes 
off  or  take  them  off  the  ball  before  the  complete 
mastery  of  the  strokes  themselves  has  been  ac- 
complished, and  whenever  you  go  "off  your 
stroke"  you  will  generally  find  that  going  back  to 
first  principles  and  keeping  the  eyes  on  the  ball 
longer  will  bring  back  the  lost  skill.  In  the  nee- 


EYES  ON  THE  BALL 


49 


essary  ten  years  that  it  requires  to  make  a  first- 
class  player,  at  least  the  first  two  should 
be  devoted  to  hard  practice  with  the  eyes  on  the 
ball.  Even  among  the  most  apt  pupils  there  is 
great  danger  of  wrecking  a  promising  career  by 
hurrying  one's  progress  in  this  particular  even 
more  than  in  any  other. 

There  is  much  diversity  of  opinion  as  to  the 
point  at  which  an  expert  takes  his  eyes  off  the 
ball.  I  am  convinced  that  this  varies  greatly  with 
the  individual  and  that  no  accurate  rule  can  be 
laid  down.  Among  the  best  American  experts, 
the  average  is  well  after  the  ball  leaves  the 
ground,  but  some  of  them  look  up  immediately 
after  it  bounds.  Very  few  actually  see  the  ball 
strike  the  racket  except  in  smashing,  but  here 
it  is  possible  to  watch  the  ball  longer  than  in  serv- 
ing because  the  direction  does  not  have  to  be  con- 
trolled in  such  narrow  limits,  or  so  accurately. 
Personally,  I  do  not  remember  ever  seeing  the 
ball  actually  touch  my  racket. 

Dewhurst,  whose  opinions  are  worthy  of  se- 
rious consideration,  says  in  his  "Science  of  Lawn 
Tennis":  "The  fault  of  taking  the  eye  off  the 
ball  before  it  is  hit  constitutes  the  main  source 
of  error  with  most  players." 

Nor  do  I  question  the  accuracy  of  this  state- 
ment. The  necessity  for  taking  the  eyes  off  the 
ball  is  a  constant  source  of  error,  but  I  believe 
it  to  be  a  necessity.  I  have  never  yet  seen  a  really 
severe  player  who  did  not  do  so.  To  keep  the 
eyes  on  the  ball  until  the  stroke  is  completed 
means  to  weaken  the  attack,  and  it  would  seem 


Time  to  Lift 
Eyes  Varies 


In  Smashing, 
Ball  Can  Be 
Watched 
Longer 


Dewhurst's 
Opinion  Sound 
but  Misleading 


50 


METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Rushing 
Opponent 
Must  Not 
Disconcert 


Dohertys 
Dwell  on 
This  Point 


Vaile's 

Impossible 

Advice 


better  to  maintain  severity  of  attack  even  though 
in  doing  so  errors  creep  in  from  the  lifting  of  the 
eyes. 

Dewhurst  emphasizes  the  danger  of  trying 
to  watch  the  rushing  opponent  who  follows  his 
service  up  to  the  net  with  so  much  fuss  as  to  dis- 
tract the  attention  of  the  striker-out,  and  make 
him  lift  the  eyes  too  soon  and  spoil  his  attempt 
at  passing.  That  is  an  undeniable  source  of  dan- 
ger, but  it  seems  to  me  due  more  to  allowing 
one's  self  to  be  flustered  by  the  rush  of  the  threat- 
ening volleyer  than  to  the  danger  of  lifting 
the  eyes  too  soon.  The  same  result  will  follow 
if  the  nerves  become  unsteady  under  the  rushing 
net  attack,  even  though  you  keep  your  eyes  on  the 
ball  throughout  the  stroke. 

In  their  book  on  the  game,  the  Doherty 
brothers  also  dwell  on  this  point  with  the  added 
warning  that  in  handling  the  American  twist 
service  it  is  doubly  necessary:  "One  may  have 
a  dim  idea  where  one's  opponent  is,  but  the  eye 
must  be  glued  upon  the  ball." 

Vaile  carries  his  instructions  for  keeping  the 
eyes  on  the  ball  to  such  an  extreme  that  he  ad- 
vises the  player  to  watch  that  part  of  the  ball  that 
he  intends  to  hit.  This  seems  like  splitting  hairs, 
and  I  have  made  many  tests  since  this  theory 
was  brought  out  to  see  if  it  were  possible  to  watch 
part  of  a  flying  lawn  tennis  ball,  but  always  with- 
out success. 

In  golf,  it  is  often  advised  that  the  player 
should  look  at  the  back  of  the  ball  as  he  strikes 
it  to  prevent  "topping,"  which  often  results  from 


EYES  ON  THE  BALL 


51 


looking  at  the  top  surface  of  the  ball.  But  here 
we  have  a  stationary  object  and  a  very  small 
striking  surface,  which  both  differ  from  the  prob- 
lem we  have  to  solve  in  tennis.  There  the  ball  flies 
so  fast  through  the  air  that  it  is  manifestly  impos- 
sible to  select  a  single  part  of  it  for  attention,  so 
I  seriously  doubt  if  Vaile's  advice  on  this  point  is 
practicable. 


Cannot  Watch 
Part  of  a 
Flying  Ball 


52       METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 

OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS. 
Do  you  consciously  raise  your  eyes  before  the  ball 
is  hit? 

Some  of  the  R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND:     No. 

Best  Players  T.  C.  BUNDY  :     No,  if  so  I  miss  the  shot. 

Raise  Their  K   H    BEHR.     Yes. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER:    No. 
R.  D.  LITTLE  :    No. 

H.  H.  HACKETT:    Yes. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT:    Yes. 
J.  C.  PARKE:     No. 

C.  P.  DIXON  :    Yes,  a  fraction  of  a  second. 
R.  L.  MURRAY:    Yes. 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :    If  my  opponent  is  at  the  net,  yes ; 
if  he  is  in  the  backcourt,  no. 

W.  M.  WASHBURN  :    No. 
ELIA  FOTTRELL:    No. 
CLARENCE  HOBART:    No. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST:    Not  consciously. 
J.  R.  STRACHAN  :    No. 

C.  R.  GARDNER:    Unconsciously. 

A.  S.  DABNEY:     Sometimes;  ought  not  to. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :    No. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :    No. 
W.  F.  JOHNSON  :    No. 
N.W.  NILES:    No. 
T.  R.  PELL:    No. 

LeRoy  ROBERT  LfiRoY :     No,  I  look  first  and  lower  them  so 

Looks  Up  as  to  look  at  the  ball  when  I  hit  it. 

First  A.  M.  SQUAIR:    No. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:    No. 
J.  J.  ARMSTRONG:    No. 
LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :     No. 
W.  M.  HALL:    No. 
RICHARD  HARTE  :    No. 
DEAN  MATHEY:    No. 


EYES  ON  THE  BALL  53 

R.  C.  SEAVER  :    Yes.  Unconsciously 

G.  C.  SHAFER:     Yes.  Raises  Eyes, 

S.  H.  VOSHELL:    I  don't  think  so.  Says  Whitney 

E.  H.  WHITNEY  :    I  raise  them  but  not  consciously. 
I.  C.  WRIGHT  :    No. 

W.  C.  GRANT  :    Yes,  in  serving. 

Do  you  read  your  opponent's  eyes  for  the  direction 
of  his  stroke? 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND:     Yes.  Williams  Reads 

T.  C.  BUNDY:    No.  '  the  Other 

K.  H.  BEHR:    No.  .        .  Man's  Eyes 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER:    Never.          ; 
R.  D.  LITTLE  :    No. 

H.  H.  HACKETT:    No. 

B.C.WRIGHT:    No.  : 

J.  C.  PARKE:    No. 

C  P.  DIXON  :    No. 

R.  L.  MURRAY  :    Yes.  , 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :    Against  some  players. 
W.  M.  WASHBURN  :    No. 

ELIA  FOTTRELL:     Sometimes. 
CLARENCE  HOBART  :     No. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST:    No. 

J.  R.  STRACHAN:    No.  Few  Others 

C.  R.  GARDNER  :     Sometimes  when  he  looks.  say  They  Do 

A.  S.  DABNEY:    No. 
G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.:     Not  consciously. 

F.  C.  INMAN:     No. 
W.  F.  JOHNSON  :    No. 
N.  W.  NILES:    No. 
T.  R.  PELL:    No. 

ROBERT  LsRoY:    Yes,  always. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR:  Not  only  the  eyes,  in  judging  direc- 
tion of  opponent's  return,  his  general  position  in  the  court 
and  mine  give  the  first  hint.  I  try  to  decide  first  where  the 
danger  spots  are,  where  the  "hole"  is  in  my  court,  what  I 
would  do  if  I  were  in  his  place.  Then  his  body  position 


54 


METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Squair  Tells 
His  Method  of 
Anticipation 


What  First 
Shows 
Direction  ? 


Hackett  Says 
Intuition 
Guides  Him 


(facing  or  sidewise  to  net,  etc.)  length  and  direction  of 
beginning  of  stroke,  his  eyes.  His  grip  of  the  racket, 
strength  and  direction  of  the  wind,  the  spin  you  gave  the 
ball,  all  these  help  in  deciding  in  what  direction  his  return 
will  come.  I  watch  the  ball  more  than  anything  else, 
although  I  try  to  see  all  he  does.  Finally,  it  is  the  ball 
itself  which  shows  for  certain  the  direction. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:     No. 

J.  J.  ARMSTRONG  :    No. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :    Yes. 

W.  M.  HALL:    No. 

RICHARD  HARTE  :     No. 

DEAN  MATHEY:     No. 

R.  C.  SEAVER:    Certainly. 

G.  C.  SHAFER  :    Yes. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL  :   No. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY  :     No,  only  in  the  serve. 
I.  C.  WRIGHT:    No. 

W.  C.  GRANT:    Not  always. 

//  not  the  eyes,  what  do  you  rely  on  to  first  show 
the  opponent's  direction — arm,  racket  or  ball? 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND :  Eyes,  arm,  racket,  body,  ges- 
ture before  and  at  the  moment  of  hitting  ball. 

T.  C.  BUNDY  :     His  position  and  mine ;  also  stance. 

K.  H.  BEHR:  None,  generally  from  his  position  in 
the  court. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER:     Racket  and  general  position. 
R.  D.  LITTLE  :     Everything ;  racket  motion,  study  of 

habits,  favorite  shots,  etc. 

H.  H.  HACKETT:    Intuition. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT  :     Position  in  court  and  arm. 

J.  C.  PARKE:  Position  of  opponent  and  self  in  the 
court  and  opponent's  feet. 

C.  P.  DIXON  :     Stance,  arm  and  racket. 
R.  L.  MURRAY  :    Also  arm  and  racket. 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :    Usually  on  the  racket. 
W.  M.  WASHBURN  :    His  general  attitude. 
ELIA  FOTTRELL  :    It  depends  on  the  opponent. 


EYES  ON  THE  BALL 


55 


CLARENCE  HOBART  :  His  position  and  where  he  may 
be  expected  to  play  from. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST  :    Position  of  ball ;  position  of  self ; 
attitude  of  body  and  feet  of  opponent. 

J.  R.  STRACHAN  :    Arm. 

C.  R.  GARDNER:  Depends  on  the  man.  It  may  be 
one  or  all  or  none  of  these. 

A.  S.  DABNEY  :  On  his  general  position  in  the  court, 
habits  of  direction,  psychological  guess  work,  etc.  A  com- 
bination of  mental  process  acquired  by  long  practice  which 
becomes  intuitive. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,,  JR.  :   Nothing  in  particular. 

F.  C.  INMAN:    Racket. 
W.  F.  JOHNSON  :    Arm. 

N.  W.  NILES  :  His  habit,  i.  e.,  what  he  usually  does. 
His  stance,  his  racket. 

T.  R.  PELL:    Watch  ball  only. 

ROBERT  LEROY  :     I  look  also  at  his  racket  and  arm. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR  :  Arm,  racket  and  ball  are  seen  prac- 
tically at  the  same  time.  The  arm  and  racket  give  the 
warning  but  the  ball  is  decisive. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:    There  is  an  obvious  place  for 
every  shot.    It  depends  on  whether  your  opponent  may  be 
counted  on  to  do  the  expected  thing. 

J.  J.  ARMSTRONG  :  You  watch  the  ball  and  instinct- 
ively know  the  direction  of  the  return. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :    Also  his  racket. 

W.  M.  HALL  :     Racket  and  position  of  his  body. 

RICHARD  HARTE  :    His  arm,  then  racket,  then  ball. 

DEAN  MATHEY  :  The  ball  almost  entirely,  although 
sometimes  the  racket  may  have  some  influence. 

R.  C.  SEAVER:  I  think  you  judge  your  opponent's 
return  strokes  by  his  position  in  court. 

G.  C.  SHAFER:     All  help  indicate  direction. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL  :  Arm,  racket  and  ball.  Position  of 
opponent  in  court. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY:  Principally  the  position  of  the 
ball,  and  the  position  the  player  himself  is  in. 

I.  C.  WRIGHT:   Intuition. 


Dabney 
Makes  a 
"Psychological 
Guess" 


Touchard  Says 
There  Is  an 
Obvious  Place 
for  Every  Shot 


56       METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 

V. 

FOOTWORK 
FOUR  CARDINAL  POINTS  TO  REMEMBER: 

Cardinal  1 — Keep  up  on  the  toes  whenever  the  ball  is  in 

Points  to  play. 

Keep  in  Mind      2—Keep  the  knees  bent  just  before  and  while 

making  the  stroke. 

3 — The  line  of  the  feet  should  b'e  almost  invari- 
ably parallel  with  the  flight  of  the  ball. 
A — When  waiting  uncertainly  for  the  next  stroke, 
the  position  of  the  feet  should  be  at  an 
angle  diagonal  to  the  net. 

up  on  Your         T^  HE  use  of  the  feet  in  lawn  tennis  is  of  far 


T 


Toes  All  the  |        greater  importance  than  one  generally  rea- 

lizes. The  balance  of  the  body,  the  facility 
for  moving  quickly  in  any  direction,  the  all-im- 
portant follow  through,  and  even  the  actual  strik- 
ing of  the  ball,  depend  largely  for  success  on  good 
footwork. 

First  and  most  important,  one  should  be  up 
on  his  toes,  actually  as  well  as  figuratively,  while 
making  nearly  every  stroke.  All  life  and  snap 
disappear  from  the  play  when  you  settle  down  on 
your  heels  and  instantly  you  are  placed  on  the  de- 
fensive. To  attack  sharply,  to  put  "sting"  in  the 
ball,  requires  the  elasticity  of  motion  that  can  be 
had  only  when  up  on  your  toes. 


FOOTWORK 


57 


Bent  knees  are  also  essential  during  most  of 
the  play,  and  although  strictly  speaking  the  knees 
are  not  the  feet,  their  use  should  come  under  the 
head  of  footwork.  It  may  be  more  restful,  per- 
haps, to  stiffen  the  knees  and  settle  down  on  flat 
feet,  and  this  is  sometimes  safe  when  the  ball  is 
not  actually  in  play  or  just  about  to  be  put  into 
action.  But  while  the  play  is  on,  or  just  before 
receiving  the  service,  one  should  set  all  his  springs 
for  instant  action  and  the  greatest  of  these  are 
the  knees  and  feet. 

Now,  the  position  of  expectancy  is  the  one 
we  must  assume  most  often — the  waiting  position 
when  the  service  is  about  to  be  handled,  when  at 
the  net  waiting  for  a  volley,  and  even  when  back 
of  the  base-line  anticipating  the  drive  of  your 
opponent.  For  this  it  is  most  apparent  that  not 
only  should  the  knees  be  bent  and  the  weight  car- 
ried on  the  toes,  but  also  that  the  angle  of  the 
feet  should  be  such  as  to  allow  the  quickest  start 
in  any  possible  direction  that  may  be  demanded. 

I  lay  great  stress  on  this  point  because  I  have 
found  that  a  great  many  good  players  do  not 
make  use  of  it.  Even  the  present  American  cham- 
pion, Williams,  shows  distinct  defects  in  his  foot- 
work, and  seems  to  win  despite  it,  rather  than 
because  of  the  position  of  his  feet.  Ex-champion 
Whitman  also  played  too  frequently  with  straight 
knees,  flat  feet  and  with  his  body  squared  around 
toward  the  net. 

On  the  other  hand,  we  find  that  McLoughlin, 
Larned,  H.  L.  Doherty,  Wrenn,  and  other  great 
masters  of  the  game  almost  invariably  and 


Bending  the 
Knees  Adds 
Fire  to  Action 


The  Waiting 
Position  of 
Expectancy 


Many  Good 
Players  Do  Not 
Stand  Right 


58       METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Feet  Should 
Not  Parallel 

the  Net 


Moving 

Backward 

Facilitated 


How  the 
Position 
Works  Out 


involuntarily  fell  into  the  orthodox  positions  that 
gave  them  the  greatest  power  and  latitude  in  ac- 
tion. 

Before  a  player  can  actually  get  set  to  make 
his  next  stroke  he  may  be  called  upon  to  move 
quickly  forward  or  back,  to  the  right  or  to  the 
left.  With  the  feet  parallel  to  the  net,  he  is  free 
for  instant  side  motion,  and  if  they  are  spread  far 
enough  apart,  he  will  be  very  quick  in  jumping  to 
either  side.  But  if  he  is  suddenly  called  on  to  move 
forward  or  backward  from  this  position,  he  must 
lift  one  foot  and  put  it  down  again  either  behind 
or  in  front  of  the  other  to  push  off  and  start  his 
weight  backward  or  forward. 

Remember,  it  is  easy  to  move  the  feet,  but 
in  shifting  position  the  real  problem  is  to  move 
the  whole  body  quickly.  Carrying  the  weight 
low,  with  the  feet  spread  well  apart  and  the  diag- 
onal "stance"  allows  the  quickest  action  possible 
in  any  direction,  while  the  other  permits  quick  ac- 
tion only  sidewise  and  entails  a  slight  delay  in 
moving  backward  or  forward. 

Let  us  look  at  the  practical  working-out  of 
this  theory.  You  are  at  the  net  trying  to  antici- 
pate your  opponent's  passing  stroke.  In  the  par- 
allel position,  you  feel  ready  to  jump  quickly  in 
either  direction.  Good.  But  suppose  he  lobs  over 
your  head.  This  position  of  the  feet  will  find  you 
anchored  at  the  net,  and  the  best  you  can  do  will 
be  to  turn  and  run  for  the  ball  to  save  the  situa- 
tion with  another  defensive  job. 

If  your  feet  had  been  in  the  diagonal  position, 
the  instant  the  overhead  attack  was  discovered 


FOOTWORK 


59 


the  forward  foot  would  have  pushed  the  whole 
weight  backward  and  you  would  have  been 
able  to  back  up  fast  enough  to  have  smashed 
the  lob,  or  at  least  to  have  volleyed  the 
ball  and  saved  the  attacking  position.  Even 
that  tiny  fraction  of  a  second  that  is  lost  in  lifting 
one  foot  and  putting  it  forward  to  push  off  the 
weight  backward,  would  have  been  enough  to 
have  saved  the  situation.  It  is  just  such  points 
as  this  that  make  the  clever  player  better  than  his 
less  thorough  rival. 

Suppose  on  the  other  hand,  you  are  at  the 
base-line  with  feet  parallel  to  the  net,  expecting  a 
deep  volley  from  an  opponent  at  the  net,  confident 
that  you  could  move  quickly  in  either  direction  to 
anticipate  the  return.  What  happens  if  the  other 
man  plays  a  short  ball,  drops  a  stop-volley  just 
over  the  net?  Again  that  fraction  of  a  second 
needed  to  start  forward  is  lost  and  you  cannot  get 
in  fast  enough  to  reach  the  low-bounding  ball  that 
might  otherwise  have  offered  an  easy  chance  for 
a  kill  if  you  had  got  there. 

The  position  recommended  at  first  seems  to 
favor  the  forehand  stroke  and  it  is  true  that  it 
takes  a  shorter  step  to  swing  for  the  forehand 
stroke  than  if  the  ball  comes  on  the  other  side. 
But  on  the  other  hand,  for  the  backhand  stroke, 
you  simply  step  forward  with  the  right  foot,  turn- 
ing the  body  with  the  step,  if  the  ball  is  coming 
short ;  or  backward  with  the  left  foot,  if  the  ball 
is  coming  deeper.  Either  way,  you  swing  quickly 
into  position  for  backhand  play,  and  although 
the  turn  of  the  body  is  slightly  greater  than  if 


Getting  Back 
from  the  Net 
for  a  Lob 


Just  as  Bad  at 
the  Base-Line 


Diagonal 
Position  Seems 
to  Favor 
Forehand 


60 


METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Feet  Must  Be 
in  Line  with 
Flight  During 
Stroke 


Foot-Faults  as 
Troublesome 
as  Ever 


Simply  a 
Matter  of 
Which  Happens 
First 


the  feet  had  been  parallel  with  the  net,  the  motion 
can  be  made  quicker.  On  the  other  hand,  the 
turn  for  the  forehand  stroke  is  less. 

In  actually  making  the  stroke,  whether  it  be 
forehand  or  backhand,  the  feet  should  be  almost 
if  not  quite  in  line  with  the  flight  of  the  ball. 
This  rule  is  most  essential  and  the  failure  to  ob- 
serve it  is  one  of  the  most  common  faults  of 
beginners.  In  making  the  stroke,  as  we  shall 
presently  see,  the  weight  of  the  body  must  be 
swung  forward  from  one  foot  to  the  other,  very 
much  as  in  good  golf,  and  in  order  to  preserve 
the  balance  it  is  necessary  that  the  forward  foot 
shall  be  in  the  line  of  the  flight  to  catch  the  weight 
and  quickly  recover  the  balance  for  the  next 
movement. 

The  use  of  the  feet  in  serving  is  one  point 
that  has  caused  more  trouble  in  the  lawn  tennis 
world  than  anything  else.  Foot-faults  have  been 
a  constant  source  of  fresh  legislation  on  both 
sides  of  the  ocean,  and  even  to  this  day  the  diffi- 
culty of  judging  a  fair  service  is  no  less  difficult 
than  it  was  twenty  years  ago. 

No  rules  that  can  be  devised  will  do  away 
with  the  difficulty  of  deciding  which  of  two  things 
happens  first.  If  the  foot  crosses  the  line  before 
the  ball  leaves  the  racket,  it  is  a  fault ;  and  if  the 
ball  leaves  the  racket  first,  it  is  not.  No  matter 
what  words  are  used  to  describe  this  infraction  of 
the  laws  there  will  always  remain  that  same  diffi- 
culty in  deciding  which  happens  first. 

For  the  player  who  wants  to  avoid  the  dan- 
ger of  being  foot-faulted,  and  who  prefers  to 


FOOTWORK 


61 


eliminate  even  the  suspicion  that  keeps  the  base- 
line umpire  watching  him  so  closely  that  it  is  in- 
clined to  upset  his  game,  the  safest  way  is  to  keep 
both  feet  well  behind  the  line. 

Many  players  make  foot-faults  through  sheer 
carelessness  and  they  are  generally  the  result  of 
not  taking  care  in  planting  the  left  foot  before 
serving.  It  is  safer  to  give  the  line  six  inches 
of  margin  and  not  tread  even  close  to  the  limit 
allowed — the  few  inches  gained  otherwise  are  not 
worth  the  risk  of  being  foot-faulted. 

But  many  players  plant  the  left  foot  carefully 
enough  and  then  after  they  lock  up  to  toss  the 
ball  in  the  air,  they  promptly  lift  the  foot  again 
and  replant  it  nervously  a  few  inches  closer  to- 
ward the  net.  Whitman  used  to  do  this  con- 
stantly, and  Theodore  Pell  has  also  been  a  bad 
transgressor  in  this  respect. 

Beginners  frequently  develop  a  habit  of  ad- 
vancing the  left  foot  in  playing  the  backhand 
stroke,  and  this  awkward  position  cuts  off  the 
back  swing  of  the  racket.  There  is  no  freedom 
of  swing  and  little  chance  to  follow  through 
with  the  arm  across  the  body  in  this  position, 
and  it  is  absolutely  necessary  to  put  the  right 
foot  forward  and  turn  the  body  toward  the  ball 
to  succeed  at  all  in  making  the  stroke. 


Carelessness 
Causes  Many 
Foot-Faults 


One  Common 
Fault  of 
Beginners 


62 


METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


The  Question 
of  Bending 
the  Knees 


Parke  Says  All 
Foot-Work 
Must  Be  Done 
on  the  Toes 


OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS. 

Do  you  use  bent  knees  and  carry  weight  on  the 
toes  when  making  stroke? 

R.  N.  WILLAMS,  2ND :     I  think  so. 
T.  C.  BUNDY  :    Usually. 
K.  H.  BEHR:    Yes. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER:     No. 

R.  D.  LITTLE:     Knees  probably  somewhat  bent  as 
weight  is  carried  well  forward. 
H.  H.  HACKETT:    No. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT:     For  some  strokes  bent  knees,  as 
volleying  and  half-volleying;  on  toes  when  serving  and 
receiving. 

J.  C.  PARKE  :     Knees  straight  but  not  stiff.    All  foot- 
work must  be  done  on  toes. 

C.  P.  DIXON  :    Yes. 

R.  L.  MURRAY  :     Yes,  decidedly. 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :    Yes. 
W.  M.  WASHBURN:    Yes. 
ELIA  FOTTRELL:    Yes. 

CLARENCE  HOBART:     Not  consciously. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST  :     Not  particularly. 
J.  R.  STRACHAN  :     I  think  so. 

C.  R.  GARDNER:     Yes. 

A.  S.  DABNEY:     Not  always.    When  volleying  low 
balls,  yes.    Not  always  on  ground  strokes. 
G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :     I  think  so. 

F.  C.  INMAN:     I  do  in  preparing  for  stroke — but 
straighten  and  take  firm  stand  when  hitting. 

W.  F.  JOHNSON  :     Bent  knees  and  carry  weight  on 
ball  of  foot. 

N.  W.  NILES:    Yes. 
T.  R.  PELL:    No. 


FOOTWORK 


63 


ROBERT  LEROY:  My  knees  are  somewhat  bent.  My 
weight  shifts  as  I  hit,  forehand,  from  right  foot  to  left, 
backhand,  vice  versa.  This  is  a  very  marked  characteris- 
tic of  my  forehand  stroke,  and  gives  it  great  force  with- 
out much  muscle  behind  it. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR  :     Knees  slightly  bent.     Balanced  on     How  Can  a 
both  heel  and  toes.  Player  Balance 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:    Yes.  on  Heels? 

J.  J.  ARMSTRONG:  No.  According  to  position  of 
player  and  ball. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN:     No. 

W.  M.  HALL:    Yes. 

RICHARD  HARTE:    No. 

DEAN  MATHEY  :  I  think  I  do,  to  a  certain  extent  at 
least. 

R.  C.  SEAVER  :  I  do  not  bend  knees,  but  run  forward 
to  meet  ball. 

G.  C.  SHAFER  :    Yes. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL:    Yes. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY  :    Yes. 

I.  C.  WRIGHT  :     No,  but  you  should. 

Do  you  stand,  while  waiting  for  the  next  stroke, 
with  feet  parallel  with  the  net  or  diagonal? 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND :     Parallel.  Feet  Parallel 

T.  C.  BUNDY:     Quartering.  with  Net  or 

K.  H.  BEHR:     Depends  entirely  on  stroke  awaited     Diagonal? 
and  position  in  court,  at  net  one-half  diagonally. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER:     On  account  of  weak  left  ankle, 
my  weight  is  more  on  my  right  foot ;  parallel. 

R.  D.  LITTLE:  Hardly  diagonal,  but  certainly  not 
parallel. 

H.  H.  HACKETT:    Parallel. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT  :    Being  left-handed,  the  right  foot  a 
few  inches  in  advance. 

J.  C.  PARKE  :  I  never  stand  during  a  rally.  Before 
rally  commences,  my  feet  are  parallel  to  net. 


64        METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Majority  Favor 

Parallel 

Stance 


LeRoy 
Strong  on 
Foot-Work 


C.  P.  DIXON  :     Diagonal. 

R.  L.  MURRAY:     Parallel. 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :     Nearly  parallel. 

W.  M.  WASHBURN  :     Parallel. 

ELI  A  FOTTRELL:     Almost  diagonal. 

CLARENCE  HOBART:     Parallel. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST:     Parallel. 

J.  R.  STRACHAN:     Between  the  two. 
C.  R.  GARDNER  :     Depends  on  what  expecting.  Diag- 
onal ordinarily. 

A.  S.  DABNEY  :     Parallel. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :     Parallel. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :    Diagonally. 
W.  F.  JOHNSON  :     Diagonal. 
N.  W.  NILES:     Parallel. 

T.  R.  PELL  :     Parallel. 

ROBERT  LEROY:  Always  diagonal.  Before  making 
the  stroke,  I  try  to  make  sure  that,  for  forehand,  my  right 
foot  is  well  back  (from  the  net)  of  the  left  one ;  for  back- 
hand, vice  versa;  when  hitting,  I  stand  sidewise  to  the 
net. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR:  Can't  say  definitely.  Depends  on 
stroke  and  position  in  the  court.  More  likely  to  be  diag- 
onal than  parallel,  I  think. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:     Diagonal. 

J.  J.  ARMSTRONG:  You  don't  know  what  position 
you  will  be  forced  to  assume. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :     Feet  parallel. 

W.  M.  HALL  :     Usually  parallel. 

RICHARD  HARTE  :     Parallel. 

DEAN  MATHEY:  Parallel  until  I  see  whether  I  am 
to  take  a  forehand  or  backhand  stroke. 

R.  C.  SEAVER  :     Parallel. 

G.  C.  SHAFER:     Diagonal,  usually. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL:     Parallel. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY  :    Diagonal. 

I.  C.  WRIGHT:     I  have  poor  form. 

W.  C.  GRANT:     Diagonal. 


THE  SWING  AND  HITTING  THE  BALL 


65 


VI. 


THE  SWING  AND  HITTING  THE  BALL 


Six  CARDINAL  POINTS  TO  REMEMBER: 


1 — The  back  swing  should  begin  zvell  before  you 
knozv  just  where  the  ball  will  bound. 

2 — The  body  weight  must  be  shifted  from  the 
back  to  the  forward  foot  as  the  racket 
comes  forward,  and  its  momentum  added 
to  the  swing  of  the  arm. 

3 — The  follow  through  should  be  as  complete  as 
possible,  with  weight,  arm  and  body  fol- 
lowing after  the  ball. 

A — The  shoulders  must  be  turned  in  making  the 
stroke,  and  turning  the  hips  will  add  power. 

5 — Every  motion  of  arm,  racket,  and  body  should 
be  in  direct  line  with  the  ball's  night;  all 
side  motions  detract  from  the  stroke. 

6 — Keep  away  from  the  ball,  before  hitting,  both 
sidewise  and  backward,  so  that  you  can 
lean  toward  it  to  strike,  and  always  be 
moving  forward  when  you  hit  it.  Keep 
the  elbow  well  free  from  the  side. 

AFTER  the  use  of  the  feet  conies  the  use 
of  the  body  and  the  arm,  entirely  aside 
from  the  actual  making  of  the  stroke. 
Whether  you  make  a  forehand  or  backhand,  a 


Cardinal 
Points  to 
Keep  in  Mind 


Entirely  Aside 
from  Making 
the  Stroke 


66       METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Three  Distinct 
Actions  Run 
Into  One 


Starting  the 
Back-Swing 
Early 


Novices 
Find  This 
Difficult 


lift  or  a  cut  stroke,  the  general  principles  involved 
are  much  the  same,  and  a  thorough  study  of  these 
will  help  the  beginner  a  great  deal. 

Three  distinct  actions  must  be  kept  in  mind, 
although  they  frequently  all  run  into  one  with 
such  rapidity  that  it  is  hard  to  separate  them. 
First  we  have  the  back  swing  in  preparation  for 
^  the  stroke;  then  the  act  of  hitting  the  ball,  and 
finally  the  follow  through. 

A  full  and  free  back  swing  is  most  essential. 
It  is  not  necessary,  as  in  golf,  to  wrap  your  arm 
and  racket  around  behind  your  neck  in  order  to 
get  the  full  impetus  necessary  for  a  hard  drive, 
but  a  stroke  that  starts  only  a  foot  or  two  back 
of  the  point  of  impact  with  the  ball  is  unlikely 
to  have  any  great  power. 

In  coming  into  position  for  a  stroke  that  is 
made  on  the  run,  as  a  great  many  of  them  are 
during  fast  play,  the  racket  must  be  swung  back 
long  before  the  ball  is  ready  to  bound.  Uncer- 
tainty of  the  actual  point  at  which  it  will  be  met 
does  more  to  prevent  a  full  swing  than  anything 
else  with  beginners,  but  one  should  remember  that 
it  is  easier  to  correct  a  badly  aimed  shot  after  the 
racket  is  well  behind  you,  than  to  make  a  good 
stroke  without  the  necessary  back  swing. 

In  coaching  young  players,  I  have  always 
found  it  most  difficult  to  get  them  to  swing  back 
v  early  enough ;  they  seem  afraid  to  start  the  stroke 
until  they  are  sure  where  the  ball  will  come.  Yet 
there  is  no  reason  why  this  bad  tendency  cannot 
be  overcome  in  short  order. 

At  the  back  of  its  preliminary  swing  the 


THE  SWING  AND  HITTING  THE  BALL 


67 


racket  must  pause  anyway  and  lose  its  mo- 
mentum before  starting  forward,  so  that  it  can 
be  checked  for  a  slightly  longer  period  if  neces- 
sary, if  you  should  unintentionally  swing  too  early 
for  the  stroke.  It  is  far  better  to  err  on  this  side 
than  on  the  other,  so  it  is  a  safe  rule  to  keep  swing- 
ing back  earlier  until  you  find  you  must  noticeably 
check  the  racket  before  starting  the  forward  swing 
for  the  stroke. 

This  pause  at  the  end  of  the  back  swing  has  an 
inclination  to  steady  the  stroke,  but  it  can  easily 
be  exaggerated  and  it  then  has  a  tendency,  par- 
ticularly when  marked,  to  expose  to  the  opponent 
the  direction  of  the  attack.  George  Wrenn  ex- 
aggerated this  pause  until  it  became  a  distinct 
drawback  to  his  play,  while  Larned  delayed  his 
forward  swing  just  long  enough  to  steady  the 
stroke  without  exposing  direction. 

The  total  absence  of  any  pause  may  result 
in  hurrying  the  stroke  too  much  and  the  tendency 
to  "snap"  on  the  ball  which  follows  this  habit 
invariably  results  in  a  loss  of  control.  If  full 
time  is  not  allowed  and  the  forward  swing  is  hur- 
ried, the  slightest  deviation  of  the  ball  from  the 
expected  flight  will  result  in  a  bad  stroke,  as  there 
is  left  no  time  to  correct  the  swing  to  meet  this 
shift. 

At  the  end  of  the  reach  backward,  it  will  be 
noticed  that  the  arm  swings  naturally  either  up- 
ward or  sidewise  behind  you.  By  all  means,  select 
the  upward  motion.  This  keeps  the  racket  in  the 
direct  line  of  flight  and  avoids  the  side  motion 
that  is  so  apt  to  throw  off  the  accuracy  of  the 


Far  Better 
Too  Early 
Than  Too  Late 


Pause  Helps  to 
Steady  the 
Stroke 


Avoid  Side 
Motion  in 
Back-Swing 


68       METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Increasing 
the  Arc  of  the 
Arm's  Swing 


Making  the 
Actual  Stroke 


The 

All-Important 
Foil ow- 
Through 


stroke  as  well  as  the  body's  poise  during  the 
forward  stroke. 

It  is  also  well  to  increase  somewhat  the  arc 
of  this  circle  in  the  back  swing  by  turning  slightly 
with  the  shoulders  so  that  you  have  the  longest 
reach  possible  without  getting  out  of  position 
for  a  free  stroke.  The  shoulders  at  the  end  of 
the  back  swing  should  be  parallel  with  the  feet 
and  the  line  of  flight  of  the  ball.  The  weight 
of  the  body,  too,  should  be  shifted  full  on  the  back 
foot  and  in  making  a  severe  stroke,  it  should  be 
swung  back  as  far  as  it  is  possible  to  preserve 
the  balance. 

When  the  time  is  right  to  begin  the  forward 
swing,  that  is  to  make  the  stroke,  the  body  turns 
on  the  hips,  the  right  shoulder  comes  forward, 
followed  by  the  upper  arm,  and  then  the  fore- 
arm; and  finally  just  before  the  ball  is  hit,  the 
wrist  adds  the  snap  of  a  whip-lash  to  the  blow 
and  the  full  weight  of  the  body  shifts  quickly 
forward  from  the  backward  to  the  forward  foot, 
so  that  at  the  moment  of  impact  every  possible 
energy  is  concentrated  in  the  blow. 

Now  comes  the  greatest  difficulty  that  is 
found  in  the  play  of  most  players.  They  are 
inclined  to  stop  here.  The  ball  hit,  they  feel  that 
is  as  far  as  they  can  control  it,  and  they  make  no 
effort  to  follow  through,  recovering  the  balance 
as  quickly  as  possible  in  the  most  convenient  way. 

But  this  is  all  wrong.  Just  as  in  golf,  the 
follow  through  is  most  important,  and  while  it  is 
true  that  after  the  ball  has  once  left  the  racket, 
it  is  impossible  to  further  affect  its  movements, 


THE  SWING  AND  HITTING  THE  BALL 


69 


the  after  swing  of  the  player  does  affect  the  whole 
stroke  most  materially.  It  is  impossible  to  make 
a  true  stroke  without  it,  since  any  effort  to  cut 
short  the  swing  infallibly  affects  the  stroke  itself 
and  draws  the  racket  away  from  its  work  before 
its  maximum  power  has  been  exerted. 

The  racket  should  not  only  follow  the  ball 
itself  just  as  far  as  you  can  normally  reach,  but 
you  should  also  bend  the  whole  body  as  far  as  the 
balance  will  allow  to  lengthen  the  swing  of  the 
arm.  The  entire  body  should  be  turned  on  the 
hips,  the  bent  knees  allowing  it  to  move  forward 
with  the  stroke  and  extend  the  swing  of  the 
racket.  At  the  end  of  this  following  swing,  the 
body  should  turn  still  further  around,  the  should- 
ers pulling  in  the  arm  and  the  wrist  bending  to 
allow  the  racket's  impetus  to  be  checked  with  a 
short  swing  like  the  mouKnet  of  the  swordsman. 

For  the  most  exaggerated  ground  strokes, 
the  weight  of  the  body  is  thrown  so  violently  for- 
ward in  the  follow  through  that  the  balance  is 
frequently  checked  by  carrying  the  back  foot 
forward  to  a  further  advanced  position.  Indeed 
this  style  is  not  at  all  uncommon,  and  where  well 
practiced  it  almost  invariably  increases  the  body 
swing,  the  follow  through  and  the  power  of  the 
stroke.  It  is  an  excellent  habit  to  allow  the 
weight  to  draw  the  back  foot  forward  to  a  new 
position,  and  the  habit  of  taking  this  forward 
step  in  making  the  stroke  will  add  greatly  to  the 
vigor  of  the  attack. 

This  method  should  be  used  sparingly  when 
the  player  is  well  forward  in  his  court,  for  if  the 


Body  Should 
Swing  After 
the  Ball 


Forward  Step 
Will  Recover 
Balance 


Dangerous 
in  the  Front 
of  the  Court 


70       METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Every  Motion 
in  Line  with 
Ball's  Flight 


Body  Must 
Not  Bend 
Backward 


Timing  the 
Biggest  Factor 
for  Speed 


weight  is  thrown  too  far  forward  when  in  the 
volleying  position,  it  is  easy  to  lose  the  balance 
forward  and  become  exposed  to  an  overhead  at- 
tack by  a  lob  before  the  balance  can  be  recovered. 

Now,  through  all  these  three  motions  of  the 
stroke,  one  cardinal  rule  should  always  be  kept  in 
mind.  Every  motion  should  be  as  far  as  possible 
in  the  direct  line  of  the  ball's  flight ;  every  motion 
that  is  off  this  line  tends  to  lessen  or  check  the 
power  of  the  stroke  and  to  lessen  its  accuracy. 
Side  motion  of  any  kind  only  weakens  the  swing. 

It  is  not  an  uncommon  fault  among  begin- 
ners to  see  the  player  bend  his  body  backward 
away  from  the  ball,  particularly  in  making  the 
forehand  ground-stroke.  This  only  serves  to  de- 
tract from  the  body  swing  by  checking  the  for- 
ward motion  of  the  weight.  Swinging  the  racket 
across  the  face  of  the  ball  to  exaggerate  the  cut 
checks  the  forward  force  of  the  stroke,  and  some- 
times loses  more  in  speed  than  it  gains  in  the 
twist. 

Timing  the  stroke,  of  course,  is  the  biggest 
factor  in  getting  power  and  speed  in  the  ball.  All 
of  the  momentum  in  the  racket  and  arm  should 
be  at  its  maximum  at  the  exact  second  of  impact, 
and  the  added  power  of  the  body's  weight  should 
be  exerted  just  before  the  ball  is  hit  to  increase 
the  force  of  the  stroke. 

Just  as  it  weakens  a  stroke  to  bend  back- 
ward, it  adds  to  its  power  to  bend  forward  to 
meet  the  ball  as  the  blow  is  delivered.  The  posi- 
tion before  making  the  stroke,  therefore,  should 
never  be  close  to  the  ball.  Great  care  should  be 


THE  SWING  AND  HITTING  THE  BALL 


71 


taken  to  keep  away  from  it,  not  only  sidewise, 
that  is,  back  from  the  line  of  flight,  but  also  well 
behind  the  spot  at  which  you  plan  to  make  the 
stroke,  so  as  to  jump  at  the  ball  in  making  the 
stroke,  and  to  lean  against  it  hard  as  the  supreme 
effort  is  made. 

Getting  too  close  to  the  ball  either  way  in- 
variably spoils  the  stroke  by  forcing  the  weight 
backward  to  allow  room  for  the  swing,  which 
kills  the  stroke  at  once;  or  by  not  allowing  room 
for  the  forward  body  swing  in  making  the  stroke, 
which  greatly  weakens  it. 

The  feet  should  be  spread  well  apart  always 
for  a  powerful  swing,  but  it  is  possible  to  get  them 
too  far  apart.  The  effect  of  too  wide  a  stance  is 
to  limit  the  follow  through,  for  this  position  pre- 
vents the  weight  from  following  well  after  the 
ball. 

So  far  as  possible,  the  elbow  should  be  kept 
on  a  level  with  the  ball  as  it  is  struck.  For  a  very 
low  ball,  it  is  generally  necessary  to  drop  the  head 
of  the  racket  slightly  downward,  and  for  a  high 
bound  the  opposite  may  often  be  the  case,  but  it 
is  well  to  use  the  striking  arm  as  a  jointed 
rod  in  the  same  plane  that  the  head  of  the  racket 
travels. 


Keeping  Away 
from  the  Ball 


Elbow  Should 
Be  Level 
With  the  Ball 


72        METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Should  the 
Stroke  Be 
Made  with  a 
Full  Swing? 


Hobart  Thinks 
Short  Swing 
Best 


OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS. 

Do  you  customarily  take  a  full  swing,  starting 
from  as  far  back  as  possible  and  following 
through  to  the  very  end? 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND :    Yes. 
T.  C.  BUNDY  :     Try  to. 
K.  H.  BEHR:     I  think  so. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER  :    Not  necessarily. 

R.  D.  LITTLE  :  Whenever  the  stroke  is  not  too  hur- 
ried. 

H.  H.  HACKETT:    Yes. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT:    No. 

J.  C.  PARKE:  Not  too  far  back,  but  following 
through  to  end. 

C.  P.  DIXON  :    Half  swing  to  three-quarters. 
R.  L.  MURRAY  :     Not  always,  but  I  try  to. 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :    No. 

W.  M.  WASHBURN  :    Yes. 
ELI  A  FOTTRELL  :     Always  try  to. 
CLARENCE    HOBART:     Best    results    by    shortening 
back  swing. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST:     I  try  to,  except  in  volleying. 

J.  R.  STRACHAN  :  I  don't  start  from  as  far  back  as 
possible,  but  I  do  follow  through. 

C.  R.  GARDNER:     No. 

A.  S.  DABNEY  :  Not  absolutely  full.  Follow  through 
should  be  the  most  pronounced. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :     I  think  so. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :    Yes. 

W.  F.  JOHNSON  :     No,  only  a  half  swing. 
N.  W.  NILES  :     Follow  through  to  the  end  but  do  not 
start  correspondingly  far  back,  quite.    This  applies  gen- 


WILLIAM  A.  LARNED 
Perfect  End  of  a  Straight  Forehand  Drive. 

The  action  shown  in  this  snap-shot,  revealing  a  perfect  follow-through, 
could  hardly  be  surpassed.  Compare  the  freedom  and  long  sweep  of  the 
extended  arm  with  the  pictures  of  Brookes,  McLoughlin  and  other 
masters,  to  see  why  Larned  was  justly  known  as  the  best  ground-stroke 
player  in  the  world. 


Copyright  by  Undenvood  &  Underwood 


WILLIAM  M.  JOHNSTON 
Body-Swing  Increasing  the  Follow-Through. 

Here  is  a  splendid  example  of  perfect  follow-through.  Johnston  is  a 
very  small  man,  yet  drives  one  of  the  fastest  halls  seen  in  modern  tourna- 
ment play.  The  secret  of  his  success  is  well  illustrated  in  this  picture. 
.Note  the  bent  knees,  and  shoulders  turned  and  carried  forward  to  add  to 
the  length  of  the  swing. 


THE  SWING  AND  HITTING  THE  BALL 


73 


erally  speaking  to  all  but  my  volleys,  which  are  or  ought 
to  be  a  quicker  and  sharper  stroke. 

T.  R.  PELL:     Not  always. 

RORERT  LEROY:     No.     My  swing  does  not  (for  the      Checking  the 
forehand)  go  very  far  back,  but  it  is  quite  high  in  the  air     Swing  to  Make 
and  the  follow  through  is  pretty  complete,  except  when  I      the  Bal*  Dr°P 
stop  it  consciously,  in  order  to  make  the  ball  drop  very 
quickly,   as   when   passing  a   volleyer   cross-court   very 
gently. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR:     A  full  swing  usually. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:     I  think  I  do. 

J.  J.  ARMSTRONG  :    Sharp  short  swing, 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :     Yes. 

W.  M.  HALL:     Try  to. 

RICHARD  HARTE  :     No,  start  back  and  finish  well  up, 
but  the  stroke  is  not  exaggerated. 

DEAN  MATHEY  :     I  try  to  as  I  believe  this  style  to  be     Most  Players 
correct.  Favor  Full 

R.  C.  SEAVER:     Yes. 

G.  C.  SHAFER:    Yes. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL:    Yes. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY:    Yes. 

I.  C.  WRIGHT:   No. 

W.  C.  GRANT:    Yes. 


74        METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Cardinal 
Points  to 
Keep  in  Mind 


Importance  of 
the  Forehand 
Ground-Stroke 


VII. 

THE  FOREHAND  STROKE 
FOUR  CARDINAL  POINTS  TO  REMEMBER: 

1 — Learn  the  drop-stroke  and  use  it  always 
against  a  volleyer  at  the  net. 

2 — For  driving  against  a  player  in  the  back  of 
his  court,  use  a  straight  drive  or  an  under- 
cut ball. 

3 — Change  your  pace  if  necessary  to  throiv  the 
other  man  off  his  game. 

4 — Play  high  over  the  net  unless  time  is  import- 
ant, or  the  adversary  is  in  position  to  vol- 
ley; then  play  low  for  a  pass,  or  lob. 


L 


ONG  after  the  true  swing  has  been  mas- 
tered, the  actual  stroke  itself  should  be 
studied.  There  is  some  choice  in  this  mat- 
ter, and  while  a  player  may  become  a  regular  user 
of  a  certain  style  of  stroke,  his  play  will  be  the 
stronger  if  he  succeeds  in  mastering  two  or  three 
different  methods  of  hitting  the  ball  so  that  he 
may  alter  the  shot  to  meet  the  conditions  that 
confront  him. 

Fully  half  the  game  is  made  up  of  ground 
strokes  even  among  confirmed  volleyers,  and  with 
base-line  players  ninety  per  cent,  of  their  play  is 
confined  to  these  strokes.  And  of  this  share, 
from  sixty  to  eighty  per  cent,  of  the  ground 


THE  FOREHAND  STROKE 


75 


strokes  are  made  on  the  forehand  side,  since  that 
is  the  most  natural  and  the  strongest  way  to  hit 
the  ball. 

For  the  forehand  ground  stroke  then,  which 
is  what  we  have  now  under  consideration,  there 
are  three  methods  of  hitting  the  ball,  with  many 
variations  of  each.  First,  we  have  the  normal 
straight  drive,  made  with  the  racket  following  the 
ball  in  a  direct  line  as  long  as  possible  before  it 
starts  its  flight,  so  that  the  ball  receives  little  or 
no  twist  in  making  the  stroke. 

Then  we  have  the  undercut  ball  that  is  sliced 
or  "chopped"  with  a  glancing  downward 'stroke 
that  makes  it  spin  backward  on  its  own  axis,  or  in 
the  direction  opposite  to  its  flight;  and  finally, 
we  have  the  over-cut  or  forward  spinning  ball, 
that  is  made  with  what  is  commonly  known  as  the 
drop  stroke,  the  lift  stroke,  or  by  some  as  the 
"Lawford"  stroke.  Call  it  what  you  will,  this 
is  considered  by  most  authorities  as  the  most 
valuable  of  all  the  methods  of  playing  the  fore- 
hand stroke,  and  will  therefore  be  considered  first. 

Without  going  too  deeply  into  the  history  of 
this  play,  it  is  interesting  to  note  how  it  came 
to  be  called  the  Lawford  stroke.  Among  the 
very  earliest  of  the  English  experts  was  one 
player,  Henry  F.  Lawford,  who  stood  out  among 
his  contemporaries  because  of  the  force  of  his 
forehand  drive  off  the  ground.  Lawford  was  the 
first  to  put  marked  top-spin  on  the  ball  and  the 
power  and  speed  of  his  strokes  made  him  nearly 
unconquerable  when  at  his  best. 

The  original  Lawford  stroke  was  made  with 


Three  Ways  to 
Hit  the  Ball 


Under-Cut  and 

Top-Spin 

Strokes 


The  Original 

Lawford 

Stroke 


76       METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


As  the  Famous 
Englishman 
Made  It 


How  the 
American 
Drop-Stroke 
Differs 


End  of  the 
Swing  Most 
Important 


an  upward  glancing  blow,  the  racket  finishing 
above  the  head  and  right  shoulder,  and  the  ball 
receiving  a  very  sharp  top-spin  that  made  it  fly 
fast,  drop  quickly  and  shoot  from  the  ground. 
Lawford  had  many  imitators  but  few  ever  suc- 
ceeded in  getting  this  difficult  stroke  under  any 
close  control.  Its  popularity  died  out  for  a  time 
when  the  English  expert  retired  from  competi- 
tion, only  to  be  revived  again  in  America  many 
years  later,  or  at  least  the  name  resurrected  and 
tacked  onto  a  similar  lifting  drive  with  top-spin. 

The  American  drop  stroke  differs  from  the 
original  Lawford  stroke  chiefly  in  that  the  wrist 
is  used  a  good  deal  more  than  with  the  original, 
and  the  body  weight  is  carried  more  into  the 
stroke  so  that  the  follow  through  is  more  com- 
plete. The  racket  sweeps  more  to  the  left  at  the 
end  of  the  stroke,  and  more  often  finishes  over  the 
left  shoulder  when  properly  played.  But  there 
are  nearly  as  many  variations  of  this  drop  stroke 
in  use  in  America  to-day  as  there  are  players  us- 
ing it — hardly  two  are  the  same  in  detail. 

The  stroke  can  be  made  with  a  full  back- 
swing  and  follow  through,  or  each  can  be  cut 
off  nearly  half  its  length,  although  there  is  always 
a  loss  in  accuracy  when  the  follow  through  is 
shortened.  The  racket  sometimes  finishes  far  out 
to  the  left  and  is  drawn  up  slightly  at  the  end  of  its 
swing,  sometimes  over  the  left  shoulder,  which  is 
the  safest  ending  for  the  stroke,  and  the  arc  of 
the  swing  is  sometimes  so  shortened  and  exag- 
gerated that  the  racket  finishes  in  front  of  the 
face  or  over  the  head  and  right  shoulder. 


THE  FOREHAND  STROKE 


77 


These  extreme  drop  strokes,  as  a  rule,  are 
not  reliable.  They  require  such  constant  prac- 
tice and  depend  on  such  a  perfect  adjustment  of 
the  angle  of  the  short  impact  for  a  true  flight  that 
they  entail  too  large  a  percentage  of  error  to  be 
counted  on.  Besides,  the  exaggerated  "lift"  in 
the  stroke  gives  the  ball  a  very  rapid  spin  that 
brings  a  sharp  drop,  the  blow  on  the  ground 
checks  the  ball,  and  its  bound  is  weakened,  offer- 
ing an  easy  mark  for  the  back-court  player  if  he 
gives  the  ball  plenty  of  room  and  returns  it  after 
a  full  bound. 

In  addition  to  this,  the  making  of  this  exag- 
gerated stroke  itself  pumps  the  player  by  the  very 
violence  of  the  arm's  swing,  and  exhausts  him 
without  giving  an  adequate  return  for  the  effort 
it  demands.  I  have  seen  many  a  young  player 
who  worshipped  this  so-called  Lawford  stroke, 
exhaust  himself  in  a  short  match  and  finally  fall 
easy  prey  to  an  experienced  adversary  who  stayed 
back  in  his  court  and  fed  the  balls  back  to  him 
until  he  tired  himself  out  trying  to  kill  with  these 
terrific  drives. 

The  most  useful  form  of  the  top-spinning 
stroke  requires  a  medium  back  swing,  not  a  very 
long  one,  a  sweeping  impact  rather  than  a  sharp 
glancing  blow,  and  a  gradual  upturn  at  the  last 
end  of  the  stroke  to  put  the  spin  on  the  ball  after 
it  has  received  plenty  of  power  for  speed  and 
enough  follow  through  for  guidance.  The  Eng- 
lish players,  some  of  them,  have  a  way  of  using 
top-spin  at  the  last  end  of  their  strokes  that  does 
not  give  so  pronounced  a  drop  as  does  the  glanc- 


Extreme 
Drop-Strokes 
Not  Reliable 


Violence 
Exhausts 
the  Player 


Best  Way 
of  Playing 
This  Strokt 


78        METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


English 
Method  of 
Putting  on 
Twist 


Diagrams 
Show  Both 
Methods 


ing  blow,  but  has  the  virtue  of  being  much  better 
controlled. 

This  top-spin  is  put  on  entirely  with  a  turn 
of  the  wrist  just  before  the  racket  leaves  the  ball. 


THE    AMERICAN 
DROP    STROKE 


SWING   OP   RACKET 
SWING    OF   RACKET 

[•-€! 

FLIGHT  OF    BALL 

TH£     ENGLISH     MET*HOD  OF  PRODUCING    TOP-SPIN 

7 

'  .''&&\l         * 

ruOHTc,^  «po* 

///'**  THE    AMERICAN 

^~«*f/  CHOP    STROKE 

rucMT  or  BALL 

SWINO_OP^  RACKET 

THE      ENGLISH     METHOD    OF    MAKING    UNDER-CUT 

The  wrist  turns  the  racket  over  it  and  the  spin  is 
given  from  pressure  on  top  of  the  ball,  rather  than 
from  behind  it  as  with  the  style  that  is  more 


THE  FOREHAND  STROKE 


79 


familiar  in  America.  In  either  case,  the  rough 
strings  grip  the  surface  of  the  ball  and  compel 
it  to  revolve  rapidly  on  its  own  axis.  It  is  appar- 
ent that  this  twisting  pressure  can  be  exerted 
with  more  power  when  the  racket  is  behind  the 
ball  than  when  above  it  and  the  result  is  shown 
in  the  faster  rotation  generally  gained  by  the 
American  drop  stroke  than  the  English  type. 

The  variations  of  the  forehand  drop  stroke 
are  almost  unlimited  and  the  best  types  show  the 
most  valuable  stroke  of  the  game.  But  this  stroke 
is  useful  only  in  certain  circumstances  and  the 
top-spin  hurts  rather  than  helps  the  play  under 
other  conditions.  With  an  opponent  at  the  net, 
there  is  no  question  that  it  is  the  best  of  all  attacks. 

A  top-spinning  ball  is  the  most  difficult  of  all 
returns  to  volley;  firstly,  because  it  drops  so  soon 
after  crossing  the  net,  and  must  be  lifted  back 
over  again;  and,  secondly,  because  it  glances  up- 
ward from  the  volleyer's  racket  and  slows  up  his 
volley  in  consequence.  To  offset  this,  it  is  neces- 
sary for  him  to  meet  the  ball  more  sharply  and 
slightly  more  over  it  to  check  the  top-spin. 

In  addition  to  this,  the  drop  stroke  carries 
great  speed  in  the  early  part  of  its  flight.  Its 
initial  velocity  is  greater  than  any  other  stroke,  as 
the  drop  can  be  relied  on  to  shorten  its  flight  and 
bring  it  into  court,  and  until  the  top-spin  begins 
to  take  effect,  this  ball  travels  very  fast  indeed. 
So  the  volleyer  has  speed,  dropping  trajectory 
and  troublesome  rotation  all  to  contend  with  if  he 
tries  to  volley  a  top-spinning  ball.  Moral :  Learn 


Rough  Strings 
Grip   Ball's 
Surface 


Top-Spin 
Most    Useful 
Against  a 
V  olleyer 


Net  Player 
Always 
Troubled  by  It 


80 


METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Ineffective 
Against 
Opponent  at 
Base-Line 


Alexander's 
Style  the 
Best  Model 


LeRoy's 
Short  Swing 
Conceals 
Direction 


this  stroke  and  use  it  every  time  you  try  to  pass 
a  volleyer  at  the  net. 

However,  the  same  reasoning  that  makes  this 
stroke  so  valuable  against  a  volleyer,  destroys  its 
usefulness  against  a  base-line  player.  After  the 
drop,  the  top-spinning  ball  loses  its  forward  speed 
very  rapidly,  and  when  it  strikes  the  ground  at 
an  unnaturally  sharp  angle,  more  of  its  life  is 
crushed  out.  The  spin  makes  it  shoot  from  the 
bound  but  the  impact  of  the  ball  after  a  deep 
bound  is  comparatively  weak  and  if  the  opponent 
will  stay  back  well  behind  his  base-line,  he  will 
generally  find  little  difficulty  in  handling  the  lift- 
ing drive. 

Perhaps  the  best  model  we  have  for  this 
stroke  is  Alexander,  and  his  use  of  top-spin  has 
been  very  effective.  He  combines  a  very  full 
swing  and  good  follow  through  with  plenty  of 
lift  so  that  his  drives  are  very  hard  to  volley.  I 
do  not  think  I  ever  met  a  player  whose  return  of 
the  service  was  more  difficult  to  volley  than  Alex- 
ander when  he  got  the  ball  on  his  forehand.  It 
does  not  pass  so  often  as  others  but  its  speed 
and  twist  make  it  very  hard  to  return  aggres- 
sively. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  drop  stroke  players 
with  a  shorter  back  swing,  like  LeRoy  and  the  late 
Kriegh  Collins,  conceal  their  direction  much  bet- 
ter. LeRoy  comes  up  on  the  ball  so  quickly  and  with 
so  little  preliminary  swing  that  he  is  able  to  whip 
it  across  the  court  and  get  it  out  of  reach  almost 
before  you  can  realize  its  direction.  Williams 
also  uses  the  short  back  swing  in  his  forehand 


THE  FOREHAND  STROKE 


81 


strokes,  but  he  tops  less  than  LeRoy  and  many 
others,  and  gets  better  length  and  speed  in  con- 
sequence. 

So,  against  a  back-court  player,  one  finds  the 
top-spin  a  distinct  handicap  instead  of  an  advan- 
tage, and  he  has  the  choice  of  the  straight  driving 
stroke  or  the  under-cut  ball.  Regarding  the  chop 
stroke,  it  might  be  well  to  say  that  nearly  every 
player  who  has  mastered  the  full  use  of  this  stroke 
has  depended  on  it  entirely,  and  it  is  doubly  diffi- 
cult to  control  both  the  under-cut  and  the  over- 
spinning  strokes.  The  swings  are  so  dissimilar 
that  it  is  almost  impossible  to  keep  in  close  touch 
with  both.  It  is  easier  to  change  either  cut 
when  needed  for  variety  to  a  straight  drive,  which 
can  be  combined  with  the  twist  strokes  much  more 
successfully  than  they  with  each  other. 

The  under-cut  drive,  or  slice,  or  chop  stroke, 
as  it  is  most  often  known,  has  also  its  virtues  as 
well  as  its  drawbacks,  just  like  its  brother. 
Against  the  man  at  the  net  it  is  a  positive  handi- 
cap, for  no  ball  is  easier  to  volley  than  one  that  is 
under-cut  and  no  ball  is  so  difficult  to  pass  with  as 
one  of  these  chop  strokes.  The  back-spin  keeps 
the  ball  up  longer  in  the  air,  slows  up  its  flight, 
making  it  higher  and  easier  to  reach  than  any 
other  stroke,  while  the  rotation  tends  to  make 
it  come  away  from  the  volleyer's  racket  with  in- 
creased speed  and  crispness. 

Against  the  base-line  player,  on  the  other 
hand,  it  is  correspondingly  hard  to  handle.  The 
spin  makes  the  ball  catch  on  the  ground  and  rise 
to  the  bound  at  a  low,  unnatural  angle.  After 


Difficult  to 
Play  Both 
Twists 


Under-Cut 
Reverses  the 
Points  in  Its 
Favor 


Hard  to 
Handle  from 
the  Bound 


82       METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


English  Use 
of  the  Wrist 


W.  Johnson 
Developed 
Long  Swing 
for  Under-Cut 


Seals  Wright's 
Skill  with 
the  Chop 


the  bound,  the  ball  hangs  lifeless  in  the  air,  lack- 
ing the  needed  impact  from  which  to  get  away  a 
good  drive.  What  still  remains  of  its  back-spin 
also  tends  to  draw  it  downward  from  the  player's 
racket,  and  one  is  never  sure  how  much  must  be 
allowed  for  this,  so  that  the  return  must  be  lifted 
a  little  higher  over  the  net  for  safety  or  another 
under-cut  return  made  from  it  to  reverse  the  rota- 
tion of  the  ball. 

The  chop  stroke  is  started  higher  in  the  back 
swing  than  any  other  and  the  ball  met  with  a 
downward  glancing  blow  that  makes  the  end  of 
the  swing  finish  with  the  racket  in  front  of  the 
left  knee.  As  in  the  drop  stroke,  the  English  vary 
this  stroke  somewhat  in  a  similar  manner,  giving 
the  same  full  follow  through  and  imparting  the 
spin  to  the  ball  by  turning  the  wrist  and  drawing 
the  racket  under  the  ball  just  before  it  leaves  the 
strings. 

Wallace  Johnson  has  cultivated  an  excep- 
tionally long  swing  for  the  under-cut  stroke  and 
he  is  perhaps  the  best  exponent  of  this  type  we 
have,  but  the  shot  is  sometimes  cut  off  to  such  an 
extreme  that  its  name  of  "chop  stroke"  well  de- 
scribes the  motion  which  resembles  the  swing  of 
a  hatchet  in  chopping  wood.  Bundy  also  makes 
good  use  of  the  undercut,  and  he  crouches  even 
more  than  Johnson  in  making  the  stroke.  His 
ball  lacks  the  speed  of  the  Philadelphia's  also. 

Beals  Wright,  who  became  so  famous  for  his 
clever  play  in  many  international  matches,  devel- 
oped the  chop  stroke  to  its  highest  possibilities, 
and  it  was  truly  remarkable  the  accuracy  and  at- 


THE  FOREHAND  STROKE 


tacking  power  he  secured  with  it.  More  than 
any  other,  he  succeeded  in  passing  an  opponent  at 
the  net  by  slowing  up  his  chop  strokes  and  making 
them  drop  from  sheer  lack  of  speed  despite  the 
back-spin.  Little  calls  this  the  "fadeaway"  shot. 
Wright's  greatest  success  with  the  stroke,  how- 
ever, depended  on  an  exceptional  ability  to  use  the 
lob  for  attack.  He  drove  his  adversaries  back 
from  the  net  by  lobbing  and  then  chopped  at  their 
feet. 

Among  young  players,  this  chop-stroke  is 
often  cut  off  so  short  that  it  becomes  little  more 
than  a  stab  or  a  jab  of  the  racket,  and  then  the 
stroke  has  lost  all  its  value,  for  it  lacks  the  speed 
to  make  it  effective.  Such  shots  with  the  half- 
arm  push  or  "pat"  are  the  weakest  of  all  attempts 
at  the  game,  and  generally  come  from  the  mental 
attitude  of  trying  to  fight  the  ball  away  from  you, 
rather  than  directing  the  returns  with  any  intel- 
ligence. Snapping  the  racket  back  with  a  late, 
jerky  back-swing  and  no  pause  before  the  stroke, 
is  nearly  as  bad  as  the  absence  of  swing,  and 
brings  even  more  errors. 

For  pure  driving  purposes,  probably  the 
straight  stroke  without  any  marked  twist  is  the 
most  reliable.  As  played  by  Larned,  this  stroke 
became  a  powerful  weapon  of  attack  and  its 
strong  flight  and  deep  bound  kept  his  opponent 
well  out  of  court  at  nearly  all  times,  unless  they 
risked  the  difficult  run  to  the  net.  In  making 
this  stroke,  a  long  back  swing  is  even  more  valu- 
able than  for  either  of  the  others,  and  it  is  often 
wise  to  pause  slightly  at  the  end  of  the  back 


Half-Arm 
Jabs  and 
Push  Strokes 


Straight  Stroke 
the  Best  for 
Driving 


84       METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Little  Change 
Needed  to 
Get  the  Drop 


Straight  and 
Drop-Strokes 
Work  Well 
Together 


Chances  of 
Getting  to 
the  Net 


swing  before  striking.  This  pause  has  a  tendency 
to  steady  the  aim  of  the  player  and  eliminate  the 
danger  of  "snapping"  on  the  ball  with  a  jerky 
back  swing  that  throws  the  direction  off. 

The  ball  is  met  truly  in  the  center  of  the 
racket  and  followed  as  long  and  as  far  forward 
as  it  is  possible  to  reach.  More  than  in  any  other 
stroke,  the  follow  through  counts  here.  The 
shoulders  should  be  thrown  forward  after  the  ball 
rather  than  turned  or  drawn  upward  as  in  com- 
pleting the  drop  stroke  and  the  racket  should  fin- 
ish far  out  in  front  and  perhaps  a  little  over  to  the 
left. 

This  is  the  most  valuable  stroke  to  vary  with 
the  drop-stroke,  and  the  motions  are  so  nearly 
alike  that  it  is  only  necessary  to  straighten  up  a 
little  with  the  shoulders  at  the  end  of  the  stroke, 
draw  the  racket  up  and  finish  the  swing  a  trifle 
further  to  the  left,  to  give  the  ball  a  little  top- 
spin.  This  spin  can  be  increased  as  much  as  the  cir- 
cumstances demand  by  simply  increasing  the 
glancing  angle  of  the  blow  or  turning  the  wrist 
more  in  the  English  style  to  give  the  ball  the  for- 
ward rotation.  When  the  other  man  comes  to 
the  net,  and  a  passing  stroke  is  needed,  then  the 
drop  can  easily  be  put  on  the  ball  without  entirely 
changing  the  manner  of  striking,  which  would 
warn  the  adversary  what  to  look  for. 

In  getting  to  the  net,  from  a  position  with 
both  players  back  in  their  courts,  the  cut  stroke 
is  distinctly  better  than  either  of  the  others,  but 
the  straight-hit  ball  is  better  than  the  drop  stroke. 
One  distinct  advantage  of  the  under-cut  ball  for 


THE  FOREHAND  STROKE 


85 


this  purpose  is  that  it  travels  slower  through  the 
air  allowing  more  time  for  the  dangerous  run 
from  the  base-line  to  the  volleying  position,  which 
reverses  the  action  of  the  drop  stroke. 

The  direction  of  either  stroke  toward  the 
centre  of  the  court  for  the  effort  to  get  into  the 
volleying  position  is  as  important  as  the  stroke 
itself,  but  this  phase  of  the  play  will  be  treated 
later  under  the  head  of  position  play. 

The  use  of  the  "forcing  stroke/'  that  is,  the 
stroke  that  is  intended  to  get  the  opponent  into 
difficulties  that  will  force  him  to  give  you  a  weak 
ball  for  killing  purposes,  rather  than  a  stroke  that 
is  intended  to  win  outright,  is  also  a  matter  of 
tactics,  rather  than  pure  strokes,  but  the  method 
of  making  it  must  be  treated  here. 

Larned,  perhaps,  was  the  most  expert  player 
in  making  these  strokes  before  McLoughlin  ap- 
peared on  the  horizon,  and  there  are  many  who 
still  believe  that  he  was  better  in  this  play  than 
the  Californian  who  succeeded  him  to  the  cham- 
pionship crown.  Larned  had  a  way  with  him 
that  was  well-nigh  irresistible,  when  he  wanted 
to  get  his  opponent  into  difficulties.  He  drove  his 
forehand  stroke  very  high  over  the  net  and  very 
deep  into  the  court  with  a  peculiar  little  jump  to  it 
that  kept  pushing  his  man  back  behind  his  court 
in  a  most  aggressive  way.  His  opponent  seemed 
to  be  always  playing  up-hill. 

For  pure  driving,  the  ball  should  be  played 
high  and  deep,  and  for  the  forcing  stroke,  unless 
time  is  an  important  consideration  to  catch  the 
opponent  out  of  position,  it  should  still  be  kept 


Use  of  the 

Forcing 

Stroke 


Larned's  Skill 
at  This  Play 


A  High, 
Deep  Drive 
Often  Best 


86       METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


When  to  Use 
the  Fast, 
Low  Shot 


Speed  and 
Drop  Needed 
for  Small 
Openings 


Changing  the 
Pace  a 
Puzzling 
Defence 


high  and  the  bound  be  made  as  deep  as  possible 
to  get  the  opponent  further  into  difficulties. 

It  is  only  when  the  adversary  threatens  a  net 
attack,  or  is  actually  in  place  at  the  net,  that  the 
risk  of  the  low  passing  shot  should  be  taken,  for 
then  the  risk  is  worth  the  effort,  and  then  too, 
shortness  rather  than  length  is  what  is  required. 
The  most  important  consideration  is  to  keep  the 
ball  low  and  to  make  it  drop  still  lower  the  instant 
it  has  crossed  the  net.  Often  it  will  be  found 
better  to  slow  down  the  stroke  so  that  it  will  drop 
faster,  particularly  on  the  cross-court  passes. 

With  an  opponent  off  his  balance,  or  when 
playing  for  a  narrow  opening  down  the  alley, 
speed  is  often  necessary  to  keep  the  other  man 
from  reaching  the  ball,  but  even  then  a  little  top- 
spin  or  over-twist  will  help  to  bring  the  ball  down 
into  the  court  and  also  make  it  fly  faster  through 
the  air. 

Changing  the  pace  is  perhaps  the  most  puz- 
zling of  all  variations  of  stroke  play,  and  it  can 
be  done  with  either  the  ground  stroke  or  the 
volley.  One's  opponent  gets  accustomed  to  re- 
ceiving the  balls  from  you  with  a  certain  amount 
of  speed  and  impact,  and  he  guages  his  own 
strokes  accordingly.  To  alter  this  materially  is 
generally  certain  to  throw  him  off  his  usual  stroke 
and  to  a  certain  extent  upset  his  accuracy  and 
control.  A  fast  drive  followed  by  a  soft  shot  that 
has  half  the  impact  in  it  will  make  it  more  diffi- 
cult for  him  to  maintain  a  severe  attack.  This  is 
a  most  valuable  point  in  defence. 

Correspondingly,  the  same  play  can  be  used 


THE  FOREHAND  STROKE 


87 


for  attack,  but  in  this  case  it  takes  the  form  of 
variations  in  the  length  of  your  returns.  A  deep 
ball  followed  by  a  short  ball  will  often  prove  a 
very  dangerous  attack.  The  antagonist  is  drawn 
in  close  to  the  net,  and  then  passed  before  he  can 
get  back  into  position  for  the  next  shot,  or  he  is 
driven  back  behind  his  base-line  and  then  given 
a  short  ball  that  pitches  in  front  of  the  service 
line.  This  keeps  him  running  forward  and  back, 
in  addition  to  the  sidewise  work,  and  the  back- 
ward and  forward  running  will  be  found  quite 
as  tiring  and  much  more  disconcerting  than  the 
side-to-side  hustling. 


Varying  the 
Length  for 
Attack 


88       METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS: 


Top-Spin, 
Under-Cut 
or  Straight 
Stroke? 


Most  Experts 

Favor 

Top-Spin 


Do  you  think  the  top-spin,  under-cut  or  straight 
stroke  without  twist  the  best  attack  ? 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND:     Straight  stroke. 

T.  C.  BUNDY  :  Am  essentially  a  "chop  stroke"  player 
but  advise  top-spin  or  straight  stroke  as  capable  of  high- 
est development. 

K.  H.  BEHR  :  The  last  for  back-court  play ;  ,the  first 
against  a  net  attack.  I  employ  both  about  equally,  in 
doubles  the  former  entirely. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER  :    Great  believer  in  top-spin.    One 
should  be  able  to  use  a  variation  at  times. 

R.  D.  LITTLE:     Top-spin,  moderately  applied. 
H.  H.  HACKETT:    Straight  stroke  in  singles.    Top- 
spin  in  doubles. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT  :     For  the  present  game,  the  top-spin 
is  best  as  it  is  harder  to  volley.    The  straight  stroke  is  best 
for  a  deep  shot  as  the  bound  is  lower,  and  has  more  speed. 

J.  C.  PARKE:  For  attack,  the  straight  stroke,  with 
just  a  suspicion  of  top-spin  for  control,  seems  to  me  to 
be  the  infinitely  more  serviceable;  but  in  defence,  it  de- 
pends upon  the  nature  of  the  attack,  as  top-spin  is  very 
useful  against  a  volleyer,  but  equally  useless  against  a 
base-liner. 

C.  P.  DIXON  :     Top-spin  or  straight  stroke ;  the  for- 
mer is  undoubtedly  the  best  attack  on  a  hard  or  fast 
court. 

R.  L.  MURRAY  :  Top-spin  allows  of  more  control  as 
it  brings  the  ball  down  into  the  court. 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :     I  consider  the  top-spin  drive  the 
best  attack,  because  it  increases  steadiness  and  because 
with  it  the  ball  can  be  hit  harder  without  going  out  than 
with  any  other  stroke. 


THE  FOREHAND  STROKE 


89 


W.  M.  WASHBURN  :  On  grass,  the  straight  stroke 
is  always  useful.  The  topped  drive  is  best  against  a 
net  player,  the  cut  against  a  back-court  player.  A  topped 
or  cut  stroke  is  as  good  on  dirt  as  on  grass. 

ELI  A  FOTTRELL:  A  little  top-spin  (enough  to  keep 
the  ball  in  court).  More  top-spin  when  the  opponent  is 
at  the  net. 

CLARENCE  HOBART  :  Straight  strokes  with  slight  top 
for  passing  strokes. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST:     Straight  stroke  with  a  roll  or 
top. 

is  J.  R.  STRACHAN:  With  new  balls  I  use  a  straight 
^stroke  and  when  they  become  a  little  worn  I  use  the  top- 
spin  as  a  rule. 

C.  R.  GARDNER:  Depends  on  the  man  you  attack. 
The  fastest  and  most  effective  strokes  so  far  as  pace  goes 
are  doubtless  hit  without  twist.  Sometimes  one  has  to  put 
top-spin  on  the  ball  to  make  it  drop  or  stay  in  court. 

A.  S.  DABNEY:  Top-spin.  Straight  stroke  good  if 
ball  is  fairly  high  up.  But  straight  stroke  has  a  spin,  i.  e., 
it  slides  off  the  end  of  the  racket  and  has  a  side  spin.  Ex- 
ample— Behr. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.:  It  depends  on  the  person's 
game. 

F.  C.  IN  MAN  :    Top-spin.    On  account  of  better  con- 
trol. 

W.  F.  JOHNSON  :     The  under-cut  if  accurate. 

N.  W.  NILES:  Generally  speaking  "top-spin" 
should  be  more  decided  on  dirt  than  grass.  On  grass,  I 
think  the  best  ground-strokes  are  almost  without  twist, 
just  a  tendency  of  top-spin;  i.  e.,  Williams's  rather  than 
McLoughlin's  forehand. 

T.  R.  PELL  :  My  forehand  is  among  the  missing,  but 
I  think  straight  stroke  best. 

ROBERT  LEROY:  Top-spin.  As  much  like  S.  H. 
Smith's  forehand  stroke  as  possible.  The  face  of  the 
racket  should  begin  the  swing  almost  exactly  at  right 
angles  to  the  ground,  but  before,  or  really  as  the  ball  is 


Washbur* 

Prefers 
Straight 
Stroke  on 
Grass 


Depends  on  the 
Opponent, 
Gardner 
Thinks 


For  Grass, 
Williams'* 
Style 

Preferred  to 
McLoughlin's 


90        METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


LeRoy's 
Opinion 
Instructive 


Top-Spin  Made 
Quickly,  More 
Deceptive  than 
When  Made 
Slow 


Gives  Instant's 
Advantage  by 
Concealing 
Direction 


hit,  the  elbow  should  be  raised  and  the  face  of  the  racket 
should  turn  slightly  on  top  of  the  ball.  For  a  long  stroke 
the  top  should  not  be  very  marked,  but  for  a  short  stroke, 
say  a  diagonal  cross-court  close  to  the  net,  the  top  should 
be  very  emphatic.  Topping  the  ball  at  the  last  minute  has, 
in  addition  to  the  other  advantages  better  known,  one 
which  is  not  often  mentioned :  it  conceals  direction  better 
than  any  other  stroke.  I  have  observed  this  in  many  play- 
ers, notably  the  late  Kriegh  Collins  (in  his  doubles  return 
of  the  service,  which  he  made  into  an  aggressive  attack, 
both  forehand  and  backhand),  S.  H.  Smith,  and  occasion- 
ally N.  E.  Brookes,  when  he  tops  his  forehand.  Of  the 
newer  players,  R.  N.  Williams's  forehand  has  almost  as 
much  top  as  Collins's  or  Smith's,  and  the  results  are  re- 
markable. His  direction  is  unrevealed  until  the  very  mo- 
ment of  impact  or  even  later. 

There  is  one  thing  about  a  top-spin  for  attack  that  is 
not  often  mentioned,  and  that  is  that  the  top  forehand 
stroke  if  made  quickly  is  more  effective  than  if  it  takes 
time  to  make.  Compare  Clarence  Hobart's  and  Williams's 
forehands.  The  direction  of  Hobart's  stroke  was  always 
easy  to  foresee,  and  he  had  to  be  pretty  well  set  in  position 
to  make  it  well.  Williams,  on  the  other  hand,  makes  his 
stroke  on  the  spur  of  the  moment,  and  you  cannot  tell 
where  it  is  going;  it  drops  like  a  shot,  making  it  difficult 
to  return,  besides  which  Williams  can  make  it  whether  he 
is  in  position  or  not,  in  spite  of  his  having  very  poor  foot- 
work. The  same  is  true  of  Brookes,  but  in  his  case  his 
foot-work,  instead  of  being  a  handicap  to  him,  is  a  help. 

If  you  will  pardon  my  alluding  to  my  own  single  char- 
acteristic stroke,  I  find  that  making  the  forehand  stroke 
quickly  and  with  a  severe  top  to  it  enables  me  to  make 
a  fair  attack  and  a  very  formidable  and  aggressive  de- 
fence out  of  my  ground-strokes,  and  this  from  any  posi- 
tion in  the  court,  almost  entirely  unaided  by  good  volley- 
ing, and  reinforced  by  a  very  mediocre  backhand  and  very 
bad  foot-work.  I  almost  always  have  an  instant's 
advantage  of  the  other  man,  as  my  stroke  reaches  him 


THE  FOREHAND  STROKE 


91 


before  he  expects  it  and  the  closer  he  is  to  the  net  the 
more  help  this  is  to  me.  So  far  as  I  can  see,  it  is  possible 
to  make  a  forehand  stroke  topped  severely  the  prelimin- 
ary to  an  immediate  attack  at  the  net,  just  as  well  as  if 
the  stroke  were  made  without  top-spin.  I  have  seen 
Brookes  do  this  often. 

I  use  a  moderate  top-spin  backhand  but  do  not  know 
enough  about  the  stroke  to  discuss  it. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR:     Top-spin. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:  I  believe  it  depends  entirely  on 
what  one  wants  to  do.  Ordinarily  I  believe  a  side-spin  as 
Little  plays  to  be  most  effective. 

J.  J.  ARMSTRONG:  To  pass  a  man  standing  close  to 
net,  use  top-spin;  for  back-court  manoeuvering,  use 
straight  stroke. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :    Top-spin 

W.  M.  HALL:  Depends  on  style  of  game  against 
you.  Can't  give  a  general  rule. 

RICHARD  HARTE:     Slight  top. 

DEAN  MATHEY  :  I  believe  each  stroke  has  its  advan- 
tages and  personally  use  a  more  or  less  straight  stroke. 

R.  C.  SEAVER:  I  think  the  under-cut  stroke  very 
effective  and  the  hardest  to  play  against,  but  for  a  man 
dependent  on  covering  a  lot  of  ground,  the  straight  swift 
stroke  is  best  if  well  placed. 

G.  C.  SHAFER:  Top-spin  for  attack,  chops  and 
straight  stroke  on  defense. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL:     A  little  top-spin. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY  :  Straight  stroke  seems  to  me  to  be 
by  all  odds  the  most  effective. 

I.  C.  WRIGHT:     Straight  stroke  without  twist. 

W.  C.  GRANT:  For  deep  strokes,  top-spin.  For 
volleying  above  height  of  net,  and  to  sides  of  court,  chop. 


Little's  Style 
Recommended 


Seaver  Favors 
Straight  Strokr 


92       METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


VIII. 


THE  BACKHAND  STROKE 


Cardinal 
Points  to 
Keep  in  Mind 


Backhand 
Position  Is 
Awkward 


FOUR  CARDINAL  POINTS  TO  REMEMBER: 

1 — Use  the  thumb  along  the  handle  to  support  the 
grip. 

2 — Turn  squarely  toward  the  ball  and  keep  your 
right  foot  and  right  shoulder  (for  right- 
handed  players)  toward  the  direction  the 
ball  is  to  go. 

3 — Finish  with  the  racket  and  arm  as  far  ahead 
in  the  line  with  the  ball  as  possible. 

4 — Do  not  run  around  the  ball  to  avoid  backhand 
strokes;  play  the  right  stroke  and  build  up 
your  weakness. 

THE   BACKHAND   ground-stroke   differs 
from  the  forehand  stroke  radically  because 
of  the  position  required  of  the  body  in 
making  it,  and  the  awkwardness  of  the  arm-swing 
that  results.     In  forehand  play,  the  back  swing 
is  clear  of  the  body  and  the  turn  as  the  blow  is 
delivered  keeps  the  arm  free,  but  in  backhand 
play  the  arm  must  swing  across  the  body,  and 
the  pushing  muscles  of  the  upper  arm  rather  than 
those  that  pull  are  used  in  making  the  stroke. 

The  grip  of  the  hand  too  allows  all  the  power 
to  be  behind  the  racket  for  a  forehand  shot,  while 


Copyright J  by    Underwood    &    Underwood 


HAROLD  H.  HACKETT 
A  Fine  Example  of  Free  Body  Action  in  Backhand  Play. 

Study  this  splendid  illustration  of  perfect  form  in  backhand  play.     Note 

the  position  of  the  feet  and  the  freedom  of  the  arm,  with  the  body  and 

shoulders  turned  full  toward  the  ball.     This  shows  the  typical  American 

backhand  with  the  elbow  high. 


R.  XORRIS  WILLIAMS,  20 

End  of  the  Champion's  Backhand  Stroke. 

Note  the  bevel  of  the  racket's  head,  which  has  passed  under  the  ball; 
giving  it  a  back-spin.  Williams  uses  the  low  elbow  of  the  English  style, 
depending  more  on  the  twist  of  his  shoulders  for  body-swing  than  on 
following  the  ball.  Compare  the  position  of  the  racket  with  Pell's  at 
the  end  of  a  similar  stroke,  and  the  difference  between  passing  over  the 
ball  and  under  it  will  be  apparent. 


THE  BACKHAND  STROKE 


93 


on  the  other  side  the  necessary  grip  forces  the 
hand  above,  and  in  the  English  style,  a  little  ahead 
of  the  racket,  giving  the  effort  more  of  a  pull 
than  a  push.  The  shoulder  is  seldom  behind  the 
ball  and  the  turning  of  the  body  for  the  follow 
through  is  never  so  pronounced  in  backhand 
play,  because  the  striking  arm  is  already  far 
advanced  when  the  stroke  begins  and  it  is  diffi- 
cult to  shift  so  that  the  ball  can  be  followed  as 
long  as  in  forehand  play. 

Among  many  of  the  English  players,  the 
body  is  turned  at  the  end  of  the  stroke  so  that  it 
nearly  faces  the  flight  of  the  ball,  but  this  side 
motion  tends  to  make  the  racket  travel  across  the 
ball  in  striking,  rather  than  after  it.  R.  F.  Doherty 
was  a  notable  example  of  this  style,  and  the  pic- 
ture of  Oscar  Kreutzer,  the  German  player,  in  this 
volume,  illustrates  the  point  well. 

The  grip  of  the  racket  which  results  from 
the  awkward  backhand  position  is  essentially  dif- 
ferent from  the  freedom  of  the  forehand  stroke, 
and  to  overcome  the  difficulty,  two  distinctly  dif- 
ferent holds  have  come  into  vogue  which  largely 
influence  the  method  of  hitting  the  ball  in  back- 
hand play.  This  question  of  the  grip  is  more 
fully  analyzed  in  the  preceding  chapter  on  this 
subject  but  its  bearing  on  backhand  play  is  so 
important  that  the  underlying  principles  must 
be  considered  here,  even  at  the  risk  of  going  over 
some  of  the  ground  a  second  time. 

To  be  sure,  the  same  three  styles  of  hitting 
the  ball  that  are  used  for  the  forehand  stroke, 
i.  e.,  the  straight  hit  ball,  the  under-cut  and  the 


Power  Ahead 
of  the  Ball, 
Not  Behind 


English  Style 
Turns  the  Body 
at  End 


Different  Grips 
Influence 
the  Stroke 


94       METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Difficult  to 
Avoid 

Back-Spin  with 
English  Grip 


Thumb- 
Around  Grasp 
Weakens 
Driving  Power 


Rigid  Joints 
Limit  Shift 
in  Direction 


top-spinning  ball,  are  available  for  backhand 
play,  but  all  three  and  the  methods  of  making 
them  are  vitally  affected  by  the  grip  of  the  racket 
that  is  employed.  If  the  unchanged  grip  is  used 
for  both  sides,  or  if  the  thumb  is  wrapped  around 
the  handle  with  a  shifted  hold,  it  is  difficult  to 
avoid  a  backward  bevel  of  the  face  of  the  racket 
which  must  be  altered  during  the  stroke  by  twist- 
ing the  wrist,  unless  the  under-cut  or  chop  stroke 
is  used. 

With  the  thumb  around  the  handle,  as  more 
frequently  seen  abroad  than  in  America,  there  is 
a  distinct  weakness  in  the  driving  power,  al- 
though the  grasping  power  to  prevent  the 
racket  from  turning  in  the  hand  as  the  ball  is  hit 
is  somewhat  increased.  To  overcome  the  lack  of 
support  for  the  handle  when  it  rests  in  the  crotch 
between  the  thumb  and  first  finger,  the  English- 
men generally  turn  the  grip  a  little  more  and  drop 
the  elbow  so  that  in  meeting  the  ball  the  racket 
will  be  supported  by  side  pressure  from  the  thumb 
to  increase  its  driving  power. 

This  brings  with  it  a  bent  arm,  and  the 
striking  arm  and  racket  look  much  like  the  con- 
ventional scythe  as  they  sweep  forward  to  hit  the 
ball,  with  a  second  bend  at  the  wrist  which  is  also 
lower  than  the  racket  head.  The  power  of  the 
stroke  depends  on  the  rigidity  of  the  joints  rather 
than  their  flexibility,  and  this  very  rigidity  pre- 
vents the  player  from  altering  and  concealing  di- 
rection as  much  as  is  possible  with  the  American 
style.  It  need  hardly  be  proven  that  a  bent  arm 
is  less  powerful  than  a  straight  one. 


THE  BACKHAND  STROKE 


95 


In  the  American  style,  the  thumb  is  used  to 
support  the  handle  of  the  racket,  as  a  strut  or 
prop  against  it,  and  this  position  permits  the 
player  to  keep  the  elbow  much  higher  during  the 
swing.  The  average  American  carries  his  elbow 
in  backhand  play  about  level  with  the  head  of  the 
racket  and  the  ball  when  it  is  hit,  while  some  pre- 
fer to  keep  the  elbow  even  higher.  The  other 
extreme,  however,  with  the  elbow  so  high  that  the 
racket  drops  downward  from  the  hand,  is  natu- 
rally as  bad  as  the  elbow-low  position,  for  it  also 
gives  a  bent  striking  arm  with  all  its  limitations. 

There  are  endless  variations  of  both  styles, 
of  course,  as  there  can  be  no  hard  and  fast  rules 
for  such  details,  and  the  closer  intercourse  with 
English  players  in  many  international  matches 
of  recent  years  has  made  the  types  lose  much  of 
their  original  nationality.  This  difference  in 
backhand  methods  is  the  most  sharply  denned 
contrast  between  the  English  and  American 
schools  of  play,  but  both  styles  have  now  many 
devotees  on  each  side  of  the  Atlantic. 

In  any  case,  no  matter  which  method  is  se- 
lected, there  is  no  question  that  the  position  for 
backhand  strokes  requires  the  body  swung  well 
around,  with  the  right  shoulder  toward  the  net, 
or  rather  toward  the  intended  flight  of  the  ball, 
and  the  feet  nearly  if  not  quite  in  line  with  its 
flight.  In  the  English  style,  the  whole  right 
shoulder  and  even  the  upper  part  of  the  body  are 
turned  somewhat  as  on  a  pivot  in  making  a  cross- 
court  stroke,  because  of  the  very  lack  of  flexibility 
in  the  wrist  of  which  I  have  already  spoken,  but 


Elbow  Can  Be 
Too  High  as 
Well  as 
Too  Low 


Endless 
Variations  of 
Both  Styles 


Body  Must  Be 
Swung  Around 
to  Face  Ball 


96       METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Left  Foot 
Should  Never 
Be  Forward 


Flexible  Wrist 
a  Great 
Advantage 


the  more  the  shoulders  can  be  kept  in  the  line  of 
flight,  and  the  body  weight  used  in  a  forward  di- 
rection for  the  follow-through,  the  straighter  and 
truer  will  the  ball  fly  and  the  stronger  will  be  the 
stroke. 

All  freedom  and  power  are  robbed  from  the 
stroke  if  the  left  foot  is  forward  or  the  two  feet  at 
right  angles  to  the  ball's  flight  so  that  the  playing 
arm  must  strike  across  the  body.  This  position 
kills  the  follow-through  and  the  swing  is  cut 
short,  finishing  out  to  the  right  instead  of  in  front. 

Of  the  methods  of  actually  hitting  the  ball, 
we  have  several  to  choose  from,  no  matter  in 
which  way  the  racket  is  held  and  the  arm  swung. 
To  be  sure,  the  English  grip  and  elbow  position 
make  the  rolling  lift  stroke  very  difficult,  al- 
though some  of  the  English  experts  finish  the 
backhand  with  an  upturn  and  a  sweep  that  car- 
ries the  racket  over  the  ball  with  a  slight  forward 
spin.  The  English  method,  however,  more  often 
produces  a  slight  back-spin  or  under-cut,  and  it  is 
difficult  to  overcome  this  with  their  hold. 

With  the  racket  as  held  in  the  prevailing 
manner,  that  is,  with  the  arm  nearly  straight  and 
the  thumb  braced  up  the  handle,  the  stroke  can 
be  varied  at  pleasure  with  a  slight  turn  of  the 
flexible  wrist.  By  rolling  the  racket  backward 
and  allowing  the  racket  to  pass  under  the  ball,  :v 
back-spin  is  given,  and  we  have  an  under-cut  that 
has  a  tendency  to  keep  the  ball  up  in  the  air  long 
and  make  its  bound  low.  It  is  a  good  stroke  for 
straight  side-line  shots,  when  the  distance  to  the 
base-line  or  diagonally  to  where  the  ball  would  go 


THE  BACKHAND  STROKE 

out  of  court,  is  so  long  that  the  stroke  can  be 
played  fast  without  danger;  but  for  cross-court 
shots  it  is  generally  difficult  to  play  fast  and  hold 
in  court. 

This  stroke  is  easy  to  volley  at  the  net,  too, 
so  that  it  is  seldom  as  good  a  passing  stroke 
against  a  volleyer.  With  the  opponent  at  the 
base-line,  however,  when  only  driving  must  be 
considered,  it  is  very  useful,  because  its  low  "hop" 
is  a  mean,  lifeless  ball  to  handle  off  the  ground. 

The  backhand  rolling  drop-stroke  is  the  most 
useful  for  all-around  play,  although  more  difficult 
to  learn.  Vaile  dilates  at  great  length  on  the  vir- 
tues of  this  stroke,  and  he  is  so  strong  in  his  ad- 
vocacy of  it  that  he  cannot  find  any  good  in  any 
other  way  of  hitting  the  ball  on  the  backhand  side. 
Pell  has  been  taken  as  his  model  of  the  perfect 
backhand,  and  it  must  be  conceded  that  Pell's 
backhand  is  very  efficient.  But  Pell  has  devoted 
so  much  attention  to  backhand  play  that  he  de- 
liberately runs  around  as  many  balls  as  possible  to 
favor  this  side,  which  is  the  weaker  with  most 
players.  Running  around  to  favor  the  backhand, 
it  is  plain,  is  as  short-sighted  as  running  around 
to  favor  the  forehand. 

Little  also  uses  this  rolling  backhand  effect- 
ively and  his  style  of  playing  it,  although  less 
certain  than  Pell's,  carries  more  "sting"  than  his 
rival,  and  he  has  maintained  a  better  forehand 
stroke  at  the  same  time.  Pell's  case,  like  Mc- 
Loughlin's,  shows  the  weakness  of  one-sided  de- 
velopment. In  practice  anyway,  if  not  in  impor- 
tant match  play,  it  is  wiser  to  devote  attention  to 


97 


Under-Cut  Ball 
Easy  to  Volley 


Pell's  a  Model 

Backhand 

Stroke 


Little  Gets 
Top-Spin  on 
Both  Sides 


98       METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Back-Swing 
Should  Be 
Extended 


Racket  Must 
Finish  Low  for 
Under-Cut 


the  weaker  side  of  one's  play  in  order  to  bring 
that  up  to  the  general  standard  of  the  whole  game. 
Constant  practice  of  one  stroke  generally  pro- 
duces an  unbalanced  game  and  notable  weak  spots 
for  attack. 

The  start  of  the  backhand  stroke  should  be 
as  far  back  of  the  left  shoulder  as  is  possible  to 
swing  the  racket,  and  this  can  be  extended  some- 
what by  increasing  the  backward  swing  of  the 
body  until  the  weight  is  carried  almost  entirely 
on  the  left  foot  before  the  stroke  is  started.  At 
the  end  of  the  swing,  the  racket  should  finish  far 
out  in  front  of  the  right  shoulder,  with  the  weight 
shifted  completely  over  onto  the  right  foot  and 
the  balance  thrown  as  far  forward  as  possible, 
even  to  the  point  of  checking  the  weight  with  a 
forward  step  at  the  end  of  the  stroke,  if  necessary. 

For  the  under-cut  stroke,  the  racket  should 
finish  low,  generally  at  about  the  height  of  the 
waist,  but  for  the  top-spinning,  rolling  lift  stroke, 
the  racket's  swing  should  end  much  higher,  gen- 
erally above  the  shoulder.  The  same  principles 
of  meeting  the  ball  and  imparting  the  twist  apply 
as  in  the  forehand  stroke,  and  the  English  experts 
get  the  same  variations  here  by  increasing  their 
follow-through  and  imparting  the  twist  with  a 
turn  of  the  wrist  at  the  last  moment  before  the 
ball  leaves  the  racket. 

But  the  backhand  stroke  without  any  twist 
at  all,  the  straight  hit  ball,  is  perhaps  more  val- 
uable for  general  play  than  either  of  the  others. 
It  is  certainly  easier  to  control  with  the  thumb-up 
grip  and  permits  a  turn  of  the  wrist  at  the  last 


THE  BACKHAND  STROKE 


99 


instant  to  alter  the  direction  of  passing  shots.  As 
played  by  Larned  this  stroke  probably  reached  as 
near  perfection  as  the  stroke  has  ever  been  pro- 
duced, and  it  is  probable  that  Larned's  backhand 
was  more  effective  than  Pell's,  despite  the  greater 
drop  that  the  latter  secures  by  his  lifting  stroke. 

Whether  a  straight  hit  ball,  under-cut  or  a 
top-spinning  ball  is  selected  as  the  best  style  for 
use,  it  is  generally  wisest  to  use  the  same  stroke 
on  both  sides.  The  player  who  uses  mostly  the 
lift-stroke  on  his  forehand  side  and  then  shifts  to 
a  chop-stroke  for  his  backhand  will  frequently  find 
himself  in  difficulties.  An  experienced  adversary 
will  quickly  learn  which  to  expect  and  place  his 
returns  so  that  the  kind  of  ball  he  prefers  to 
handle  will  be  forthcoming. 

The  Doherty  brothers  emphasized  in  their 
book  the  advisability  of  "stepping  into"  position 
for  the  backhand  stroke,  and  instantaneous  photo- 
graphs of  them  in  action  illustrate  better  than 
their  text  just  what  was  meant  by  this.  Many 
English  players  make  the  stroke  as  they  did,  and 
the  typical  style  they  used  is  accountable  for  it. 
The  Dohertys  played  many  of  their  backhand 
drives  with  the  back  turned  almost  directly  to- 
ward the  net,  with  the  right  foot  well  in  advance 
of  the  left.  They  depended  on  the  rotation  of 
the  body  on  the  hips  to  give  them  follow-through. 

This  style  certainly  proved  successful  with 
these  masters  but  I  would  hesitate  to  recommend 
it  to  others  because  it  requires  the  English  thumb- 
around  grip  and  the  low  elbow  to  make  it  effective. 
One  depends  more  on  a  sense  of  direction  than 


Larned's 

Perfect 

Backhand 


Same  Twist 
for  Both 
Strokes  Best 


Dohertys 
Almost  Turned 
Their  Backs 
to  Net 


100      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 
Difficult  to          any  view  of  the  adversary's  position  also  with  this 

Style  °f  hittin£  the  ball>  atld  {t  is  m°re  difficult  to 

change  the  direction  of  the  stroke  after  it  has 
been  started. 


in 


rt 

cx 

I 


V  X3    C 

_M  *- i     0$ 

»~*  ^  .H 

O  o  t> 


CO 


PQ 


be 


r-     O 

£  - 


S  ^."y 

tn        C^    ^^ 

O   -5^ 
"p-  ^2  £ 

Hi 

o   "3*1 

a  25 

o 

k— 4      w   a> 

J^     .C  ^ 


I 

as 
O 
V 


H 

>  "^ 

3 

c  ^ 

£ 

^K 

Q 

s  *•* 

O    2 

§ 

U    CJ 

CJ    jg 

!•§  . 

j    O 

«  o> 

<    u 

+j    3    «-. 

^     •*-* 

S  co 

1  J 

TJ 

2         C 

q 

rt 

J3 

-§*£  o 

en   c3  ^ 

1 

^    bfl  J« 

-o  c  rt 

C  '>    .  - 

rt    >   >. 

m  f 

c«  rt 

Q 

c  ^*E 

8 

Ij.i 

a  «  ^ 

K^i 

o      15 

j_j 

•4->  rt  i> 

CO 

^^*° 

^ 

ja.tJ*o 

O 

c 

2^8 

£  vl 

*2*rt  rt 

'•£ 

§S-o 

CO 

0  (n  SJ 

«l1 

3o 

s^2 

/J    U 

«s 

Q          43 


.U,     CO 

^  "c 


f 

OJ 

II 


THE  BACKHAND  STROKE 


101 


OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS: 

Do  you  carry  the  elbow  in  English  style,  or  prefer 
the  American  style,  with  elbow  high? 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND:  God  only  knows  what  I  do 
here,  but  I  shall  stick  to  whatever  I  do  now,  as  it  is  my 
natural  way  of  doing  it.  I  believe  I  do  both. 

T.  C.  BUNDY:    Yankee. 

K.  H.  BEHR:  Carry  elbow  naturally,  low  on  volley 
and  stroke,  I  believe. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER  :  My  backhand  is  nothing  to  follow. 
R.  D.  LITTLE:    American  style. 

H.  H.  HACKETT  :    American  style. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT:    As  my  stroke  is  a  chop  stroke  like 
a  court  tennis  stroke,  my  elbow  is  below  my  waist. 

J.  C.  PARKE  :  Being  English,  naturally  I  prefer  our 
own  style,  but  as  an  argument  in  its  favor,  I  may  suggest 
that  it  is  the  natural  method  of  playing  the  stroke.  The 
elbow  high  appears  to  me  to  be  unnatural  and  to  cramp 
the  body  and  to  minimize  the  value  of  distribution  of 
weight  to  be  obtained  from  foot-work. 

C.  P.  DIXON  :     Elbow  low  in  English  style. 

R.  L.  MURRAY  :  I  prefer  the  low  English  style,  but 
have  always  used  the  high. 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :     I  always  carry  the  elbow  high  in 
the  American  style  even  on  backhand  pickups. 

W.  M.  WASHBURN  :    American. 

ELIA  FOTTRELL:    American  style. 

CLARENCE  HOBART  :    I  believe  the  English  best. 

E.  B.  DEW  HURST  :  Elbow  about  level  with  the  wrist  ; 
racket  head  slightly  above  wrist. 

J.  R.  STRACHAN  :    American  style. 

C.  R.  GARDNER:  American  style  mostly.  English 
on  backhand  occasionally. 


English  or 

American 

Style? 


Parke  and 
Dixon  Prefer 
Their  Own 
Style 


102      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Dabney   Uses 
All  Styles 


Most 

Americans 
Prefer  High 
Elbow 


Mathey  Has 
Followed   the 
Dohertys 


A.  S.  DABNEY  :  American.  I  prefer  generally  getting 
a  top-spin  but  do  not  emphasize  the  high  elbow,  more  than 
half  way  between  the  two  styles.  Sometimes  I  cut  a  high 
bouncing  ball  for  a  decisive  stroke,  as  it  is  difficult  to 
top-spin  these  on  the  backhand.  On  these  shots  also  I 
sometimes  get  a  top-spin  with  elbow  down. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :     High,  I  think. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :    I  play  the  American  style. 

W.  F.  JOHNSON:  I  carry  the  elbow  several  inches 
below  the  wrist. 

N.  W.  NILES:  More  latter  than  former;  almost  on 
a  line  with  forearm. 

T.  R.  PELL:     American  style. 

ROBERT  LERov :  Elbow  high,  always. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR  :  Certainly  not  the  English  style,  but 
the  elbow  is  not  especially  high. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:     My  elbow  is  in  the  plane  of  my 
racket  on  all  strokes. 

J.  J.  ARMSTRONG  :  English  stroke  is  best  if  schooled 
to  use  it. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :  Elbow  high,  always  parallel 
with  flight  of  ball. 

W.  M.  HALL  :  Elbow  about  on  a  level  with  forearm 
and  racket. 

RICHARD  HARTE  :  American  style.  My  elbow  is 
slightly  above  the  wrist. 

DEAN  MATHEY:  I  carry  the  elbow  low,  mainly 
because  I  have  followed  out  as  much  as  possible  the  ad- 
vice of  the  Dohertys. 

R.  C.  SEAVER  :  I  think  I  carry  the  elbow  low,  but  I 
think  the  American  style  with  elbow  high  the  strongest 
backhand. 

G.  C.  SHAFER  :     Elbow  high. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL:  American. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY  :     The  American  style. 

I.  C.  WRIGHT:    High  elbow. 

W.  C.  GRANT  :    Elbow  low,  with  top-spin. 


VOLLEYING 


103 


IX. 


VOLLEYING 


SEVEN  CARDINAL  POINTS  TO  REMEMBER 


1 — Never  volley  upward;  all  volleys  should  be 
horizontal  or  downward. 

2 — The  volleying  position  should  be  near  enough 
to  the  net  to  meet  the  ball  while  it  is  still 
above  it.  Six  to  twelve  feet  is  about  right. 

3 — Bevel  the  racket  backward  for  horizontal  vol- 
leys, and  let  the  forearm  do  the  work; 
the  swing  should  be  short  and  crisp. 

4 — Never  move  backward  zvhile  making  a  volley; 
if  you  can't  move  forward  to  meet  the  ball, 
stand  still  and  make  your  arm  move  for- 
ward. 

5 — Strike  downward  at  a  ball  with  top-spin, 
horizontally  at  a  ball  with  under-cut. 

6 — Smashing  should  be  confined  to  balls  in  front 
of  the  service-line;  more  is  lost  than  won 
by  smashing  from  the  back  of  the  court, 
and  overhead  volleying  is  safer  there. 

7 — Don't  half -volley  at  all;  avoid  the  position  that 
forces  it,  and  step  forward  or  back  for  a 
normal  stroke  if  caught  in  that  position. 

ORIGINALLY,  all  strokes  in  lawn  tennis 
were  made  after  the  ball  had  bounded, 
and  it  was  not  until  some  years  after  the 
game  had  reached  England  from  its  native  home 


Cardinal 
Points  to 
Keep  in  Mind 


Origin  of  the 
Volley  Stroke 


104      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


The  Renshaws 
Invented 
the  Stroke 


Time  and 
Wider  Angle 
Gained 


Element  of 
Time  of  Great 
Importance 


in  India  that  the  idea  of  striking  the  ball  in  the  air, 
"on  the  fly"  as  we  used  to  say  in  baseball,  came 
into  vogue.  But  it  was  only  a  short  time  after 
this  before  the  value  of  the  new  stroke  was  well 
appreciated.  The  famous  Renshaw  brothers, 
among  the  earliest  English  champions,  introduced 
the  volley  stroke  and  revolutionized  the  early  de- 
velopment of  the  game. 

Two  distinct  advantages  are  offered  by  the 
volley,  time  and  angle  of  attack.  A  ball  hit  in 
the  air,  particularly  when  close  in  toward  the  net, 
offers  a  much  wider  range  of  the  antagonist's 
court  for  attack  than  when  hit  off  the  ground. 
In  addition  to  this,  much  valuable  time  is  gained 
by  using  the  stroke,  since  the  player  on  the  other 
side  has  less  time  to  anticipate  the  volleyed  stroke 
than  one  played  from  the  back  of  the  court. 

This  element  of  time  is  of  far  greater  im- 
portance than  is  understood  by  most  players.  A 
tennis  player  forced  to  one  side  of  his  court  to 
make  a  return  requires  a  certain  amount  of  time 
to  recover  a  safe  position  in  the  center,  from 
which  he  can  reach  any  stroke  that  his  adversary 
may  deliver  to  him.  If  he  is  badly  hurried,  his 
stroke  falters,  and  he  suffers  soon  from  fast 
breathing,  which  also  hurts  his  play  immediately. 
To  keep  an  opponent  in  such  a  condition  is  to 
maintain  a  constant  attack  that  keeps  him  on  the 
defensive. 

Primarily,  then,  the  volleying  position  at  the 
net  is  the  best  position  for  attack,  and  by  the  vol- 
leying position  I  mean  anywhere  in  front  of  the 
service-line,  for  it  is  next  to  impossible  in  fast 


VOLLEYING 


105 


play  to  hit  a  ball  off  the  ground  from  in  front  of 
the  service-line.  Now,  two  players  cannot  sur- 
vive long  with  both  at  the  net  against  each  other 
because  the  closeness  of  their  positions  does  not 
afford  either  time  enough  to  anticipate  the  other's 
attack,  and  one  or  the  other  must  lose  at  once. 
Hence,  it  is  necessary  that  one  of  them  must  retire 
to  the  back  of  his  court  and  assume  the  defensive 
when  his  adversary  outgenerals  him  and  gains 
the  coveted  net  position. 

But  the  reader  must  not  reason  from  this 
that  it  is  always  safe  to  make  a  dash  for  the  net 
if  the  other  man  has  not  anticipated  him.  On  the 
contrary,  a  very  dangerous  attack  can  be  main- 
tained from  the  base-line,  and  blindly  rushing  to 
the  net  is  as  short-sighted  as  camping  indefinitely 
at  the  back  of  the  court.  There  are  correct  prin- 
ciples which  should  be  learned  to  show  how  and 
when  it  is  safe  to  take  the  volleying  position. 
This  subject  will  be  fully  covered  in  a  later  chap- 
ter under  position  play. 

The  volley  stroke  itself  can  be  made  at  any 
time  until  the  ball  touches  the  ground,  of  course, 
but  it  is  a  safe  general  rule  to  lay  down  that  it 
should  always  be  made  at  the  height  of  the  net 
or  above.  There  are  many  times  when  one  is 
forced  to  play  a  lifting  volley  from  below  the 
height  of  the  net,  but  such  a  stroke  instantly  be- 
comes defensive,  destroying  the  very  life  of  the 
volley,  and  should  be  avoided  whenever  possible. 
Caught  in  the  front  of  the  court,  with  a  dropping 
low  ball,  there  is  no  choice  but  to  volley  upward, 
but  as  a  foreseen  and  anticipated  stroke  it  is  un- 


Both  Sides 
Cannot  Live 
at  the  Net 


Blind 

Net-Rushing 
Is  Fool-Hardy 


Volley  Should 
Not  Be  Made 
from  Below 
Top  of  Net 


106      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


English  School 
of  Low 
Volleying 


Deep  Position 
Condemned 


sound.  One  should  not  intentionally  assume  a 
position  where  such  a  stroke  will  be  necessary. 

I  know  that  this  advice  is  not  in  accordance 
with  one  common  English  method  of  playing  the 
volley  stroke,  for  many  strong  English  players 
purposely  volley  underhand,  with  an  upward 
tendency.  But  this  conies  from  their  faulty  posi- 
tion for  volleying.  The  English  school  teaches 
the  volleyer  to  hang  back  anywhere  from  six  to 
ten  feet  more  than  Americans  believe  good  tac- 
tics, and  as  a  consequence  of  this  position  you 
sometimes  see  opposing  volleyers  in  England  both 
near  the  service-line,  exchanging  short  lifting 
volleys,  when  an  American  would  dart  forward 
and  kill  the  ball. 

I  believe  this  English  volleying  position  to 
be  unsound,  and  certainly  the  closer  American 
methods  have  forced  some  of  the  English  author- 
ities to  abandon  their  first  theories,  and  advise  a 
closer  position  for  this  stroke.  The  Dohertys 
shifted  their  position  for  attack  closer  to  the  net 
after  their  first  experiences  with  American  tac- 
tics, and  others  who  have  followed  them  to  this 
country  have  shown  a  tendency  to  come  in  closer 
to  volley.  The  old  English  style  does  not  allow 
the  same  sting  in  the  attack,  and  permits  the  an- 
tagonist to  creep  forward  against  such  a  weak 
attack,  and  sometimes  to  turn  the  tables  on  the 
deep  volleyer. 

If  it  is  accepted  then  that  the  correct  posi- 
tion for  a  volleyer  is  close  enough  forward  to 
meet  the  ball  while  it  is  still  higher  than  the  net, 
one  must  be  governed  somewhat  by  the  character 


VOLLEYING 


107 


of  the  adversary's  strokes  in  deciding  how  close 
he  should  come  in.  If  he  resorts  to  lobbing  to 
dislodge  the  volleyer,  then  the  position  should  be 
a  little  further  back,  while  on  the  other  hand,  if 
he  uses  a  short  dropping  stroke  that  falls  below 
the  level  of  the  net  very  soon  after  crossing  it,  it 
is  evident  that  the  position  must  be  very  close 
in  to  receive  the  ball  at  the  necessary  height. 
But  again  we  are  trespassing  on  the  ground  to 
be  covered  under  position  play.  Generally  speak- 
ing, the  best  volleying  position  is  from  6  to  12 
feet  from  the  net. 

For  the  horizontal  volley,  that  is,  the  ball 
that  is  flying  nearly  horizontally  when  struck  and 
is  met  at  a  height  from  the  waist  to  the  shoulder, 
the  stroke  should  be  made  with  less  swing  than 
is  advisable  for  a  ground  stroke.  The  impact  of 
the  ball  itself  will  furnish  much  of  the  power  that 
is  required  to  give  it  speed  on  the  return  flight, 
but  it  should  be  met  with  a  forward  motion 
of  the  arm  and  a  snap  of  the  wrist  to  give  the 
sliot  crispness.  The  forearm  is  used  very  much 
more  than  the  upper  arm  in  this  stroke,  and 
when  close  to  the  net  it  will  provide  all  the  power 
necessary  for  a  short  volley  across  the  opponent's 
court. 

It  is  generally  necessary  to  bevel  the  face  of 
the  racket  slightly  backward  in  making  a  horizon- 
tal volley.  The  ball,  even  when  played  while  still 
rising,  has  a  tendency  to  drop  quickly  after  being 
hit,  and  to  overcome  this  the  bevel  of  the  racket 
is  used.  This  has  an  inclination  to  give  the  ball 
a  slight  under-cut,  which  will  in  its  turn  tend  to 


Hoiv  Close 
Should  You 
Come  Up? 


Half  Swing  for 
a  Horizontal 
Volley 


Face  of  the 
Racket  Should 
Be  Beveled 
Back 


108      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


The  Short 

Cross-Court 

Volley 


A  Slight 
Downward 
Motion  Needed 


Easier  to 
Volley 
Under-Cut  Ball 


keep  the  bound  low  and  somewhat  embarrass  the 
opponent  in  making  the  next  return. 

The  amount  of  power  required  from  the  arm, 
particularly  the  upper  part  of  the  arm,  will  depend 
largely  on  the  length  of  the  stroke  you  are  play- 
ing. For  the  short  cross-volley,  it  is  best  played 
with  very  little  swing  of  the  arm,  just  a  slight 
forward  motion  and  a  twist  of  the  forearm  which 
turns  the  ball  off  to  the  side,  and  a  snap  of  the 
wrist  that  adds  crispness  to  the  stroke  and  makes 
the  ball  fly  faster;  the  backward  bevel  of  the 
face  adds  a  little  backspin  to  keep  down  the  bound 
and  lifts  the  ball  over  the  net  and  makes  it  drop 
quickly  again. 

These  horizontal  volleys  should  be  struck 
with  a  slight  downward  motion  of  the  arm,  and 
this  is  more  accentuated  in  handling  a  ball  with 
top-spin  than  any  other.  Here  the  tendency  of 
the  twist  is  to  make  the  ball  fly  upward  from  the 
racket  and  the  downward  angle  of  the  stroke 
helps  to  overcome  this,  while  the  beveled  face 
sends  the  ball  away  high  enough  to  clear  the  net. 

It  is  distinctly  easier  to  volley  an  undercut 
ball  at  the  net  than  one  with  top-spin,  and  this 
results  from  the  rotation  whose  effect  is  to  in- 
crease the  speed  and  crispness  with  which  it  goes 
away  from  the  volleyer's  racket.  But  it  is  neces- 
sary to  make  allowance  for  this  tendency  in  order 
to  avoid  netting  the  balls.  A  horizontal  stroke 
with  the  face  of  racket  bevelled  back  will  gen- 
erally do  the  trick  successfully. 

This  stroke  can  be  played  either  forehanded 
or  backhanded  with  almost  equal  facility  *n.ct  is 


bJO 
3 

o 

C  . 
<u  en 
cu  en 

•S& 

«g  rt 


bJO   g3^ 

Hi 


i  y 

1   1.5 


-e 


.     o    ™  « 

w    >-l   3S 


en    .-i 

o  6 


«  w 

fc  s 

«  fcf 

•5  . 

0) 

u  c 

cd  s. 

•5  *l- 

<l  <U 

8    6  la 

.,       O  J3 

S    43  w 

<  c  • 

3^*  ^- 

1—4  ^    *^ 

^H             *^  C/)   ,Ii 


CO       CX 


«    o. 


§  I, 

.2  £ 

o  2 

ffi  J* 


VOLLEYING 


109 


probably  the  only  stroke  in  the  game  that  is  as 
easily  played  on  both  sides.  All  the  ground- 
strokes,  the  lob  and  the  smash,  are  more  difficult 
on  the  backhand  side,  but  not  so  the  horizontal 
and  low  volley.  This  is  chiefly  because  little  arm 
motion  is  needed  for  these  strokes,  which  require 
only  a  stiffness  of  the  wrist  instead  of  the  flexi- 
bility needed  by  the  greater  impact  of  the  other 
strokes. 

For  a  lifting  volley,  that  is,  the  volleyed  ball 
that  must  be  met  and  returned  from  a  height 
lower  than  the  net,  more  motion  of  the  arm  and 
less  of  the  wrist  is  needed.  In  fact,  a  stiff  wrist 
will  often  be  found  better  for  the  execution  of 
this  really  difficult  shot.  The  difficulty  of  making 
the  stroke  and  the  increased  danger  of  error  add- 
ed to  the  loss  of  attacking  power  from  its  low 
point  of  starting,  helps  to  emphasize  the  folly  of 
being  caught  in  a  position  when  it  is  necessary  to 
use  it. 

But  there  are  times,  no  matter  whether  one 
uses  the  English  or  American  position  for  volley- 
ing, there  are  times  when  it  becomes  necessary  to 
play  this  shot,  and  the  method  cannot  be  studied 
too  closely.  A  full  arm  sweep,  starting  half  as 
far  back  as  a  ground-stroke,  a  stiff  wrist  and  a 
full  follow  through  are  needed  to  get  the  ball  off 
well,  and,  as  in  the  horizontal  volley,  the  face  of 
the  racket  should  be  beveled  back  a  little  to  keep 
the  bound  down  and  the  ball  well  up  over  the  net. 

Karl  Behr  and  one  or  two  other  successful 
players  use  occasionally  a  horizontal  or  dropping 
volley  with  a  long  sweeping  stroke  like  a  fore- 


Little  Arm 
Motion  Needed 


Lifting  Volley 
a  Defensive 
Stroke 


How  It 
Is  Made 


110      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Behr's  Odd 
Drive  Volley 


Most 

Americans 
Overdo 
the  Smash 


H.  L.  Doherty 
the  Best  at 
Killing 
Without  It 


hand  lift  drive,  with  plenty  of  top-spin,  but  this 
style  cannot  be  recommended.  Its  success  in  one 
case  is  no  vindication  of  the  soundness  of  the 
principle  involved,  and  in  the  hands  of  nine  men 
this  play  would  fail  when  one  man  would  succeed 
with  it.  The  under-cut  is  distinctly  preferred  for 
these  strokes  to  the  forward  top-spin,  for  its  tend- 
ency is  to  keep  the  ball  out  of  the  net,  the  barrier 
that  ruins  many  more  volleys  than  the  outside 
lines  of  the  antagonist's  court. 

Now  we  come  to  consideration  of  the  smash. 
This  play  is  nothing  more  than  an  overhead  vol- 
ley played  so  fast  that  it  is  intended  to  kill  from 
its  speed  alone,  irrespective  of  whether  it  is  placed 
out  of  the  opponent's  reach  or  not.  In  America, 
the  smash  is  very  much  overdone.  Our  impetu- 
ous temperament  develops  a  tendency  to  make 
sensational  strokes,  and  the  smash  is  probably 
the  most  spectacular  of  all.  The  added  speed 
put  into  this  play  increases  the  risk  of  error  and 
is  a  drain  on  physical  strength  in  a  long  match, 
so  it  follows  logically  that  any  ball  that  can  be 
killed  as  well  by  placing  an  overhead  volley  out 
of  reach  with  less  speed,  less  risk  of  error  and 
less  physical  strain,  should  not  be  smashed. 

H.  L.  Doherty,  M.  D.  Whitman,  W.  A. 
Larned  and  R.  N.  Williams,  2nd,  the  present 
champion,  are  all  exponents  of  this  method,  and  of 
these  Doherty  was  perhaps  the  most  skilful  of 
all  in  safely  tucking  away  an  overhead  volley 
into  some  impossible  position  for  an  ace.  He 
never  seemed  to  be  hitting  hard,  but  a  short  lob 
was  almost  invariably  killed  as  effectively  with- 


VOLLEYING 


111 


out  speed  as  when  played  by  the  most  extreme 
smashers  of  the  American  contingent.  G.  P. 
Sheldon,  one  of  the  national  champions  in 
doubles;  Dwight  Davis  and  M.  E.  McLoughlin 
all  leaned  toward  the  other  method,  the  use  of 
speed  rather  than  direction  for  killing  overhead. 

Of  these  two  schools,  one  can  take  his  choice, 
and  it  would  seem  that  a  judicious  mixture  of 
both  were  better  than  following  either  blindly. 
Certain  returns  can  be  handled  better  with  a 
smash  and  others  with  an  overhead  volley.  A  high 
horizontal  shot  is  easier  to  volley  because  the 
angle  of  impact  is  so  much  more  direct,  the  ball 
coming  toward  the  racket  to  meet  it;  while  the 
dropping  ball  of  a  lob  requires  a  more  accurate 
calculation  to  avoid  missing  the  lines  if  placed 
close  to  the  edge,  and  is  generally  handled  best 
with  a  smash  depending  on  its  speed  for  success. 

The  overhead  volley  of  a  horizontal  ball 
calls  for  a  full  swing,  a  sharp  impact  with  less 
twist  than  any  other  stroke  of  the  game  (unless 
it  be  the  lob)  and  a  medium  follow  through. 
The  success  of  the  shot  depends  more  on  direc- 
tion than  the  mere  execution  of  the  play.  It  is 
an  easy  stroke  to  make  and  not  difficult  to  direct. 
If  the  adversary  has  left  an  opening,  it  should 
afford  an  ace  on  the  next  play,  but  if  he  is  well 
covered  up  and  the  ball  is  over  the  centre  of  the 
net,  a  deep  volley  into  one  corner  will  often  open 
up  the  way  for  a  clean  ace  on  the  next  return. 
This  stroke  is  so  simple  and  affords  so  many 
chances  to  kill  that  the  experienced  player  seldom 
offers  his  opponent  such  an  opening.  Clothier 


Judicious 
Mixture  of 
Two  Styles 


Overhead 
Volleys 
Comparatively 
Easy 


Clothier  Fine 
on  High 
Volleys 


112      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Short  Smashes 
Should  Never 
Be  Missed 


Never  Ease  Up 
on  This  Stroke 


Smashing 

Position 

Described 


handles  these  volleys,  shoulder  high  or  above, 
better  than  any  other  player  we  have  now,  al- 
though Lamed  used  to  be  very  deadly  on  such 
openings. 

The  smash  is  a  stroke  that  is  properly  used 
only  on  a  lob,  for  no  other  return  offers  the  drop- 
ping lifeless  ball  needed  for  its  execution.  On  a 
short  lob,  that  is,  a  ball  that  falls  within  twelve 
of  fifteen  feet  of  the  net,  the  risk  of  error  is  small, 
and  even  this  decreases  rapidly  as  the  distance  to 
the  net  is  lessened.  When  within  ten  feet  of  the 
net,  it  is  always  safe  to  hit  the  ball  hard,  and  when 
so  close  as  this  it  is  seldom  difficult  to  earn  a  clean 
ace  by  smashing  the  ball  right  "through"  the 
other  man. 

The  deeper  the  ball  to  be  smashed,  the  more 
difficult  it  is  to  handle,  the  danger  of  missing 
increasing  very  rapidly,  and  when  a  lob  drops 
back  of  the  service-line,  it  depends  entirely  on  the 
individual  skill  of  the  player  whether  it  pays 
better  to  smash  than  to  volley  the  return.  To 
ease  up  on  a  smash  generally  results  in  ruining 
the  stroke.  If  the  full  power  and  speed  cannot 
be  risked,  it  is  generally  better  to  change  the 
stroke  to  a  volley  and  wait  for  a  better  opening 
for  the  attempt  to  kill. 

The  position  the  player  ought  to  assume  for 
a  smash  varies  somewhat  according  to  individual 
style.  Little  lays  down  the  rule  that  under  a 
dropping  ball,  the  player  ought  to  stand  so  that 
it  would  strike  him  in  the  right  eye  if  allowed  to 
fall.  This  may  be  wise,  but  I  should  incline 
toward  allowing  the  ball  to  drop  perhaps  six  or 


VOLLEYING 


113 


eight  inches  more  to  the  right.  To  make  the 
stroke  directly  over  the  head  has  a  tendency  to 
throw  the  balance  backward  at  the  end  of  the 
stroke,  and  makes  the  recovery  slower.  No  mat- 
ter whether  the  smash  is  expected  to  win  out- 
right or  not,  the  player  should  instantly  recover 
his  balance  and  prepare  for  another  stroke,  for 
he  never  can  be  sure  the  rally  is  over  on  even  the 
hardest  smash.  His  opponent  may  make  a  sen- 
sational recovery  and  put  up  another  lob  or  try 
for  a  pass. 

To  take  the  ball  in  front  of  you  often  results 
in  hitting  the  net,  and  this  habit  of  standing  too 
far  back  for  a  smash  is  one  of  the  worst  of  faults, 
one  that  is  seldom  to  be  seen  among  the  better 
players. 

Making  the  smash  requires  the  fullest  ac- 
tion possible.  The  racket  should  start  well  be- 
hind the  back  with  a  full  back  swing,  and  come 
forward  with  rapidly  increasing  energy,  striking 
the  ball  with  a  sharp  impact.  The  entire  body 
weight  should  be  thrown  into  the  blow,  and  there 
should  be  a  full  body  swing  and  follow  through 
to  add  to  the  power  of  the  stroke.  No  stroke  of 
the  game  is  played  with  such  abandon,  for  as 
this  shot  is  expected  to  end  the  rally  nine  times 
out  of  ten,  the  attitude  is  one  of  finality  that  per- 
mits the  player  to  literally  throw  himself  at  the 
ball  regardless  of  what  may  follow. 

The  ball  should  always  be  met  with  an 
"open"  racket,  that  is,  with  the  full  face  of  the 
stringing  exposed,  the  face  being  at  right  angles 
to  the  flight  of  the  ball,  and  it  is  essential  that 


Balance  Must 
Be  Recovered 
Quickly 


Fullest  Action 
Required  to 
Smash  Well 


Use  an 

"Open"  Racket 
and  No  Twist 


114      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Placing  a 

Killing 

Smash 


Handling  a 
Deep  Lob 


the  ball  should  be  struck  in  the  center  of  the 
strings.  Twist  is  almost  unnecessary,  although 
some  players  have  an  inclination  to  wrap  the 
racket  around  the  ball  slightly,  as  in  the  service, 
and  this  has  a  tendency  to  keep  the  ball  some- 
what better  under  control. 

As  to  placing  the  smash,  it  is  often  better 
to  use  the  center  of  the  court  than  to  risk  the 
edges,  as  the  shot  cannot  be  placed  to  within  a 
few  feet  of  the  desired  spot,  as  in  the  slower 
volleys  where  the  control  of  the  direction  is  more 
certain.  If  the  antagonist  is  close  to  you,  it  is 
generally  better  to  play  directly  at  him,  as  it  will 
allow  him  too  short  a  time  to  prepare  for  the 
next  stroke  to  have  any  hope  for  success.  If  the 
adversary  is  far  back  in  his  court,  smashing  at 
him  often  loses  the  ace,  because  he  will  then  have 
ample  time  to  let  the  ball  bound  and  replay  it 
with  another  lob  or  a  drive  that  will  find  you  off 
your  balance,  perhaps,  from  the  abandon  of  the 
stroke.  A  hard  smash  may  be  directed  toward 
the  side  of  the  court  without  taking  liberties 
with  the  last  few  feet  at  the  edge,  and  still  have 
room  enough  to  score  the  ace.  The  very  speed 
of  the  stroke  will  make  it  extremely  difficult  for 
the  other  man  to  make  the  return  even  if  he 
should  reach  the  ball. 

When  a  really  deep  lob  has  to  be  handled, 
that  is,  one  that  is  about  to  drop  within  the  last 
ten  feet  of  the  court,  smashing  is  extremely  risky. 
The  angle  of  open  court  that  can  be  seer 
over  the  net  is  very  small  from  far  back  in  the 
court,  especially  on  a  smashed  ball  hit  so  fast 


VOLLEYING 

that  it  has  little  or  no  drop,  and  the  risk  of  error 
is  so  great  that  the  game  is  not  worth  the  candle. 
(See  diagram.)  In  addition,  the  opponent  has 
so  much  more  time  to  anticipate  the  direction  of 
such  a  smash  that  its  chances  for  winning  are 


115 


SIX     FEET    FROM     THE     NET 


TEN     FEET    FROM    THE     NET 


AT      THE     SERVICE    LINE 


Chances  for 
Success  in 
Smashing  from 
Different 
Distances 


THE    BACK  OP   THE 


AT     THe    BA.SB    LIME 


materially  lessened.  Notwithstanding  the  fact 
that  some  players  like  McLoughlin  succeed 
with  it  at  greater  distance,  the  smash  is  a  stroke 
to  be  used  only  from  in  front  of  the  service-line. 

It  is  always  better  on  deep  lobs  to  use  a  deep"  Better  Use 
uolley  and  creep  up  again  toward  the  net  to  wait 
for  a  better  chance  to  kill.    In  the  Western  sec- 
tion of  the  country,  some  of  the  players  have 


116      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Stop-Volley 
Not  Well  Used 


Plow  to  Make 
the  Stroke 


developed  a  way  of  "bucking"  the  ball  on  such  a 
lob  that  is  safe,  although  it  looks  very  ungainly. 
They  get  under  the  ball  and,  with  the  racket 
beveled  sharply  upward,  push  it,  rather  than 
strike  it,  a  deep  slow  volley  that  keeps  the  op- 
ponent away  from  the  net  and  gives  them  time 
to  run  in  themselves  to  wait  for  a  shorter  lob 
that  can  be  killed. 

The  stop-volley  is  a  variation  of  the  low 
horizontal  volley  that  is  very  useful  and  can  be 
made  much  better  use  of  than  is  commonly  seen 
in  tournaments  nowadays.  Holcombe  Ward  was 
an  adept  at  this  stroke  and  used  it  with  telling 
effect,  varying  it  with  a  deep  volley  that  kept  his 
antagonist  constantly  guessing  as  to  whether  to 
go  forward  or  hang  back  for  a  deep  ball.  This 
stroke  can  be  played  only  from  the  front  of  the 
court,  and  it  is  very  risky  unless  the  volleyer  is 
within  ten  feet  of  the  net. 

If  in  this  position,  however,  it  is  a  deadly 
stroke  in  the  hands  of  a  thinking  player  who 
chooses  the  right  time  to  use  it  and  does  not  use 
it  too  often.  Either  forehand  or  backhand,  the 
racket  just  meets  the  ball,  with  a  stiff  wrist  and 
little  or  no  motion  of  the  arm.  The  face  of  the 
racket  should  be  beveled  back  just  a  trifle  unless 
very  close  to  the  net,  and  a  slight  flick  of  the 
wrist  added  if  the  ball  lacks  impact  or  the  net  is 
too  far  away  for  a  dead  wrist  to  carry  the  ball 
over.  The  object  of  the  stroke  is  to  make  the  ball 
just  clear  the  net  and  then  drop  dead.  If  the 
opponent  is  far  back  in  his  court,  particularly  if 
he  is  expecting  a  deep  return,  he  will  probably 


WILLIAM  A.  LARNED 
A  Fine  Stop- Volley  at  the  Net. 

Note  the  short  grip  of  the  racket  so  apparent  in  this  picture,  a  marked 

characteristic  of  this  stroke.     Also  the  perfect  freedom  of  shoulders  and 

arm  that  always  marked  Larned's  play. 


GUSTAVE    F.    TOUCHARD 

Backhand  Half- Volley  of  a  Short  Ball. 

There  are  very  few  pictures  in  existence  of  half-volley  strokes,  but  this 

shows   Touchard  just  about  to   "trap"  a   short  ball  near  the  net  with  a 

backhand  half-volley.     The  racket  is  directly  in  front  of  the  foot,  which 

shows  the  absence  of  swing  in  making  these  strokes. 


VOLLEYING 


117 


be  unable  to  get  forward  in  time  to  get  the  low 
bound. 

On  most  stop-volleys,  particularly  on  those 
made  close  to  the  net,  the  grip  on  the  racket  should 
be  relaxed  a  trifle  just  as  the  ball  is  hit,  and  this 
helps  to  kill  the  rebound. 

This  stop-volley  can  be  varied  well  if  the  ball 
is  turned  off  sharply  to  one  side  or  the  other,  ac- 
cording to  which  side  seems  most  exposed  by  the 
adversary's  position.  Ward  used  this  variation 
constantly  and  beveled  his  racket  sidewise  as  well 
as  backward  to  cut  the  ball  out  of  reach.  Beals 
Wright  was  also  exceptionally  clever  at  the 
stroke,  and  Karl  Behr  uses  it  effectively  at  times. 

One  cardinal  point  should  be  kept  in  mind 
in  all  volley  strokes  and  this  is  the  strict  rule 
never  to  move  backward  as  the  blow  is  delivered. 
Nothing  will  ruin  an  otherwise  good  volley  stroke 
more  certainly  than  the  tendency  to  draw  the 
weight  back  as  the  racket  meets  the  ball.  This 
is  even  more  important  in  volleying  than  in  play- 
ing ground  strokes,  because  the  whole  swing  of 
the  arm  and  weight  are  not  pronounced  in  vol- 
leying. Many  volley  strokes  are  played  without 
the  body's  weight,  and  their  success  depends 
largely  on  a  slight  motion  of  the  wrist  or  arm. 
To  offset  this  with  a  backward  motion  means  to 
ruin  the  stroke. 

The  lob-volley,  a  lob  played  on  the  volley, 
is  more  correctly  a  lob  than  a  volley  and  will  be 
treated  under  that  head. 

The  half-volley  might  similarly  be  consid- 
ered more  of  a  ground  stroke  than  a  volley,  but 


Grip  Should 
Be  Relaxed 
a  Trifle 


Weight  Must 
Never  Move 
Backward 


Lob-Volley 

Occasionally 

Used 


118      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Half-Volley 
Always  a 
Tactical 
Blunder 


A  Common 
Stroke  in 
England 


Eaves  and 
Caridia 
Attacked  by 
Half-Volley 


as  it  is  really  played  from  the  false  volleying 
position,  it  will  be  treated  here. 

Primarily,  I  consider  the  half-volley  under 
all  circumstances  to  be  an  error.  One  simply 
should  not  play  the  stroke,  and  there  seems  little 
excuse  for  being  forced  to  play  it.  When  you 
are  far  enough  back  for  the  ball  to  bound  at  all, 
you  have  time  to  go  further  back  or  come  for- 
ward and  volley  the  ball  properly.  If  caught  in 
such  a  position,  a  man's  judgment  should  decide 
whether  he  should  go  forward  or  back.  If  his 
opponent  is  coming  forward,  the  probabilities 
are  that  he  should  retire  or  he  will  be  caught  on 
the  next  play  without  hope  of  defending  his  posi- 
tion. Conversely,  if  the  opponent  is  retiring,  he 
should  go  forward  and,  meeting  the  ball  with  a 
low  volley,  try  to  place  his  return  deep  enough 
to  be  safely  in  the  net  position  for  the  next  shot. 

It  is  quite  common  to  half-volley  in  Eng- 
land, but  the  use  of  the  stroke  has  been  a  natural 
sequence  of  the  faulty  volleying  position  that 
they  use  over  there.  To  volley  from  near  the 
service-line  means  to  court  such  embarrassment, 
and  to  half -volley  in  return  is  simply  to  play  a 
weak  defensive  shot  that  entails  much  risk  for 
even  the  most  expert  users  of  the  stroke,  without 
any  compensating  advantage. 

Dr.  Eaves  was  perhaps  the  most  expert 
player  of  the  half-volley  the  world  has  seen,  and 
he  practiced  the  stroke  constantly  in  match  play 
and  with  some  success.  In  his  hands  and  as  used 
by  some  other  Englishmen,  notably  G.  A.  Caridia, 
it  has  been  used  as  a  weapon  of  attack,  but  its 
chief  merit,  if  it  has  any  merit  at  all,  lies  in  gain- 


VOLLEYING 


119 


ing  time  to  catch  the  opponent  out  of  position. 
But  even  this  could  have  been  done  better  by 
stepping  in  a  yard  or  two  and  volleying. 

Eaves  frequently  came  only  half  way  for- 
ward on  his  service,  perhaps  to  just  behind  the 
service-line,  and  then  stepping  in  to  meet  the 
next  return,  would  half-volley  it  deeply  and  then 
go  on  in  two  or  three  yards  further  to  take  up 
his  usual  volleying  position  for  the  attack.  But 
a  man  who  was  faster  on  his  feet  than  Eaves — 
the  genial  doctor  was  notoriously  slow  in  this  re- 
gard— would  have  secured  the  same  position  by 
one  rush  without  half-volleying,  and  have  risked 
much  less  in  doing  it. 

Williams  sometimes  half-volleys  now,  but 
his  use  of  the  stroke  comes  almost  entirely  from 
his  constant  desire  to  play  a  rising  ball  and  keep 
his  opponent  on  the  run. 


Sometimes 
Used  as  a 
Toward 
the  Net 


120      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS. 


Is  It  Sound  to 
Volley  from 
Service-Line? 


Very  Few 
Find  It  So 


Do  you  consider  it  sound  to  volley  from  the  serv- 
ice-line? 


R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND :    Yes. 

T.  C.  BUNDY  :    Only  a  few  can  do  it  successfully. 

K.  H.  BEHR  :     As  part  of  advance  to  net  only. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER:     No;  exceptions,  one  should  be 
able  to  do  so. 

R.  D.  LITTLE  :     No. 
H.  H.  HACKETT:     No. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT:     Never. 

J.  C.  PARKE  :    Distinctly  so. 

C.  P.  DIXON  :     Not  as  a  rule,  but  volleying  from  ser- 
vice-line should  be  cultivated  to  a  certain  extent  as  it 
certainly  offers  an  effective  mode  of  attack. 

R.  L.  MURRAY:    No. 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :     No. 

W.  M.  WASHBURN:     Only  when  unavoidable. 
ELIA  FOTTRELL:     No. 
CLARENCE  HOBART:     No. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST:    No. 
J.  R.  STRACHAN  :     No. 
C.  R.  GARDNER  :     No. 
A.  S.  DABNEY:    No. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :     I  think  it  preferable  and  more 
aggressive  to  get  in  closer  to  the  net. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :    No,  only  when  caught  there. 
W.  F.  JOHNSON  :     No. 

N.  W.  NILES:     For  some,  yes;  not  for  most. 

T.  R.  PELL:     No. 

ROBERT  LsRoY :    No. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR:     Not  generally. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:     No. 
J.  J.  ARMSTRONG:    No. 


VOLLEYING  121 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN:    No. 

W.  M.  HALL:    No. 

RICHARD  HARTE  :    No. 

DEAN  MATHEY  :    Only  when  you  are  forced  to  do  so. 

R.  C.  SEAVER:     No. 

G.  C.  SHAFER:    Yes. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL:   No. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY:     Sometimes,  not  very  often. 
LC.  WRIGHT:    No. 

W.  C.  GRANT  :  Volleying,  I  stand  close  to  net  if  op- 
ponent is  in  short  court,  and  just  inside  of  service-line 
when  opponent  is  in  deep  court. 

Do  you  consider  half -volleying  ever  aggresive? 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND:   Yes.  is  Half- 

T.  C.  BUNDY  :     Seldom.  Volleying  Ever 

K.  H.  BEHR:     No.  Aggressive 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER  :    Seldom. 
R.  D.  LITTLE  :    Not  as  a  habit. 
H.  H.  HACKETT:    No. 
B.C.WRIGHT:    No. 

J.  C.  PARKE  :    No. 
C.  P.  DIXON  :    Yes. 
R.  L.  MURRAY:    No. 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :    No. 

W.  M.  WASHBURN:    Rarely. 

ELIA  FOTTRELL:    Yes,  for  keeping  the  net. 

CLARENCE  HOBART  :     Sometimes. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST  :   No. 

J.  R.  STRACHAN  :  Very  seldom. 

C.  R.  GARDNER  :  No,  although  I  have  seen  some  men 
make  remarkably  good  half-volleys. 

A.  S.  DABNEY  :    If  it  can  be  done  well  like  Williams,     As  Williams 
but  not  otherwise.  Does  It,  Yes 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :  Extremely  difficult  to  be  ag- 
gressive. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :    Yes. 


122      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 

W.  F.  JOHNSON  :     Only  when  done  by  masters  of  the 
stroke  as  Caridia  or  Williams. 

N.  W.  NILES  :    Yes,  but  not  usually. 

T.  R.  PELL:    Yes. 

ROBERT  LEROY:     Very  seldom.     Only  when  impos- 
sible to  make  another  stroke. 

Few  A.  M.  SQUAIR  :  These  may  be  part  of  an  attack,  i.  e., 

Recommend  may  be  necessary  while  on  the  way  to  the  net.    In  them- 

Stroke  selves  they  are  defensive,  not  aggressive. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:    Very  rarely. 

J.  J.  ARMSTRONG:    No. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :     Very  exceptionally. 

W.  M.  HALL  :     Only  luckily  perhaps. 

RICHARD  HARTE  :     No. 

DEAN  MATHEY:     I  believe  the  half-volley  is  at  best 
A  defensive  stroke,  or  at  least  it  should  be  so. 

R.  C.  SEAVER:    Yes. 

G.  C.  SHAFER:     No. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL  :     No. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY  :     Yes,  if  it  gets  your  opponent  out 
of  position. 

I.  C.  WRIGHT:    No. 
W.  C.  GRANT:    No. 

Do  you  consider  underhand  volleying  aggressive? 

Is  Underhand  R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND :     Yes. 

Volleying  T.  C.  BUNDY  :  No.  Volleying  from  service-line,  half- 

Aggressivef  volleVj  etc  ?  only  defensive. 

K.  H.  BEHR:     Sometimes  it  is,  especially  a  side  top- 
spin  volley. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER:    Often. 

R.  D.  LITTLE:     The  higher  the  volley  the  more  ag- 
gressive, meaning  usually  closer  to  the  net. 

H.  H.  HACKETT  :    No. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT  :  No. 

Parke  and  J.  C.  PARKE:     No. 

Dixon  Both  C.  P.  DIXON  :     No,  except  on  very  rare  occasions. 

Say  "No"  R  L  MURRAY  :     No,  absolutely  not. 


VOLLEYING 


123 


G.  M.  CHURCH  :     Only  in  the  case  of  a  few  players, 
who  hit  underhand  volleys  with  a  big  top-spin. 
W.  M.  WASHBURN  :     Often. 
ELIA  FOTTRELL:    Sometimes. 
CLARENCE  HOBART:     No,  but  very  necessary. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST:     Too  risky  and  not  aggressive; 
the  nearer  the  net  the  better. 

J.  R.  STRACHAN  :  W.  M.  Johnston  and  Melville 
Long  often  use  the  underhand  volley  and  they  are  two  of 
the  best  volleyers  that  I  have  seen. 

C.  R.  GARDNER:  Hardly,  but  a  very  good  under- 
hand volleyer  may  make  it  so. 

A.  S.  DABNEY  :     No.    Only  do  it  when  you  have  to. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :  Extremely  difficult  to  be  ag- 
gressive. 

F.  C.  IN  MAN  :     Yes.    Any  volleying  is  aggressive  as 
quick  play  to  keep  other  player  in  poor  position. 

W.  F.  JOHNSON  :    No. 

N.  W.  NILES:  Not  usually;  sometimes  Clothier 
makes  it  so. 

T.  R.  PELL:     Sometimes. 

ROBERT  LEROY:  No,  except  once  in  a  while,  when 
meeting  a  long  slow  shot  or  lob  near  the  base-line  by  a 
long  underhand  volley  on  which  to  run  to  the  net. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR  :  These  may  be  part  of  an  attack,  i.  e., 
may  be  necessary  while  on  the  way  to  the  net.  In  them- 
selves they  are  defensive,  not  agressive. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:     No. 

J.  J.  ARMSTRONG  :     Yes,  if  close  to  the  net. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :     No. 

W.  M.  HALL  :    Yes,  it  can  be  made  so. 

RICHARD  HARTE  :    No. 

DEAN  MATHEY:  No,  I  believe  one  should  always 
volley  down  when  possible  and  think  therefore  that  an 
underhand  volley  is  essentially  a  defensive  volley. 

R.  C.  SEAVER:  Not  so  aggressive  as  over  or  side 
hand,  because  it  gives  your  opponent  a  much  better  op- 
portunity to  get  the  ball. 


Many 
Opinions  Differ 


Clothier's  Style 
Commended 


Majority 
Against  It 


124      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 

G.  C.  SHAFER:    No. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL:    No. 

Grant  Thinks  E.  H.  WHITNEY  :     Usually  not. 

//  Prevents  I.  Q  WRIGHT :     No. 

Lobbing  w    c    QRANT:     No,  but  it  is  safer,  as  it  prevents 

being  lobbed  overhead. 


Copyright  by  Underwood  &  Underwood 


MAURICE  McLoucHLiN 
Extreme  American  Twist  Service 

In  this  remarkable  photograph,  McLoughlin  is  shown  balanced  on  one 
foot  just  before  hitting  the  ball.  The  backward  bend  of  the  body  is 
necessary  in  order  to  strike  the  ball  upward  and  give  it  the  necessary 
forward  twist.  The  sharp  bend  of  the  elbow  allows  the  racket  head  to 
drop  low  and  increase  the  upward  swing. 


THOMAS  C.  BUNDY 
Reverse  Twist  American  Service 

The  racket  is  moving  upward  in  this  picture  and  the  ball  is  clearly  shown 
against  its  strings.  Bundy  is  probably  the  most  effective  user  of  this 
delivery  and  he  has  perfected  the  service  so  that  he  controls  the  ball  very 
well.  The  racket  passes  from  right  to  left  across  in  front  of  the  player. 


THE  SERVICE 


125 


Cardinal 
Points  to 
Keep  in  Mind 


x. 


THE  SERVICE 

•^% 

FIVE  CARDINAL  POINTS  TO  REMEMBER: 

1 — Serve  from  as  high  up  in  the  air  as  possible. 

2 — Every  service  must  be  played  with  more  or 
less  twist. 

3 — Don't  try  to  make  your  first  service  too  fast, 
and  don't  let  your  second  be  so  weak  it  can 
be  handled  severely.  A  weak  second  ser- 
vice is  a  deadly  sin. 

4 — Place  your  service  to  the  unexpected  sidef  or 
to  the  weakest  point  of  the  adversary. 

5 — Don't  use  the  American  twist  service  unless 
you  have  ample  physical  stamina  and  keep 
in  perfect  condition. 


IT  IS  truly  wonderful  the  accuracy  that  is     Wonderful 
reached  in  serving.   It  looks  easy  enough  to    Accuracy  of 

serve  the  ball  into  a  court  thirteen  and  a 
half  by  twenty-one  feet,  but  the  space  is  really 
much  smaller  than  it  seems  because  the  greater 
part  of  the  prescribed  area  near  the  net  is  impos- 
sible to  reach.  With  a  fast  service,  the  ball  drops 
almost  invariably  within  the  last  six  feet  of  the 
service  court  and  in  championship  play  generally 
in  the  last  three  feet. 

The   problem   among   fairly   good   players 


the  Service 


126      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Narrow  Space 
Available 


Many 
Variations 
of  Service 


How  High  to 
Throw  Up 
the  Ball 


therefore  is  to  serve  the  ball  into  a  strip  of  court 
some  fifty-five  feet  away  from  the  server,  four- 
teen feet  wide  and  from  three  to  six  feet  deep. 
And  what  is  more  difficult  still,  to  outwit  the 
striker-out  by  placing  the  ball  in  this  small  space 
so  he  cannot  handle  it  easily. 

The  reason  for  the  overhead  service  is  ap- 
parent on  the  surface,  for  it  is  necessary  to  get 
as  far  up  over  the  net  as  possible  in  order  to  bring 
the  ball  down  inside  of  the  court  while  still  serv- 
ing fast.  There  is  practically  no  other  way  to 
serve  with  speed.  The  stroke  is  like  an  overhead 
volley  and  must  be  executed  with  speed  and  neces- 
sarily with  even  more  accuracy  than  the  volley. 

There  are  scores  of  variations  of  the  method 
of  overhead  serving,  but  all  are  made  high  up 
over  the  right  (or  left,  for  a  left-handed  player) 
shoulder,  and  the  ball  is  given  a  twist  in  striking, 
in  varying  degrees  from  the  almost  straight  slow 
old-fashioned  service  to  the  most  extreme  Amer- 
ican twist.  The  reverse  American  twist  can  hard- 
ly be  classed  as  an  overhead  service,  as  the  ball 
is  hit  out  to  the  side  and  barely  above  the  height 
of  the  shoulder. 

The  height  at  which  the  ball  should  be 
thrown  varies  a  good  deal.  R.  F.  Doherty  used 
to  toss  the  ball  from  six  to  eight  feet  in  the  air 
and  wait  majestically  with  racket  poised  behind 
him  to  strike  when  it  fell.  On  the  other  hand,  his 
own  brother  went  to  the  other  extreme  and  tossed 
the  ball  barely  high  enough  to  clear  his  head, 
striking  it  just  as  it  reached  its  maximum  height, 
and  then  with  a  racket  that  did  not  reach 


SERVICE 


127 


as  high  as  he'  could  stretch.  Somewhere  be- 
tween these  two  is  doubtless  the  best  point,  neither 
too  high  nor  too  low,  but  the  exact  height  must  be 
governed  by  the  style  and  the  individual  prefer- 
ence of  the  server. 

As  the  server  looks  up  to  strike  the  ball  he 
should  bend  over  somewhat  backward,  the  amount 
of  this  bend  again  depending  on  the  style  of  the 
service  adopted,  and  the  amount  of  twist  desired. 
In  bending  backward,  you  are  able  to  reach  more 
directly  up  into  the  air,  and  as  the  body  straight- 
ens out  again,  the  out-twist  is  put  on  the  ball  and 
the  forward  motion  needed  to  give  the  ball  speed 
is  added.  In  the  American  twist  service,  this 
bending  backward  is  exaggerated  to  a  very 
marked  degree,  but  the  extra  bend  is  for  the  pur- 
pose of  striking  the  ball  while  the  racket  is  still 
moving  in  an  upward  direction.  However,  the 
American  services  will  be  taken  up  shortly. 

The  need  for  twisting  the  ball  is  most  im- 
perative. Hardly  any  service  can  be  made  with 
speed  unless  the  ball  is  made  to  rotate  on  its  own 
axis.  The  twist  is  needed  to  keep  it  more  directly 
on  its  course — in  other  words,  to  control  the  ball 
better — and  it  is  also  necessary  to  bring  it  down 
inside  the  court.  This  whole  question  of  twist  or 
rotation  and  the  underlying  principles  involved 
will  be  taken  up  in  more  detail  in  another  chapter, 
but  in  considering  the  service,  it  must  be  remem- 
bered that  twist  is  essential  to  success. 

Omitting  from  consideration  for  the  moment 
the  newer  American  twist  services,  it  may  safely 
be  said  that  ninety  per  cent,  of  the  services  deliv- 


H eight  Must 
Be  Governed 
by  Preference 


Bending 
Backward 
Depends 
on  Twist 


The  Need  of 
Twist  in  All 
Services 


128      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Overhead 
Out-Twists 
Most  Useful 


Service  Used 
to  Be  Made 
on  the  Run 


Weak  Second 
Service  a 
Deadly  Sin 


ered  among  good  tennis  players  in  all  lands  are 
overhead  out-twists  and  this  delivery  is  unquest- 
ionably the  most  useful  method  known.  The  speed 
and  low,  deep  bound  necessary  to  keep  the  striker 
well  back  is  provided  and  the  control  of  direction  is 
also  well  developed.  Another  important  point  in 
its  favor  is  that  this  style  of  service  is  economical 
of  the  player's  strength  and  its  motion  is  inclined 
to  carry  the  server  rapidly  forward  from  the  base- 
line, so  that  if  he  follows  the  delivery  up  toward 
the  net  to  volley  the  first  return,  it  will  help  him 
get  started  in  the  right  direction  without  loss  of 
time.  In  fact,  this  delivery  is  so  much  in  unison 
with  a  forward  step  that  it  was  a  common  habit  of 
the  extreme  net  players  not  many  years  ago  to 
make  the  service  while  moving  forward,  practi- 
cally on  the  run,  until  a  new  foot-fault  rule  was 
put  on  the  statute  books  to  prevent  this  style  of 
play. 

It  is  advisable,  then,  for  the  young  player  to 
learn  this  service  before  any  other  and  to  drill 
himself  in  its  use  until  he  is  able  to  serve  the  ball 
into  the  opposing  court  with  great  regularity.  A 
common  fault  in  its  use,  however,  must  be 
avoided,  in  the  desire  to  play  the  first  ball  so  fast 
that  it  seldom  lands  inside  the  court.  Almost  in- 
variably the  man  who  tries  to  serve  his  first  ball 
with  extreme  severity  moderates  his  second  ser- 
vice so  much  that  it  is  distinctly  weak. 

A  weak  second  service  is  a  deadly  sin,  be- 
cause it  ruins  the  chance  to  run  in  safely,  because 
it  turns  the  attack  directly  over  to  the  striker,  be- 
cause it  opens  the  way  to  the  most  dangerous 


THE  SERVICE 


129 


passing  shots,  because  it  permits  the  adversary  to 
pound  this  second  ball  to  almost  any  part  of  the 
court  at  pleasure,  and  because  of  its  moral  effect 
on  the  server,  discouraging  him  in  future  play. 

Two  services  of  average  speed  for  first  and 
second  delivery  are  much  stronger  than  one  ter- 
rific "swipe"  and  a  weak  "pop"  second  delivery. 
The  man  who  keeps  a  good  average  fast  pace  on 
his  first  service  has  to  make  less  shift  in  his 
method  of  hitting  for  the  second  and  is  less  likely 
to  double  fault.  The  practice  of  the  first  delivery 
also  helps  him  to  guage  his  error  and  he  is  able 
to  keep  fair  speed  on  the  second  ball  with  less 
danger  of  a  double  fault.  In  short,  the  extremely 
fast  first  ball  is  so  radically  different  from  an  easy 
second  delivery  that  it  does  not  help  the  player  in 
guaging  his  second  delivery,  and  he  consequently 
takes  no  chances  by  playing  close  to  the  net  or 
to  the  court-lines,  and  makes  such  an  easy  service 
that  the  ball  is  frequently  killed  outright,  and 
generally  the  attack  is  turned  against  him  on  the 
next  stroke. 

Now,  having  acquired  a  fairly  fast  over- 
head, out-twist  delivery  that  is  well  under  control, 
and  a  second  delivery  that  is  of  the  same  style, 
but  just  a  trifle  slower  and  a  trifle  higher  to  be 
sure  of  clearing  the  net,  every  player  should  prac- 
tice both  until  he  is  reasonably  certain  of  avoid- 
ing the  deadly  pitfall  of  double  faults.  The  next 
point  is  the  control  of  the  direction.  This  is  of 
the  utmost  importance,  and  no  style  of  service 
should  be  adopted  that  does  not  permit  of  the 
most  perfect  control. 


Two  Average 
Deliveries 
the  Best 


Practice  Until 
Double  Faults 
Are  Eliminated 


130      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNXS 


Placing 
the  Service 


Selecting  the 
Best  Point 
for  Attack 


Outwitting  the 
Man  Who 
Get*  "Set" 


The  average  player  of  little  experience  con- 
siders his  duty  done  in  serving  when  the  ball  is 
safely  delivered  into  the  opponent's  court;  he  does 
not  see  the  far  greater  possibilities  of  attack  in 
placing  the  service.  To  be  sure,  the  latitude  for 
placing  is  small,  but  there  is  ample  range  to  out- 
wit the  adversary  in  even  the  small  space  allowed, 
as  his  time  is  short  in  which  to  shift  his  position 
to  meet  the  attack. 

Before  making  the  delivery,  the  position  of 
the  adversary  should  be  carefully  noted,  and  the 
position  of  his  arm  and  racket  to  see  whether  he 
is  anticipating  a  backhand  or  a  forehand  stroke. 
If  you  have  studied  your  adversary  or  are  famil- 
iar with  his  play,  you  may  already  know  his  favor- 
ite strokes  and  what  his  attitudes  mean.  If  he  is 
a  better  player  of  forehand  than  backhand  strokes, 
naturally  his  weak  spot  will  be  on  the  other  side, 
while  the  reverse  will  sometimes  be  the  case. 
Possibly  he  will  habitually  lean  in  one  direction 
or  the  other  in  anticipating  the  service,  to  be  in 
position  for  the  stroke  he  prefers,  and  this  at  once 
should  give  the  signal  to  place  the  ball  on  the 
opposite  side  of  the  court. 

I  remember  well  one  notable  case  like  this 
that  will  illustrate  my  point.  Wylie  Grant,  a  good 
tournament  player,  plays  a  ball  from  either  the 
backhand  or  forehand  side  with  much  skill,  pro- 
viding it  comes  just  where  he  expects  it.  He  gets 
"set"  in  position  for  a  certain  stroke  long  before 
the  ball  reaches  him,  and  if  the  server  on  the  op- 
posite side  gives  him  what  he  is  expecting,  he  will 
often  make  so  fast  a  return  that  the  other  man 


THE  SERVICE 


131 


is  passed  clean  or  immediately  placed  in  diffi- 
culties. Experienced  players  who  used  their 
heads,  however,  have  generally  outwitted  him  by 
watching  his  position  closely.  They  delayed  their 
service  until  Grant  got  "set,"  then  placed  the  ball 
on  the  opposite  side  from  which  it  was  expected, 
and  the  return  was  weakened  instantly;  from  the 
unexpected  side,  he  seldom  made  a  dangerous 
attack. 

When  the  server  is  running  in  to  volley,  new 
problems  complicate  the  service  that  must  be  taken 
into  consideration.  If  the  striker  is  weak  on  the 
backhand  side,  the  server  should  consistently 
place  the  service  to  his  backhand  side  until  he 
finds  that  it  is  being  anticipated.  The  striker  may 
run  around  the  backhand  attack  to  get  the  ball 
on  his  forehand,  or  he  may  anticipate  this  attack 
by  bringing  his  racket  over  into  position  for  this 
return  so  that  he  is  able  to  handle  it  better.  Then 
an  occasional  service  placed  to  the  other  extreme 
edge  of  the  court  will  bring  him  back  into  a  nor- 
mal receiving  position  again,  or  possibly  win  an 
ace  outright  by  the  very  unexpectedness  of  the 
play. 

If  the  opponent  is  found  to  select  one  direc- 
tion regularly  for  his  return  from  a  given  posi- 
tion, this  in  itself  can  be  anticipated  often  with 
success.  For  instance,  the  striker  may  cross- 
court  five  balls  for  every  one  that  he  plays  down 
the  line  from  a  backhand  return.  In  this  case, 
it  is  well  to  serve  to  the  backhand  and  watch  for 
the  cross-court  return,  leaning  a  little  to  that  side 
of  the  centre  of  the  court  at  the  risk  of  the  unex- 


Serving  to  the 

Unexpected 

Side 


When  Running 
in  With  the 
Service 


Anticipating  a 
Certain 
Favored 
Return 


132      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Centre  Theory 

Helps 

the  Server 


Serving  Down 
the  Centre  of 
the  Court 


pected  line  pass.  Or  the  opposite  may  be  the  case, 
and  can  be  anticipated  similarly. 

The  centre  theory  is  perhaps  of  more  value 
to  the  server  than  at  any  other  point  of  the  play. 
The  most  difficult  problem  the  server  has  to  solve 
is  to  get  to  the  net  safely  in  order  to  secure  the 
volleying  position.  The  centre  theory  is  more 
fully  covered  in  the  chapter  on  position  play,  but 
so  far  as  it  refers  to  the  service,  it  is  the  principle 
of  placing  the  service  in  the  centre  of  the  court 
(that  isrin  the  corners  of  the  service  courts  near- 
est the  centre  of  the  whole  court)  in  order  to  keep 
the  opponent  in  the  centre  of  his  court,  directly  in 
front  of  you  as  you  stand  at  the  middle  of  the  net 
to  volley.  This  shuts  off  his  chances  for  fast  side- 
line drives,  because  from  the  centre  any  fast  ball 
that  will  pass  you  must  be  aimed  out  of  court  and 
a  slow  ball  will  give  you  more  time  to  reach  it. 

Adopting  this  centre  theory,  which  is  most 
valuable  in  a  volleying  net  attack,  the  server 
should  stand  all  the  time  very  close  to  the  centre 
of  his  base-line  to  serve.  By  shifting  a  yard  to  the 
right  or  left  he  can  serve  into  the  left  or  right 
court,  and  still  keep  his  delivery  right  down  the 
centre  by  placing  each  ball  close  to  the  dividing 
line  of  his  opponent's  service  courts. 

Against  a  right-handed  player,  this  will 
bring  his  backhand  presented  to  the  delivery  al- 
ways in  the  right  court  and  his  forehand  in  the 
left  court.  If  his  backhand  is  weak,  this  will  make 
the  right  court  the  more  productive  and  the  left 
court  always  dangerous  if  his  forehand  stroke 
is  severe.  However,  this  attack  can  be  varied 


THE  SERVICE 


133 


whenever  one  finds  an  opponent  is  handling  these 
deliveries  in  an  embarrassing  manner.  If  the  left 
court  service  is  being  pounded  with  a  forehand 
drive  that  is  too  fast  to  handle,  an  occasional 
service  far  out  to  the  adversary's  backhand  to- 
ward the  extreme  edge  of  the  court,  will  often 
catch  him  by  surprise,  and  if  it  does  not  score 
a  clean  ace  will  embarrass  his  return  in  conse- 
quence so  that  an  easy  chance  for  a  kill  will  re- 
sult. 

Often  the  backhand  weakness  of  an  antag- 
onist will  make  it  advisable  to  work  on  the  centre 
theory  only  in  the  right-hand  court  where  it  at- 
tacks his  backhand,  and  to  place  the  service  far  to 
the  edge  of  the  court  regularly  in  the  left  court. 
In  this  case  the  path  of  the  server  in  running  in 
must  be  further  to  his  right  to  cover  the  danger- 
ous opening  along  his  right  side-line,  unless  the 
opponent  has  shown  a  marked  tendency  to  cross- 
court  his  backhand  returns. 

I  have  sometimes  found  it  advisable  against 
a  player  whose  backhand  weakness  was  pro- 
nounced to  serve  in  the  right  court  from  the  cen- 
tre and  the  left  from  the  extreme  corner  to  shut 
out  the  other  man's  forehand  shot,  and  then  an 
occasional  quick  service  down  the  centre  line,  will 
often  surprise  him  into  a  weak  return  or  an  out- 
right error,  particularly  if  served  from  the  ex- 
treme position  at  the  corner  that  would  indicate 
another  attempt  to  force  the  weak  backhand  side. 

The  American  twist  services  have  revolu- 
tionized most  standard  theories  of  serving  in 
lawn  tennis,  and  to-day  they  are  a  recognized  and 


Point  of 
Attack  Must 
Be  Varied 


Backhand 
Weakness 
Offers 
Openings 


Serving  from 
the  Extreme 
Corner 


134      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Value  of  the 

American 

Twist 


Little's 
Opinion 
Against  It 


McLoughlin 
Also  Limits 
Its  Value 


orthodox  feature  of  the  game.  In  a  previous 
volume  published  over  ten  years  ago  by  the 
present  writer,  the  opinion  was  expressed  that 
these  extreme  services  entailed  so  mudi 
physical  effort  and  forced  such  a  constant 
physical  strain  on  the  player's  endurance,  that  it 
was  doubtful  whether  the  effort  was  not  too  great 
to  make  the  delivery  profitable.  Certainly,  in 
some  cases  it  has  proven  to  be  so,  but  there  have 
been  so  many  cases  in  which  this  service  has 
proven  a  weapon  of  attack  that  has  won  matches, 
tournaments  and  championships — so  many  indi- 
viduals who  have  consistently  withstood  the  strain 
on  back,  arms  and  shoulders  and  still  shown  the 
needed  strength  to  win,  that  I  must  modify  this 
position  somewhat. 

Raymond  Little,  whose  opinions  I  consider 
as  sound  as  those  of  any  other  writer  on  the  game, 
declared  only  two  years  ago  in  his  "Tennis  Tac- 
tics" (p.  34)  :  "Personally,  I  believe  the  Amer- 
ican twist  service  requires  a  waste  of  energy  and 
that  such  a  strong  defence  has  been  built  up 
against  it  that  it  has  greatly  lost  its  former  ef- 
fectiveness/' 

Maurice  McLoughlin,  perhaps  the  most  suc- 
cessful of  all  users  of  this  stroke,  declares  in  his 
recently  published  book  (p.  74) :  "I  do  not  advise 
the  average  player  to  attempt  an  extreme  amount 
of  break  through  the  use  of  the  American  service. 
*  *  *  The  body,  principally  the  back,  must 
snap  forward  as  the  racket  comes  onto  the  ball ;  at 
the  same  time  this  must  be  accompanied  with  a 
twisting  motion  which  I  have  heretofore  described 


THE  SERVICE 


135 


as  the  'rotation'  at  the  waist.  All  this  creates  a 
tremendous  amount  of  strain  on  the  back 
muscles,  one  that  very  few  players  are  physically 
capable  of  long  withstanding." 

Unless  played  extremely  well  and  varied  con- 
stantly, opponents  soon  become  accustomed  to  the 
erratic  bound  of  the  twist  services  and  they  lose 
much  of  their  terrors.  However,  they  are 
played  effectively  by  many  players  in  these  days, 
and  there  is  no  question  that  these  deliveries  can 
be  mastered  and  used  successfully  by  others  in 
match  play,  provided  always  that  the  user  is 
physically  strong,  particularly  in  his  back  mus- 
cles, and  keeps  his  physical  condition  well  up  to 
the  mark  when  long  matches  are  expected,  for  this 
service  is  a  heavy  drain  on  the  endurance. 

The  American  twist  service  was  invented  by 
Holcombe  Ward  and  its  introduction  was  not  so 
much  a  sequence  of  deliberate  plans  to  accomplish 
a  certain  result  as  an  accidental  discovery  stum- 
bled upon  while  he  was  working  in  another  direc- 
tion. Ward  was  experimenting  with  a  service 
that  would  get  him  started  quicker  in  his  dash 
toward  the  net.  He  was  always  a  volleyer  and 
poor  in  ground  strokes,  so  that  it  was  imperative 
for  him  to  reach  the  net  very  quickly.  He  found 
by  starting  his  racket  for  the  swing  far  down  be- 
hind his  back  and  bringing  it  up  with  great  ra- 
pidity and  striking  the  ball  slightly  before  it 
reached  the  top  of  its  swing  that  the  momentum 
carried  him  forward  so  rapidly  that  he  got  into 
motion  much  quicker  than  with  the  old  style. 

But  he  soon  found  he  was  hitting  the  ball 


Twists  Lose 
Their  Terrors 
When 
Undersjgoji 


Ward's 
Discovery 
Partly 
Accidental 


136      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


New  Spin 
Made  Ball  Act 
Strangely 


Weakness  of 
the  Reverse 
Twist 


How  the 
American 
Service 
Is  Made 


on  the  upward  swing  and  with  a  rising  motion  of 
the  racket  that  gave  the  ball  a  new  spin  which 
made  it  act  strangely.  The  ball  twisted  and 
turned  in  an  unexpected  manner  and  then  bounded 
from  the  ground  in  still  stranger  fashion.  This 
was  the  beginning  of  the  American  twist  service, 
and  Ward  did  not  know  until  long  afterward  the 
revolutionizing  effect  that  his  new  discovery 
would  have  on  the  game. 

Curiously  enough,  the  reverse  twist  service 
was  invented  at  just  about  the  same  time,  a  little 
ahead  in  fact,  by  Malcolm  Whitman,  but  this 
was  an  attempt  at  a  puzzling  service  pure  and 
simple,  yet  it  has  never  been  so  successful  as  the 
other  delivery.  It  does  not  help  the  server  to  get 
started  toward  the  net ;  on  the  contrary,  it  retards 
his  effort  to  get  in  motion,  throwing  the  weight 
over  from  the  right  foot  to  the  left  so  that  it  is 
necessary  to  check  this  cross  motion  of  the  weight 
before  the  player  can  start  forward. 

The  American  twist  service  is  a  combination 
of  the  forehand  drop  stroke,  played  overhead,  and 
a  side  twist.  The  ball  is  struck  a  glancing  blow 
from  the  racket  behind  the  head,  while  it  is  still 
travelling  upward.  The  racket  is  kept  in  contact 
with  the  ball  even  longer  than  in  the  drop  stroke 
off  the  ground,  and  the  strings  wiped  across  its 
surface  rapidly.  It  is  hit  on  the  near  edge  of  the 
stringing  and  the  contact  is  kept  up  as  the  racket 
rubs  across  the  ball  and  starts  its  revolving  spin, 
the  ball  leaving  the  racket  at  the  other  edge  of  the 
racket.  In  some  cases,  where  the  twist  is  severe, 
the  ball  rubs  on  the  strings  for  no  less  than 


R.  Lindley  Murray's  American  Service. 

By  many,  Murray  is  considered  the  most  brilliant  of  all  servers,  some 
good  authorities  placing  him  ahead  of  McLoughlin,  Williams  and  Brookes. 
The  end  of  his  swing  that  gives  the  break  to  the  ball  is  more  extreme 
than  any  of  the  others,  and  he  is  very  fast  at  getting  started  for  the  net. 


Champion  Williams  Serving  American  Twist. 

Williams  serves  with  less  extreme  effort  than  McLoughlin.  but  his 
delivery  is  not  so  reliable.  At  its  best,  it  is  very  effective  because  of  its 
high  deep  bound  and  speed,  although  it  has  not  the  spin  or  the  break  of 

the   Californian's. 


THE  SERVICE 


137 


six  or  eight  inches  across  the  racket,  and  I  have 
often  seen  it  strike  the  wood  of  Ward's  racket  in 
leaving. 

The  upward  and  forward  motion  of  the 
racket,  with  its  face  bent  well  over  the  ball  to  give 
it  a  glancing  blow,  imparts  a  very  rapid  forward 
spin  as  in  the  drop  stroke  off  the  ground,  and  this 
rotation,  as  will  be  shown  in  the  chapter  on  twists, 
creates  a  much  greater  friction  on  the  top  of  the 
ball  than  its  lower  side,  with  the  result  that  the 
dropping  curve  of  its  normal  flight  is  much  ac- 
centuated, far  beyond  what  ordinary  gravity 
would  cause.  This  curve  is  so  pronounced  that 
the  service  can  be  delivered  with  great  speed  and 
still  come  inside  the  court. 

But  this  is  not  the  only  motion  that  the  ball 
receives  in  this  delivery.  From  the  illustrations 
of  the  twist  service  it  will  be  apparent  that  it 
would  be  impossible  for  the  right  arm  to  strike  the 
ball  an  upward  glancing  blow~  from  behind  and 
below,  follow  over  it  and  end  there.  After  the 
arm  reaches  its  maximum  height,  the  finish 
of  the  stroke  is  made  by  carrying  the  racket  out 
to  the  right  and  then  sharply  downward  at  the 
end  of  the  service.  The  outward  side  motion 
gives  the  ball  a  second  spin  or  perhaps  alters  the 
first,  so  that  it  rotates  diagonally  on  its  own  axis 
as  it  travels  through  the  air.  It  revolves  forward, 
curving  downward,  and  to  the  right  which  makes 
it  bend  sharply  to  the  (server's)  left  as  it  flies 
through  the  air. 

Now  the  striker  has  two  motions  to  antici- 
pate as  he  tries  to  solve  the  flight  of  these  twist 


Spin 
Makes  Ball 
Drop 


Another  Curve 
to  Contend 
With 


Break  Worse 
to  Handle 
Than  the  Curve 


138      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


How  the 
Ball  Bends 
in  the  Air 


Diagrams 
Show  the 
Curves  of 
the  Ball 


Side  Spin 
Makes  the 
Erratic  Bound 


services,  the  amount  of  unnatural  drop  on  the 
ball  and  the  outward  side  curve  that  alters  its 
normal  direction.  It  swings  out  to  his  right  or 
away  from  his  forehand,  but  if  he  is  familiar  with 
the  delivery,  he  will  not  follow  it  far,  since  there  is 
still  another  feature  of  this  service  to  contend 


t 

/ 

t 

'. 

1 

1 

f 

1 

f 

1 

f 

1 

"W  i 

\ 

1 

1 

1 

t 

\ 

\ 

1 

"""1  

t 

1 

1 

f 

\ 

I 

1 

| 

f 

V 

1 

'  1 

1  \ 

1 

\ 

t 

\ 

1 

1 

t 

1 

1 

I 

1 

1 

f 

1 

1                    Q, 

-J>  

1 

1 

\ 

\ 

\ 

1 

\ 

*x 

* 

\ 

IL 

\ 

1 

£ 

1 

/ 

1 

/ 

/ 

1  

7~ 

1 

/ 

\         ' 

\j 

!\ 
\ 
\ 

\ 

\ 

\ 

& 

«_s 

\ 

AMERICAN    TWIST 


REVERSE    TWIST 


with  in  the  unnatural  bound,  or  "break"  from  the 
ground.  The  side  spin  that  makes  the  ball  bend  in 
going  through  the  air  has  a  different  effect  when 
it  strikes  the  ground. 

Spinning  sharply  from  right  to  left,  the  bairs 
rotation  is  the  same  as  that  of  a  billiard  ball  with 


THE  SERVICE 


139 


right  English,  and  when  it  strikes  the  ground  it 
has  the  same  effect  on  the  sphere  as  the  English 
has  when  the  billiard  ball  strikes  the  cushion  of 
the  table.  The  spinning  motion  drags  it  sharply 
out  of  the  line  of  its  flight,  in  the  direction  of  the 
spin,  or  to  the  striker's  left  and  the  server's  right. 
This  gives  it  an  unnatural  bound  at  a  sharp  angle 
from  its  flight,  and  a  curve  that  brings  it  in 
toward  the  striker's  body  and  somewhat  offsets 
the  curve  of  its  flight  through  the  air. 

The  greatest  power  in  the  attack  of  the 
'American  service  lies  in  the  hidden  ability  to  vary 
the  amount  of  twist  that  the  ball  receives  with  the 
most  delicate  adjustment  of  the  wrist  during  the 
stroke.  By  easing  up  slightly  on  the  pressure  as 
the  racket  shifts  from  the  upward  to  the  side  mo- 
tion, the  ball  can  be  allowed  to  leave  the  strings 
before  the  side  motion  is  accentuated,  and  then 
it  will  bound  very  much  less  out  of  its  natural 
course,  if  at  all.  By  delaying  contact  with  the  ball 
until  the  racket  has  reached  its  maximum  height, 
so  the  upward  and  forward  spin  is  not  given, 
the  service  can  be  turned  with  little  per- 
ceptible change  in  the  swing  into  a  fast  overhead 
delivery  that  will  bend  very  little  out  of  its  course, 
and  bound  almost  true,  jumping  away  from  the 
striker  so  fast  as  to  score  an  ace  if  he  has  been 
deceived  into  expecting  a  twist  delivery. 

McLoughlin  often  scores  aces  by  this  varia- 
tion of  the  service  and  he  keeps  his  antagonists 
constantly  on  the  anxious  seat  to  discover  whether 
the  delivery  they  must  handle  has  much  or  little 
top-spin,  side-twist  and  break.  With  such  varia- 


Like  the 

"English' 

Billiards 


of 


Easing  Up  in 
the  Swing 
Changes  Effect 


McLoughlin 
Clever  at  This 
Change 


140      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Long,  Deep 
Bound  an 
Advantage 


Better  to  Let 
Ball  Spin 
Itself  Out 


Action 

Reversed  by  a 
Left-Handed 
Player 


tions  the  service  is  doubly  dangerous,  but  if 
served  always  with  the  same  amount  of  spin,  the 
striker  soon  becomes  accustomed  to  its  eccentrici- 
ties and  allows  for  the  curve  and  bound,  so  that 
he  is  able  to  hit  it  as  well  as  a  straight  service, 
and  it  is  necessarily  slower. 

One  feature  of  the  twist  service  adds  to  its 
strength,  and  this  is  the  long,  deep  bound  that  the 
over-twist  gives.  Its  tendency  is  to  give  a 
high  bound  that  forces  the  striker  well  out  of 
court  in  order  to  give  the  ball  room.  It  is  spin- 
ning so  rapidly  even  after  it  leaves  the  ground 
that  it  is  a  difficult  ball  to  play  while  rising,  al- 
though some  players  have  succeeded  in  return- 
ing it  this  way,  from  the  top  of  the  bound  well 
over  the  shoulder,  and  thus  get  the  advantage  of 
being  able  to  drive  it  downward  over  the  net  in 
return. 

However,  most  players  will  find  it  better  to 
let  this  difficult  service  spin  itself  out  to  the  end 
of  its  bound,  and  while  this  drives  the  striker  fur- 
ther from  the  net,  to  be  sure,  it  lessens  the  danger 
of  putting  it  out  of  court  because  of  the  spinning 
motion  which  is  then  nearly  lost,  and  it  also  gives 
more  time  to  guage  the  flight  and  angle. 

Played  by  a  left-handed  man,  the  action  of 
the  twist  service,  so  far  as  the  striker  is  con- 
cerned, is  of  course  just  reversed,  the  ball  curving 
to  the  (server's)  right  and  breaking  to  his  left. 
Dwight  Davis  used  the  service  at  the  same  time 
that  Ward  did,  and  when  they  played  doubles  to- 
gether both  variations  were  offered  to  their  an- 
tagonists, since  Davis  is  a  left-handed  player. 


THE  SERVICE 


141 


The  same  effect  as  regards  curve  in  the  air 
and  break  from  the  ground  appears  in  the  reverse 
twist  service,  as  originally  served  by  Malcolm 
Whitman  and  as  served  now  by  Thomas  Bundy. 
However,  this  variety  is  never  so  dangerous  as 
the  other,  because  it  is  served  with  the  racket  in 
front  of  the  body,  the  motion  of  the  racket  cross- 
ing in  front  of  the  face  from  right  to  left  upward, 
which  gives  the  opposite  spin  to  the  ball  from 
the  regular  "American"  service. 

But  this  motion  gives  no  such  speed  as  the 
other  service,  as  the  weight  of  the  body  cannot  be 
used  to  help  it  as  in  the  other  delivery.  The  ball 
travels  slower  and  bounds  shorter,  but  a  trifle 
more  sharply  to  the  side,  as  the  forward  motion 
that  must  be  overcome  is  less. 

Length  is  of  great  value  in  all  services,  par- 
ticularly when  the  server  is  running  up  to  the  net. 
It  keeps  the  striker  further  away  from  the  vol- 
leyer,  it  makes  his  stroke  therefore  a  longer  one 
and  more  difficult  to  make,  it  gives  the  volleyer 
more  time  to  get  into  position  to  play,  and  after 
he  is  there  more  time  to  anticipate  the  return  of 
his  antagonist.  The  short  service,  particularly 
when  it  has  a  high  bound,  is  simply  an  encourage- 
ment to  being  passed.  However,  there  have  been 
some  short  services  that  have  succeeded.  Harold 
Hackett's  is  not  always  deep,  but  he  places  it  with 
wonderful  accuracy  and  succeeds  in  keeping  down 
the  bound  so  that  it  is  very  difficult  to  get  an  ag- 
gressive return  from  it. 

Another  short  service  that  was  very  decep- 
tive was  that  used  by  Dr.  Eaves,  the  English  ex- 


Same  Effects  In 
the  Reverse 
Twists 


Cross  Motion 
Checks  Speed 


Length  of 
Great  Value  in 
All  Services 


Short  Service 
Must  Have  a 
Low  Bound 


142      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Risk  Double 
Fault 

Rather  Than 
Weak  Second 


pert  who  was  in  America  some  years  ago.  Eaves 
used  a  very  sharp  out-twist  that  kept  the  bound 
low  and  he  placed  his  service  well  to  the  sides  of 
the  court  so  that  it  was  difficult  to  pass  him. 

I  have  already  spoken  of  the  dangers  of  a 
weak  second  service,  and  this  fault  cannot  be  en- 
larged upon  too  much.  It  is  better  to  risk  a 
double  fault  than  to  offer  so  weak  a  second  delivery 
that  it  is  easily  killed  by  the  opponent.  Williams 
hazards  much  on  a  fast  second  service  and  prob- 
ably gains  more  than  he  loses  by  it  despite  the 
large  number  of  double  faults  made  in  some  of  his 
matches. 


THE  SERVICE 


143 


OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS. 

Does  the  American  twist  service  pay  the  average 
player? 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND:     No. 
T.  C.  BUNDY  :    If  severe,  yes. 
K.  H.  BEHR  :     Net  player  only. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER  :    Yes. 
R.  D.  LITTLE  :    No. 

H.  H.  HACKETT  :    I  think  so.  , 

B.C.WRIGHT:    No. 

J.  C.  PARKE  :    No. 

C.  P.  DIXON:    On  the  whole,  yes. 

R.  L.  MURRAY  :    Yes,  it  does. 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :     I  don't  think  so,  especially  if  a  man 
is  ambitious  to  rise  to  the  top  rank,  he  should  develop 
as  fast  a  service  as  possible  with  just  enough  twist  to  in- 
sure steadiness.    If  he  does  not  intend  to  enter  tourna- 
ments and  his  opponents  are  going  to  be  men  of  no  great 
experience,  the  American  twist  service  will  be  a  big  asset 
to  his  game. 

W.  M.  WASHBURN  :    I  don't  think  so. 
ELIA  FOTTRELL  :  No,  second  ball  too  easy  to  hit. 
CLARENCE  HOBART:    Hardly  now.     Good  when  it 
was  novel. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST:    No. 
J.  R.  STRACHAN  :  Yes. 

C.  R.  GARDNER  :    Not  the  average,  perhaps. 
A.  S.  DABNEY  :  Yes. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :    No. 
W.  F.  JOHNSON  :   No. 

N.  W.  NILES  :  Probably  yes,  but  not  a  good  player. 
For  its  "break,"  consistency  and  speed,  a  fast  top  service 
like  Williams's  is  better. 


Does  American 
Twist  Pay 
Average 
Play  erf 


Church  Thinks 
It  Does  Not 


Niles  Thinks 
Fast  Top 
Service  Better 


144      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Reverse  Better 
for  Left- 
Handed  Player 


Should  Second 
Service  Be 
Omitted  f 


T.  R.  PELL:    Yes. 

ROBERT  LERov:  Yes,  unless  he  is  a  left-hander,  in 
which  case  he  should  cultivate  the  double  twist  (like 
Whitman's,  Clothier's  and  Bundy's)  only. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR:    No. 
G.  F.  TOUCHARD  :  No. 
J.  J.  ARMSTRONG  :  No. 
LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :    No. 
RICHARD  HARTE  :    No. 

DEAN  MATHEY:  Not  for  the  twist  he  gets,  merely 
for  the  control. 

R.  C.  SEAVER  :  Yes,  if  he  can  stand  the  strain. 
G.  C.  SHAFER:  Yes. 
S.  H.  VOSHELL:    Yes. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY  :     Not  unless  it  is  mastered. 
I.C.WRIGHT:  No. 

W.  C.  GRANT:    No. 

Would  the  game  be  improved  by  allowing  only 
one  service  in  singles?  In  doubles? 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND :    No.    No.    No. 

T.  C.  BUNDY  :    Not  in  either. 

K.  H.  BEHR:    (1)  No.    (2)    Yes. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER  :    Do  not  believe  so.    Such  a  radi- 
cal change  would  mean  an  entire  reversal  of  lawn  tennis 
tactics. 

R.  D.  LITTLE:   Yes. 

H.  H.  HACKETT:   No.   No. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT:    I  am  in  favor  of  but  one  service, 
only  for  big  match  play,  however. 

J.  C.  PARKE:  No.  If  umpires  would  enforce  the 
present  foot-fault  rule  by  penalizing  all  doubtful  services 
(as  per  instructions  of  our  L.  T.  A.)  it  would  be  a  suffi- 
cient handicap  upon  the  server. 

C.  P.  DIXON  :     On  this  point  I  am  not  convinced. 
Should  say  it  would  not  improve  singles  play  to  allow  only 
one  service,  but  am  rather  in  favor  of  allowing  only  one 


THE  SERVICE 


145 


service  in  doubles  as  the  service  in  doubles  plays  by  far 
too  important  a  role.  The  percentage  of  service  games 
won  in  doubles  must  be  very  high. 

R.  L.  MURRAY  :  No,  it  would  not  in  either  singles  or 
doubles.  Skill  in  serving  ought  to  be  worth  something. 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :  I  don't  think  either  game  would  be 
improved  by  allowing  only  one  service. 

W.  M.  WASHBURN  :  There  seems  to  be  no  necessity 
for  such  a  radical  change  in  the  game  at  present. 

ELIA  FOTTRELL:    No.    No. 

CLARENCE  HOBART:  Yes,  in  both.  If  every  one 
served  like  McLoughlin,  the  game  would  be  ruined. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST  :    No.    I  have  advocated  the  short- 
ening of  the  service  court,  say  one  foot,  so  that  the  service 
may  not  become  the  whole  game  and  so  spoil  every  other 
part  of  it. 

J.  R.  STRACHAN  :   No. 
C.  R.  GARDNER  :   Possibly,  but  I  think  not. 
A.  S.  DABNEY  :    In  singles,  no.    In  doubles,  perhaps, 
but  I  doubt  it.   This  could  make  an  argument. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :   I  do  not  think  so  in  either. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :    No. 
W.  F.  JOHNSON:    No. 

N.  W.  NILES  :  I  believe  it  would  in  both  cases.  Have 
never  tried  or  seen  it  tried  out,  however. 

T.  R.  PELL  :  I  think  it  would  be  a  great  mistake  to 
allow  only  one  service  in  either. 

ROBERT  LEROY:  No.  The  brilliant  services  which 
are  being  developed  yearly  add  to  the  interest  of  the  game 
and  the  delight  of  the  spectators.  It  is  up  to  the  players 
to  develop  equally  brilliant  defences  to  offset  the  services. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR  :   I  think  not. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:     Not  in  my  opinion. 
J.  J.  ARMSTRONG:    No. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :     Not  in  either. 

W.  M.  HALL:  No,  it  would  change  it  completely  in 
my  opinion.  Would  probably  necessitate  enlarging  service 
court. 


Most  Players 
Oppose  Such 
a  Change 


Dewhurst  Has 

Another 

Suggestion 


Brilliant 
Services  Add 
Interest  to  the 
Game 


146     METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 

RICHARD  HARTE  :    No.  No. 

DEAN  MATHEY  :    I  do  not  think  so. 

R.  C.  SEAVER:    No. 

G.  C.  SHAFER  :   Two  serves  best  in  both. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL  :  No,  in  either  case. 

E.H.WHITNEY:  (1)  No.  (2)  No. 

I.  C.  WRIGHT  :    No. 

Grant  Thinks  W.  C.  GRANT:    Yes,  in  both  cases.    The  server  has 

Change  Would      too  much  advantage  as  the  rule  now  stands. 
Be  Wise 


THE  FIRST  RETURN 


147 


XI 


THE  FIRST  RETURN 
FOUR  CARDINAL  POINTS  TO  REMEMBER: 

iM'  !    I     •< 
1 — From  a  service  to  the  far  edge  of  the  court,  the 

pass  up  the  line  is  generally  best. 
2 — //  the  server  hangs  back,  cross-court  passes 

have  more  room  to  get  past  in  front  of  him. 
3 — When  no  passing  shot  seems  profitable,  lob  if 

opponent  comes  in  close,  or  drive  at  his 

feet  if  he  hangs  back. 
4 — In  doubles,  drive  across  the  lowest  part  of  the 

net  in  the  centre,  or  lob;  do  not  drive  at 

the  net  man. 

THERE  is  one  and  only  one  stroke  in  the 
game  that  is  restricted  to  be  played  off  the 
ground,  and  that  is  the  first  return.    Not 
only  that,  but  the  position  of  the  striker-out  is 
more  confined   and   the  difficulty  of  his   stroke 
greater  than  any  other  the  player  must  negotiate. 
For  these  reasons,  it  is  as  well,  perhaps,  to  con- 
sider the  first  return  as  a  play  in  itself  and  treat  it 
separately  from  the  other  ground-strokes  of  the 
game.  j-  ;-.^j  "!'\\$. 

The  difficulty  of  the  striker-out  has  been 
greatly  increased  of  recent  years  by  the  steady 
development  of  the  American  twist  services, 


Cardinal 
Points  to 
Keep  in  Mind 


First  Return 
Closely 
Restricted 
by  Rules 


148      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Difficulty 
Increased   by 
New  Services 


Four  Plays 
Open  When 
Server  Runs  In 


Pass  Down 
Right  Line 
Easiest 


whose  powerful  attack  has  embarrassed  him  until 
he  is  now  conservatively  believed  to  be  twenty  per 
cent,  weaker  than  his  adversary  in  the  first  duel. 
After  the  ball  has  been  brought  into  general  play, 
the  striker  can  regain  an  even  footing  with  the 
other  man  only  by  dislodging  him  from  the  net  (if 
his  adversary  is  a  volleyer  and  has  followed  up 
his  service)  or  by  passing  him. 

In  considering  the  best  handling  of  the  serv- 
ice, it  is  necessary  to  examine  the  matter  in  two 
different  lights ;  first,  when  the  server  runs  up  to 
the  net,  and  second,  when  he  does  not.  Against 
the  volleyer,  who  is  fast  on  his  feet  and  well 
settled  in  position  to  handle  the  first  return,  the 
striker  has  four  plays  open  to  him.  He  can  pass 
down  the  line,  he  can  pass  across  the  court,  he 
can  lob  over  the  server's  head  to  drive  him  back, 
or  he  can  drive  toward  the  adversary  with  a  low 
dropping  stroke  that  is  kept  close  to  the  net  or 
drops  soon  after  crossing  it  so  that  it  leaves  no 
chance  for  a  killing  volley. 

The  pass  down  the  line  is  always  easier  (for 
a  right-handed  player)  in  the  right  court,  where 
his  forehand  can  be  brought  into  the  play.  If  the 
service  is  directed  toward  the  edge  of  the  court, 
this  stroke  will  generally  offer  the  best  chance,  for 
the  cross-court  pass  is  then  more  difficult  and  the 
line  more  open  for  attack.  For  a  player  like 
Larned  or  Pell,  with  a  fine  control  of  the  back- 
hand ground-stroke,  the  line  pass  is  also  open  in 
the  left  court  when  the  service  comes  toward  the 
side. 

But  when  the  server  works  on  the  centre 


THE  FIRST  RETURN 


149 


theory,  or  without  that  plan  of  action,  keeps  his 
service  well  centred,  the  line  pass  is  not  open  for 
a  fast  ball,  and  is  more  difficult  for  a  slow  ball. 

From  the  centre  of  the  court,  the  dropping 
ball  is  often  the  best  attack  against  a  good 
smasher  to  whom  it  is  dangerous  to  lob.  The 
cross-court  shot  can  be  played  slow  from  the 
centre  to  either  side,  but  the  striker  is  always  in 
trouble  against  a  fast  server  who  centres  his 
service  and  closes  the  alleys  to  attack  by  passing 
up  the  side-lines. 

Occasionally,  a  short  cross-court  pass  will  be 
found  very  useful  from  the  outside  edge  across 
in  front  of  the  server  as  he  runs  up  to  volley. 
From  the  far  side  of  the  court,  this  allows  a 
sharper  angle  and  more  speed  because  of  the 
greater  distance  the  ball  must  travel,  and  while 
difficult  to  execute,  it  is  a  most  valuable  attack  for 
occasional  use.  This  shot  should  not  be  played 
often  because  it  will  give  the  server  an  easy 
chance  to  kill  if  he  is  able  to  anticipate  it  and 
lean  toward  the  cross-court  position  to  intercept 
it.  Your  own  position  at  the  side  of  the  court  will 
make  it  impossible  for  you  to  defend  against  his 
volley  and  the  court  will  be  open  to  him;  such  a 
shot  must  win  outright  or  not  at  all. 

But  another  side  of  this  stroke  is  its  value 
as  a  surprise  and  to  keep  the  volleyer  in  the 
centre  of  the  court.  If  the  cross-court  return  of 
the  service  is  never  used,  an  experienced  server 
will  find  it  easy  to  direct  his  attack  to  the  far  edge 
of  your  service  court  and  lean  toward  the  same 
side  to  intercept  your  attempts  at  passing  along 


From  the 
Centre,  a 
Dropping  Ball 
the  Best 


Short 

Cross-Court 
Pass  Is  Useful 


Valuable  as  a 
Surprise 


150      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Brings  Volleyer 
Back  to  Centre 
of  Court 


Beds  Wright 
Best  at  the 
Dropping 
Attack 


the  side  lines.  Then  it  is  that  the  cross-court 
shot  is  most  valuable,  and  one  or  two  successes 
with  this  stroke  will  bring  him  back  to  his  correct 
position  and  give  you  an  even  chance  once  more 
for  the  line  pass,  unless  he  centres  his  service. 

Failing  to  find  the  necessary  opening  for  any 
passing  shot,  a  dropping  ball  down  the  centre  of 
the  court  will  make  the  volleyer  block  the  ball  up- 
ward again  over  the  net,  if  you  succeed  in  making 
it  low  enough  and  drop  quickly  enough  for  the 
purpose.  Your  second  shot  may  offer  a  better 
chance  for  a  winning  pass  and  often  does.  At 
least  it  brings  the  striker  back  nearer  on  even 
terms  with  the  server  if  the  latter  does  not  make 
a  very  aggressive  stroke  from  such  a  return  of 
his  service. 

Beals  Wright  was  unquestionably  the  best 
player  ever  developed  at  this  particular  shot  and 
he  was  very  successful  in  dropping  the  ball  with  a 
slow  chop-stroke  from  the  service,  particularly 
from  a  high-bounding  service,  that  came  very 
close  to  putting  the  volleyer  on  the  defensive. 
When  the  server  came  forward  to  reach  this  "f ade- 
away"  return  before  it  got  too  low  for  an  aggres- 
sive volley,  Wright  would  lob  over  his  head  and 
he  won  many  aces  in  this  fashion.  It  is  more  dif- 
ficult to  play  a  top-spinning  ball  with  a  slow 
stroke,  but  it  can  be  done,  particularly  when  the 
bound  is  high,  and  the  top-spin  will  make  such  a 
return  much  more  difficult  for  the  opposing  vol- 
leyer to  handle  than  if  it  is  played  with  a  chop  or 
under-cut. 

The  lob  is  often  a  good  answer  to  a  difficult 


THE  FIRST  RETURN 


151 


service,  and  varied  with  passing  strokes  or  drop 
strokes  at  the  feet  of  the  server,  it  is  doubly  valu- 
able. To  lob  regularly  to  a  server  is  to  court  de- 
struction, for  he  will  soon  be  able  to  anticipate  the 
shot  and  then  only  the  deepest  and  straightest 
dropping  balls  will  not  be  killed  and  even  they  are 
likely  to  be  volleyed  back  so  deep  as  to  drive  you 
out  of  court  to  handle  them. 

But  worked  in  occasionally  with  the  other 
variations,  the  lobbing  return  has  a  tendency  to 
keep  the  server  from  coming  in  close,  which  opens 
up  his  feet  in  turn  for  the  dropping  attack. 
Particularly  is  this  valuable  from  the  extreme  left 
of  the  left  service  court,  where  the  backhand  is 
attacked,  and  the  server  is  running  up  diagonally 
to  meet  the  return.  A  lob  diagonally  to  his  back- 
hand corner  then  will  be  very  difficult  for  him  to 
reach,  and  may  make  him  turn  and  give  you  the 
attack. 

Lobbing  the  service  is  generally  better  to- 
ward the  end  of  a  hard  match,  rather  than  at  the 
start  when  the  adversary  is  fresh  and  strong. 
When  he  begins  to  show  signs  of  fatigue,  particu- 
larly if  you  are  stronger  than  he  at  the  end,  a 
lobbing  attack  generally  wins  good  results.  Per- 
haps the  most  dangerous  lob  of  all  for  the  server 
is  one  that  is  made  with  the  same  motion  used  in 
playing  a  passing  stroke.  It  is  quite  possible  to 
swing  the  arm  forward  as  though  to  drive  the  ball, 
and  turn  it  at  the  last  instant  and  lob  with  the 
face  of  the  racket  bevelled  back.  The  server  is 
almost  certain  to  lunge  forward,  if  this  stroke  is 
concealed  well,  in  order  to  volley  the  next  stroke, 


The  Lob  Is 
Often  a 
Good  Attack 


Keeps  the 
Server  from 
Creeping  Up 
Close 


Lobbing  Better 
at  End  of  a 
Match 


152      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Williams  Plays 
the  Ball  as 
It  Rises 


Is  This  Style 
Practicable? 


Timing  Must 
Be  Perfect 
for  Success 


and  he  will  then  be  caught  off  his  balance  for  a 
probable  ace. 

The  problem  of  handling  the  service  aggres- 
sively has  been  studied  from  many  angles,  and  it 
is  still  possible  that  some  better  methods  of  mak- 
ing the  first  return  may  be  developed  that  will 
make  unnecessary  any  change  in  the  rules  to  re- 
strict the  server's  present  advantage.  Champion 
Williams  and  a  few  others  have  a  method  of  their 
own  for  this  which  deserves  serious  consideration. 
Williams  believes  that  the  proper  answer  to  the 
fast  twist  services  is  to  stand  in  close  to  them  and 
take  the  ball  as  it  rises.  This,  he  contends,  will 
not  only  bring  the  striker  closer  to  the  attacking 
position,  but  it  will  gain  time  and  often  catches 
the  server  before  he  gets  settled  at  the  net. 

Theoretically,  there  is  no  doubt  that  this  is 
sound,  but  is  it  practicable  ?  That  is  the  question. 
Williams  himself  uses  this  style  with  considerable 
success  and  Brookes  also  has  a  tendency  to  play 
the  ball  as  it  rises.  In  the  hands  of  a  master  with 
the  skill  of  a  Brookes  or  a  Williams,  there  is  no 
doubt  that  such  an  attack  on  the  server  can  often 
be  made  very  powerful,  but  it  depends  for  its 
success  on  a  wonderfully  quick  co-ordination  of 
eye,  brain  and  arm  and  fast  footwork. 

The  slightest  miscalculation  of  distance  or 
time  ruins  the  stroke.  We  had  an  example  of 
that  last  year  in  the  internationals  when  Williams 
made  such  a  poor  showing  against  both  Brookes 
and  Wilding,  At  all  times  in  both  matches,  I 
thought  he  was  too  close  in  to  receive  the  service, 
and  the  ball  was  allowed  to  shoot  in  against  this 


Copyright  by  Underwood  &  Underwood 


DEAN  MATHEY 
The  English  Style  of  Volleying  With  Elbow  Low. 

Note  the  bent  wrist  that  brings  the  racket's  head  well  above  the  forearm. 

This   stroke   is   unusual   among  American   players,   but   is   more   effective 

than  the  same  method  used   for  ground-strokes.     Compare  with  pictures 

of  Behr  and  Murray  volleying. 


THE  FIRST  RETURN 


153 


faulty  position,  when  he  could  have  met  it 
with  more  power  if  he  had  stood  further  back. 
But  Williams  told  me  that  his  error  in  these 
matches  was  not  that  he  was  too  close,  but  that 
from  this  close  position  he  did  not  step  still  further 
in  to  meet  the  ball  as  it  came  up  from  the  ground. 

This  new  development,  this  tendency  to  lean 
toward  half-volleying  in  order  to  save  time,  may 
be  the  coming  development  in  the  game.  I  am 
not  prepared  to  say  that  it  will  not,  but  I  doubt 
very  much  if  such  a  play  will  ever  be  practicable 
for  the  average  tournament  player.  Even  among 
the  most  expert  players,  I  believe  it  will  fail  in 
the  hands  of  two  men  for  every  one  who  succeeds 
with  it. 

The  great  danger  of  standing  in  close  to  play 
the  ball  as  it  is  rising,  comes  from  the  chance  of  a 
clever  server  on  the  other  side  watching  your 
position  and  placing  the  service  either  out  of  reach 
or  in  such  position  as  to  make  the  return  more 
difficult  than  if  it  were  given  a  full  bound,  and  time 
were  allowed  to  take  a  full  swing  and  to  gauge  the 
flight  properly. 

Should  this  style  ever  come  into  general  use 
even  by  the  best  tournament  players,  I  have  no 
doubt  that  an  improvement  in  placing  the  service 
would  soon  follow,  and  to  prevent  being  aced  the 
striker  be  forced  back  again  into  giving  the  ball 
more  room  by  the  accuracy  of  placed  services 
which  could  not  be  handled  on  the  rise  from  close 
in.  This  play  allows  only  a  short  backswing,  or 
with  a  server  who  places  well,  only  a  half  swing, 
and  this  also  handicaps  the  power  of  the  return. 


Champion's 
Fault  in  the 
Internationals 


Danger  of 
Standing  In 
Close 


New  Services 
Might  Stop 
Such  Play 


154      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


McLoughlin 
Points  Out 
Disadvantages 


Collins  Used 
This  Style 
in  Doubles 


In  Doubles, 
First  Return 
Depends  on 
"Formation" 


McLoughlin  sums  up  the  disadvantages  of 
this  play  well  in  his  new  book,  as  follows: 
"Brookes  and  Williams  are  the  two  great  players 
who  by  preference  play  a  rising  ball,  that  is,  a  ball 
that  has  not  reached  the  height  of  its  bound — a 
method  I  emphatically  do  not  advocate  for  the 
average  player.  To  attain  such  accuracy  as  that 
of  Brookes  or  Williams  in  this  respect  requires 
not  only  a  marvellously  true  eye,  but  bespeaks 
long  years  of  faithful  practice.  The  player  who 
strokes  the  ball  on  its  rise  has  no  time  for  delibera- 
tion. Accuracy  must  become  a  matter  of  second 
nature,  but  when  once  achieved  it  gives  him  a 
tremendous  advantage  over  his  opponent.  He  is 
enabled  to  return  a  service  before  his  rival  can 
get  to  the  net;  consequently,  he  catches  the 
server  midway  of  the  court  and  at  a  disadvant- 
age." 

In  doubles,  Kriegh  Collins  used  this  style  for 
his  first  return,  stroking  the  ball  with  a  top-spin 
before  it  reached  the  top  of  its  bound,  and  he 
earned  considerable  success  with  it.  But  Collins 
was  constantly  drawn  too  close  in  while  making 
this  stroke  and  was  often  passed  by  the  server 
on  his  first  volley  as  a  result  of  his  bad  position. 
Then  too,  he  did  not  have  to  meet  the  terrific  twist 
services  that  now  threaten  the  striker. 

The  first  return  is  quite  as  important  in 
doubles  as  singles,  if  not  more  so,  and  it  is  often 
governed  by  the  "formation"  of  the  serving  side. 
The  problems  that  confront  the  striker  under 
such  conditions  will  be  analyzed  in  the  chapter  on 
doubles.  With  the  normal  conditions  on  the  other 


THE  FIRST  RETURN 


155 


side  of  the  net,  however,  the  first  return  in 
doubles  is  almost  invariably  a  cross-court  drive 
or  a  lob  over  the  net  man's  head.  Occasionally 
it  may  be  better  to  lob  over  the  server  as  he  runs 
in,  but  to  drive  at  the  net  man  is  suicidal. 

For  this  first  cross-court  drive,  the  chief  re- 
quisite is  that  it  must  be  low  and  drop  as  quickly 
as  possible.  The  net  is  lowest  in  the  centre  and 
this  favors  a  cross-court  shot.  Speed  is  of  less 
value  than  low  trajectory,  as  is  shown  by 
Hackett's  ability  at  this  play.  Without  speed, 
Hackett  makes  more  of  his  first  return  than  any 
other  player  I  know,  by  keeping  his  shot  always 
within  a  foot  and  generally  within  six  inches  of 
the  net,  and  dropping  it  before  the  server  can 
volley  it  back  at  his  feet. 

The  ball  with  an  exaggerated  top-spin,  how- 
ever, is  very  valuable  for  this  first  return  in 
doubles,  for  it  "ducks"  quickly  from  its  twist  and 
is  more  difficult  to  volley.  Alexander's  forehand 
drive  is  particularly  effective  for  this  stroke,  and 
it  was  the  combination  of  this  with  Hackett's 
clever  first  return,  more  than  any  other  feature 
of  their  play,  that  made  this  pair  the  leading  team 
of  the  country  and  kept  them  so  long  in  the 
championship  position. 

There  is  some  little  latitude — or  should  I 
say  longitude? — in  the  angle  of  placing  this  first 
cross-court  drive.  With  a  server  who  is  inclined 
to  hang  back  for  fear  of  lobbing  or  who  naturally 
assumes  a  deep  position  for  volleying,  a  short 
angle  can  often  be  found  for  an  ace  across  in 
front  of  him.  On  the  other  hand,  the  server  who 


First  Drive 
Must  Be  Low 
and 
Cross-Court 


Sharp 
Top-Spin 
Makes  Ball 
"Duck" 


Pass  in  Front 
of  Servers 
Who 
Hang  Back 


156      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 

comes  in  very  close  almost  invariably  leaves  a 
hole  between  himself  and  his  partner  that  can  be 
used  by  the  striker  for  a  fast  drive  down  the 
centre  of  the  court. 
Lob  Valuable  Except  when  the  opponents  are  exceptionally 

in  Doubles  .  .  .          ,111-1  i 

strong  in  smashing,  the  lob  is  always  a  good  re- 
turn of  the  service  in  doubles,  being  more  valuable 
than  in  singles  for  this  play.  With  a  server  who 
comes  in  so  fast  he  cannot  back  up  his  partner,  a 
lob  over  the  net  man's  head  is  frequently  a  win- 
ning shot,  or  at  least  one  that  will  turn  the  attack 
against  them.  Against  the  American  formation 
the  lob  is  especially  valuable  because  the  diagonal 
path  of  the  server  in  running  to  the  net  brings 
him  there  a  trifle  later  and  makes  it  more  difficult 
for  him  to  get  back  for  a  lob.  Over  the  net  man's 
head,  in  this  case,  will  give  a  diagonal  ball  that  will 
be  hard  for  either  man  to  reach.  Dewhurst  be- 
lieves that  this  play  will  break  up  the  American 
formation  when  well  directed. 


THE  TWIST  ON  THE  BALL 


157 


XII. 


THE  TWIST  ON  THE  BALL 


FIVE  CARDINAL  POINTS  TO  REMEMBER: 

1 — Nearly  every  tennis  ball  carries  more  or  less 
twist,  as  few  can  be  hit  without  it. 

2 — Every  spinning  ball  is  depressed  in  its  flight, 
by  the  greater  friction  of  the  air,  away 
from  the  side  that  is  twisting  forward. 

3 — The  ball  curves  in  the  opposite  direction  that 
the  racket  travelled  when  it  hit  the  ball. 

4 — When  it  bounds,  the  break  will  be  in  the  same 
direction  the  racket  took. 

5 — Top-spin  makes  the  ball  drop  and  under-cut 
keeps  it  up  longer  by  offsetting  gravity. 

FEW  LAWN  TENNIS  players  realize  how 
important  is  the  part  that  is  played  by  the 
spinning  of  the  ball  in  its  flight.    Even  so 
good  a  player  and  writer  as  Dr.  Dewhurst  speaks 
repeatedly  of  a  drive  without  twist,  and  others 
refer  to  balls  hit  in  such  a  way. 

Now,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  it  is  next  to  impos- 
sible to  hit  a  tennis  ball  with  absolutely  no  twist. 
The  roughness  of  the  felt  cover  which  clings  so 
closely  to  the  resilient  strings  of  the  racket,  makes 
the  ball  revolve  from  the  slightest  side  motion  of 
the  racket  as  the  blow  is  delivered. 


Cardinal 
Points  to 
Keep  in  Mind 


Few  Realize 
Importance 
of  Twist 


158      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Almost 
Impossible  to 
Hit  Ball 
Without  It 


Even  the 
Earth  Revolves 
on  Its  Own 


Some  Twist 
Necessary 
in  Tennis 


A  perfectly  straight-hit  ball,  which  is  intend- 
ed to  have  no  twist,  will  carry  out  this  plan  of  ac- 
tion only  if  the  swing  of  the  racket,  during  the  en- 
tire time  it  is  in  contact  with  the  ball,  is  absolutely 
parallel  with  its  flight,  and  this  is  next  to  impos- 
sible for  the  most  expert  player  to  accomplish, 
even  had  he  so  intended. 

But  this  would  not  only  be  difficult  but  a  dis- 
tinct drawback,  since  a  spherical  body  without 
twist  travels  through  the  air  less  accurately  than 
one  which  is  rotating  on  its  own  axis.  This  prin- 
ciple is  as  old  as  the  hills.  Scientists  tell  us  that 
the  largest  of  all  spherical  bodies  we  have  to  do 
with,  the  earth,  could  not  maintain  its  true  course 
through  the  heavens  if  it  did  not  have  its  own  re- 
volving motion  that  gives  us  our  day  and  night. 

Applied  to  smaller  bodies,  it  has  been  clearly 
shown  that  a  smooth  bore  cannon  cannot  fire  as 
far  or  as  accurately  as  one  with  the  rifling  that 
makes  its  shot  revolve  on  its  own  axis.  The  rifling 
was  put  there  for  that  purpose,  and  the  results 
have  proved  its  success.  Your  golf  ball,  your  base- 
ball, your  cricket  ball  and  the  spheroid  in  practi- 
cally every  other  sport  follows  the  same  rule. 

So  we  find  that  some  twist  at  least  is  neces- 
sary in  all  tennis  strokes,  both  because  it  cannot  be 
avoided  and  because  it  is  advantageous  anyway. 
Then  how  much  and  what  kind  of  twist  is  most 
desirable  ?  Ah,  that  is  a  more  difficult  question  to 
answer.  Vaile  wrote  a  whole  volume  on  "Swerve," 
as  he  called  the  unnatural  action  of  balls  in  cricket, 
lawn  tennis  and  golf  when  spinning  through  the 
air,  and  in  this  he  served  the  cause  of  lawn  tennis 


THE  Twist  ON  f HE  BALL 


159X 


better  than  in  most  of  his  other  theories  on  the 
game.  But  he  did  not  answer  the  difficult  ques- 
tions even  then,  his  work  being  more  scientific 
than  practical. 

A  spherical  body  rotating  on  its  own  axis 
encounters  more  resistance  in  the  air  on  the  side 
that  is  moving  forward  than  on  its  other  side,  and 
in  seeking  the  line  of  least  resistance  it  is  de- 
pressed slightly  away  from  that  direction.  That 
is  the  underlying  principle  on  which  is  based  the 
whole  theory  of  twist  strokes. 

It  is  the  old  question  of  the  carriage-wheel 
over  again.  The  top  of  a  carriage-wheel  fnoves 
faster  (in  relation  to  things  standing  still)  than 
does  the  bottom  because  the  forward  motion  of 
the  centre  or  axle  increases  the  motion  of  the  top 
and  decreases  the  motion  of  the  bottom.  Similarly 
the  forward  motion  of  a  flying  ball  increases  the 
movement  of  the  side  that  is  revolving  forward 
and  decreases  the  motion  of  the  opposite  side. 

In  the  theory  of  rotation,  the  maximum  curve 
will  be  reached  in  a  ball  whose  rotation  is  exactly 
equal  to  its  forward  motion.  The  back-spinning 
side  will  encounter  more  or  less  friction  according 
to  how  much  its  speed  around  its  own  axis  is 
greater  or  less  than  its  forward  progression.  In 
a  ball  that  revolves  very  rapidly,  the  back-spin- 
ning side  meets  some  friction  which  offsets  the 
pressure  from  the  opposite  side,  while  a  slow  spin- 
ning ball  has  a  similar  effect  except  that  the  pres- 
sure on  the  back-spinning  side  is  from  the  front 
instead  of  the  back.  Where  the  speed  of  revolu- 


More  Air 
Resistance  on 
Side  Moving 
Forward 


Old  Carriage 
Wheel  Problem 
Again 


Theory  of 
Rotation 


160      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Baseball  First 
Game  to  Curve 
the  Ball 


Rough 
Tennis  Ball 
Curves  Easier 


Lawford  Used 
a  Sharp  Twist 


tion  and  progression  is  exactly  equal  the  swerve  or 
bend  in  the  air  will  reach  the  maximum  possible. 

The  first  practical  demonstration  of  the  pos- 
sibilities of  the  twist  appeared  in  baseball.  Here 
the  pitcher  has  learned  to  curve  the  ball  with 
marvelous  skill.  Thrown  from  the  hand,  it  is  made 
to  spin  in  the  air  and  curve  at  will  in  one  direction 
or  another  to  deceive  the  batter.  Right  and  left 
curves  have  been  followed  by  drop  curves  and 
"upshoots"  which  seemed  to  defy  the  laws  of 
gravitation. 

Now  a  baseball  has  a  smooth  horsehide  cover 
and  weighs  several  times  what  a  tennis  ball  does. 
The  latter  is  covered  with  rough  felt  that  offers 
more  resistance  to  the  air  in  its  flight,  and  its 
weight  of  only  two  ounces  makes  it  particularly 
susceptible  to  curves  in  the  air.  But  the  contact 
of  the  racket's  strings  with  the  surface  of  the  ball 
offers  no  such  fine  control  as  a  pitcher's  grip  on  it. 
Nevertheless,  tennis  players  have  developed  many 
curves  that  have  added  variations  to  the  game  that 
have  not  been  yet  exhausted. 

The  first  use  of  this  twist  of  the  ball  appeared 
in  the  Lawford  stroke  originally  used  by  one  of 
the  earliest  English  masters  of  the  game,  who 
struck  the  ball  with  such  a  sharp  upglancing  blow 
that  it  took  on  a  rapid  forward  spin  which  made  it 
"duck"  in  an  unnatural  way  soon  after  crossing 
the  net.  This  stroke  in  a  modified  form  still  re- 
mains as  one  of  the  most  useful  drives  we  have  in 
the  modern  game  of  to-day,  and  it  is  fully  de- 
scribed in  a  previous  chapter  on  the  forehand 
strokes. 


THE  TWIST  ON  THE  BALL 


161 


The  forward  spinning  ball  has  been  matched 
by  its  reverse,  the  under-cut  stroke,  with 
sharp  backspin  that  gives  the  opposite  effect  to 
the  flight  of  the  ball.  Struck  in  this  way,  the 
greater  resistance  underneath  the  ball  in  its  spin- 
ning works  against  the  natural  gravitation  and 
the  ball  sails  longer  in  the  air,  flying  nearer  hori- 
zontally than  if  hit  without  twist,  and  finally  dy- 
ing with  a  lifeless  swoop  at  the  end  of  its  flight 
when  gravitation  has  overcome  the  spin. 

Hit  with  the  same  power  and  the  same  tra- 
jectory, a  ball  will  fly  about  twenty  per  cent,  fur- 
ther before  touching  the  ground  if  under-cut  than 
if  played  with  sharp  top-spin. 

But  these  are  only  the  simplest  uses  of  the 
spinning  ball  in  tennis.  Right  and  left  twists 
come  next  and  then  all  the  variations  and  combi- 
nations of  the  two.  Finally,  we  come  to  the  effect 
of  the  rotating  motion  on  the  bound  of  the  ball 
after  its  eccentric  flight  has  ended,  and  here  we 
encounter  the  well-known  principles  that  are  in- 
volved in  billiards,  where  the  spinning  ball  gets 
an  unnatural  rebound  from  the  cushions. 

To  make  the  tennis  ball  revolve  on  its  own 
axis,  the  racket  strikes  a  glancing  blow,  the 
strings  brushing  or  wiping  across  its  rough  sur- 
face with  a  gripping  contact  that  gives  a  rapid 
spin.  The  rougher  the  stringing  of  the  racket, 
the  more  complete  will  be  its  grip  on  the  ball,  and 
the  longer  the  racket  is  kept  in  contact  with  it,  the 
more  fully  will  it  be  able  to  transfer  its  motion. 

In  the  early  days  of  the  game,  when  the  cut 
strokes  of  court  tennis  were  in  use,  many  devices 


Under-Cut 
Ball  Carries 
Rapid  Spin 


Right  and 
Left  Side 
Twists  Also 


Glancing  Blow 
Makes  Ball 
Revolve 


162     METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Rough 

Stringing  Tried 
to  Increase 
Twist 


Loose  Strings 
Increase  Spin 


Drop-Stroke 
Like  Billiard 
Follow-Shot 


Spin  Drags 
Ball  Forward 
from  Bound 


were  tried  to  increase  the  cut  or  spin.  Knotted 
stringing  in  the  rackets  and  double  weaves  of  the 
catgut  were  experimented  with,  but  finally  the 
manufacturers  settled  on  the  present  method  as 
the  best.  Lop-sided  heads  were  used  first;  then 
some  bright  mind  thought  the  lop  could  be  used  on 
both  sides  and  a  racket  that  was  almost  triangular 
followed.  One  extremely  wide  abortion  was  cre- 
ated on  the  theory  that  the  wider  the  racket  the 
more  twist  could  be  secured,  but  it  was  finally  dis- 
covered that  the  ball  held  contact  with  the  strings 
for  such  a  short  time  that  extra  width  could  not 
increase  the  rubbing  surface. 

The  looser  the  strings  are  in  a  racket  the 
longer  can  the  contact  be  maintained,  and  tight, 
highly-resilient,  thin  strings  tend  to  lessen  the 
ability  to  twist  the  ball.  Other  than  cut  strokes, 
however,  are  made  better  with  tight  stringing. 

The  lift,  or  drop-stroke,  with  its  straight 
top-spin,  simply  imparts  with  an  upward  drag  of 
the  racket  as  it  strikes  the  ball,  a  forward  rotation 
like  a  follow  shot  in  billiards,  with  the  axis  of  the 
spin  parallel  with  the  ground.  The  greatest  fric- 
tion is  on  the  top  side  of  the  ball  in  consequence, 
and  this  friction,  added  to  gravitation,  makes  it 
drop  unnaturally  from  its  original  line  of  flight 
when  the  first  force  of  its  forward  movement  is 
spent. 

When  this  ball  strikes  the  ground,  its  spin- 
ning motion  drags  it  ahead  with  a  sudden  shoot 
that  depresses  the  height  of  its  ordinary  bound. 
The  spin  continues  with  it  although  dying  rapidly, 
and  it  is  inclined  to  shoot  upward  from  the  racket 


THE  TWIST  ON  THE  BALL 


163 


when  you  try  to  return  it.  At  the  net,  when  the 
top-spinning  ball  is  encountered,  it  is  especially 
difficult  to  volley  because  of  its  tendency  to  dip 
just  about  the  time  it  reaches  the  volleying  posi- 
tion, and  also  because  of  its  rotation. 

This  spin  makes  the  ball  jump  upward  from 
the  racket,  and  slows  up  the  return  unless  the  vol- 
leyer  understands  the  proper  way  to  handle  it, 


Difficult  to 
Volley 

Top-Spinning 
Ball 


TO   GRAVITY   OVERCOMES  WOWWARD  MCfriOM   AMO  BM.t  CROPS  FACT. 


GRAVITY    OVVRCOMCS    PWICTtOM    AMO   BALL   DROPS     SPSMT   AND   UF6LESS 

EFFECT  OF  TOP-SPIN   AND  UNDER-CUT. 


Diagrams 
Show  Effect  of 
Twists  on 


TWIST 


BALL'S  FLIGHT  WITH  SIDE  TWISTS. 

which  is  to  bevel  the  racket  slightly  backward  and 
to  strike  a  slightly  glancing  blow  downward  to 
overcome  the  spin. 

The  under-cut  ball,  with  its  back-spin,  is  just 
the  reverse  of  the  drop-stroke,  and  it  receives  its 
rotation  from  a  downward  glancing  blow  from  the 
racket,  or  a  down  drag  while  the  strings  are  still 


Under-Cut  Ball 
Reverse  of 
Drop-Stroke 


164      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Spin  Resists 
Gravitation 


Mean  Bound 

from 

Chop-Stroke 


Vertical  Twist 
Can  Also  Be 
Used 


Rule  That 
Governs 
Curves  and 
Breaks 


in  contact  with  the  ball.  The  effect  of  this  twist 
is  to  produce  greater  friction  on  the  bottom  of  the 
ball,  and  this  resists  gravitation  until  the  forward 
power  of  the  ball  is  spent  and  then  the  ball  drops 
spent  and  lifeless  to  the  ground. 

The  bound  from  the  under-cut  ball  is  more  of 
an  awkward  kick  than  a  true  bound,  and  it  jumps 
up  with  some  of  its  back-spin  still  in  operation  to 
bother  the  player  who  has  to  return  it.  The 
bound  is  low  and  the  spin  makes  it  necessary  to 
get  well  under  the  ball  and  lift  it  slightly  higher 
to  clear  the  net  than  a  similar  ball  without  spin, 
for  the  rotation  has  a  tendency  to  make  it  carrom 
down  toward  the  earth  again  from  the  racket. 

Vertical  twist  can  be  put  on  a  tennis  ball 
from  either  the  right  or  left  side,  but,  except  in 
the  service  which  is  hit  with  a  glancing  blow 
overhead,  it  is  difficult  to  make  a  driving  stroke 
at  the  ball  with  any  angle  that  permits  vertical 
rotation.  The  axis  of  the  spin  on  the  ball,  how- 
ever, can  be  nearly  vertical  in  some  ground 
strokes,  and  the  ball  will  bend  to  one  side  or  the 
other  from  this  twist  according  to  which  way  it 
is  spinning. 

It  is  a  safe  rule  to  know  that  a  spinning  ball 
will  always  curve  in  the  opposite  direction  that  the 
racket  travelled  in  hitting  it.  When  it  comes  to 
the  bound,  the  ball  will  break  in  the  same  direction 
the  racket  travelled  in  hitting  it,  upward,  down- 
ward, to  the  right  or  left,  or  diagonally,  if  the 
racket's  path  was  diagonal,  at  the  moment  of  hit- 
ting the  ball. 

The  racket  frequently  swings  around  a  con- 


THE  TWIST  ON  THE  BALL 


165 


siderable  part  of  a  circle  in  making  a  stroke  and  it 
is  not  always  apparent  at  which  part  of  the  swing 
the  ball  was  hit,  but  when  you  find  the  path  of  the 
racket  at  the  time  of  impact,  you  can  safely  calcu- 
late that  the  ball  will  curve  away  from  this  direc- 
tion and  bound  toward  it. 

Twist  services,  with  the  methods  involved  in 
making  them,  have  been  fully  described  in  the 
chapter  on  service.  However,  the  principles  of 
ball  rotation  are  more  closely  involved  in  this 
stroke  than  any  of  the  ground  strokes,  and  even 
at  the  risk  of  repeating,  the  service  must  be  consid- 
ered here.  In  this  stroke,  more  than  in  any  other, 
are  the  vertical  and  horizontal  twists  combined 
and  their  effect  is  very  puzzling  unless  the  princi- 
ples are  thoroughly  analyzed  and  understood. 

The  ball,  being  struck  with  an  upward  motion 
of  the  racket  similar  to  that  of  the  drop-stroke  off 
the  ground,  has  much  of  the  same  action,  but  at 
the  end  of  the  stroke,  the  racket  is  dragged  diag- 
onally across  the  line  of  flight  and  the  ball  re- 
ceives a  sharp  side  twist,  which,  added  to  and 
altering  the  forward  spin  already  imparted  to  it, 
gives  a  diagonal  rotation. 

The  effect  of  this  altered  rotation  is  to  make 
the  ball  bend  sharply  to  right  or  left  in  the  air,  ac- 
cording to  whether  the  out-twist  or  reverse  twist 
is  used,  and  whether  the  stroke  is  played  by  a 
right-handed  or  a  left-handed  player.  The  action 
of  the  ball  is  just  reversed  by  the  same  stroke 
played  with  the  opposite  hand,  for  the  path  of  the 
racket  in  hitting  it  lies  in  the  opposite  direction. 

The  top   spin  makes   the  ball  spring  for- 


Watch  Path  of 

Racket 

for  Secret 


Both  Vertical 
and  Horizontal 
Twists  in 
Service 


Effect  of  the 

Altered 

Rotation 


166      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 

Sudden  Drop        ward  in  its  bound  and  the  sudden  drop  gives  a 

and  Sharper        different  angle  of  impact  with  the  ground  from 

the  normal  service  and  a  consequently  sharper 

upbound,  while  the  side-spin  makes  the  ball  drag 

or  break  sharply  off  in  the  direction  of  its  spin. 


THE  TWIST  ON  THE  BALL  167 


OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS: 

Do  you  intentionally  put  twist  on  every  ball? 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND:    No.  Should  Every 

T.  C.  BUNDY  :    Service,  yes,  reserve  twist.  Ball  Carry 

K.  H.  BEHR  :  Almost,  except  a  few  volleys.  Twist? 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER:     Usually. 
R.  D.  LITTLE:  Yes. 

H.  H.  HACKETT:  No. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT  :   On  eighty-five  per  cent. 
J.  C.  PARKE  :  No. 

C.  P.  DIXON  :    No. 

R.  L.  MURRAY:   Almost. 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :    Yes,  except  on  pickups. 
W.  M.  WASHBURN  :  No. 

ELIA  FOTTRELL:   No. 
CLARENCE  HOBART  :     No. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST:    No. 

J.  R.  STRACHAN  :  Yes.  1 

C.  R.  GARDNER:   No. 

A.  S.  DABNEY  :   Top-spin  on  ground  strokes.    Some-     Majority 
times  cut  on  volleys,  but  mostly  straight.  Think  Not 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :    A  slight  spin  usually. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :    Only  service. 

W.  F.  JOHNSON  :    Not  intentionally,  but  naturally. 
N.  W.  NILES  :   On  nearly  every  shot. 
T.  R.  PELL:   No. 

ROBERT  LERoY :   No,  I  do  not  use  a  twist  and  do  not 
think  I  should  care  to  if  I  could. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR  :    On  most,  but  not  on  all. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:    No. 
J.  J.  ARMSTRONG:    No. 
LEONARD  BEEKMAN:    No. 
W.  M.  HALL:  No. 


168      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


RICHARD  HARTE:    Yes. 

Second  Service  DEAN  MATHEY  :   No.   Only  on  my  second  service  for 

Carries  Most          control. 

R.  C.  SEAVER:   No. 

G.  C.  SHAFER:    Yes,  reverse. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL  :  No. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY:   No. 

I.  C.  WRIGHT:   No. 

W.  C.  GRANT:    Hardly  any  on  first  service;  quite  a 
little  on  second. 


Do  Speed  and 

Control 

Go  With  the 

Twist? 


Do  you  consider  a  ball  played  without  tivist  to 
have  as  much  speed  or  control  as  a  twisting 
one? 


Washburn  Has 
Never  Seen  a 
Ball  Without 
Twist 


R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND :   I  believe  more. 
T.  C.  BUNDY  :   Depends  entirely  on  player. 
K.  H.  BEHR:    I  doubt  it. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER  :    More  speed,  but  less  control 
R.  D.  LITTLE:  No. 

H.  H.  HACKETT  :  Not  as  much  speed,  possibly  more 
control  though. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT  :   The  more  twist,  the  less  speed.   De- 
pends on  the  player. 

J.  C.  PARKE:   More  speed,  but  perhaps  less  control. 

C.  P.  DIXON  :   Quite  as  much  speed. 

R.  L.  MURRAY  :   Less  control  but  more  speed. 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :  No. 

W.  M.  WASHBURN:  I  have  never  seen  a  tennis 
ball  played  without  twist  of  some  kind. 

ELIA  FOTTRELL:   More  speed,  less  control. 

CLARENCE  HOBART  :    Yes. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST:    More  speed  and  more  control. 

J.  R.  STRACHAN  :     It  has  more  speed  but  less  control 

C.  R.  GARDNER  :  More  speed  and  theoretically  more 
control  without  twist,  but  for  me  it  is  easier  to  control 
with  top  or  under-spin. 


THEODORE  R.  PELL 
A  Rear  View  of  the  American  Twist  Service. 

This  shows  well  the  dropping  of  the  racket  from  the  wrist  at  the  end  of 

the  back-swing.     Pell  does  not  bend  his  body  quite  so  much  as  others  in 

this  delivery,  and  he  does  not  get  so  much  twist  and  curve  in  the  air,  nor 

so  much  break  from  the  ground. 


Wilding's  Style  of  Service. 

Note  the  low  ball  and  short  swing  of  the  racket.  Wilding's  service  was 
good,  but  never  so  dangerous  as  the  American  leaders  who  developed  the 
twist  deliveries,  nor  as  that  of  Brookes,  who  placed  his  delivery  with 

great  accuracy. 


THE  TWIST  ON  THE  BALL 


169 


A.  S.  DABNEY  :  On  volleys,  yes.  On  ground-strokes, 
top  gives  more  control  and  speed. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :   More  speed,  less  control.  Twist  Gives 

F.  C.  INMAN  :    More  speed,  less  control.  Less  Speed, 
N.  W.  NILES:     As  much  speed  but  usually  not  so     More  Control 

accurate.  However,  so  long  as  the  balls  remain  heavy 
as  on  grass,  an  almost  straight  shot  except  in  serving 
is  as  good  if  not  better. 

T.  R.  PELL:    No.    More  speed,  less  control. 

ROBERT  LERov  :  Yes,  it  usually  has  more  of  both. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR:  As  much  speed,  but  usually  not  so 
much  control. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:    There  is  no  such  thing  as  a  ball     Nearly  All 
without  twist.    The  more  on  a  ball  the  more  its  flight  is     Agree 


retarded. 

J.  J.  ARMSTRONG  :  Yes. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :  No. 

W.  M.  HALL:  No. 

RICHARD  HARTE  :    No. 

DEAN  MATHEY:    More  speed,  less  control. 

R.  C.  SEAVER:  More  speed  and  more  control  for 
nine  out  of  ten  players. 

G.  C.  SHAFER  :   More  speed  usually,  less  control. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL:    More  speed,  less  control. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY:  More  speed,  but  not  such  good 
control. 

I.  C.  WRIGHT  :    Without  twist  much  better. 

W.  C.  GRANT  :  A  moderate  top-spin  gives  more  con- 
trol and  better  direction. 


Potnt 


Do  you  think  a  ball  with  top-spin  or  under-cut  a 
better  attack  against  a  net  player?  Against 
a  base-liner? 


R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND :  Hardly.  Which  Ball 

T.  C.  BUNDY:    Top-spin  against  a  net  player,  about     Offers  Best 


equal  against  base-liner. 


Attack? 


170      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Parke  and 
Dixon 
Both  Favor 
Top-Spin 


Beats  Wright 
Only  Man  with 
Under-Cut 
Attack 


K.  H.  BEHR:  Top-spin  vs.  net  attack,  under-cut 
better  vs.  base-line,  but  few  can  do  it. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER  :    Top-spin,  fifty-fifty. 

R.  D.  LITTLE  :    Top-spin  is  better  either  way. 
H.  H.  HACKETT:    I  consider  top-spin  only  good  in 
doubles. 

B.  C.   WRIGHT:      Top-spin  against   a  net  player. 
Under-cut  against  base-line,  as  it  hangs  low  and  shoots. 

J.  C.  PARKE:  Under-cut  is  never  an  attack  in  the 
proper  sense  of  the  word  (meaning  aggressiveness)  but 
is  purely  defensive  in  my  opinion. 

C.  P.  DIXON  :   A  ball  with  top-spin  is  the  best  attack 
against  a  net  player;  under-cut  would  be  more  effica- 
cious against  a  base-liner.    Some  base-liners  might  relish 
it. 

R.  L.  MURRAY  :    Top-spin  by  far,  against  both. 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :    I  think  a  ball  with  stop-spin  is  the 
best  attack  against  every  opponent  except  when  you  are 
inside  the  service-line  and  your  opponent  is  near  the  base- 
line.   In  this  case,  I  frequently  use  an  under-cut. 

W.  M.  WASHBURN  :  Top-spin  is  better  against  a  net 
player;  cut  against  a  base-liner. 

ELIA  FOTTRELL:  (No.  1)  Top-spin.  (No.  2)  Top- 
spin. 

CLARENCE  HOBART  :    (1)  Yes.    (2)  No. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST:  Top-spin  in  both  cases.  Beals 
Wright  was  the  only  player  who  did  anything  with  cut, 
and  it  was  his  volley  that  won. 

J.  R.  STRACHAN:  Some  players  cannot  handle  a 
low-bounding  ball  and  in  that  case  an  under-cut  ball  is 
more  effective,  while  others  cannot  handle  a  high  one. 
If  the  latter  be  the  case,  a  top-spinning  ball  is  a  better 
shot  because  the  ball  would  bounce  high.  I  think  that  the 
top-spinning  ball  is  the  better  form  of  attack  against  a 
net  player. 

C.  R.  GARDNER:  Top-spin  (dropping  ball)  is  good 
against  a  net  attack,  and  under-cut  often  breaks  up  a 
back-court  player. 


THE  TWIST  ON  THE  BALL 


171 


A.  S.  DABNEY  :  Top-spin  always.  But  a  good  under- 
cut will  bother  a  pure  base-liner  exceedingly. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :  Depends  largely  on  player  as  a 
rule.  Top-spin  for  net  player  and  under-cut  for  base- 
liner  if  you  can  control  it. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :   Top-spin.     Faster  and  as  much  con- 
trol against  all  players. 

W.  F.  JOHNSON:  A  ball  with  top-spin  is  better 
against  a  net  player  and  an  under-cut  against  a  base- 
liner. 

N.  W.  NILES:  Top-spin  is  better  against  a  net 
player.  An  accurate  under-cut  shot  is  better  against  a 
back-court  "stroke"  player.  The  twist  is  apt  to  make  the 
stroke  player  uncertain. 

T.  R.  PELL:  Top-spin  against  a  net  player  best. 
Under-cut  against  a  base-liner. 

ROBERT  LEROY  :  With  top-spin,  against  a  net  player. 
Probably  also  against  a  base-liner.  As  a  rule  those  who 
can  send  a  good  under-cut  (lik;e  Wallace  Johnsoni) 
can't  go  to  the  net  after  making  it. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR:  Top-spin  is  best  usually  against 
both  net  and  base-line  players. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:    Top-spin,  except  against  a  base- 
liner. 

J.  J.  ARMSTRONG:  Against  a  net  player,  top-spin. 
Against  a  base-liner,  straight  ball. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :  Top-spin  against  a  net  player; 
under-spin  against  base-line  player. 

W.  M.  HALL  :  Top-spin  against  net  player.  Under- 
cut against  base-liner. 

RICHARD  HARTE:  Top-spin  in  both  cases,  for  the 
ball  can  be  hit  harder,  with  better  placing. 

DEAN  MATHEY:  Top-spin  better  attack  against  net 
player.  Under-cut  better  attack  against  base-liner. 

R.  C.  SEAVER  :  It's  a  harder  ball  against  a  net  player. 
Against  a  base-liner  not  so  effective. 

G.  C.  SHAFER  :     Top-spin  best  attack  in  both  cases. 

S.  H,  VOSHELL  :    Top-spin  against  both. 


Most  Favor 

Top-Spin 

Against  Net 

Player, 

Under-Cut 

Against 

Base-Liner 


Some  Believe 
Straight  Ball 
Best  Against 
Back-Court 
Player 


172      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Whitney 
Differs  from 
the  Others 


Which  Ball 
Is  Easier 
to  Volley? 


All  Look  Alike 
to  Church 


Majority  Find 
the  Under-Cut 
Ball  Easier 


E.  H.  WHITNEY:    Against  a  net  player  I  think  the 
under-cut  ball  is  the  best  attack,  as  it  is  more  apt  to 
drop  so  the  opponent  has  to  return  it  up  to  you.     The 
under-cut  ball  is  never  very  effective  against  a  good 
player.    It  loses  all  its  speed. 

I.  C.  WRIGHT:  Straight,  hard,  well-placed  more 
important. 

W.  C.  GRANT  :  A  ball  with  top-spin  is  more  difficult 
to  volley. 

While  volleying,  do  you  find  it  easier  to  volley  an 
under-cut  or  a  top-spinning  ball? 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND :    Same. 

T.  C.  BUNDY:    Top-spin  and  under-cut  about  equal. 

K.  H.  BEHR  :    I  think  the  latter. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER  :    Fifty-fifty. 

R.  D.  LITTLE  :    Under-cut  is  easier  to  volley. 
H.  H.  HACKETT:    Top-spin. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT  :    Under-cut  as  it  hangs  to  the  racket 
better  and  usually  not  dropping. 

J.  C.  PARKE:    Under-cut. 

C.  P.  DIXON  :    Easier  to  volley  an  under-cut  ball. 
R.  L.  MURRAY  :    I  never  noticed. 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :   The  spin  on  the  ball  to  be  volleyed 
makes  no  difference  to  me;  the  difficulty  in  volleying 
varies  directly  with  the  speed  of  the  ball  to  be  volleyed. 

W.  M.  WASHBURN  :   Under-cut. 
ELIA  FOTTRELL:    An  under-cut  ball. 
E.  B.  DEWHURST  :     Under-cut  ball  easier  because  of 
slower  flight. 

J.  R.  STRACHAN: 
C.  R.  GARDNER: 


An  under-cut. 

The  under-cut  is  easier  to  volley 


after  one  learns  to  hit  hard  and  higher. 

A.  S.  DABNEY  :    Under-cut  easier. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :   Under-cut  is  more  unusual  and 
apt  to  be  deceptive  at  first. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :    Under-cut,  it  comes  much  slower. 


THE  Twist  ON  THE  BALL 


W.  F.  JOHNSON  :   Under-cut. 

N.  W.  NILES  :  Easier  to  volley  an  under-cut ;  slower. 

T.  R.  PELL:    Under-cut. 

ROBERT  LERov:  Much  easier  to  volley  an  under- 
cut. All  volleyers  know  this,  and  that  is  why  some  one 
like  Clothier  or  G.  P.  Gardner,  or  even  Colston,  can 
win  against  a  remarkable  under-cut  player  like  Wallace 
Johnson. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR:    Very  little  difference. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:    Under-cut.  , 

J.  J.  ARMSTRONG  :    About  same. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :    Under-cut. 

W.  M.  HALL:  Under-cut. 

RICHARD  HARTE:    Top-spinning. 

DEAN  MATHEY:  Easier  to  volley  an  under-cut  be- 
cause it  "floats." 

R.  C.  SEAVER  :  Am  not  qualified  to  make  remarks  as 
a  volleyer,  but  I  think  the  under-cut  ball  easier  to  volley. 

G.  C.  SHAFER  :  About  the  same,  but  you  may  have 
to  volley  the  top-spinning  ball  lower. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL:    Top-spinning. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY:  An  under-cut  is  much  easier  to 
volley.  .,  , 

I.  C.  WRIGHT  :   All  look  alike  to  me. 

W.  C.  GRANT:   Under-cut. 


A  Few  Think 
They  Are 
About  Equal 


174      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


XIII. 


LOBBING 


Cardinal 
Points  to 
Keep  in  Mind 


Legitimate 
Value  of 
the  Lob 


FIVE  CARDINAL  POINTS  TO  REMEMBER: 

1 — Lob  low  to  attack  and  lob  high  for  defence. 

2 — Except  to  gain  time,  only  lob  when  the  oppo- 
nent is  close  up;  if  he  is  back  in  his  court, 
he  will  be  in  position  to  kill  it. 

3 — Place  your  lobs  to  the  backhand  corner,  and 
always  make  them  deep.  Nothing  is  worse 
than  a  short  lob. 

A — Do  not  lob  all  the  time;  vary  the  stroke  with 
others,  and  use  it  only  when  needed  for  de- 
fence, or  to  dislodge  a  volley er. 

S — Lob  high  and  deep  when  pressed  for  time 
either  to  recover  position  in  court,  or  to  get 
a  breathing  spell. 

THE  LOB  is  a  stroke  that  is  too  often  mis- 
taken for  a  sign  of  weakness,  and  it  is 
only  among  the  better  players  that  its  true 
value  is  understood  and  appreciated.    The  stroke 
has  a  position  in  the  scheme  of  good  tennis  as  defi- 
nite and  respected  as  any  other  stroke  in  the  cate- 
gory. 

Opposed  by  a  net  attack,  it  is  a  perfect  de- 
fence, except  against  that  rare  exception  to  the 
general  average  of  even  strong  tournament  play- 


LOBBING 


175 


A  Safe 
Answer  to  the 
Net  Attack 


ers,  the  man  who  can  smash  from  his  deep  court 
with  aggressiveness  and  accuracy.  Among  the 
great  majority  of  players  a  deep  lob  is  almost 
a  perfect  defence.  Few  can  kill  more  such  balls 
than  they  miss,  and  all  but  the  best  experts  are 
generally  forced  to  a  deep  overhead  volley  that  is 
little  more  dangerous  from  that  distance  than  a 
ground  stroke. 

Against  all  such  players  then,  a  deep  lob  is 
a  safe  answer  to  the  net  attack,  and  if  no  opening 
is  presented  for  a  passing  stroke  when  your  op- 
ponent goes  to  the  net,  the  lob  puts  you  back  at 
least  on  even  terms  with  him  unless  he  is  a 
smasher  of  extraordinary  power.  If  the  volleyer 
hangs  back  from  the  net,  if  he  is  more  than  ten 
or  twelve  feet  away,  of  course  he  is  open  to  a 
dropping  horizontal  attack  at  his  feet  that  is  even 
more  threatening  than  a  lob. 

On  the  other  hand,  if  the  volleyer  comes  in 
very  close  to  the  net,  then  the  lob  is  not  only  a 
perfect  defence,  but  can  be  turned  into  a  danger- 
ous attack.  A  clean  ace  can  often  be  scored  on 
this  stroke,  if  the  lob  be  played  low  just  out  of  the 
volleyer's  reach,  and  when  caught  in  close  the  op- 
ponent can  often  be  forced  to  turn  and  play  the 
ball  from  the  bound,  giving  the  attacking  position 
over  to  the  other  man.  Unless  played  high,  the 
lob  will  not  give  such  a  close  net  player  enough 
time  to  back  away  and  volley  the  ball. 

The  balance  of  power  in  the  lobbing  game     Balance  of 
between  the  persistent  lobber  and  the  persistent    p°™er  Very 

Delicate 

smasher  is  very  delicate,  and  the  victory  generally 
goes  to  the  man  who  is  steadiest,  no  matter  which 


Also  an  Attack 

in  Itself 

in  Some  Cases 


176     METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Tiresome 
Work, 

Smashing  Lob 
After  Lob 


Lobbing  to 
Make  the  Other 
Man  Miss 


Foote  Wore 
Down  His 
Opponents 
This  Way 


end  of  the  duel  he  assumes.  The  player  who  can- 
not kill  overhead  often  beats  himself  through  his 
own  errors,  even  though  his  opponent  does  noth- 
ing more  than  lob  defensively.  It  is  difficult  and 
tiresome  work  at  best,  smashing  lob  after  lob,  and 
unless  there  is  speed  and  accuracy  in  these 
smashes  enough  to  beat  the  other  man  quickly, 
the  smasher  is  likely  to  wear  himself  out  in  such 
a  duel  before  the  lobber  and  finally  lose  through 
exhaustion  or  unsteadiness. 

Personally,  I  have  seen  scores  of  men  beaten 
in  this  way  and  I  have  been  the  victim  of  many 
such  campaigns.  The  smasher  generally  has  a 
little  the  better  of  the  struggle  at  first,  but  over- 
head play  is  much  more  tiring  than  lobbing,  and 
if  the  match  is  drawn  out  long,  he  is  likely  to 
gradually  fade  away  and  the  steady  lobbying  will 
wear  down  his  attack  until  his  errors  far  outnum- 
ber his  aces  scored. 

Arthur  Foote,  one  of  the  "first  ten"  players 
of  the  land  some  years  ago,  used  this  method  of 
campaign  with  success  for  some  seasons.  He 
lobbed  so  accurately  and  with  so  little  effort  that 
he  wore  down  scores  of  antagonists  and  beat  them 
from  his  own  superior  steadiness.  Always  out- 
played in  ground  strokes  at  the  start  of  the  match, 
his  play  invariably  suffered  by  contrast,  but  when 
the  other  man's  freshness  had  gone,  Footers  stead- 
iness would  win  for  him.  More  recently,  Abra- 
ham Bassford,  Jr.,  earned  considerable  success 
with  similar  methods  among  the  second-class 
players. 

In  doubles,  the  same  tactics  have  been  sue- 


LOBBING 


177 


cessfully  followed  for  a  long  time.  In  1895,  Clar- 
ence Hobart  and  Fred  Hovey  held  the  American 
championship  and  were  challenged  for  their  title 
by  Robert  Wrenn  and  Malcolm  Chace  at  New- 
port. The  challengers  believed  that  the  old  hold- 
ers could  not  smash  lobs,  and  they  started  out 
from  the  first  game  to  lob  everything  miles  high, 
with  the  expected  result  that  the  champions 
gradually  faded  until  at  the  end  of  the  match  they 
were  missing  many  more  lobs  than  they  killed, 
and  the  championship  changed  hands  that  season 
in  consequence.  A  little  later  on,  Ward  and  Davis 
adopted  similar  tactics  with  success.  They  be- 
came so  proficient  at  lobbing  and  placed  their 
lobs  with  unerring  accuracy  so  close  to  the  back 
line  that  there  were  few  teams  which  could  handle 
them  aggressively. 

But  in  doubles,  there  is  a  greater  need  for 
lobbing  than  in  singles,  since  the  advantage  of 
the  attack  arbitrarily  given  to  the  servers  is  so 
much  stronger  than  in  singles,  owing  to  the 
smaller  expanse  of  net  each  player  has  to  cover. 
The  chances  of  the  strikers  to  successfully  pass 
their  opponents  at  the  net  is  much  smaller  and 
the  lob  is  more  often  needed  in  doubles  than  in 
singles. 

But  the  lob  is  a  strong  weapon  of  attack, 
not  only  negatively,  through  the  weakness  or  er- 
rors of  the  opponent  who  is  unable  to  kill  it,  but 
as  a  positive  aggressive  attack.  Against  a  man 
in  the  back  of  his  court,  particularly  one  who  does 
not  smash  well,  it  is  sometimes  possible  to  lob  and 
run  in  to  take  the  attacking  position  at  the  net 


Lob  a 
Dangerous 
Attack  in 
Doubles 


More  Need  for 
It  Than  in 
Singles 


Can  Be  Made 

Very 

Aggressive 


178      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


"Irish  Lob"  Is 
Often  the  Best 


Net-Rushing 
Tactics  Can  Be 
Stopped 


Keeping  the 
Volleyer  Back 
Opens  Fresh 
Holes 


yourself.  A  weak  volley  of  such  a  deep  lob  often 
affords  an  opportunity  for  the  lobber  to  kill  the 
return. 

For  this  kind  of  work,  the  "Irish  lob"  is  the 
best.  This  is  simply  a  high  deep  lob  with  a  little 
under-cut  to  give  the  ball  back-spin  and  make  it 
drop  straighter.  The  higher  a  ball  is  lobbed,  the 
straighter  and  faster  it  must  fall,  and  speed  in  the 
dropping  ball  as  well  as  the  lack  of  incoming 
angle  increases  the  difficulty  of  the  smasher. 

Your  net-rushing  volleyer  who  follows  up 
his  service  each  time  must  keep  in  mind  always 
the  danger  to  which  he  is  exposed  in  an  overhead 
attack.  If  his  opponent  does  not  lob  at  all,  lie 
may  throw  all  caution  to  the  winds  and  dash  head- 
long at  the  net  every  time,  but  if  he  is  given  one 
or  two  well-timed  lobs,  the  constant  menace  over- 
head will  affect  his  net  play  materially.  The 
whole  success  of  the  volleying  campaign  depends 
on  getting  to  the  net  very  fast  behind  the  service, 
and  if  the  server  rushes  too  close  or  is  caught  still 
moving  forward  a  low  lob  will  often  score  a  clean 
ace. 

It  is  not  always  the  actual  effect  of  the  lob 
itself  that  is  most  valuable;  it  is  the  moral  effect 
on  the  adversary,  who  is  almost  certain  after  a 
few  successful  overhead  attacks  to  come  in  a  trifle 
slower  and  a  trifle  less  close  to  the  net  for  fear 
of  the  lob,  and  this  gives  his  opponent  a  fresh 
opening  either  by  dropping  the  ball  close  to  the 
net,  by  side-line  passing  strokes  or  short  cross- 
court  passes  that  could  not  get  past  in  front  of 
the  volleyer  if  he  were  three  feet  closer  in.  Two 


LOBBING 


179 


or  three  aces  won  by  lobbing  over  the  head  of  the 
net-rusher  will  sometimes  break  up  his  game 
entirely  or  weaken  his  attack  so  that  he  can  be 
passed  with  ease. 

Against  the  volleyer  after  he  is  once  safely 
settled  at  the  net,  the  lob  is  still  a  splendid  weapon 
of  attack.  The  same  considerations  affect  his  po- 
sition, and  if  he  ventures  too  close,  a  clean  ace 
can  sometimes  be  scored  on  a  low  lob.  This  anxi- 
ety which  he  must  always  feel  when  close  in,  if 
a  shrewd  lobber  is  opposed  to  him,  makes  him 
keep  one  foot  well  behind  ready  to  start  back- 
ward instantly  if  necessary  to  smash  a  lob,  and 
this  position  makes  it  more  difficult  for  him  to 
start  quickly  from  one  side  of  the  net  to  the  other 
to  reach  passing  shots  along  the  lines. 

Covering  the  lob  also  adds  much  to  the  dan- 
ger of  its  attack.  Leonard  Ware  used  this  clever 
deception  with  consummate  skill.  He  could  lob 
with  almost  exactly  the  same  motion  he  used  for 
his  forehand  drive,  and  with  an  opponent  at  the 
net,  he  would  go  through  all  the  motions  of  try- 
ing to  pass  him,  drawing  his  man  forward  to 
anticipate  the  pass,  and  then  turn  the  stroke  at 
the  last  second  into  a  lob  that  often  caught  him 
off  his  balance  for  a  sure  ace.  Catching  your 
adversary  off  his  balance  in  this  way  with  his 
weight  thrown  forward  when  an  attacking  lob  is 
made  delays  his  effort  to  get  back  for  it  by  just 
enough  to  make  his  return  defensive  if  not  to 
make  him  miss  altogether. 

The  aggressive  lob  is  made  doubly  danger- 
ous, and  the  value  of  a  defensive  lob  increased,  if 


A  Clean  Ace 

Sometimes 

Scored 

by  Low  Lob 


Ware's  Skill  at 
Covering 
the  Lob 


180      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Selecting  the 

Backhand 

Corner 


Lobbing  to 
Gain  Time 


the  backhand  corner  of  the  antagonist's  court  is 
selected  to  place  it  in.  No  matter  how  well  an  ex- 
pert may  play  backhand  strokes  off  the  ground, 
there  is  not  one  chance  in  a  thousand  that  he  can 
volley  overhead  backhand.  H.  S.  Mahony,  one  of 
the  old-time  British  experts,  really  could  use  this 
stroke  effectively,  but  outside  of  this  one  player, 
I  never  met  a  man  who  did  not  run  around  such 
a  lob  and  smash  it  or  volley  it  over  his  forehand 
shoulder.  (I  do  not  say  right  shoulder  because 
this  is  reversed  by  left-handed  players. )  To  place 
a  lob  in  the  backhand  corner  therefore  makes  it 
doubly  difficult  for  the  other  man  to  get  properly 
under  it  for  the  smash  or  volley.  If  he  should  let 
it  drop  and  play  it  from  the  bound,  such  a  position 
makes  him  run  around  the  ball  and  outside  of  the 
court  in  order  to  get  the  return  on  his  forehand 
side  for  the  return.  A  low  lob  in  the  deep  back- 
hand corner  is  a  winner  every  time. 

There  is  also  another  defensive  use  of  the  lob 
which  is  very  valuable.  It  is  a  time-saver  useful 
in  two  different  ways.  When  forced  out  of  posi- 
tion, particularly  when  outside  the  court  with 
an  opponent  at  the  net,  a  lob  and  preferably  a  high 
one,  will  afford  the  time  to  get  back  into  position 
safely,  and  if  it  is  played  deep,  will  not  give  the 
average  opponent  any  distinct  advantage.  It  is 
very  discouraging  to  drive  your  man  clear  outside 
of  the  court  by  a  well-placed  forcing  stroke  that 
was  expected  to  open  the  court  for  a  killing  shot, 
and  then  have  him  put  up  a  lob  that  is  too  deep 
to  be  killed.  He  immediately  scampers  back  into 
his  defensive  position  in  the  middle  of  the  court, 


LOBBING 


181 


and  the  attack  must  begin  all  over  again  in  order 
to  secure  an  opening  for  the  expected  kill. 

When  hard-pressed  for  breathing  time,  the 
lob  is  a  splendid  time-saver,  and  a  perfectly  legiti- 
mate play.  Often  in  match  play  a  man  will  find 
himself  temporarily  embarrassed  either  from  run- 
ning too  hard  from  side  to  side,  or  from  some 
sudden  effort  that  has  left  him  breathless.  A  deep 
lob  at  this  point  gives  him  the  few  precious  sec- 
onds needed  for  one  or  two  slow  breaths  and  then 
he  will  be  ready  for  the  next  thrust  without  the 
"bellows-to-mend"  feeling  that  is  sure  to  make 
him  miss  his  stroke. 

At  the  end  of  a  hard  match  when  exhausted, 
or  sometimes  in  the  middle  of  a  match  before  you 
get  your  "second  wind,"  there  sometimes  comes  a 
time  when  some  relief  is  needed  or  everything  is 
lost,  and  then  your  old  friend  the  lob  is  again  the 
life-saver. 

But  the  constant  use  of  the  lob  in  match  play 
is  most  likely  to  kill  its  value.  To  lob  steadily 
is  sure  to  give  the  opponent  clear  warning  of  what 
to  expect,  and  he  soon  becomes  so  accustomed  to 
handling  that  stroke  that  he  does  not  miss  the 
kill  so  often  as  you  might  reasonably  expect.  He 
will  soon  begin  to  hang  back  in  his  court  for  the 
lob  also  if  it  comes  to  him  regularly;  he  will  get 
his  eye  on  the  ball  and  his  smashing  arm  in  good 
working  order.  After  that,  lobbing  will  be  a  los- 
ing manoeuver. 

The  keynote  to  successful  lobbing  rests  in 
keeping  your  opponent  guessing  as  to  when  and 
where  the  lob  is  coming  to  him.  If  you  also  at- 


When  Out  of 
Breath,  Lob 
Saves  the  Day 


Its  Constant 
Use  Will  Kill 
Its  Value 


Must  Keep 
Your  Opponent 
Guessing 


182      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Beats   Wright's 
Clever  Use 
of  the  Lob 


The  Lob-Volley 
Is  Rarely  Used 


tack  his  feet  with  short  balls,  he  will  fear  the  lob 
more  because  he  must  come  in  closer  to  stop  that 
attack,  and  if  you  only  lob  when  you  have  drawn 
him  in,  your  lobs  will  be  always  more  dangerous. 
As  a  systematic  attack,  the  stroke  is  used  best  as 
Beals  Wright  used  it,  in  conjunction  with  a  short 
dropping  stroke  at  the  feet  of  the  opponent  that 
alternately  drew  his  man  in  and  drove  him  back 
again,  exposing  him  constantly  to  a  winning  at- 
tack. Wright  used  this  method  with  exceptional 
skill  against  an  opponent  at  the  net,  and  promptly 
took  the  attack  into  his  own  hands  as  soon  as  he 
could  dislodge  him  from  the  volleying  position  by 
this  kind  of  play. 

The  lob-volley  is  simply  a  lob  played  with  a 
volleyed  stroke,  and  is  rarely  used.  Occasionally, 
both  players  will  be  drawn  in  close  and  one  will 
have  the  chance  to  lob  a  volley  over  the  other's 
head,  but  the  stroke  is  difficult  to  execute  and  in 
this  position  the  ball  can  generally  be  killed  with  a 
passing  volley. 


LOBBING  183 


OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS 

Do  you  use  the  lob  as  an  attacking  stroke f 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND :    I  do  not  much.    It  is  one  of     Is  the  Lob 
my  weaknesses.  Used  to 

T.  C.  BUNDY:    Yes.  Attack? 

K.  H.  BEHR  :    No,  because  I  can't. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER:    Yes. 

R.  D.  LITTLE:    Occasionally. 
H.  H.  HACKETT:     Yes. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT  :   When  the  opportunity  offers. 
J.  C.  PARKE  :    Yes,  whenever  I  use  it  at  all. 

C.  P.  DIXON:     Yes,  and  originally  a  very  effective 
one. 

R.  L.  MURRAY  :    No,  only  as  defensive. 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :    Yes. 

W.  M.  WASHBURN  :    When  my  opponent  crowds  the     Most  Experts 
net.  Use  It, 

ELIA  FOTTRELL  :    Sometimes.  More  or  Less 

CLARENCE  HOBART:     It  is  sometimes  very  satisfac- 
torily so  used. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST:    Why  not? 
J.  R.  STRACHAN  :     No. 

C.  R.  GARDNER  :     Seldom. 

A.  S.  DABNEY:    No. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :    Not  often. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :    No. 

W.  F.  JOHNSON  :    On  occasions. 
N.  W.  NILES  :    At  times,  yes. 
T.  R.  PELL:    Sometimes. 
ROBERT  LEROY:    Very  seldom. 
A.  M.  SQUAIR:     Sometimes. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD  :   Quite  often. 
J.  J.  ARMSTRONG  :   Sometimes. 


184      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :     Sometimes,  but  seldom. 

W.  M.  HALL  :    At  times. 

RICHARD  HARTE:    No. 

DEAN  MATHEY:    Yes. 

Seaver  Says  It  R.  C.  SEAVER  :     A  great  deal ;  it  wears  the  other 

Wears  the  player  out  more  than  anything  else. 

Other  Man  Out  G  C  SHAFER:    Yes. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL:    Sometimes. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY:   Yes. 

I.  C.  WRIGHT:    Defensive  only. 

W.  C.  GRANT:    Yes,  if  opponent  is  close  to  net. 

Do  you  consider  persistent  lobbing,  to  make  the 
opponent  lose,  good  tennis  and  good  sports- 
manship? 

Is  Persistent  R-  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND:    Hardly. 

Lobbing  Good  T.  C.  BUNDY:    Consider  it  a  very  aggressive  stroke 

Sportsmanship?     jf  done  well,  and  good  tennis. 
K.  H.  BEHR:   Yes. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER  :    Certainly. 
R.  D.  LITTLE:    Certainly. 

H.  H.  HACKETT:   Yes. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT:  Yes.   It  is  difficult  to  lob  consistently 
and  his  opponent  should  be  strong  at  all  points. 

J.  C.  PARKE  :     I  would  not  go  so  far  as  to  call  it  bad 
sportsmanship,  but  I  would  certainly  call  it  bad  tennis. 
Most  Players  C.  P.  DIXON  :    Certainly  justifiable  in  match  play  to 

Approve  of  It       use  means  which  are  perfectly  legitimate  and  open  to 
both  players. 

R.  L.  MURRAY  :    Absolutely,  unless  the  sun  is  hot. 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :    Yes. 
W.  M.  WASHBURN  :   Yes. 
ELI  A  FOTTRELL:    Yes. 
CLARENCE  HOBART  :    Yes,  of  course. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST:    Why  not?    Not  good  tennis  but 
all  right. 


LOBBING 

J.  R.  STRACHAN  :  Yes.  I  think  that  persistent  lob- 
bing is  good  sportsmanship.  Some  players  use  a  lob  as 
others  do  a  drive,  that  is,  as  their  effective  stroke. 

C.  R.  GARDNER  :  Personally,  I  have  always  preferred 
not  to  do  this ;  but  I  shouldn't  consider  it  bad  sportsman- 
ship to  beat  a  man  by  using  any  stroke  in  tennis. 

A.  S.  DABNEY  :  Yes,  if  it  wins  it  is  good  judgment 
and  that  is  part  of  the  game.  But  if  the  opponent  is 
always  in  the  back  court  then  it  is  not  tennis.  I  mean 
if  he  never  comes  to  the  net. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.:    Yes. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :    Yes. 

W.  F.  JOHNSON:  May  be  neither,  but  often  neces- 
sary to  win. 

N.  W.  NILES:  Latter,  yes.  Not  particularly  good 
tennis  usually,  especially  in  singles. 

T.  R.  PELL:  Yes,  perfectly  fair  if  you  can  win  by 
it. 

ROBERT  LERov:    Yes. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR:  Yes. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:    Certainly. 
J.  J.  ARMSTRONG  :   Yes. 
LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :   Yes. 
W.  M.  HALL:    Yes. 
RICHARD  HARTE  :    Yes. 
DEAN  MATHEY:    Yes. 

R.  C.  SEAVER  :  Lobbing  is  part  of  the  game,  I  think 
it  is  good  sportsmanship;  never  thought  of  it  in  any 
other  sense. 

G.  C.  SHAFER:    Yes. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL  :    Yes. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY  :  No  indeed. 

I.  C.  WRIGHT  :  Yes,  it  is  part  of  the  game  and  a  dif- 
ficult shot. 

W.  C.  GRANT  :  It  is  honest  tennis  and  if  opponent  is 
weak  on  overhead  strokes,  it  is  part  of  the  game. 


185 


Any  Stroke 
of  the  Game 
Legitimate 


A  Few 
Against  It 


186      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Do  Experts 
Place  Lobs  on 
Backhand? 


Murray  Does 
Not,  but 
Ought  To 


Majority  Favor 
This  Attack 


Do  you  intentionally  place  your  lobs  to  opponent's 
backhand  corner  f 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND :   No. 

T.  C.  BUNDY:    Yes. 

K.  H.  BEHR:    Yes,  when  I  can,  which  is  seldom. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER:     Not  always  good  policy,  gener- 
ally sound;  some  men  smash  better  that  way  than  the 
other ;  depends  on  whom  I  am  against. 

R.  D.  LITTLE:  It  depends  on  the  opponent  and  his 
position  in  the  court.  Generally,  it  is  safe  to  lob  over 
opponent's  backhand  shoulder. 

H.  H.  HACKETT:   No. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT  :    Yes. 
J.  C.  PARKE:    No. 

C.  P.  DIXON:     More  perhaps  to  backhand  than  to 
forehand,  but  much  depends  on  the  exact  position  of 
your  opponent  at  the  time  and  also  the  relative  strength 
of  opponent  on  forehand  and  backhand. 

R.  L.  MURRAY  :    No,  but  I  ought  to. 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :     Not  unless  my  opponent  is  very 
slow  in  covering  court. 

W.  M.  WASHBURN:  Often,  unless  I  am  in  such  a 
bad  position  as  to  make  an  attempt  to  place  too  danger- 
ous. 

ELIA  FOTTRELL:  Mostly.  It  always  depends  on  his 
position  in  the  court. 

CLARENCE  HOBART  :    Sometimes. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST:    Why  not? 
J.  R.  STRACHAN  :    No. 

C.  R.  GARDNER:    If  he  is  discomfited  thereby,  yes. 

A.  S.  DABNEY  :    Yes. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :   Usually. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :    As  a  rule. 

W.  F.  JOHNSON  :   Quite  often. 
N.  W.  NILES:   Yes. 
T.  R.  PELL:   No. 
ROBERT  LEROY:    Yes. 


LOBBING 


187 


A.  M.  SQUAIR:  More  frequently  there  than  in  the 
other  corner,  unless  I  find  that  my  opponent  can  smash 
best  from  that  corner.  I  myself  can  smash  better  from 
there  than  in  the  forehand  corner. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD  :    Nine  times  out  of  ten. 

J.  J.  ARMSTRONG:    Sometimes. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :    Yes. 

W.  M.  HALL:    Sometimes. 

RICHARD  HARTE:    No. 

DEAN  MATHEY:  At  times.  However,  I  think  that 
this  has  been  the  custom  so  long  that  most  everyone  is 
always  prepared  for  this  shot. 

R.  C.  SEAVER  :    Try  to. 

G.  C.  SHAFER  :     Yes. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL:    Yes. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY:    Yes,  if  I  can  do  so. 

I.  C.  WRIGHT  :    Not  necessarily. 

W.  C.  GRANT:  Not  necessarily;  it  depends  where 
my  opponent  is,  in  his  court. 


Mathey  Thinks 
Most  Players 
Expect  It 


188      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Cardinal 
Points  to 
Keep  in  Mind 


Base-Line  Play 
vs.  Volleying 


XIV. 

£"'"'•  ' 

POSITION  PLAY 

I 

FIVE  CARDINAL  POINTS  TO  REMEMBER: 

1 — Never  come  to  rest  between  the  service  and  the 

base-lines;  this  is  the  forbidden  zone. 
2 — All  volleys  should  be  made  from  well  in  front 

of  the  service-line. 
3 — When  forced  to  defence,  retire  to  behind  the 

base-line. 
4 — Study  the  centre  theory  and  use  it  for  safety 

in  net  play;  it  cannot  be  used  against   an 

opponent  at  the  net. 
5 — Don't  run  around  the  ball  to  protect  a  weak 

backhand;  play  it  the  right  way  and  so 

build  up  your  weakness  to  strength. 


N 


O  CONSIDERATION  of  the  question  of 
position  in  court  could  be  undertaken 
without  discussing  the  time-honored  con- 
troversy of  base-line  vs.  volleying  methods. 
Almost  from  the  infancy  of  the  game,  this  has 
been  a  much-mooted  question,  and  one  that  has 
never  been  definitely  settled  beyond  dispute. 

Could  a  perfect  volleyer  beat  a  perfect  base- 
line player?  That  is  the  question.  There  is  no 
doubt  that  good  base-line  play  will  always  beat 
poor  volleying,  and  that  good  volleying  will  al- 


POSITION  PLAY 


189 


ways  beat  poor  base-line  play.  The  only  question 
then  is  whether  perfect  volleying  or  perfect  base- 
line play  will  win  from  the  other.  And  this  is 
purely  an  academic  question  after  all,  for  we  have 
no  perfect  base-liners  and  no  perfect  volleyers. 
Among  the  others,  it  is  invariably  a  question  of 
relative  skill,  not  relative  methods  of  play. 

No  matter  what  the  answer  may  be  to  the 
academic  question  raised,  there  is  no  doubt  that  a 
judicious  combination  of  the  two  styles  will  beat 
either  alone.  The  ideal  lawn  tennis  player  is  he 
who  makes  his  own  openings  for  the  killing 
strokes  from  the  back  of  the  court;  who  goes  to 
the  net  at  the  turn  of  the  tide,  and  then  finally 
administers  the  coup  de  grace  at  the  proper  mo- 
ment. It  is  he  who  never  makes  a  fancy  killing 
shot,  but  never  misses  an  easy  kill ;  he  who  is  able 
to  dislodge  a  net  volleyer  with  a  well-timed  lob  if 
he  cannot  pass  him  outright,  and  he  who  can 
hold  his  place  at  the  net  against  the  best  passing 
and  lobbing. 

There  are  sound  principles  back  of  every 
combination  that  comes  up  on  the  court,  and  the 
intelligent  student  of  the  game  becomes  as  fa- 
miliar with  the  possibilities  of  the  different  posi- 
tions as  a  chess  player  with  the  different  varia- 
tions of  the  opening  and  the  other  familiar  group- 
ings of  the  pieces.  There  are  also  known  angles 
very  similar  to  those  of  the  billiard  table  which  are 
as  fixed  as  in  that  game,  but  which  can  be  par- 
tially overcome  by  artificial  means,  as  they  are  by 
the  English  of  the  billiard  player. 

To  begin  with  the  fundamentals,  the  player's 


Purely  an 
Academic 
Question 


The  Ideal 
Player 
Combines 
Both  Styles 


Sound 

Principles  and 
Known  Angles 
Involved 


190      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Position 
Depends  on 
Fixed  Rules 


Basis  of  the 
Centre  Theory 


Angles  at  the 
Disposal  of  the 
Adversary 


position  in  court  must  be  governed  chiefly  by  the 
position  of  the  ball  first,  then  by  the  position  of 
the  opponent,  and  finally  by  the  known  character- 
istics of  the  antagonist's  play.  If  your  return 
has  carried  the  ball  far  over  to  the  right  of  the 
other  man's  court,  your  waiting  position  must  be 
correspondingly  to  your  own  left  to  anticipate  his 
next  shot.  Similarly,  you  must  lean  toward  your 
own  right  when  you  have  played  the  ball  far  out 
to  the  left  side  of  your  opponent's  court. 

Speaking  generally,  you  are  safer  on  sharp 
cross-court  angles  the  farther  you  are  from  the 
net,  and  the  more  in  danger  the  nearer  you  ap- 
proach the  net.  Conversely,  you  are  more  or  less 
safe  in  the  net  position  according  to  how  near 
the  centre  of  your  opponent's  court  the  ball  is 
placed  when  he  is  ready  to  make  his  next  return. 
This  is  the  basis  of  what  is  known  as  the  centre 
theory,  and  those  who  study  it  most  closely  find 
it  the  best  means  of  strengthening  their  net  at- 
tack. 

A  glance  at  the  accompanying  diagram 
will  explain  perhaps  better  than  can  be  done 
in  words  what  the  centre  theory  is.  It  is  based  on 
the  possible  angles  that  the  opponent  has  at  his 
disposal  to  pass  you  on  the  next  stroke.  At  the 
net,  the  volleyer  has  a  limited  time  in  which  to 
move  over  from  his  position  to  either  side  to  an- 
ticipate the  next  stroke  of  his  adversary,  and  the 
faster  the  ball  is  hit,  the  less  time  will  be  allowed 
for  this  shift.  It  is  very  seldom  that  the  opponent 
will  play  the  ball  straight  at  you — on  the  contrary, 
his  object  will  be  to  play  it  out  of  your  reach,  and 


POSITION  PLAY 


191 


the  further  away  from  you  he  places  it,  and  the 
faster  he  hits  it,  the  less  time  you  will  have  to 
reach  the  ball. 

As  a  drive  with  much  pace  requires  greater 
length  in  order  that  the  ball  shall  have  room  to 
make  the  necessary  drop  from  the  height  of  the 
net  to  the  ground  before  reaching  the  boundary 
lines  of  the  court,  a  straight  side-line  stroke  can 
always  carry  more  speed  than  a  cross-court  shot. 
Now,  a  side-line  shot  cannot  be  played  from  the 
middle  of  the  court.  A  cross-court  to  the  side-line 
can  be  made,  but  this  is  not  a  line  pass,  which  can 
only  be  made  from  one  side  directly  parallel 
with  the  line.  Therefore,  it  is  apparent  that 
it  is  doubly  difficult  to  use  speed  from  the  middle 
of  the  court,  unless  the  return  be  made  to  travel 
straight  down  the  centre,  to  gain  the  full  length  of 
the  court  to  the  base-line,  and  such  an  attempt  is 
easy  to  anticipate  at  the  net  no  matter  how  much 
pace  it  carries. 

Even  the  speed  of  the  cross-court  shot  is  very 
much  limited  by  forcing  the  opponent  to  play  it 
from  the  centre  of  the  court.  If  he  is  off  at  either 
side  of  the  court,  his  ball  may  have  the  full  width 
of  the  court  for  its  flight  before  it  need  drop  to 
keep  in  court,  but  from  the  centre,  the  greatest 
distance  that  is  offered  is  half  the  width  of  the 
court  plus  the  lengthwise  distance  it  can  travel 
before  reaching  the  side-lines. 

By  keeping  your  opponent  in  the  centre  of  his 
court,  then,  you  force  him  to  cut  down  the  speed 
of  his  passing  strokes  or  play  out  of  court.  The 
more  he  lessens  his  speed  the  more  time  you  will 


Speed  Greatest 
on  Side-Line 
Shots 


Cross-Court 
Shots  Must  Be 
Slow 


192      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODEKN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Fast  Balls  Go 
Out  of  Court 


Diagrams 
Explain  the 
Centre  Theory 


Angles  Shorter 
When 
Opponent 
Is  in  Close 


have  to  reach  the  return,  and  the  safer  you  are 
in  close  to  the  net.  Against  some  players,  partic- 
ularly those  who  use  the  chop-stroke,  I  have  even 
found  it  wise  to  use  a  very  short  ball  with  low 
bound  in  the  centre  of  the  court,  for  the  closer  the 
opponent  approaches  your  net  position,  the  nar- 
rower become  the  angles  of  possible  direction  for 
his  passing  shots. 


1 

) 

1 

1 

i 

1 

1 

1 

1 

\ 

1 

I 

1 

I 

1 

) 

1 

1 

1 

\ 

!  J 

(     \ 

i    -  / 

\              V 

,       i 

X             \ 

i     / 

\         . 

i     / 

\ 

/     / 
.    / 

\     \ 

t       / 

X      V 

X      » 

/     / 

X    \ 

// 

J' 

jj 

/'        ""'""""-.^ 

/  /                       VOLU 

XT  '  \ 

/ 

\ 

<\ 

\ 

\ 

\ 

\. 

\ 

\ 

\ 

\ 

X 

% 

z 

^f 

ul 

I 

\ 

i,..v 

'~% 

g          VOLLEY 

^t 

X 

5 

\ 

CHANCES  OF  THE  VOLLEYER  WITH  THE  CENTRE   THEORY  AND 
WITHOUT  IT. 

A  little  study  of  the  accompanying  diagrams 
will  make  it  plain  that  in  the  centre  theory,  the 
striking  point  at  which  the  adversary  hits  the 
ball  is  the  apex  of  a  triangle,  the  sides  of  which 
are  the  lines  of  his  possible  passing  strokes,  and 


POSITION  PLAY 


193 


the  base  of  which  is  that  part  of  the  net  that  the 
volleyer  is  able  to  cover.  Now  the  sides  of  this 
triangle  diverge  more  rapidly  when  the  opponent 
is  drawn  further  forward  in  his  court  by  short 
shot.  In  addition  to  this,  he  must  play  a  slower 
ball,  as  his  angle  of  direction  becomes  more  dif- 
ficult, and  this  in  turn  adds  to  your  advantage  in 
the  additional  time  allowed  to  reach  his  return. 

On  the  other  hand,  note  what  happens  when 
you  go  to  the  net  on  a  ball  placed  off  at  one  side, 
as  shown  in  the  second  diagram.  Whether  your 
man  be  at  the  left  or  right  side  of  his  court,  he  will 
have  the  choice  of  a  fast  side-line  drive,  with  the 
full  length  of  the  court  wide  open  to  him,  and  a 
short  croas-court  pass  with  the  full  width  of  the 
court  in  front  of  you.  You  cannot  possibly  afford 
to  play  a  short  ball  to  the  side,  for  this  wide  choice 
with  the  side  opening  for  a  fast  ball,  will  give 
your  opponent  such  a  golden  opportunity  that  it 
is  almost  hopeless  to  try  to  hold  the  net  position 
from  such  a  weak  stroke. 

There  is  nothing  more  dangerous  to  the  net 
volleyer  than  to  find  his  opponent  with  this  choice, 
and  one  waits  in  this  position  with  fear  and  trem- 
bling, metaphorically  speaking  if  not  physically  so, 
when  he  hesitates  whether  to  dodge  to  the  right 
or  the  left  to  intercept  the  next  attempt  at  a  pass. 
Nothing  is  more  welcome  to  the  average  tourna- 
ment player  than  to  find  his  opponent  at  the  net 
with  the  ball  short  and  off  to  one  side  of  his 
court,  preferably  of  course  on  the  forehand  side, 
and  the  option  in  his  hands  of  playing  a  fast  side- 
line shot,  with  the  long  white  line  to  guide  his 


//  Is 

Dangerous  to 
Play  Short  at 
the  Side 


Volleyer  in 
Trouble  After 
Such  a  Shot 


194      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


How  to  Apply 
the  Centre 
Theory 


A  Distinct 
Help  for 
Defence 


To  Force  an 
Adversary 
to  Come  In 


eye  in  placing  the  ball,  or  a  short  teasing  cross- 
court  drop  stroke  that  is  so  difficult  for  the  vol- 
leyer  to  reach,  and  if  reached  to  kill. 

If  we  accept  the  centre  theory  as  the  safest 
to  work  on,  as  the  majority  of  experienced  tour- 
nament experts  have  already  done,  the  question 
arises  as  to  how  it  can  be  best  employed.  In  serv- 
ice, it  is  doubly  valuable  as  a  help  in  getting  to  the 
net  safely,  for  it  has  the  same  effect  here  and  will 
lessen  the  speed  of  the  striker  and  cut  off  his  an- 
gles of  passing.  This  has  been  more  completely 
treated  in  the  chapter  on  the  service. 

In  general  play,  it  is  a  distinct  help  for  de- 
fence, and  a  valuable  forcing  play  for  attack. 
One  must  remember  that  every  stroke  of  the  game 
is  not  intended  to  win  outright ;  some  of  them  are 
intended  by  wise  players  to  furnish  future  oppor- 
tunities for  killing  strokes.  One  needs  defence  at 
the  back  line,  and  to  keep  the  ball  down  the  middle 
of  the  court  helps  to  prevent  the  adversary  from 
finding  winning  openings  and  limits  his  chances 
of  getting  you  into  difficulties  that  will  provide 
them. 

If  I  were  opposed  by  a  player  whom  I  felt  I 
could  not  actually  beat  and  still  thought  he  might 
lose  by  unsteadiness,  I  could  think  of  no  safer  play 
than  to  return  everything  possible  to  the  centre 
of  his  base-line  and  let  him  drive  the  balls  out  in 
his  effort  to  put  them  out  of  my  reach.  This  ap- 
plies to  base-line  play  of  course,  and  would  be 
feasible  only  so  long  as  the  opponent  stayed  back 
in  his  court.  Unless  he  were  a  powerful  ground- 
stroke  player,  such  a  campaign  would  almost  cer- 


POSITION  PLAY 


195 


Against  a 
Volleyer 


Most  Useful 
for  Safety  in 
Net  Attack 


tainly  drive  him  to  running  up  to  the  net,  and 
should  you  be  opposed  by  a  man  whom  you  were 
very  anxious  to  draw  up  to  the  net,  this  is  one  of 
the  best  ways  to  do  it. 

Once  your  adversary  has  gone  forward  to*  No  Value 
volley,  however,  the  usefulness  of  the  centre  the- 
ory is  gone.     Then  you  must  pass  him  or  lob, 
unless  he  hangs  back  far  enough  to  give  him  a 
dropping  shot  at  the  net  that  he  cannot  kill. 

But  apart  from  purely  defensive  play,  the 
centre  theory  is  most  valuable  for  safety  in  at- 
tacking and  as  a  forcing  stroke.  The  most  diffi- 
cult manoeuver  of  the  net  attack  is  getting  safely 
to  the  net  position.  The  idea  that  one  only  has 
to  run  up  when  he  gets  ready  to  volley,  will  be 
dispelled  the  first  time  it  is  tried  against  a  good 
passing  adversary.  The  right  time  must  be 
chosen  for  such  a  shift  and  even  then  the  way 
must  be  prepared  by  the  proper  play.  With  the 
opponent  far  off  to  one  side  of  his  court  it  is  often 
safe  to  run  in  by  driving  the  next  ball  to  the  oppo- 
site side,  but  the  safety  of  this  play  depends  largely 
on  his  inability  to  pass  well  when  running  fast,  for 
if  he  can  you  will  offer  him  just  the  chance  he 
wants  to  win  the  rally. 

It  would  be  better  to  drive  that  next  ball  deep 
down  the  centre  of  the  court  to  near  the  base-line 
and  then  run  straight  in.  Your  chances  of  being 
passed  will  be  lessened,  and  moreover,  your  being 
able  to  run  straight  instead  of  diagonally  up  will 
keep  your  weight  in  line  with  the  flight  of  the  ball 
and  nearer  the  line  of  the  most  probable  flight  of 


Drive  to  Centre 
of  BaserLine 


196      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


When  Up,  a 
Good  Defence 
of  Net  Position 


Sharp  Angles 
Always  Full  of 
Danger 


Centre 

Principle  Used 
Without  the 

Name 


the  next  return,  than  if  the  ball  were  placed  off  to 
one  side  before  running  in. 

Once  settled  safely  at  the  net  the  centre  the- 
ory is  still  a  splendid  defence  of  your  position  if 
you  do  not  get  the  opportunity  at  once  to  end  the 
play  by  killing  the  ball.  There  are  many  times 
when  a  man  is  volleying  that  he  can  return  the 
ball  but  cannot  kill  it,  and  then  the  part  of  wis- 
dom is  to  keep  the  other  man  from  passing  and 
wait  for  a  better  opening  for  the  kill  you  are 
playing  for.  Again  the  centre  theory  is  needed,  for 
the  volley  that  does  not  kill  is  better  in  the  center 
of  the  court  so  that  the  next  return  shall  not  turn 
the  tables  against  you  and  put  you  on  the  de- 
fensive. 

From  every  viewpoint  then,  the  centre  theory 
is  a  help  to  defence  and  a  greater  help  to  safety 
while  attacking.  For  the  man  who  wants  to 
throw  all  caution  to  the  winds  and  rip  and  slash 
his  way  through  all  opposition,  perhaps  the  better 
course  is  to  adopt  only  the  sharpest  angles  for  all 
his  strokes,  but  this  opens  him  up  to  even  greater 
dangers  than  he  is  hoping  to  ensnare  his  antago- 
nist with,  and  unless  he  is  very  skillful  at  this  style 
of  game  the  safer  man  on  the  other  side  of  the  net 
is  likely  to  beat  him. 

Among  many  of  the  experts  who  do  not 
openly  recognize  this  centre  theory,  which  was  put 
into  practical  use,  if  not  invented,  by  R.  D.  Wrenn 
twenty  years  ago  against  Larned  and  Neel,  the 
same  principles  are  in  use  without  the  name.  One 
may  object  to  calling  the  principle  a  theory,  and 
perhaps  he  is  right,  but  it  is  good  sound  tennis, 


POSITION  PLAY 

and  a  careful  study  and  practice  of  its  use  will 
improve  the  game  of  many  of  those  who  do  not 
understand  position  play  properly. 

The  forcing  stroke  is  one  that  is  not  intended 
to  win  outright  but  to  force  the  opponent  into  such 
difficulties  that  will  later  furnish  an  opportunity 
to  make  the  winning  shot.  The  inspired  player 
who  makes  winning  strokes  from  all  kinds  of  im- 
possible angles  may  be  very  much  admired  by  the 
gallery  but  he  is  seldom  found  as  consistently  in 
the  column  with  the  winners  as  his  brother  who 
does  not  make  so  many  fancy  kills,  but  adopts  the 
forcing  stroke  as  a  method  of  producing  easy 
chances  and  then  never  fails  to  take  advantage 
of  an  easy  opening  when  he  gets  it. 

In  defence,  it  is  used  to  embarrass  the  antag- 
onist so  that  the  attack  can  be  turned  against  him, 
and  during  an  attack  it  keeps  the  other  man  con- 
stantly in  trouble  when  no  winning  opening  is 
presented,  so  that  the  attack  cannot  be  turned 
against  you.  At  the  net,  a  ball  often  comes  that  it 
is  not  possible  to  kill  outright,  yet  it  can  be  played 
with  another  forcing  stroke  that  will  furnish 
the  chance.  It  should  be  placed  short  across  or 
deep  into  the  corner  unless  the  centre  theory  is 
used,  as  it  is  always  dangerous  to  allow  the  oppo- 
nent to  get  close  in  when  a  ball  is  placed  to  the 
side. 

With  an  opponent  at  the  base-line,  the  vol- 
leyer  often  has  the  choice  of  trying  to  cut  his 
volley  off  short  to  one  side  for  an  ace,  or  of  play- 
ing it  deep  into  the  opposite  court  to  force  a  better 
opening  for  a  winning  stroke.  It  is  dangerous  to 


197 


Definition  of 
the  Forcing 
Stroke 


Keeping  the 
Other  Man  in 
Trouble 


Volleyer  Need 
Not  Always 
Play  for  an 
Ace 


198      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


//  No  Opening 
to  Kill,  Use 
Forcing  Stroke 


Correct 
Position 
for  Volleying 


English  Ideas 
Are  Changing 


try  this  short  cross-court  volley  unless  the  other 
man  is  far  enough  back  and  to  one  side  of  his 
court  to  allow  that  stroke  to  win  outright.  If  the 
adversary  has  time  to  get  in  and  play  the  ball  he 
is  likely  to  be  so  close  to  you,  and  so  far  to  one 
side  that  he  will  have  an  easy  opening  for  a  pass- 
ing stroke  that  should  score  the  ace. 

When  no  sure  opening  exists  for  a  winning 
shot,  a  deep  volley  to  one  extreme  corner  is  likely 
to  draw  the  opponent  off  enough  in  that  direction 
to  furnish  the  opening  on  the  next  return  for  the 
winning  short  cross-volley  to  the  opposite  side, 
unless  of  course  the  other  man  anticipates  your 
strategy  and  lobs  or  scores  a  pass  from  the  deep 
ball  you  offer  him. 

The  correct  volleying  position  is  in  the  centre 
of  the  angles  of  the  possible  good  returns  of  the 
adversary,  and  it  must  be  shifted  from  side  to 
side  as  the  ball  is  played  toward  one  side  or  the 
other.  How  close  it  should  be  to  the  net  opens 
up  one  of  the  most  difficult  questions  that  have 
developed  in  the  game.  The  English  players, 
many  of  them,  volley  from  near  the  service-line, 
and  the  ball  has  always  dropped  well  below  the 
top  of  the  net  before  it  reaches  them.  This  posi- 
tion makes  it  necessary  to  volley  underhand  and 
with  a  lifting  stroke  that  of  itself  limits  the  speed 
of  the  ball.  It  robs  the  player  of  the  opportunity 
to  meet  it  while  still  rising,  which  is  a  wonder- 
ful advantage. 

Americans  all  come  in  much  closer  to  volley 
and  Australians  also  find  a  closer  position  more 
profitable.  Even  the  British  experts  of  the  last 


POSITION  PLAY 


199 


few  years  have  seemed  to  appreciate  the  weakness 
of  their  backward  position  for  volleying  and  they 
approach  closer  to  the  net  than  those  of  previous 
decades,  although  still  further  away  than  the  av- 
erage American  tournament  player.  Kidson, 
the  best  Australian  authority,  places  the  volley- 
ing position  at  fifteen  feet  from  the  net  and  ag- 
gressive American  volleyers  cut  this  to  from  eight 
to  twelve  feet. 

The  advantage  of  the  closer  net  position  must 
be  apparent  at  a  glance.  It  permits  the  ball  to 
be  struck  when  at  its  maximum  height  and  before 
it  falls  below  the  top  of  the  net,  which  in  itself 
adds  greatly  to  the  attacking  power  of  the  volley. 
Then  the  time  allowed  the  opponent  to  anticipate 
the  stroke  is  lessened  by  the  shorter  flight  of  both 
the  coming  and  going  ball,  and  the  angles  of  pos- 
sible winning  shots  are  decreased  rapidly  as  the 
volleyer's  position  approaches  the  net. 

The  drawbacks  to  offset  this  advantage  lie 
in  the  shorter  time  the  volleyer  has  to  reach 
the  ball,  and  the  danger  of  overhead  attack  by 
lobbing.  There  is  no  doubt  that  the  lobbing 
danger  is  increased  by  every  yard  that  the  vol- 
leyer creeps  forward,  but  this  can  be  offset  by 
good  footwork,  and  if  the  quick-moving  volleyer 
is  always  on  his  guard  against  this  danger  he 
need  have  little  fear  of  it. 

Williams,  for  instance,  hangs  back  badly  in 
his  volleying,  and  his  failure  to  go  in  close  to  the 
aggressive  net  position  shown  in  the  international 
matches  last  year,  was  apparently  due  more  to 
his  fear  of  being  lobbed  than  to  any  desire  to  volley 


Advantage  of 
the  Close 
Net  Position 


Drawbacks 
Against  It 


Williams'* 
Weakness 
at  the  Net 


200      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Volleyer  Must 
Always  Be 
Ready  to 
Get  Back 


Length  Limits 
the  Power  of 
the  Attack 


from  that  position.  His  dread  of  the  overhead 
attack,  on  the  other  hand,  would  disappear  if  he 
used  better  footwork  and  was  ready  when  close  to 
the  net  to  start  back  quickly  without  turning. 

One  can  approach  the  net  safely  only  so  far 
as  his  quickness  and  preparedness  will  permit 
him  to  back  away  under  a  good  lob  and  still  play 
it  before  it  has  touched  the  ground.  It  is  always 
a  defensive  play  to  let  a  lob  bound,  for  if  you  are 
caught  so  close  in  that  you  must  turn  and  play  the 
ball  from  the  bound,  the  quick  adversary  is  almost 
certain  to  have  followed  up  his  successful  lob  to 
the  net  and  taken  the  attacking  position  away 
from  you.  The  ability  to  come  in  close  increases 
materially  with  good  footwork  because  that  is  the 
basis  of  a  man's  ability  to  back  away  fast.  A 
quick  eye,  a  quick  brain,  and  speedy  co-ordination 
of  muscles  with  mind  are  what  count  most,  of 
course,  in  the  final  analysis  of  most  all  the  prob- 
lems of  the  game,  as  in  this  case. 

Primarily,  length  is  defensive,  and  only  in  a 
passing  shot  is  it  an  advantage  in  an  attempt  to 
score.  It  is  always  a  strong  bulwark  in  defence, 
but  limits  the  power  of  the  attack  because  the 
possible  directions  of  attacking  strokes  on  deep 
returns  keep  the  ball  nearly  parallel  with  the  side- 
lines and  within  a  range  of  the  width  of  the  base- 
line, making  it  easier  for  the  opponent  to  cover 
his  position.  He  will  have  less  distance  to  travel, 
if  all  of  your  returns  fall  in  the  back  of  his  court, 
when  he  need  only  trot  across  from  one  side  to 
the  other. 

When  length  is  varied  as  well  as  side  placing, 


POSITION  PLAY 


201 


the  attack  becomes  more  dangerous.  There  are 
far  greater  possibilities  in  the  front  of  the  court 
for  attack  than  have  ever  yet  been  developed,  al- 
though Holcombe  Ward  and  Beals  Wright  did 
more  in  this  line,  particularly  in  stop-volleys  and 
short  cross-court  cuts,  than  has  been  accom- 
plished by  more  recent  experts.  It  is  even  more 
difficult  for  a  player  to  run  forward  and  back- 
ward than  it  is  to  run  from  side  to  side  in  his 
court.  An  attack,  therefore,  that  is  varied,  not 
only  by  side  placing,  but  by  short  and  deep  balls 
alternately,  will  be  specially  dangerous  to  him. 

At  the  net,  this  varying  of  length  is  also 
possible  by  the  mixing  of  stop-volleys  with  deep 
strokes.  The  great  danger  here  lies  in  letting  the 
other  man  get  in  close,  as  I  have  said  before,  so 
the  stop-volley  is  generally  used  only  as  a  stroke 
for  an  outright  win.  But  short  cut-volleys  from 
side  to  side  are  very  effective  when  varied  with 
deep  returns  to  the  base-line. 

In  correct  position  play,  there  should  be  two 
distinct  bases,  one  for  volleying  and  another  for 
ground  strokes,  to  one  of  which  the  skilful  player 
should  return  after  each  stroke.  These  will  be 
varied  slightly  from  time  to  time  during  play  by 
the  exigencies  of  the  occasion  and  the  position  of 
the  ball.  For  defensive  play,  for  practically  all 
ground  strokes,  the  position  should  be  behind  the 
base-line,  and  how  far  behind  it  depends  chiefly 
on  your  opponent's  length  and  speed  and  your 
own  preference  as  to  height  in  taking  the  ball. 
The  player  who  plays  a  rising  ball  well  can  of 
course  come  in  a  little  closer  for  his  ground 


Great 

Possibilities  in 
the  Front 
of  the  Court 


Winning 
Openings  in 
Short  Volleys 


Two  Bases  for 
Play  Advisable 


202      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Baddeley's 
Forbidden 
Zone 


Maintaining 

Position 

Sidewise 


strokes  than  he  who  prefers  to  hit  the  ball  after 
it  has  started  to  fall  from  its  maximum  height. 

But  in  fast  play  it  is  seldom  safe  to  come  to 
rest  inside  of  the  base-line  unless  you  are  in  front 
of  the  service-line.  Wilfred  Baddeley,  one  of  the 
early  English  masters,  proscribed  as  a  "forbidden 
zone"  all  of  the  court  between  the  service  and 
base-lines,  and  presented  the  fixed  principle  that 
in  fast  play  no  man  should  come  to  rest  within 
this  territory.  You  can  run  through  it  safely  as 
often  as  you  like,  but  keep  on  the  move  while 
there,  either  forward  or  backward,  and  come  to 
rest  only  behind  the  base-line  or  well  forward  for 
the  volley.  If  drawn  into  the  "forbidden  zone" 
to  make  a  return  the  player  should  instantly,  after 
making  his  stroke,  go  forward  to  continue  his 
attack,  or  backward  if  the  circumstances  advise  a 
defensive  position  on  the  next  return.  How 
close  the  volleying  position  should  be  has  already 
been  discussed,  but  according  to  American  ideas 
this  should  be  from  eight  to  twelve  feet  from  the 
net. 

A  very  important  principle  of  position  play 
demands  that  the  careful  player  be  not  drawn  out 
of  position  sidewise,  as  well  as  forward  or  back. 
After  being  forced  far  out  to  the  side  of  the  court, 
time  must  be  reserved  by  some  means  to  get  back 
to  the  playing  centre.  This  is  easy  with  a  deep 
slow  drive  if  the  opponent  is  in  the  back  of  his 
court,  but  if  he  is  at  the  net,  a  lob  may  be  the 
only  means  to  gain  the  needed  time  to  recover 
position.  If  this  is  played  high  and  deep,  how- 
ever, it  will  generally  afford  the  relief  needed, 


POSITION  PLAY 


203 


unless  the  other  man  is  a  dangerous  smasher, 
when  you  may  be  forced  into  the  choice  between 
an  outright  passing  stroke  or  a  sure  loss  of  the 
point. 

Uneven  development  of  one  kind  of  play  often 
forces  the  player  out  of  position  sidewise.  A  man 
with  a  weak  backhand,  which  is  the  most  common 
defect  encountered,  will  frequently  run  around 
the  balls  at  his  left,  so  that  he  may  play  them  with 
his  stronger  forehand  stroke.  But  this  apparent 
advantage  is  exposing  a  weakness  in  another 
direction  by  his  being  drawn  off  to  the  side.  The 
loss  in  position  which  results  from  playing  the 
same  ball  forehand  when  it  should  be  played  back- 
hand is  six  to  eight  feet,  and  it  takes  time  to 
recover  this  much  space  when  the  play  is  fast. 

Take  a  simple  case.  A  ball  is  placed  over 
close  to  your  left  line  and  should  be  played  with 
a  backhand  stroke.  If  properly  played,  your  posi- 
tion will  be  perhaps  three  feet  inside  the  line 
when  the  ball  is  hit.  If  you  run  around  the  ball, 
you  will  be  about  three  or  four  feet  outside  the 
line  when  you  hit  the  ball,  some  six  or  seven  feet 
further  from  the  center  of  the  court  than  if  you 
had  played  the  ball  correctly.  Now,  if  the  next 
return  be  placed  far  off  to  the  opposite  side,  or 
be  volleyed  down  the  right  side  at  all,  you  will 
find  it  difficult  to  get  back  in  time,  and  if  you  fail 
it  will  probably  be  by  less  than  six  feet,  so  that 
those  precious  six  feet  lost  by  running  around  the 
ball  will  have  been  enough  to  cost  you  the  point. 

As  Little  says,  running  around  the  ball  is 
only  a  Secondary  defence  that  should  be  adopted 


How  a  Weak 
Backhand 
Loses  Many 
Points 


Running 
Around 
the  Ball 
Poor  Tactics 


A  Secondary 
Defence, 
at  Best 


204      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


McLoughlin's 

Success 

No  Criterion 


Attacking 
Weakness 
Through 
Strength 


only  when  it  is  impossible  to  hit  it  in  the  natural 
way.  It  is  far  better  to  play  it  badly  in  the  right 
way  and  practice  on  the  weak  stroke  until  it  has 
been  mastered,  for  it  should  be  unnecessary  to 
run  around  the  ball  in  this  way.  A  chain  is  no 
stronger  than  its  weakest  link,  and  a  tennis  player 
is  no  stronger  than  his  weakest  stroke,  if  his  ad- 
versary knows  how  to  take  advantage  of  that 
weakness. 

Some  quick  players,  those  especially  quick  on 
their  feet,  are  able  to  successfully  run  around  the 
ball,  and  McLoughlin  did  it  constantly  against 
Brookes  in  the  Internationals  last  year,  running 
around  the  services  of  the  great  Australian  in  the 
left  court,  which  were  carefully  placed  on  his 
backhand  side.  But  McLoughlin  might  do  with 
his  quickness  on  his  feet  much  that  the  ordinary 
player  could  not  do,  and  it  is  a  poor  play  to  rely 
on  at  best.  When  forced  into  this  make-shift, 
one  should  never  play  safe,  but  hit  hard  for  an 
ace. 

Against  such  players,  a  constant  attack  of 
the  weak  side  is  not  always  the  best.  It  is  often 
better  to  attack  their  weakness  through  their 
strength  by  drawing  them  off  first  to  the  side  on 
which  they  are  best,  so  that  the  ball  can  be  placed 
so  far  to  the  other  side  that  they  have  not  time  to 
run  around  it.  This  is  often  better  than  forcing 
the  weaker  side  and  depending  on  winning  an 
ace  on  the  next  stroke  because  they  are  out  of 
position. 

The  two  critical  points  in  position  play  lie 
in  the  rush  for  the  net  when  the  man  at  the  back 


POSITION  PLAY 


205 


of  his  court  takes  the  bit  in  his  teeth  and  tries  to 
win  by  volleying,  and  the  time  when  the  opponent 
lobs  over  his  head.  If  the  volleyer  backs  away 
and  smashes  or  volleys  the  lob,  he  must  spring 
forward  again  immediately  to  prevent  the  next 
return,  if  he  has  not  killed  the  ball,  from  falling 
at  his  feet.  On  the  other  hand,  if  the  volleyer 
lets  the  ball  drop  and  turns  to  return  it  off  the 
ground,  that  is  the  time  the  other  man  must  be 
ready  at  once  to  take  advantage  of  his  success  by 
rushing  in  the  instant  he  sees  the  other  start  to 
turn. 

The  possession  of  the  net  position  implies  an 
advantage  of  fifty  per  cent,  in  the  power  of  the 
attack,  and  every  clear  opportunity  to  seize  it 
without  unnecessary  danger  of  being  passed 
should  be  taken  advantage  of  without  hesitation 
or  delay. 

But  the  position  in  court  and  the  wisdom  of 
taking  the  net  at  all  depend  largely  on  the  style 
of  play  that  the  opponent  is  best  at.  One  should 
not  play  into  his  hands,  and  it  may  be  part  of  his 
strategy  to  draw  you  in  to  the  net  because  he  is 
especially  expert  in  the  passing  strokes.  In  such 
a  case,  it  is  well  to  be  doubly  wary  and  not  to  be 
drawn  in  unless  the  other  man  is  in  such  diffi- 
culties that  his  chances  for  such  a  pass  are  re- 
duced to  the  minimum. 

On  the  other  hand  the  adversary  may  be 
poor  on  the  ground  strokes,  preferring  himself  the 
net  position,  and  then  every  opportunity  should  be 
seized  to  rush  in,  even  at  the  risk  of  some  danger 
in  getting  there.  It  simply  reduces  itself  to  fore- 


Critical 
Moments  in 
Position  Play 


Seize  the  Net 
Position 
Without  Delay 


Do  Not  Play 
Into  the  Other 
Man's  Hands 


Make  Him 
Play  the 
Strokes  He 
Likes  Least 


206      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Playing  for 
the  Smaller 
Opening 


Catching  the 
Opponent  Off 
His  Balance 


ing  the  other  man  to  play  the  strokes  he  is  least 
expert  in,  and  at  the  same  time  to  try  to  gain  and 
hold  the  position  from  which  you  can  play  the 
game  best. 

When  passing  an  opponent  at  the  net,  the 
smaller  opening  is  often  the  best  if  he  is  moving 
fast  to  get  back  into  position.  Suppose  you  have 
tried  a  pass  along  his  right  line ;  suppose  he  has 
jumped  across  in  time  to  intercept  it  and  you  are 
selecting  the  opening  for  the  next  attempt.  If 
the  opponent  has  hardly  had  time  to  get  back  to 
his  playing  center  again,  he  will  probably  be  on 
the  move  when  you  hit  the  ball  the  second  time 
and  still  going  toward  the  centre. 

Often  the  opposite  side  seems  to  offer  a  much 
wider  opening  to  place  the  ball  through,  but  one 
must  remember  that  he  can  cover  more  ground  in 
the  direction  he  is  moving  than  the  opposite  way, 
for  it  takes  time  to  stop  and  turn.  It  is  often  best 
in  such  cases  to  play  for  the  smaller  opening,  that 
is,  to  try  the  same  side  again,  although  he  may  be 
just  leaving  that  side  of  the  court  when  you  start 
your  stroke.  This  is  called  catching  your  man  off 
his  balance  by  the  tournament  experts,  and  they 
find  it  very  profitable  if  the  direction  of  the  play  is 
well  covered. 


POSITION  PLAY 


207 


OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS. 

Against  a  persistent  lobber,  would  you  stay  up 
and  smash  or  go  back  to  stop  the  lobbing  f 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND:    Depends  on  conditions. 
T.  C.  BUNDY  :    Stay  up  and  kill,  if  your  overhead  is 
developed ;  if  not,  develop  it. 

K.  H.  BEHR  :    Stay  up  and  keep  smashing. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER  :    Stay  up,  speaking  personally. 
R.  D.  LITTLE:     Stay  up  and  smash.     If  you  can't 

stand  the  lobbing  strain,  you  can  never  win  from  the 
base-line. 

H.  H.  HACKETT:    Stay  up. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT  :    Remain  at  the  net. 
J.  C.  PARKE  :    Doesn't  affect  me. 

C.  P.  DIXON  :   This  would  depend  on  my  form  at  the 
time.    Should  start  smashing,  but  if  making  many  mis- 
takes should  retire  to  the  base-line. 

R.  L.  MURRAY  :   Stay  up  and  smash  him  out. 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :   Stay  up  and  smash. 

W.  M.  WASHBURN  :  It  depends  how  I  was  smash- 
ing. I  should  stay  up  unless  I  was  completely  demoralized 
overhead. 

ELIA  FOTTRELL  :   Stay  up  and  smash. 

CLARENCE  HOBART:   Try  both. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST  :   The  former  if  I  was  able. 
J.  R.  STRACHAN  :    Stay  up  and  smash. 

C.  R.  GARDNER  :  Which  ever  seemed  best  in  the  par- 
ticular instance. 

A.  S.  DABNEY  :  I'd  stay  back  to  stop  it  if  I  was  los- 
ing by  smashing  badly. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :    Stay  up  and  smash. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :    Up  and  smash. 

W.  F.  JOHNSON  :   A  consistent  division. 


Stay  Up  or 
Back 
Against  a 
Lobber? 


Smash  Him 

Out, 

Says  Murray 


208      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Pell  Thinks  a 
Good  Lobber 
Would  Drive 
Smasher  Back 


Most  Others 
Advise 
Staying  Up 


N.  W.  NILES:  Stay  up.  If  very  bad  overhead  for 
some  reason  like  sun,  might  stay  back  if  opponent  did 
not  come  up. 

T.  R.  PELL:  You  can't  stay  up  on  a  good  lobber; 
better  keep  back. 

ROBERT  LERov :  I  don't  know ;  I  should  probably  try 
to  do  each  in  turn. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR  :    Stay  up  in  most  cases. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:    Stay  up  and  smash. 

J.  J.  ARMSTRONG  :   Stay  up  and  smash. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :    Stay  up  and  smash. 

W.  M.  HALL:     Stay  up  unless  I  was  missing. 

RICHARD  HARTE:  Stay  up  and  smash  and  if  one 
smashes  well  he  will  soon  behave. 

DEAN  MATHEY  :    Stay  up  and  smash. 

R.  C.  SEAVER:  If  I  was  a  good  net  player  I  would 
stay  up  as  long  as  I  could. 

G.  C.  SHAFER:  Stay  up  if  in  smashing  form,  other- 
wise back. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL:    Stay  up. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY  :  Stay  up  and  smash. 

I.  C.  WRIGHT:    Stay  up;  wait  for  a  short  one. 

W.  C.  GRANT:    I  should  stay  up. 


Which  Is  the 
Stronger  Game, 
Base-Line  or 
Netf 


Do  you  believe  base-line  play  or  volleying  the 
stronger  game? 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND :   Both  together. 

T.  C.  BUNDY  :   Volleying. 

K.  H.  BEHR  :    Of  the  two,  volleying  generally. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER:     Volleying. 

R.  D.  LITTLE:  Volleying  is  the  winning  aggressive 
game,  but  the  base-line  is  a  very  necessary  thing. 

H.  H.  HACKETT:  Volleying  in  exceptional  cases. 
Base-line  play  ordinarily. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT:  Volleying,  as  the  modern  game  of 
aggressiveness  has  proved. 


POSITION  PLAY 

J.  C.  PARKE  :  Depends  entirely  on  the  calibre  of  the 
player. 

C.  P.  DIXON:  Neither;  the  strongest  game  is  the 
blend  or  mixture  of  both  and  the  right  judgment  in  use 
of  either.  The  two  Dohertys  were  well  armed  at  all 
points.  I  don't  deny,  however,  that  a  one-stroke  player 
may  go  a  good  way. 

R.  L.  MURRAY  :   Volleying. 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :  I  think  that  volleying  is  the  strong- 
er game. 

W.  M.  WASHBURN  :    It  depends  on  the  individual. 

ELIA  FOTTRELL  :  Volleying. 

CLARENCE  HOBART:  The  perfect  base-line  player 
would  beat  the  perfect  volleyer. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST  :    As  the  service  rules  are  at  pres- 
ent, volleying  is  the  winning  game. 

J.  R.  STRACHAN:  I  think  that  base-line  play  is 
stronger. 

C.  R.  GARDNER  :  Would  you  prefer  a  million  dollars' 
worth  of  diamonds  or  a  million  dollars'  worth  of  pearls? 

A.  S.  DABNEY  :  Volleying. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :    A  combination. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :     Most  players  in  this  country  win  at 
the  net. 

W.  F.  JOHNSON  :  A  perfect  back-court  game  always 
the  best. 

N.  W.  NILES:  Volleying,  so  far  as  both  have  been 
developed.  From  what  I  hear,  the  Englishman,  Smith,  in 
his  prime  could  beat  any  volleyer  from  back  court. 

T.  R.  PELL:  Volleying. 

ROBERT  LsRoY :   Volleying. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR:    Volleying. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:    I  don't  believe  in  either  style  to 
the  exclusion  of  the  other  always. 

J.  J.  ARMSTRONG  :  Volleying  with  a  strong  service ; 
vice  versa  without. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :   Volleying. 

W.  M.  HALL:  I  think  the  volleying  game  will  beat 
base-line,  other  things  equal. 


209 


Hobart 

Believes  in  the 
Base -Line 
Game 


Smith  Might 
Beat  Any 
Volleyer 


Most 

Americans 
Favor  the 
Volley  Game 


210      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 

RICHARD  HARTE:     If  played  well,  there  is  little  to 
choose. 

Don't  Crowd  DEAN  MATHEY :    Volleying. 

the  Net  Rashly,  R.  Q  SEAVER  :    Volleying. 

Says  Shafer  Q  Q  SHAFER  :    Volleying  when  you  have  the  open- 

ing.   Crowd  the  net  when  you  can,  but  not  too  rashly. 
S.  H.  VOSHELL:   Volleying. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY:     I  think  the  two  styles  must  be 
used  together,  with  the  pendulum  swinging  in  favor  of 
the  volley. 

I.  C.  WRIGHT:    Volleying. 

W.  C.  GRANT:    I  should  try  to  reach  the  net  when- 
ever I  could. 

Will  not  a  combination  of  both  styles  beat  either 
alone? 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND:  Yes. 
Combination  of  T  c  BuNDY:    Depends  entirely  on  how  efficient. 

Both  Beat  T^   TT    T>  v 

Either  T  '  H<  BEHR:    Yes- 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER  :    Perfection  in  both  styles  would, 

but  do  not  consider  that  possible. 

R.  D.  LITTLE  :    Yes,  in  perfection. 
H.H.  HACKETT:  Yes. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT  :    Yes,  but  seventy-five  per  cent,  vol- 
leying. 

J.  C.  PARKE  :    Probably. 

C.  P.  DIXON  :  Yes. 

R.  L.  MURRAY  :  At  its  best,  yes. 

Church  G.  M.  CHURCH  :    I  don't  think  so,  because  if  a  man 

Thinks  Not  pays    equal    attention   to   both    volleying    and    ground- 

strokes,  he  will  not  be  as  expert  in  either  one  as  if  he 
specialized  in  it. 

W.  M.  WASHBURN:   Yes. 

ELIA  FOTTRELL:    Yes. 

CLARENCE  HOBART:   Yes,  if  good  enough. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST:    Yes,  the  striker  is  a  base-liner 
every  other  game. 


POSITION  PLAY 


211 


C.  R.  GARDNER:    Depends. 

A.  S.  DABNEY  :   Yes,  on  the  average. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.:    Theoretically,  yes. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :    Yes. 
W.  F.  JOHNSON  :  Yes. 

N.  W.  NILES:     A  remarkable  server  and  volleyer     Most  Other 
apparently  will  beat  one  having  the  combination,  if  latter     Players  Say 
is  not  almost  as  good  at  net  and  back-court  as  former 
is  at  net.   However,  a  combination  will  usually  win. 

T.  R.  PELL:    Yes. 

ROBERT  LEROY:    Yes,  decidedly. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR:    Decidedly  yes. 

G.  F.  TOUCH ARD  :  Always. 
J.  J.  ARMSTRONG:    Yes. 
LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :    Yes. 
W.  M.  HALL:    Probably. 
RICHARD  HARTE  :  Yes. 

DEAN  MATHEY  :  Not  necessarily ;  witness  McLough- 
lin. 

R.  C.  SEAVER:  Yes. 

G.  C.  SHAFER:   Yes,  usually. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL:    Yes. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY:  Yes. 
I.  C.  WRIGHT:   Yes. 

Are  there  not  bigger  possibilities  in  the  use  of  the 
front  of  the  court  for  aces,  in  short  cross- 
court  strokes  and  short  balls,  than  have  yet 
been  developed? 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND:     It  is  hard  to  predict  the  Are 

future.  More 

T.  C.  BuNDY :    Yes.  Possibilities  in 

K.  H.  BEHR:    I  suppose  so.  the  Front 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER:     No  more  than  Holcombe  Ward 
developed. 

R.  D.  LITTLE:    I  don't  think  so.    The  greatest  pos- 


212      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Ward  Said  to 
Have  Done 
All  Possible 


Much 

Difference  in 
Views  on 
This  Question 


Johnson 
Believes  There 
is  Always 
Room  for 
Improvement 


Indeed   There 
Are,  Says 
LeRoy 


sibilities  to  come  are  in  change  of  pace,  study  of  position 
and  balance. 

H.  H.  HACKETT:  I  doubt  if  there  are  greater  pos- 
sibilities than  developed  by  Ward  at  his  best. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT:    Yes,  most  players  go  for  passing 
shots  too  much. 

J.  C.  PARKE:    No. 

C.  P.  DIXON:    Possibly  so,  but  I  have  still  faith  in 
development  of  swerve,  break,  twist  and  cut  strokes. 
I  do  not  consider  that  all  these  have  been  fully  exploited 
so  far. 

R.  L.  MURRAY  :    There  certainly  are. 
G.  M.  CHURCH  :   I  do  not  think  so. 
W.  M.  WASHBURN:    Yes.    However,  such  strokes 
are  exceptionally  hard  to  control. 
ELIA  FOTTRELL  :  I  think  so. 
CLARENCE  HOBART:    Yes. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST  :    May  be,  but  very  difficult  off  the 
fast  service  and  driving  of  to-day. 

C.  R.  GARDNER:    I  think  so. 

A.  S.  DABNEY  :    I  don't  think  so. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :    Probably. 

F.  C.  INMAN:     Yes,  but  few  of  our  players  could 
make  the  shots  today. 

W.  F.  JOHNSON  :  Yes,  there  is  always  a  chance  for 
greater  development. 

N.  W.  NILES:  I  believe  every  practical  shot  of  the 
above  variety  is,  or  has  been,  used  as  a  regular  play, 
i.  e.}  Beals  Wright's  slow  shots  cut  to  your  feet ;  English- 
men's sharp  cross-court  off  the  service  in  doubles,  etc. 
No  one  person,  I  guess,  has  ever  developed  the  majority 
of  these  shots.  If  he  did,  I  think  he  might  do  so  at  the 
expense  of  the  rest  of  his  game. 

T.  R.  PELL:   Yes. 

ROBERT  LEROY  :  Indeed  there  are.  Look  at  the  way 
the  Johnson  brothers  of  Boston  used  these  strokes  in 
doubles  a  few  years  ago  with  great  success.  It  can  also 
be  done  in  singles. 


POSITION  PLAY 


213 


A.  M.  SQUAIR  :    Quite  possibly. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD  :  I  don't  know. 

J.  J.  ARMSTRONG:  Beals  Wright,  best  exponent  of 
this  game. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN:    Yes. 

W.  M.  HALL:    I  think  so. 

RICHARD  HARTE  :   Yes. 

DEAN  MATHEY:  Simply  a  question  of  getting  in 
closer  to  the  net. 

R.  C.  SEAVER:   Yes. 

G.  C.  SHAFER:  Probably — but  we  have  some  excel- 
lent net  men. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL:   No. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY:  I  don't  think  so.  If  you  overdo 
this  kind  of  play,  you  will  either  be  passed  easier  or  get 
lobbed  over  your  head. 

I.C.  WRIGHT:  Yes. 


Whitney  Does 
Not  Think  So 


Do  you  use  the  "centre  theory"  in  running  to  the 
net? 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND :    Not  always. 

T.  C.  BUNDY  :  Depends  whether  opponent  is  cross- 
courter  or  straight  driver. 

K.  H.  BEHR:  Against  a  balanced  player  almost 
always. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER  :    Not  always. 
R.  D.  LITTLE  :   To  some  extent. 
H.  H.  HACKETT  :    At  times. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT  :  No. 

J.  C.  PARKE:    Sometimes. 

C.  P.  DIXON  :    Yes,  with  good  length  to  support  it, 
but  there  is  nothing  like  varying  your  game  and  place- 
ment. 

R.  L.  MURRAY  :  Yes,  I  do  at  times. 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :  About  half  the  time. 

W.  M.  WASHBURN  :    Unless  I  wish  to  place  to  my 


Do  All 
Experts  Use 
Centre 
Theoryt 


Both 

Englishmen 
Favor  It 


214      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Strachan  Runs 
Up  in  the 
Centre 


Says 

Armstrong: 
"No  Theories 
for  Me" 


opponent's  backhand,  or  to  some  unguarded  point  in  his 
court. 

CLARENCE  HOBART:   Sometimes. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST  :  Yes. 

J.  R.  STRACHAN  :  I  very  seldom  run  to  the  net,  but 
when  I  do  I  run  up  in  the  centre. 

C.  R.  GARDNER  :    Not  so  much  as  I  should,  perhaps. 

A.  S.  DABNEY  :  Sometimes. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :    As  a  rule. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :    Often,  but  not  always. 
W.  F.  JOHNSON  :  Yes. 

N.  W.  NILES:  If  the  "centre  theory"  means,  run- 
ning to  the  net  down  as  nearly  the  centre  of  the  court  as 
possible  when  not  anticipating,  I  do  use  it. 

T.  R.  PELL:    Yes. 

ROBERT  LEROY:  Yes,  when  I  can,  but  I  have  dif- 
ficulty because  I  am  accustomed  to  play  my  ground- 
strokes  close  to  the  side-lines. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR:    Usually,  not  always. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:    Yes. 

J.  J.  ARMSTRONG  :   No  theories  for  me. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :     No. 

W.  M.  HALL:  At  times,  particularly  against  chop- 
stroke  players. 

RICHARD  HARTE  :  A  little. 

DEAN  MATHEY:  At  times.  Believe  it  to  be  abso- 
lutely sound. 

R.  C.  SEAVER:    Yes. 

G.  C.  SHAFER:  Somewhat,  but  usually  play  to  the 
weak  spot  and  then  run  in. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL:    Sometimes. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY  :   Only  intuitively. 

I.  C.  WRIGHT  :   Depends  on  position. 

W.  C.  GRANT:  In  serving,  I  follow  the  direction  of 
the  ball,  i.  e.,  in  serving  to  the  corners,  I  play  a  little 
to  that  side  of  the  centre  of  the  centre-line. 


MATCH  PLAY  TACTICS 


215 


XV. 


MATCH  PLAY  TACTICS 


FIVE  CARDINAL  POINTS  TO  REMEMBER: 


1 — Feel  out  your  opponent  at  all  points  and  attack 

his  weakest  spot. 
2 — Finding  a  vulnerable  point,  hammer  away  at 

it  unceasingly. 
3 — Shift  tactics  always  when  losing,  but  never 

change  a  winning  style. 
4 — Save  your  strength  by  judicious  finesse,  and 

if  your  opponent  weakens,  play  safe. 
5 — Banish  all  spectacular  gallery  strokes,  and 

play  to  the  score,  not  the  crowd,  if  you  want 

to  win. 


Cardinal  Points 
to  Keep  in 
Mind 


BEFORE  TOUCHING  on  the  subject  of 
match-play  tactics,  I  feel  inclined  to  sug- 
gest that  a  goodly  part  of  the  volume  under 
the  title  of  "Tennis  Tactics,"  written  by  Ray- 
mond D.  Little  a  few  years  ago,  might  safely  be 
reprinted  here  under  this  head,  and  I  could  hardly 
hope  to  improve  on  it.  Certainly,  Little's  ex- 
pounding of  the  inner  workings  of  the  best  play- 
ers, his  "inside  tennis,"  #s  baseball  lovers  might 
describe  that  part  of  the  game,  is  most  lucid,  most 
helpful  and  most  enlightening  to  the  great  ma- 
jority of  those  who  are  safely  past  the  first  prin- 


Little's  Book 
on  "Inside 
Tennis" 


216      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Mental 
Attitude 
Appealed  to 


You  Know 
What  You  Can 
Do,  But  Not 
Your  Opponent 


Feeling  Out 
the  Other 
Man's  Strokes 


ciples  and  who  want  to  improve  on  their  match 
play  skill.  It  is  a  book  for  tournament  players, 
not  for  beginners,  but  the  best  of  its  kind  extant. 

The  mental  attitude  of  the  player  is  what  I 
wish  to  appeal  to  chiefly  in  this  chapter;  it  is  a 
point  of  the  game  too  often  neglected.  We  often 
consider,  or  many  of  us  do,  that  winning  or  losing 
at  tennis  is  simply  a  matter  of  which  player  can  hit 
the  ball  most  skillfully.  But  this  is  not  so;  there 
is  much  more  in  the  mental  work  of  the  players 
and  we  constantly  see  an  inferior  stroke  player 
beating  one  who  seems  to  be  the  better.  Cherches 
le  brains! 

Unless  you  are  very  familiar  with  your  adver- 
sary's play,  when  a  match  or  even  a  practice  game 
begins,  you  know  very  closely  what  you  can  do 
yourself,  but  you  seldom  know  what  the  other 
man  will  do.  That  is  a  condition  of  mental  un- 
certainty that  ruins  the  hopes  of  many  tourna- 
ment players.  They  feel  that  they  must  win  from 
the  start  or  not  at  all,  and  they  become  so  en- 
grossed with  the  making  of  their  own  strokes 
that  they  have  no  time  to  discover  what  the  other 
man  is  doing. 

Personally,  after  twenty  years  of  tournament 
play,  I  found  that  I  was  still  in  a  most  receptive 
frame  of  mind  whenever  I  met  a  player  with  whose 
game  I  was  not  familiar.  I  was  perfectly  con- 
tent to  play  at  the  start  the  most  ordinary  strokes 
with  as  much  variety  as  I  could  muster,  and  to 
watch  my  man  very  closely  to  see  how  he  handled 
each  variation  that  I  offered  him.  First,  I  watched 
to  see  whether  he  was  better  at  backhand  or  fore- 


Copyright  by  J.  P.  Paret 


WILLIAM  A.  LARNED 
Moderate  Smash  of  a  Lob. 

Generally  an  overhead  volley  of  this  kind  is  quite  as  effective  for  killing 
a  short  lob  as  a  hard  smash,  and  entails  much  less  risk  of  error.  A 
dropping  ball  can  be  volleyed  off  to  one  side  and  killed  without  excessive 
speed.  The  left  foot  here  has  come  forward  to  clieck  the  weight.  Com- 
pare this  with  position  of  Wilding  before  making  a  similar  stroke. 


ANTHONY   F.  WILDING 
Waiting  for  an  Overhead  Smash 

This  shows  the  splendid  action  of  the  ex-champion  waiting  to  kill  a  deep 

lob.    As  the  racket  comes  down  the  left  foot  will  move  forward  to  check 

the  weight  thrown   into  the  stroke.     Stepping  forward  to  meet  the  ball 

always  gives  better  power  than  letting  the  ball  meet  the  racket. 


MATCH  PLAY  TACTICS 


217 


hand;  then,  if  he  seemed  to  prefer  cross-courting 
or  driving  down  the  lines ;  next,  if  he  always  re- 
turned the  service  in  a  stereotyped  fashion ;  when 
I  went  to  the  net,  whether  he  lobbed  at  all,  or  con- 
fined his  efforts  to  trying  to  pass.  Sometimes,  I 
would  deliberately  leave  an  opening  at  one  side 
of  the  court  to  learn  if  he  was  observant  and 
watching  for  quick  openings. 

This  is  the  way  the  experienced  tournament 
player  sizes  up  his  man  and  learns  where  lie  the 
best  openings  for  attack.  Once  this  has  been 
learned,  half  the  battle  is  over  and  then  it  is  only 
a  matter  of  steadily  hammering  at  the  weaknesses 
in  the  enemy's  armour  to  gradually  run  the  score 
up  to  the  winning  total.  But  one  cannot  take  it 
easy  on  the  court  even  after  this  stage  has  been 
reached.  Remember,  the  other  man  may  be  think- 
ing, too;  he  may  fathom  your  method  of  at- 
tack, and  you  may  suddenly  find  that  he  is  antici- 
pating your  strokes. 

Let  me  tell  a  little  story  of  a  match  some  years 
ago  in  the  New  York  state  championship  at  Syra- 
cuse to  illustrate  the  point  I  am  trying  to  explain. 
I  met  the  late  Alexander  Jenney  in  the  semi-final 
round  in  this  tournament  after  he  had  vanquished 
several  pretty  strong  players.  Jenney  was  entirely 
unknown  to  me  but  he  had  the  reputation  of  play- 
ing a  wonderfully  strong  forehand  drive.  The 
entire  local  contingent  had  turned  out  to  see  their 
favorite  meet  one  of  the  visiting  players,  and  their 
hopes  ran  high  at  the  start  when  the  studying 
process  began. 

Ball  after  ball  that  went  to  Jenney's  forehand 


Hammer  Away 
at  His 
Weakness 


A   Weak 
Backhand 
Furnishes  a 
Target 


218      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


A  Story 
Illustrates 
the  Point 


Protecting 
Backhand 
Exposes 
Forehand 


Uncertainty 
of  Attack 
Spells  Success 


came  back  faster  than  I  had  ever  seen  tennis  balls 
fly  before.  His  drives  were  literally  unplayable ; 
I  could  not  even  reach  them,  much  less  return 
them,  and  it  became  apparent  in  the  first  game  or 
two  why  he  had  beaten  the  other  men.  I  tried  the 
backhand  side  and  the  ball  came  back  awkwardly 
and  with  little  speed.  His  backhand  returns  were 
so  slow  and  so  high  over  the  net  that  it  was  easy 
to  go  to  the  net  and  volley  with  little  risk  of  being 
passed. 

But  Jenney  soon  saw  that  the  attack  was  di- 
rected at  his  left  and  worked  over  to  that  side  to 
protect  his  weakness  until  he  left  so  much  of  his 
forehand  court  open  that  it  was  an  easy  matter 
to  ace  him  on  that  side.  After  the  first  three  or 
four  games,  my  opponent  had  very  few  oppor- 
tunities to  play  his  favorite  forehand  stroke,  as 
the  ball  was  kept  always  on  his  backhand  until  he 
worked  over  too  far,  and  then  he  was  driven  back 
into  his  correct  position  in  the  middle  of  the  court 
by  an  ace  or  two  out  so  far  on  his  forehand  that 
he  could  not  reach  them.  From  3 — 0  in  his  favor 
in  the  first  set,  the  match  was  lost  by  3 — 6,  0 — 6, 
yet  his  forehand  strokes  were  better  than  mine  at 
all  times. 

Once  an  opponent's  weakness  is  discovered, 
the  attack  should  be  centered  at  this  point  so  long 
as  it  is  successful,  but  be  always  on  the  watch  for 
a  shift  on  his  part  that  will  show  he  is  anticipat- 
ing your  attack.  That  is  the  time  to  change  it 
immediately.  The  unexpectedness  of  an  attack  is 
the  precious  jewel  that  wins  success  for  it. 

Yet  there  are  one  or  two  sound  principles 


MATCH  PLAY  TACTICS 


219 


that  can  always  be  relied  upon;  they  need  hardly 
be  varied.  A  man  with  a  pronounced  weakness  on 
one  side  can  always  be  attacked  there;  he  cannot 
entirely  cover  it  up  by  running  around  the  ball, 
for  instance.  He  can  lean  a  little  toward  his 
weak  side  perhaps  with  safety,  but  against  a  quick 
adversary  the  instant  he  goes  so  far  as  to  run 
around  the  ball,  he  is  wide  open  to  a  winning 
attack,  an  ace  I  mean,  on  the  other  side.  Running 
around  a  ball  is  at  best  only  a  secondary  defence 
to  cover  a  pronounced  weakness. 

I  have  had  many  good  demonstrations  of  this 
principle,  because  I  was  always  a  weak  backhand 
player.  Holcombe  Ward  used  to  drive  me  out  of 
court  on  the  left  side  with  his  American  twist 
service  and  then  ace  me  on  the  forehand  side  when 
I  tried  to  run  around  the  ball  to  hit  it  forehanded. 
In  the  right  court,  the  ball  bounded  toward  the 
centre  of  the  court  and  I  could  with  safety  run 
out  to  the  left  and  make  a  strong  return  from  it 
without  losing  a  safe  position  in  court,  but  never 
on  the  other  side. 

There  are  many  other  points  of  weakness 
that  can  be  found  if  diligently  searched  for.  Many 
players  have  a  peculiarity  of  becoming  "set"  in  a 
fixed  position  when  waiting  for  their  return,  and 
such  men  can  almost  invariably  be  thrown  off 
their  stroke,  by  directing  the  attack  to  the  side 
where  they  are  not  expecting  it. 

Another  delicate  point  to  be  watched  is  the 
balance  of  the  antagonist.  Some  players  are  so 
quick  to  anticipate  an  attack  that  they  show 
in  advance  what  their  defence  is  to  be,  while 


Running 
Around 
Weakness  to 
Cover  Up 


How  This 
Worked  Out 
Against  Ward 


Surprising  a 
Player  in  a 
Set  Position 


22.0      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Catching  Your 
Opponent  Off 
His  Balance 


Covering   the 
Stroke  to 
Increase  Attack 


A  Low  Lob 
Catches  Close 
Net  Player 


others  have  a  tendency  to  throw  their  weight  too 
far  in  the  direction  they  believe  the  return  will 
come.  Once  this  characteristic  is  learned,  it  is 
generally  a  wise  move  to  delay  the  attack  a  frac- 
tion of  a  second,  if  necessary  hitting  the  ball  a 
little  later  or  lower  on  the  bound,  and  then  turn- 
ing the  attack  in  the  direction  opposite  to  that 
expected. 

"Covering"  the  stroke  is  another  device  used 
by  many  players  for  the  same  purpose.  This  is 
simply  hiding  its  direction  by  altering  the  swing 
and  to  prevent  your  opponent  from  anticipating 
your  shot,  and  makes  your  attack  always  more 
dangerous.  If  a  net  player,  for  instance,  is  in- 
clined to  carry  his  balance  too  far  forward  as  he 
stands  in  the  volleying  position,  he  is  always  vul- 
nerable to  an  overhead  attack  with  a  low  lob.  He 
will  not  be  able  to  shift  his  weight  and  get  back 
quick  enough  to  anticipate  it.  The  same  is  true  of 
a  player  who  leans  to  the  right  or  left  noticeably 
while  waiting  for  an  attacking  stroke. 

I  remember  using  this  overhead  attack  once 
with  splendid  success  against  Hugh  Tallant,  a 
player  who  was  always  too  close  to  the  net  when 
volleying  and  who  carried  his  weight  too  far 
forward  to  anticipate  lobs.  In  one  match  for  the 
Hudson  River  Championship,  I  remember  scoring 
twelve  aces  by  balls  lobbed  over  his  head  that  he 
could  not  reach.  And  a  small  number  of  strokes 
like  this  is  often  enough  to  turn  defeat  into 
victory.  When  players  are  evenly  matched,  the 
difference  in  their  total  score  at  the  end  of  a  match 
is  frequently  only  a  few  points,  and  these  may 


MATCH  PLAY  TACTICS 


221 


have  been  turned  by  some  small  advantage  like 
this. 

Among  more  expert  players,  the  weaknesses 
are  not  so  often  to  be  found,  and  it  often  takes 
long  study  to  find  even  the  slightest  openings. 
Close  study  of  the  technique  of  Dwight  Davis's 
game  was  enough  to  win  the  All-Comers'  tourna- 
ment at  Newport  for  me  in  1899.  I  had  been 
beaten  by  Davis  at  Longwood  the  same  season, 
but  had  profited  by  my  experience.  When  I 
met  him  in  the  finals  for  the  Championship,  I  had 
a  new  theory  to  work  on.  I  conceived  the  idea 
that  Davis,  a  left-handed  player,  could  not  cross- 
court  a  fast  service  on  his  backhand  side  short 
enough  to  pass  a  close  volleyer.  That  seems  like 
a  very  small  opening  but  it  was  enough  to  win  a 
five-set  match  for  me,  a  match  that  carried  with  it 
the  right  to  challenge  for  the  National  Champion- 
ship. 

There  was  a  difference  of  exactly  three  points 
in  the  totals  of  that  memorable  match  (Paret  201, 
Davis  198),  and  I  am  certain  that  the  particular 
manoeuver  that  I  refer  to  won  for  me  ten  times 
as  many  strokes  during  the  five  sets.  In  the  right 
court  I  served  regularly  to  Davis's  backhand  (the 
outer  edge,  as  Davis  was  left-handed)  and  delib- 
erately covered  the  side-line  to  prevent  his  pass- 
ing on  that  side.  I  was  constantly  exposed  on 
the  cross-court  side,  but  the  peculiar  method  he 
used  in  drawing  across  his  racket  for  a  backhand 
cross-court  shot  made  it  almost  impossible  for  him 
to  keep  the  ball  in  court  when  returning  a  fast  ser- 
vice with  enough  speed  to  pass  me.  He  made 


One  Small 
Point  That 
Won  the 
All-Comers' 


Davis  Could 
Not  Pass 
Cross-Court 
With  His 
Backhand 


222      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Lack  of 
Endurance 
Costs  Many 
a  Match 


Condition 
Wins  the 
Victory 


many  attempts  which  went  wide  and  some  that 
were  slowed  up  enough  for  me  to  reach  the  ball 
and  kill  it  at  the  net,  but  I  was  always  waiting  for 
the  line  pass. 

Endurance  is  another  point  to  be  considered 
in  match  play.  At  the  slightest  sign  of  weaken- 
ing on  the  part  of  an  adversary,  it  is  good  tactics 
to  use  every  effort  to  prolong  the  match  in  order 
to  outlast  your  man.  I  remember  one  case  in 
point.  I  had  played  Harold  Hackett  a  dozen  or 
more  matches  with  varying  success,  and  when  we 
came  together  in  the  fifth  year  for  the  Maine 
State  Championship  at  Sorrento,  I  could  not  think 
of  a  single  weakness  in  his  game.  We  had  each 
won  the  cup  twice  and  he  had  beaten  me  for  it  the 
last  two  years.  There  seemed  to  be  only  one  hope 
and  that  was  to  hit  the  ball  harder  and  faster  than 
he,  but  I  was  never  good  at  this  kind  of  play. 
However,  in  the  early  games  of  the  match,  he 
displayed  a  lack  of  condition,  and  although  he 
was  always  as  steady  as  the  proverbial  church, 
I  made  up  my  mind  to  try  to  outlast  him,  since  I 
was  in  prime  physical  condition.  Every  effort 
was  bent  to  prolonging  the  match  and  many 
openings  for  a  killing  smash  were  turned  to  a 
deep  volley  that  would  make  him  run  more.  Be- 
fore the  fourth  set  I  was  rewarded  by  seeing  his 
strokes  gradually  weaken  until  I  could  safely 
take  the  net  and  the  offensive  that  carried  victory 
with  it. 

I  met  an  extremely  large  man,  St.  George 
Perrott,  an  Irishman  from  Dublin,  in  the  chal- 
lenge round  for  the  South  of  Ireland  Champion- 


MATCH  PLAY  TACTICS 


223 


ship  at  Limerick  in  1898,  and  won  in  a  similar 
way.  Perrott  was  even  larger,  I  think,  than 
Dwight  Davis.  We  had  played  three  matches  be- 
fore the  same  day,  each  of  us,  and  I  didn't  believe 
he  could  last  as  well  as  I  could.  After  losing  the 
first  two  sets,  I  lobbed  persistently  and  he  soon 
collapsed  trying  to  smash  these  high  balls,  default- 
ing the  match  when  it  was  4 — 0  against  him  in 
the  fourth  set,  for  he  was  then  hopelessly  beaten. 

Inability  to  kill  lobs  is  another  weakness  to 
watch  for.  It  is  always  a  safe  play  to  feed  lobs 
to  a  man  who  cannot  kill  them.  When  your  op- 
ponent is  fresh  he  may  smash  well,  but  when  he 
tires,  he  is  never  so  dangerous  overhead. 

Dr.  Pirn  used  to  say  to  his  friends :  "I  don't 
care  what  the  other  fellow  does;  it  is  what  I  do 
that  settles  the  match."  This  may  be  a  good  plan 
of  campaign  for  some  few  players,  phenomenons 
who  were  born  brilliant  rather  than  men  who  have 
had  to  learn  their  tennis  by  hard  work,  but  for 
the  average  player  it  is  a  poor  policy  to  ignore  his 
adversary.  Larned,  perhaps  the  most  brilliant  of 
all  the  American  players  produced,  unless  we  ex- 
cept McLoughlin,  used  these  tactics  most  of  the 
time  successfully,  but  with  most  other  men  they 
have  been  a  failure. 

Larned  always  played  his  own  style  of  game, 
no  matter  what  his  opponent  did.  He  was  a  mas- 
ter of  attack  but  very  weak  in  defence.  For  him 
defence  meant  only  finding  some  new  form  of 
attack.  He  kept  the  other  man  so  constantly  on 
the  run  and  was  so  brilliant  at  passing  any  an- 
tagonist who  dared  to  rush  to  the  net  against 


Lobbing  to  a 
Player  Who 
Couldn't  Kill 
Lobs 


Pirn  Ignored 
the  Adversary 


Larned's 
Weakness  in 
Defence 


224      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Luring  an 
Opponent 
Away  from 
the  Centre 


Saving  an 
Opening  for 
the  Critical 
Points 


him,  that  he  was  very  seldom  forced  to  defence. 
But  in  all  my  experience,  I  have  never  seen  a 
first-class  expert  so  much  at  sea  as  that  same 
past-master  Larned,  when  he  was  met  with  an 
unexpected  attack  that  he  could  not  fathom. 

As  I  have  said,  the  opponent  must  be 
watched  constantly  to  see  if  he  is  anticipating 
your  attack  or  even  your  defensive  strokes,  for 
that  matter.  Little  tells  of  the  play  that  turned 
one  famous  match  between  McLoughlin  and 
Touchard  at  Longwood  in  1911,  when  Touchard 
was  persistently  driving  McLoughlin' s  service 
along  the  side  lines.  The  Californian  got  so  ac- 
customed to  this  play  that  he  leaned  far  toward 
the  side-line  as  he  came  thundering  up  behind 
his  service,  and  Touchard  played  it  closer  and 
closer  to  the  lines  until  he  had  drawn  the  other 
man  well  out  of  position.  Then  when  he  saw 
that  McLoughlin  was  anticipating  his  attack,  he 
played  two  or  three  shots  very  slow  across  court, 
scoring  clean  aces  each  time,  and  after  that  he  had 
his  opponent  guessing  every  time  as  to  which  side 
to  expect  the  ball. 

I  well  remember  playing  Little  in  the  Middle 
States  Championship  some  years  ago,  and  finding 
that  he  was  deliberately  playing  my  backhand, 
always  a  weak  point  with  me,  and  taking  liberties 
with  his  position  at  the  net  by  protecting  the  side- 
line and  exposing  himself  to  a  cross-court  pass. 
It  was  too  good  an  opening  for  me  to  use  regular- 
ly, so  I  saved  up  that  shot  and  used  the  cross- 
court  stroke  only  when  within  a  point  of  a  game, 
and  in  this  way  won  three  separate  games,  the  last 


MATCH  PLAY  TACTICS 


225 


one  being  the  final  point  that  gave  me  the  match. 

Finesse  is  a  valuable  acquisition  to  any  tour- 
nament player.  It  is  very  heroic  perhaps  to  rush 
after  every  possible  return,  and  I  have  seen  many 
seemingly  impossible  shots  recovered  and  the 
points  ultimately  won.  But  in  the  long  run, 
the  average  is  very  badly  against  the  man 
who  uses  these  tactics,  and  this  do-or-die  spirit 
that  inspires  some  players  to  race  after  every  dis- 
tant return  in  the  hope  of  making  an  impossible 
"save"  is  a  great  match  loser. 

Seven  times  out  of  ten  when  the  dash  is  over 
you  have  missed  the  return;  two  more  times  you 
will  return  another  weak  stroke  that  will  be  killed, 
and  perhaps  only  once  in  ten  times  will  this  effort 
be  rewarded  by  ultimately  winning  the  rest. 
Every  time,  though,  you  finish  the  rally  all  out  of 
breath  and  in  poor  shape  for  the  next  play. 
Whether  you  have  won  or  lost  the  previous  point, 
you  then  start  handicapped,  make  another  weak 
return  and  lose  the  second  stroke  as  a  result  of 
the  foolish  effort  to  retrieve  an  apparently  im- 
possible smash. 

The  best  tacticians  I  have  seen  would  often 
deliberately  turn  their  backs  on  a  lob  that  they 
played  so  short  there  was  only  one  chance  in  a 
dozen  that  the  opponent  would  miss  it.  This  has 
a  way  of  saving  the  nerves,  saving  the  breath  and 
keeping  the  temper  in  better  shape  for  the  next 
point.  Among  good  players  a  weak  lob  is  almost 
equivalent  to  losing  the  stroke  anyway,  and  after 
all  you  are  no  worse  off  if  you  make  a  weak  lob 
and  it  is  killed  than  if  you  had  lobbed  out  of  court. 


Finesse  is 
Valuable  in 
Tournament 
Play 


Difficult 
"Saves"  May 
Win  One  in 
Ten  Points 


Turning  Your 
Back  on  a 
Short  Lob 


226      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Gallery  Play 
Should  Be 
Tabooed 


Don't  Hurry 
Your  Play 
Unduly 


Lob  High  and 
Deep   When 
Out  of 
Breath 


Gallery  shots  and  fancy  strokes  of  all  kinds 
should  be  tabooed  in  tournament  play.  It  may 
tickle  the  vanity  to  have  a  crowd  applaud  a  spec- 
tacular stroke,  but  too  often  the  effort  is  costly 
and  the  Scoreboard  records  the  disastrous  result 
of  such  efforts.  The  most  effective  killer  of  over- 
head balls  I  ever  saw  was  H.  L.  Doherty,  and  he 
never  wasted  any  effort  in  putting  them  away.  A 
ball  cannot  be  deader  than  dead,  you  must  re- 
member, and  you  can  score  only  one  point  for  the 
kill,  no  matter  how  hard  you  may  smash  it. 
Besides  the  effort  of  smashing  hard  is  wasteful 
of  the  precious  strength  that  so  often  wins  long 
matches. 

In  preserving  the  condition  it  is  well  to  re- 
member that  there  is  no  call  to  hurry  your  play 
unduly.  You  are  entitled  to  walk  after  the  balls 
and  back  to  the  server's  position ;  it  is  not  required 
to  run,  and  you  are  also  entitled  to  a  reasonable 
time  to  get  into  position  to  receive  the  service.  Do 
not  let  your  antagonist  rush  you  too  quickly,  es- 
pecially when  you  are  losing.  Walk  deliberately, 
and  breathe  deeply  and  as  slowly  as  possible  when 
out  of  breath. 

An  excellent  resource  when  you  are  in  bad 
shape,  when  you  have  "bellows  to  mend,"  is  to 
lob  high  and  deep.  An  opponent  who  is  rushing 
you  at  the  net  can  often  be  stopped  in  this  way 
when  all  attempts  at  passing  fail.  Changing  the 
style  of  game  is  as  valuable  in  defence,  when  you 
are  losing,  as  on  the  attack  when  you  find  it  going 
against  you. 

Always  continue  the  same  tactics  in  match 


MATCH  PLAY  TACTICS 


227 


play  as  long  as  they  are  successful.  Do  not  try  to 
change  the  game  while  you  are  winning;  keep  at 
it  till  the  tide  turns.  On  the  other  hand,  never 
persist  in  the  same  style  of  play  if  it  is  losing. 
Reverse  the  other  procedure  and  shift  your  meth- 
od of  play  at  once  when  you  feel  it  is  not  suc- 
cessful, and  keep  on  changing  it  until  you  do  find 
a  winning  style  or  until  all  your  resources  are 
exhausted. 

If  you  are  up  against  a  better  man,  possibly 
no  amount  of  shifting  the  game  will  help  you  to 
win,  but  many  a  time  I  have  seen  an  apparently 
poorer  player  win  a  match  because  he  happened 
to  strike  one  weak  spot  in  his  adversary's  game. 
If  the  weaker  man  is  quick  to  see  his  advantage 
and  wise  enough  to  press  it,  he  may  often  beat 
the  other  man. 

Another  point  of  finesse  that  experienced 
tournament  players  know  is  what  might  be  called 
playing  to  the  score,  just  as  card  players  do.  In 
"auction"  your  bid  is  frequently  governed  by  the 
condition  of  the  score,  and  this  is  also  wise  in 
tennis  at  times.  At  forty-love  or  forty-fifteen,  you 
can  afford  to  take  greater  chances  in  passing  or 
killing  than  if  the  score  is  deuce,  and  this  holds 
true  whether  winning  or  losing.  While  serving, 
with  the  score  at  forty-love  or  love-forty,  it  is 
often  well  to  risk  the  chance  of  a  fast  second  ser- 
vice if  the  first  delivery  has  failed. 

In  handicap  play,  the  better  player  giving  the 
odds  can  generally  win  by  safe  play,  while  the  cue 
for  the  man  who  receives  the  handicap  is  to  cut 
loose  and  try  for  the  winning  shots.  Safe  play  will 
not  pay  the  poorer  man  against  a  better. 


Keep  Up 
Winning  Play, 
Shift  When 
Losing 


Playing  to  the 
Score  Helpful 


How  to  Give 
and  Take 
Handicaps 


228      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 

XVI. 

DOUBLES  PLAY 


Cardinal  Points 
to  Keep  in 
Mind 


Teamwork 
the  Keynote 
of  Success 


Six  CARDINAL  POINTS  TO  REMEMBER: 

1 — Select  a  partner  of  even  skill  and  sink  all  in- 
dividuality for  teamzvork;  pick  one  who 
volleys  well. 

2 — The  partner  of  the  server  must  always  stand 
close  to  the  net,  and  the  server  must  always 
run  in  on  both  first  and  second  services. 

3 — Keep  abreast  of  your  partner  always;  if  he  is 
forced  back,  go  back  with  him. 

4 — //  you  are  forced  to  let  a  lob  drop,  both 
partners  must  get  back  to  the  base-line;  if 
opponents  drop  a  lob,  both  should  rush  in 
at  once. 

5 — Never  be  caught  forward  of  the  base-line 
when  the  opponents  are  volleying,  except 
to  anticipate  a  stop-volley  or  a  short  ball. 

6 — Don't  poach;  let  your  partner  play  his  own 
balls.  Doubtful  balls  in  the  centre  should 
be  played  by  the  man  who  can  use  his  fore- 
hand in  the  stroke. 

THE  KEYNOTE  of  success  in  doubles  may 
be   summed  up   in   one   word:     "Team- 
work."     Select  two  players  whose  indi- 
vidual skill  might  be  expressed  by  50,  and  if  they 
play  together  well,  understand  each  other's  meth- 
ods and  lose  individuality  for  the  success  of  their 


DOUBLES  PLAY 


229 


team,  their  combined  strength  will  represent  the 
true  total  of  100. 

Put  the  same  two  players  together  in  doubles, 
and  let  them  try  to  play  for  individual  glory,  and 
be  not  familiar  with  each  other's  position  in  court, 
approximate  reach  and  a  dozen  other  details  that 
go  to  make  up  a  successful  doubles  combination, 
and  their  team  strength  will  be  no  better  than  75 
and  possibly  only  70. 

Just  as  a  chain  is  said  to  be  no  stronger  than 
its  weakest  link,  a  tennis  team  is  very  little  strong- 
er than  its  weakest  partner,  because  the  opponents 
can  judiciously  select  the  weak  spot  for  constant 
attack  until  they  have  battered  down  his  defence. 
Two  team-mates  represented  by  60  and  40  can  be 
considered  little  or  no  better  than  twice  the 
strength  of  the  weaker  man,  or  80,  even  though 
they  play  well  together  and  gain  all  the  team  ad- 
vantage of  old  partners. 

These  points  should  be  considered  in  se- 
lecting a  partner  for  doubles  and  kept  in  view  con- 
stantly if  tournament  success  is  hoped  for.  Choose 
a  partner  who  plays  about  the  same  game  as  you 
do,  work  together  with  him  constantly  to  become 
perfectly  acquainted  with  the  different  peculiari- 
ties of  each  other,  and  sacrifice  all  ambitions  for 
individual  glory  if  you  would  prosper  as  a  team  in 
doubles.  One  thing  more :  Select  a  partner  who 
volleys  well. 

Volleying  and  service  (which  is  another  form 
of  volleying)  are  of  the  greatest  importance  in 
doubles,  and  those  who  are  best  at  this  stroke  are 
most  certain  to  succeed  in  doubles.  A  player 


Personal  Glory 
Weakens  Any 
Team 


Tennis  Team 
Little  Stronger 
Than  Its 
Weakest  Link 


Choose  Your 

Partner 

Carefully 


230      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TUJNNIS 


Play  the  Net, 
First,  Last 
and  Always 


Server  Must 
Always 
Run  Up 


Two  Partners 
Should  Be 
Abreast 


who  cannot  volley  at  all,  or  at  best  very  poorly,  is 
certain  to  be  a  poor  doubles  player,  and  he  should 
be  avoided  as  a  partner. 

The  very  essence  of  the  game  lies  in  getting 
up  to  the  net  at  every  possible  opportunity,  and 
once  there,  never  deserting  this  point  of  vantage 
until  the  ace  is  won  or  lost.  It  is  for  this  reason 
that  the  service  counts  so  strongly  for  the  side 
that  has  it.  Among  evenly-matched  teams  in  the 
best  tournament  play,  the  serving  side  generally 
wins  from  seventy  to  ninety  per  cent  of  all  the 
games  played. 

The  servers  having  this  advantage,  it  is  most 
important  that  it  be  held,  and  from  this  was  born 
the  cardinal  rule  of  doubles  always  to  run  up  to  the 
net  on  both  first  and  second  services.  The  server's 
partner  is  always  at  the  net  when  the  service  is 
delivered — this  is  another  inviolable  rule  of 
doubles — so  that  the  two  partners  are  brought 
side  by  side,  both  in  place  at  the  net,  when  the 
first  return  reaches  them. 

This  position,  with  the  two  partners  abreast 
of  each  other,  is  absolutely  essential  to  good  form. 
Both  should  be  at  the  net  as  much  of  the  time  as 
possible,  but  if  either  is  dislodged  from  his  volley- 
ing position,  by  a  lob  or  any  other  return,  his 
partner  should  immediately  follow  him  back  as  far 
as  necessary  to  still  keep  abreast  of  him. 

It  is  a  deadly  error  in  good  doubles  to  have 
one  partner  of  a  team  up  at  the  net  and  another 
back,  and  it  is  absolutely  inexcusable  under  any 
circumstances.  No  matter  how  weak  your  service 
may  be  it  must  be  followed  to  the  net,  else  your 


DOUBLES  PLAY 


231 


partner  will  be  stranded  up  there  alone  and  put  out 
of  the  game.  If  both  stay  back  on  the  service 
games,  this  simply  hands  over  the  attack  to  the  op- 
ponents with  every  assurance  of  defeat. 

A  lob  is  the  stroke  that  most  often  drives  one 
or  both  players  away  from  the  net,  and  if  this  be 
placed  so  well  and  played  so  low  as  to  make  a  vol- 
leyer  turn  and  run  back  to  play  the  ball  from  the 
bound,  his  partner  should  instantly  follow  him 
back  to  take  up  a  defensive  position  at  his  side  at 


Never  One 
Up  and 
One  Back 


Diagram 
Shows 
the  "Open 
Diagonal" 


THE      OPEN    DIAGONAL      IN    DOUBLES. 


the  back  of  the  court.  To  stay  up  when  the  part- 
ner is  driven  back  is  almost  suicidal,  for  the  oppo- 
nents are  almost  certain  to  follow  up  their  advan- 
tage to  the  net,  and  to  stand  up  near  them  when 
they  begin  to  volley  is  to  court  destruction. 

In  addition  to  this,  there  is  a  deadly  weakness 
in  the  old-fashioned  one-up-and-one-back  plan  of 
playing  doubles,  in  the  "open  diagonal."  A  glance 
at  the  accompanying  diagram  will  demon- 
strate the  reason  for  this  weakness.  In  this  illus- 


Its  Weakness 
Apparent  at 
Once 


232      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Net  Player 
Stranded 


Adversary  Can 
Smash   Right 
"Through" 
Him 


Attack  and 
Defence  in 
Doubles 


tration,  the  shaded  portions  of  the  court  are  in- 
tended to  illustrate  the  section  that  the  players  can 
cover  if  the  ball  is  volleyed  by  the  opponent  from  a 
position  diagonally  opposite  the  stranded  net  play- 
er. Whether  it  be  a  smash  or  a  simple  horizontal 
volley,  the  net  player  covers  a  minimum  section  of 
the  court  and  leaves  seven-eighths  of  the  exposed 
territory  for  his  partner  at  the  base-line,  with  lit- 
tle or  no  chance  for  success. 

Still  another  danger  awaits  the  luckless  play- 
er who  disregards  this  rule  to  get  back  out  of 
danger  the  instant  the  partner  is  driven  away 
from  his  attacking  position  at  the  net.  No  smash 
or  sharp  overhead  volley  is  more  certain  of  suc- 
cess than  one  with  the  ball  directed  immediately  at 
the  feet  of  an  adversary  who  is  too  close  in.  It 
is  a  common  practice  among  expert  players  to  take 
instant  advantage  of  such  an  opening,  and  they 
seldom  fail  to  smash  right  "through"  an  adversary 
caught  in  such  a  helpless  position. 

Even  more  than  in  singles,  tennis  doubles  re- 
solve themselves  into  a  constant  attack  and  de- 
fence, and  the  issue  is  so  clear-cut  and  sharply- 
defined  that  the  whole  effort  of  the  serving  side  is 
to  maintain  the  advantage  the  service  gives  them 
and  to  press  home  their  attack  to  a  winning  issue ; 
while  the  players  on  the  other  side  bend  all  their 
efforts  to  turning  the  attack  against  their  op- 
ponents and  gaining  the  winning  position  at  the 
net  for  a  volleying  attack. 

In  the  constant  effort  to  offset  the  advantage 
of  the  service,  which  has  been  increasing  for  many 
years,  all  kinds  of  schemes  have  been  tried.  It  is 


W      >H 

p-4    H 
W    « 

ii 

«Q 

^K 


(3 

£^ 

£"3 
V)  > 


,,_r  ^ 
S| 

O'-+3 


S-l 

.  <->  < 

bJO  ~ 

C    « 

•&  H 

11 1 
>  „- 


OJ 


o  «J 

'O    r« 

<u 


U3 

oJ 

>>i  ^ 

cd  -^  o 

S  -S-5. 

<    4J 
U      ^HH. 

3    c 
P    o  K. 

^    ag 

5  |.S- 

PH    .2    en 


^-i 

Q.     V-i 

4-* 

6^' 

£ 

^2- 

K    S 

CO 

o^; 

jy 

-^  >, 

S  ffi 

3 

«2  ^" 

|Q 

3 

O 

f^l 

^cti 

Q 

<u  M 

•s 

-*-1  o> 

bfi 

S 


£  rt' 

Se: 

OJ  . 

*rt  "5 
^   P 


.2    >•> 

J=  tJ 

^^ 

-a| 

en 

SI 


DOUBLES  PLAY 


233 


unquestionable  that  the  advantage  exists  and  that 
it  is  a  very  heavy  handicap  against  the  other  side. 
As  the  power  of  the  service  has  grown  steadily 
stronger  with  the  increase  in  speed  and  the  devel- 
opment of  the  twist  deliveries,  the  percentage  of 
games  won  by  the  serving  side  has  grown  higher 
until  close  doubles  matches  between  expert  teams 
have  become  a  constant  struggle  on  the  part  of 
the  servers  to  hold  their  advantage,  and  of  the 
other  side  to  "break  through"  the  service. 

Several  changes  in  the  rules  have  been  advo- 
cated to  offset  or  nullify  this  overwhelming  ad- 
vantage of  the  service.  It  has  been  suggested  that 
/  the  servers  be  allowed  only  one  delivery  in 
doubles ;  another  suggestion  calls  for  a  shortening 
of  the  service  court,  while  still  another  would 
widen  the  alleys  of  the  doubles  court  to  make  more 
room  for  the  strikers-out  to  pass  the  servers. 
None  of  these  has  had  any  serious  trial  as  yet, 
and  there  is  still  hope  that  faster  ground-strokes 
or  some  new  development  in  defensive  play  will 
offset  the  steadily  increasing  disadvantage  of  the 
strikers-out.  The  style  of  Williams  in  playing  the 
service  as  it  rises  may  prove  to  be  one  solution  of 
the  difficulty. 

Some  years  ago,  Davis  and  Ward,  then  cham- 
pions of  America,  developed  the  lobbing  game  as 
a  defence  against  fast  service,  and  they  even 
carried  this  so  far  as  to  produce  a  lobbing  at- 
tack by  very  high  lobs  under  which  they  ran  in 
to  volley.  The  smashing  at  that  time  was  too 
strong  for  this,  however,  and  Beals  Wright 
developed  an  excellent  answer  to  the  play  by  let- 


Constant 
Struggle  to 
"Break 
Through" 
the  Service 


Changes  in 
the  Rules 
Suggested  to 
Equalize 


Lobbing  to 
Stop  Fast 
Services 


234      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


The  English 
Formation  of 
the  Strikers 


It  Has  Won 

Despite 

Criticism 


ting  such  high  lobs,  which  fall  too  straight  to  be 
smashed  easily,  drop  to  the  ground  and  then 
smashing  them  overhead  on  the  second  drop  of 
the  ball  from  the  bound.  This  play  succeeded  so 
well  that  it  was  soon  found  unprofitable  to  run  in 
under  a  high  lob. 

In  England,  the  Doherty  brothers  and 
other  leading  British  pairs  in  doubles,  placed 
the  partner  of  the  striker-out  at  the  service-line, 
and  sometimes  still  closer  up  toward  the  net, 
while  the  service  was  being  returned.  The  suc- 
cess of  this  manoeuver  depends  entirely  on  the 
severity  of  the  service  and  first  return,  and  the 
ability  of  the  server  in  volleying.  This  position 
has  always  been  thought  to  be  unsound  in  this 
country  because  the  close  position  of  American 
volleyers  seems  to  make  it  an  easy  matter  for 
the  server  to  volley  the  ball  right  "through"  the 
opposing  player,  as  he  is  caught  in  too  close  to 
anticipate  such  a  quick  stroke. 

On  the  other  hand,  it  has  been  quite  suc- 
cessful abroad,  and  despite  the  theoretical  un- 
soundness  of  the  "formation,"  it  has  succeeded 
almost  invariably  in  international  matches.  The 
Doherty  brothers  beat  Davis  and  Ward  using 
this  formation;  Doust  and  Jones  beat  McLough- 
lin  and  Hackett  in  1913,  and  Brookes  and  Wild- 
ing beat  McLoughlin  and  Bundy  in  1914,  the 
Australians  using  this  position  almost  invari- 
ably. 

As  an  offset  to  the  servers'  advantage  it 
cannot  be  said  to  equalize  matters,  although 
from  the  deeper  English  position  for  volleying,  it 


DOUBLES  PLAY 


235 


frequently  carries  the  play  into  a  general  volley- 
ing duel,  with  all  four  players  engaged.  If  the 
striker  is  very  severe  in  his  first  return,  or  if  he 
drops  the  ball  short  after  crossing  the  net,  as 
Beals  Wright  used  to  do  so  well,  he  may  be  able 
to  hold  his  partner's  position  safe  and  ultimately 
follow  up  abreast  of  him  to  dislodge  the  oppo- 
nents from  their  net  position  or  get  into  a  gen- 
eral volleying  rally  with  fairly  even  chances  to 
win. 

While  these  efforts  to  equalize  matters  have 
been  under  way,  there  have  been  other  plans  to 
fortify  the  position  of  the  servers.  Again  Davis 
and  Ward  must  be  credited  with  the  invention 
of  the  new  theory,  and  every  historian  of  lawn 
tennis  must  recognize  in  Holcombe  Ward  one  of 
the  most  fertile  minds  that  ever  worked  out  the 
problems  of  the  court.  To  him  belongs  the  credit 
of  the  American  twist  service  which  has  almost 
revolutionized  the  game,  the  highest  art  in  short 
cross-court  cut  volleys  and  the  "American  for- 
mation" for  doubles. 

This  position  simply  calls  for  the  partner 
of  the  server  to  stand  opposite  the  middle  of  the 
net  instead  of  to  one  side  when  his  partner  is 
serving.  The  object  of  this  formation  is  to  em- 
barrass the  striker-out,  and  it  is  very  often  suc- 
cessful where  the  style  of  play  used  by  the  op- 
ponents is  hampered  by  this  position. 

The  most  effective  return  of  the  service  has 
always  been  a  diagonal  cross-court  drive  close  to 
the  net,  and  this  return  is  harder  for  the  server 
to  handle  as  he  runs  in  than  a  straight  shot 


Often  Carries 
All  Four  Into 
Volleying  Duel 


American 
Formation 
Works  for 
the  Servers 


Partner  Stands 
at  Centre  of 
Net 


236      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Shuts  Out 

Cross-Court 

Drive 


down  the  court.  The  American  formation  prac- 
tically shuts  out  this  standard  return  of  the  ser- 
vice, as  it  would  be  intercepted  and  killed  by  the 
waiting  partner,  and  forces  the  striker-out!  to 
drive  straight  down  the  line,  unless  he  would  lob 


Diagrams 
Illustrate  Both 
Formations 


©<s>~ 


STRIKER-OUT 

ENGLISH    FORMATION 


STWKER-OU*. 
AMERICAN    FORMATION 


or  risk  a  return  into  the  net  player's  hands.     At 

least  it  has  the  tendency  to  throw  him  off  his 

Throws  striner    customary  stroke,  and  by  the  mere  novelty  of 

Off  Usual  the  position,  if  for  no  other  reason,  it  seems  to 

Return 

gam. 

The  diagonal  return  of  the  service  across  the 
centre  of  the  net  has  a  distinct  advantage  for  the 


DOUBLES  PLAY 


237 


striker,  because  the  net  is  lowest  at  that  point. 
If  this  shot  can  be  shut  out,  the  server  will  force 
him  to  lob  or  play  over  the  higher  part  of  the  net. 

Beals  Wright  has  raised  a  nice  point  re- 
garding this  play,  and  his  opinion  is  of  great 
value  because  he  used  the  formation  with  Ward 
frequently  in  match  play.  Wright  declares  that 
the  position  should  not  be  used  when  it  forces 
the  server  to  run  in  with  his  backhand  toward 
the  alley.  The  server  runs  up  diagonally  instead 
of  straight  and  he  is  almost  certain  to  meet  the 
first  return  while  still  moving.  With  a  left- 
handed  server,  the  position  should  be  used  only 
in  serving  to  the  right  court,  according  to 
Wright's  idea,  and  for  a  right-handed  server 
only  in  the  left  court.  It  is  still  possible  to  vary 
this  position  by  using  the  regular  orthodox  for- 
mation in  the  opposite  court,  and  the  new  style  on 
the  side  where  the  server  will  have  his  forehand 
toward  the  alley. 

One  point  in  which  team  play  is  most  neces- 
sary in  doubles  is  in  the  handling  of  doubtful 
balls.  Nothing  breaks  up  the  work  of  a  pair  in 
doubles  so  much  as  for  both  to  let  a  doubtful  ball 
pass  untouched  because  of  a  misunderstanding  as 
to  which  one  should  have  played  it;  and  it  is 
equally  disastrous  for  both  to  try  to  hit  the  same 
ball.  The  inevitable  conflict  generally  results  in 
the  two  rackets  clashing,  the  return  failing  alto- 
gether and  two  over-strained  tempers  being  ruf- 
fled to  the  detriment  of  the  next  play. 

It  is  an  excellent  rule,  which  of  course  must 
have  many  exceptions,  for  the  player  with  his 


Wright  Says 
Play  Should 
Be  Used  Only 
on  One  Side 


Handling 
Doubtful  Balls 


238      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Forehand 
Should  Be 
Given 
Preference 


Poaching  a 

Short-sighted 

Policy 


A  Sample  of 
It  Illustrated 


forehand  toward  the  centre  to  have  the  prefer- 
ence in  handling  doubtful  balls  down  the  centre. 
If  it  is  doubtful  which  player  should  handle  the  re- 
turn, it  is  generally  better  for  the  man  who  can 
use  his  forehand  in  the  play.  On  handling  lobs 
down  the  middle,  the  same  rule  holds  good,  but 
when  the  direction  leans  toward  the  backhand 
man  distinctly,  it  is  better  that  the  man  who 
played  the  previous  stroke  should  continue  the 
play.  After  making  one  volley  or  smash  that 
has  not  killed,  a  player's  guage  of  the  range  and 
distance  is  generally  better  to  correct  errors  for 
the  next  shot,  and  he  is  more  likely  to  succeed  in 
his  next  effort  than  if  the  idle  player  "butts  into" 
the  play. 

Poaching  over  on  your  partner's  territory 
is  a  short-sighted  policy,  even  though  you  may  be 
better  at  the  required  stroke  than  the  partner. 
Sooner  or  later  this  is  certain  to  prove  a  losing 
game,  for  the  adversaries  will  be  able  to  take  ad- 
vantage of  the  larger  openings  left  on  your  own 
side  of  the  court  as  a  result  of  trying  to  reach 
too  far  over  toward  the  partner's  side. 

An  illustration  of  this  is  shown  in  one  of 
the  plates  in  this  volume  in  which  Touchard  is 
fairly  crowding  Washburn  off  into  the  alley  in 
his  effort  to  smash  a  ball  that  should  have  been 
played  by  the  other  man.  If  this  smash  was  not 
an  outright  kill,  the  court  was  wide  open  to  his  op- 
ponents for  the  next  play. 

With  a  poaching  partner  at  the  net  against 
you,  even  though  he  be  only  leaning  toward  the 
centre  to  intercept  some  cross-court  drive,  there 


DOUBLES  PLAY 


239 


is  always  a  splendid  attack  offered  that  is  too  often 
neglected.  At  the  net,  when  a  man  anticipates 
jumping  across  sidewise,  he  stands  with  his  feet 
parallel  with  the  net  and  carries  his  weight  on  legs 
spread  far  apart  to  make  the  spring.  In  this 
position,  it  is  practically  impossible  for  him  to 
start  backward  quickly  for  a  lob.  The  prevailing 
idea  is  to  pass  such  a  player  along  his  own  alley 
as  he  deserts  it,  but  often  the  movement  may  be 
only  a  feint,  and  he  is  trying  to  draw  such  a  shot 
from  you  with  the  intention  of  dodging  back  to 
kill  it. 

Whether  his  attempt  be  a  real  attempt  to 
poach  or  a  blind,  in  either  case  he  is  prepared  only 
to  move  sidewise,  and  the  most  dangerous  of  all 
attacks  against  him  is  overhead.  If  the  stroke 
can  be  covered  so  he  cannot  anticipate  it  until  too 
late  to  shift  his  feet,  a  low  lob  is  almost  always  a 
point  winner,  and  if  his  partner  is  also  running 
forward,  they  will  at  least  have  to  let  the  ball 
bound  and  play  it  defensively  if  it  does  not  win 
the  point  outright.  This  would  turn  the  attack 
over  to  your  side,  which  is  next  best  to  winning 
the  point  outright,  so  the  value  of  such  a  strategic 
stroke  can  hardly  be  overestimated. 

Unless  he  hangs  far  back  from  his  correct 
position,  so  you  can  make  the  ball  drop  before  it 
reaches  him,  it  is  a  very  unwise  policy  to  drive  at 
the  opposing  net  player  in  doubles.  The  chances 
are  all  against  the  success  of  the  play,  and  even 
though  it  does  succeed  once  in  a  while  from  the 
sheer  unexpectedness  that  caused  the  adversary 


How  to  Fool 
the  Poaching 

Net  Man 


A  Low  Lob 
Finds  Him 
"Anchored" 


Driving  at  the 
Net  Man 
Poor  Tactics 


240      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Both  Partners 
Get  Back 
Under  Lob 


Rush  In  if 
Your  Own 
Lob  Is 
Not  Smashed 


Better  Not  to 
Let  a  Lob 

Prop 


to  miss  the  ball,  in  the  long  run  it  is  certain  to 
prove  a  losing  game. 

When  the  ball  is  lobbed  over  the  heads  of  the 
players  at  the  net,  both  should  back  away  equally 
for  the  return,  the  idle  player  anyway  far  enough 
to  be  certain  his  partner  will  not  be  forced  to  let  it 
drop  and  play  it  defensively.  When  a  lob  is  al- 
lowed to  bound,  both  partners  must  be  back  be- 
hind it,  for  this  turns  the  situation  to  a  defensive 
one  and  either  man  will  be  hors  de  combat  if  he  re- 
mains at  the  net  when  the  opponents  rush  in  to 
volley. 

The  instant  such  a  lob  is  allowed  to  fall,  that 
must  be  considered  the  signal  for  the  successful 
side  that  made  it  to  rush  forward  to  assume  the 
aggressive  position  at  the  net  before  the  next  re- 
turn reaches  them.  The  most  successful  teams 
often  try  to  turn  the  attack  against  their  antago- 
nists by  this  manoeuver  and  when  the  ball  is  put 
up  high,  they  watch  the  movements  of  the  other 
men  closely  for  this  key  to  the  situation.  If  the 
opponents  back  away  to  smash,  they  must  stay 
back  to  handle  the  ball  from  the  bound,  but  at  the 
first  sign  of  their  turning  to  play  it  defensively 
they  instantly  rush  forward  to  seize  the  attack  at 
the  net. 

But  the  best  practice  is  not  to  let  a  lobbed 
ball  drop.  No  matter  if  you  have  to  back  all  the 
way  to  the  base-line  to  volley  it,  the  advantage  is 
better  maintained  by  volleying  it  downward  than 
by  turning  to  play  it  from  the  bound.  The  instant 
the  ball  has  been  volleyed  from  a  lob,  however,  it 
is  necessary  to  rush  back  instantly  to  the  net  posi- 


DOUBLES  PLAY 


241 


tion  or  the  next  return  may  come  at  your  feet  and 
the  attack  be  turned  in  this  way. 

This  is  not  difficult  when  the  lob  is  a  com- 
paratively short  one,  leaving  no  great  distance  to 
run  to  reassume  the  net,  but  when  the  lob  is  far 
back  in  the  court,  it  requires  an  instant  recovery 
to  get  in  motion  at  once.  The  idle  player  can 
start  forward  before  the  stroke  is  made  as  soon 
as  he  is  certain  that  his  partner  will  volley  the 
dropping  ball. 

Baddeley's  forbidden  zone  between  the  ser- 
vice-line and  the  base-line  is  even  more  vital  in 
doubles  than  in  singles,  and  good  players  never 
come  to  rest  there  while  the  ball  is  in  play. 


Quick 

Recovery  on 
a  Deep  Lob 


Baddeley's 
Zone 

Forbidden  in 
Doubles,  Too 


242      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS: 


Is  the  English 

Formation 

Sound? 


Parke  Says 
He  Has  Never 
Seen  It 


Do  you  consider  the  English  position  for  doubles, 
with  partner  of  the  striker-out  at  the  service- 
line,  to  be  sound  against  fast  volley ers? 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND :  I  don't  play  doubles,  I  only 
try. 

T.  C.  BUNDY:  Very  risky;  O.  K.  if  partner  has 
good  return  to  server's  feet  on  the  run-in. 

K.  H.  BEHR:  If  the  partner  were  about  seven  feet 
from  the  net  I  think  in  many  cases  such  a  position  is 
splendid. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER  :     No,  but  depends  entirely  on  the 
style  of  game  one  is  playing  against. 

R.  D.  LITTLE:    It  depends  on  the  service  and  how 
fast  the  server  comes  in. 
H.  H.  HACKETT:    No. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT:     No,  as  I  have  seen  the  foremost 
English  teams  driven  from  this  position. 

J.  C.  PARKE  :  I  have  never  seen  the  English  position 
as  above  described.  There  are  only  two  positions  for 
partner,  either  right  up  or  right  back. 

C.  P.  DIXON  :    I  consider  the  parallel  formation  the 
better;  there  are  less  gaps.     Either  partner  of  striker- 
out  should  be  well  up  or  behind  base-line  in  line  with 
the  striker-out. 

R.  L.  MURRAY  :    I  do  not. 

G.  M.  CHURCH:     Not  unless  the  server  is  slow  in 
running  in  to  the  net. 

W.  M.  WASHBURN  :  Yes,  except  against  an  excep- 
tional service,  provided  the  striker-out  is  reasonably  good 
off  the  ground. 

ELIA  FOTTRELL:  No,  especially  against  a  difficult 
service. 


DOUBLES  PLAY 


243 


CLARENCE  HOBART:    No. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST:    Yes,  if  only  the  return  is  good 
enough.    We  are  bad  over  here,  hence  must  stay  back. 

J.  R.  STRACHAN:    No. 
C.  R.  GARDNER:    No. 
A.  S.  DABNEY  :    No. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :  No,  but  they  seem  to  get  away 
with  it  admirably. 

F.  C.  IN  MAN  :    Not  entirely,  depends  on  service,  but 
good  chance  to  take  at  times  to  win  their  service. 

W.  F.  JOHNSON  :   No. 

N.  W.  NILES:  With  a  sharp,  quick  return  of  the 
service,  yes.  It  tends  to  force  the  man  coming  in  to  try 
for  an  ace  right  off,  whereas  otherwise  he  could  block, 
get  in  good  position  for  an  ace  on  the  second  shot,  with 
better  chance  of  success. 

T.  R.  PELL:   Yes. 

ROBERT  LfiRoY:  Yes,  but  it  requires  exceptional 
brilliancy  on  the  part  of  the  partner  of  the  striker-out. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR:    No. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:    Very  rarely. 
J.  J.  ARMSTRONG:   No. 
LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :   No. 

W.  M.  HALL:  No,  think  it  will  lose,  other  things 
equal. 

RICHARD  HARTE:    No. 

DEAN  MATHEY:  Not  against  fast,  aggressive  vol- 
leyers. 

R.  C.  SEAVER:   No. 

G.  C.  SHAFER:    No. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL:    No. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY:    No. 

I.  C.  WRIGHT  :    No. 

W.  C.  GRANT:    No. 


Dewhurst 
Thinks  It 
Sound 


Large 
Majority 
Against  It 


244      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Has  American 

Formation 

Advantages? 


Wright 
Explains 
Common 
Error 


Is  there  any  advantage  in  the  American  position, 
with  the  partner  of  the  server  always  in  the 
centre  of  the  net?  If  so,  what  is  the  advan- 
tage? 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND:  I  don't  play  doubles,  I  only 
try. 

T.  C.  BUNDY:  Can  be  varied  to  advantage  against 
some  players. 

K.  H.  BEHR:  It  breaks  the  average  steady  doubles 
shot,  and  also  breaks  the  usual  low  drop  shots,  a  variation 
is  always  superior. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER:     Believe  in  mixing  positions  up. 
Stops  a  cross-court  drive ;  depends  on  style  of  game  one 
is  playing. 

R.  D.  LITTLE:    No,  often  a  disadvantage. 
H.  H.  HACKETT:    Yes,  it  will  sometimes  interfere 
with  a  favorite  and  difficult  return. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT:    About  nine-tenths  play  the  position 
incorrectly.     It  should  not  be  played  when  the  server 
has  to  cover  the  alley  with  his  backhand  as  he  is  weaker 
and  has  less  reach.     Placing  of  service  counts  in  this 
attack. 

J.  C.  PARKE:  I  have  not  seen  this  American  posi- 
tion either,  except  as  a  change  to  cover  a  particularly 
good  centre-return. 

C.  P.  DIXON  :    I  am  not  prepared  to  say  that  there 
are  no  advantages  in  this  system.     As  a  rule,  however, 
I  incline  to  think  the  English  positions  stronger. 

R.  L.  MURRAY:  I  am  not  an  expert  on  the  doubles 
game  or  the  singles  either  for  that  matter. 

G.  M.  CHURCH:     Yes.     It  makes  the  striker  play 
the  ball  straight  down  the  line  and  it  crosses  the  net 
where  it  is  three  feet  six  inches  high.    But  this  position 
also  has  a  great  disadvantage  in  that  the  server  has  to 
run  further  to  reach  the  net  and  most  returns  will  make 
him  volley  up.    I  do  not  consider  it  the  correct  position. 


DOUBLES  PLAY 


245 


W.  M.  WASHBURN:  When  used  occasionally,  it 
may  disconcert  the  opponents. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST:    None  that  I  can  see.    The  lob 
over  the  head  of  the  net  man  will  break  up  this  position 
every  time. 

C.  R.  GARDNER:  Against  some  teams  possibly,  and 
much  depends  on  your  partner's  serve. 

A.  S.  DABNEY  :     Two  men  at  the  net  better  than  one. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :  It  prevents  a  sharp  cross-court 
shot. 

F.  C.  INMAN:      Often  found  it  to  advantage;  de- 
pends on  opponents. 

W.  F.  JOHNSON:    It  would  seem  so. 

N.  W.  NILES  :  There  is  a  temporary  advantage  in  a 
change  to  the  above  position,  I  believe.  It  forces  the 
opponents  to  make  a  return  of  the  service  which  he  is 
not  accustomed  to,  also  forces  a  very  difficult  cross-court 
return  to  prevent  ruling  off  a  large  part  of  the  court. 
However,  it  is  a  formation  which  makes  lobs  more  ef- 
fective. 

T.  R.  PELL:    No  advantages. 

ROBERT  LERov:  Yes,  properly  used;  it  breaks  up 
many  striker-out's  favorite  strokes. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR:  An  advantage  very  frequently 
against  players  who  depend  largely  upon  cross-court 
shots.  A  mixture  so  that  each  plays  on  the  same  side 
of  the  court  throughout  is  very  often  good,  as  some 
players  volley  and  smash  better  from  one  side  than  from 
the  other. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:      I  don't  consider  the  position 
good. 

J.  J.  ARMSTRONG  :    No  advantage,  to  my  mind. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN:     No. 

W.  M.  HALL:  Yes,  checks  cross-court  driving, 
usually  easiest  for  receiver. 

RICHARD  HARTE:  Because  there  is  less  chance  for 
the  receiver  to  make  passing  shot. 

DEAN  MATHEY  :  It  precludes  the  accustomed  cross- 
court  "groove"  shot. 


Lob  Over  Net 
Man  Will 
Break  It  Up 


Many  Experts 
Favor  It 


Stops 

Cross-Court 
Shots  Over 
Low  Centre 
of  Net 


246      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Worries 
Opponents, 
Says  Seover 


Should  Second 
Service  Be 
Cut  Out? 


Behr,  Little 
and   Wright 
Think  It 
Would  Help 


R.  C.  SEAVER:  It  worries  the  opponents,  by  having 
someone  get  so  close  up  and  the  prospect  of  the  other 
man  running  right  up. 

G.  C  SHAFER:    No. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL  :  Yes,  makes  striker-out  play  cross- 
court  shot  most  every  time. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY  :  It  narrows  the  area  in  which  the 
striker-out  can  return  the  ball.  It  doesn't  give  him 
such  a  good  opportunity  to  take  the  net  either  unless  he 
is  an  exceptionally  good  half-volleyer. 

I.  C.  WRIGHT:    The  court  is  covered  better. 

Would  limiting  the  server  to  one  ball,  cutting  off 
the  second  service,  in  doubles  only,  stop  the 
present  advantage  of  the  serving  side? 


R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND :    I  don't  play  doubles,  I  only 


try. 


T.  C.  BUNDY:    No. 
K.  H.  BEHR:   Yes. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER:     Men  with  good  ground  strokes 
have  no  trouble  in  breaking  through  now;  why  change 
and  demoralize  the  game? 

R.  D.  LITTLE:  The  service  would  still  be  an  ad- 
vantage, but  not  an  improper  one  as  it  now  is. 

H.  H.  HACKETT:  Only  to  a  certain  extent.  I  be- 
lieve a  great  many  of  the  best  doubles  players  would  be 
as  successful  with  one  service  as  two. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT:    To  a  great  extent  because  the  re- 
ceiver could  get  well  set. 

J.  C.  PARKE  :    It  might  be  worth  testing. 

C.  P.  DIXON:     I  think  it  would  minimize  this  ad- 
vantage if  only  to  a  small  extent. 

R.  L.  MURRAY:  It  would  be  all  right  but  don't 
they  deserve  the  advantage  if  they  can  serve  well  enough  ? 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :     Yes,  to  some  extent  at  least,  but 
not  as  much  as  many  suppose. 


DOUBLES  PLAY 


247 


W.  M.  WASHBURN  :    In  part. 
ELIA  FOTTRELL  :    It  would  to  a  certain  extent. 
CLARENCE  HOBART:     Yes,  am  very  much  in  favor 
of  trying  it. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST  :    Too  radical.    Better  to  make  the 
service  harder  by  shortening  the  court. 

J.  R.  STRACHAN  :  I  don't  think  so.  Most  points  are 
played  off  the  first  ball. 

C.  R.  GARDNER:     Somewhat. 

A.  S.  DABNEY  :  No ;  the  servers  would  still  hold  the 
net  as  an  attacking  position,  even  if  the  server's  serve 
was  so  weak  as  merely  to  put  the  ball  in  play. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :     I  should  think  it  would. 

F.  C.  INMAN:     Not  to  any  great  extent.     Servers 
can  still  take  net  position. 

W.  F.  JOHNSON  :    To  a  marked  degree. 

N.  W.  NILES:    An  appreciable  part  of  it. 

T.  R.  PELL:    Yes. 

ROBERT  LsRoY :  It  might,  but  it  would  be  a  retro- 
gression in  the  game. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR:  To  some  extent,  but  not  entirely. 
The  most  important  advantage  (position  at  the  net) 
would  remain. 

G.  F.   TOUCHARD:      Naturally  it  would  lessen  it 
greatly. 

J.  J.  ARMSTRONG  :    Both  absurd  ideas. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :   No. 

W.  M.  HALL:  Yes,  think  it  would  throw  advantage 
to  receivers. 

RICHARD  HARTE  :    Yes,  to  a  degree. 

DEAN  MATHEY  :    Of  course,  to  a  great  extent. 

R.  C.  SEAVER  :    Yes,  I  think  so. 

G.  C.  SHAFER  :    Somewhat,  but  not  entirely. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL  :   No. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY  :  I  don't  think  it  would  make  any 
material  difference. 

I.  C.  WRIGHT:    No. 

W.  C.  GRANT:    Yes. 


Many  Others 
Against  Change 


Hall  Thinks 
Receivers 
Would  Be 
Too  Strong 


248      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Would  It  Do 
to  Widen  the 
Alleys  f 


Wright  Favors 
This,  Too,  But 
Not  Both 


Many  Different 
Opinions  on 
This 


Would  it  have  the  same  effect  to  widen  the  alleys 
of  the  doubles  court  from  four  and  a  half  to 
six  feet? 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND:  I  don't  play  doubles,  I  only 
try. 

K.  H.  BEHR:  Yes,  but  I  would  not  advise  such  a 
change. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER  :    Leave  well  enough  alone. 

R.  D.  LITTLE:  No,  this  would  take  very  little  from 
the  server's  advantage  but  would  probably  decrease 
lobbing. 

H.  H.  HACKETT:  It  might  help  a  great  deal  more. 
I  never  tried  it. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT  :    To  widen  the  alleys  I  believe  in,  as 
it  would  give  the  receiver  an  advantage,  but  one  service 
and  alleys  widened  as  well  would  be  too  much. 

J.  C.  PARKE  :  No,  I  am  against  any  alteration  in  the 
measurements  of  the  court. 

C.  P.  DIXON:     Offhand,  I  don't  think  this  would 
make  much  difference,  but  should  like  to  try  a  few  sets 
with  the  alteration  in  force,  before  committing  myself 
to  a  definite  opinion. 

R.  L.  MURRAY  :  No,  I  do  not  think  the  latter  would 
have  as  much  effect. 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :    I  think  so. 

W.  M.  WASHBURN  :    Not  so  much. 

ELIA  FOTTRELL:    No. 

CLARENCE  HOBART:    Possibly,  don't  like  the  idea. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST:  This  would  of  course  help  the 
strikers. 

J.  R.  STRACHAN  :  It  would  put  the  server  at  a  dis- 
advantage. 

C.  R.  GARDNER  :    I  should  think  so. 

A.  S.  DABNEY  :  This  would  lessen  the  advantage  to 
a  certain  degree. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.:     Probably,  but  it  would  tend 


O   rt 


DOUBLES  PLAY 


249 


to  shorten  the  long  rallies  which  are  the  chief  joy  of 
doubles. 

F.  C.  INMAN:    No. 

W.  F.  JOHNSON  :  It  would  be  an  advantage  but  not 
so  great  as  the  single  service. 

N.  W.  NILES:  This  unquestionably  would  make  it 
more  difficult  for  the  side  serving  to  win  its  game.  Very 
hard  to  say  how  much.  At  Seabright  a  couple  of  years 
ago,  this  was  tried  and  it  didn't  seem  to  make  as  much 
difference  as  expected.  Probably  because  we  were  not 
accustomed  to  it  and  couldn't  properly  make  use  of  the 
advantage. 

ROBERT  LEROY:  This  would  be  better,  it  is  now 
practically  impossible  to  "alley"  a  good  volleying  pair 
consistently. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR:  Yes,  this  would  tend  to  reduce  the 
server's  advantage. 

G.  F.  TOUCH  ARD:    I  should  think  so,  approximately. 
J.  J.  ARMSTRONG:    Absurd. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN:  No;  widening  it  to  six  feet 
would  give  the  receiving  side  the  advantage. 

W.  M.  HALL:    Probably  would. 

RICHARD  HARTE  :    No. 

DEAN  MATHEY:    I  think  so. 

G.  C.  SHAFER  :  Somewhat,  but  the  serving  side  gets 
the  attack,  which  in  doubles  is  a  great  advantage. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL  :    Don't  think  so ;  never  tried  it. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY:  Such  a  change  would  take  away 
some  of  the  advantage  that  the  serving  side  now  enjoys. 
I  should  not  advise  it,  however. 

I.  C.  WRIGHT  :    Leave  it  as  it  is. 

W.  C.  GRANT:    No. 


Scheme  Tried 
al  Seabright 


Some  Think 
Strikers 
Would  Have 
Advantage 


250      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


XVII. 


Mixed  Doubles 
Different  from 
Other  Games 


Woman  Must 
Play  at  the 

Net 


M 


MIXED  DOUBLES 

IXED  DOUBLES  is  a  branch  of  the 
game  which  calls  for  some  principles 
very  different  from  those  used  in  either 
singles  or  men's  doubles.  The  same  methods  of 
play  that  are  used  in  other  doubles  do  not  hold 
good  and  cannot  be  brought  into  use  because  of  the 
inequality  of  the  two  partners  in  this  kind  of  a 
game. 

The  principle  of  the  weaker  link  of  a  chain 
applies  very  strongly  here,  and  it  is  very  difficult 
to  prevent  the  opposing  players  from  selecting  the 
woman  on  your  side  of  the  net  for  attack  and  by 
directing  their  strokes  at  her,  to  reduce  the  op- 
posing strength  to  the  level  of  the  woman's  game. 

To  prevent  this  only  one  way  seems  practica- 
ble, and  that  is  to  get  the  woman  up  to  the  net  at 
the  first  opportunity  and  then  to  direct  your 
strokes,  if  you  be  the  man  partner,  so  as  to  support 
her  in  that  position  where  she  can  be  of  the  most 
value  to  her  team. 

I  know  that  this  is  not,  or  at  any  rate  was  not 
until  recently,  considered  good  tactics  in  England, 
and  I  have  seen  the  English  players  reverse  this 
campaign  with  the  man  at  the  net,  trying  to 
"poach"  across  from  side  to  side  and  make  up  by 
his  quickness  in  volleying  for  his  tactically  poor 


MIXED  DOUBLES 


251 


position  to  support  his  partner.  With  a  net  thirty- 
six  feet  wide  to  defend  and  the  great  risk  that  he 
will  be  caught  in  the  centre  with  openings  at  each 
side  where  he  can  be  passed,  only  one  of  which 
his  partner  can  hope  to  cover,  this  plan  seems 
almost  suicidal.  It  would  be  difficult  for  such  a 
game  to  win  against  an  equal  combination  of  the 
other  style,  with  a  clever  masculine  opponent  who 
would  almost  certainly  keep  the  ball  out  of  the 
man's  reach,  and  require  the  woman  on  the  other 
side  of  the  net  to  do  all  of  the  work. 

It  is  interesting  to  note  that  both  Parke  and 
Dixon,  the  two  English  leaders  whose  expert 
opinions  follow,  favor  the  American  method  of 
play.  Yet  when  I  advocated  this  position  in  an- 
other book  ten  years  ago,  English  authorities  rid- 
iculed the  idea. 

The  English  position  for  volleying  from  back 
near  the  service-line  helps  their  "formation" 
somewhat,  as  the  man  can  cover  more  ground 
from  side  to  side  in  this  position,  and  also  fore- 
stall any  attempt  to  lob  him  away  from  the  net. 
But  the  same  old  question  of  defensive  underhand 
lifting  volleys  comes  up  again  here,  and  to  Amer- 
ican eyes  they  seem  a  poor  substitute  even  in 
mixed  doubles  for  aggressive  ground-strokes  or 
sharp  killing  volleys  from  close  to  the  net. 

By  all  means,  the  woman  is  more  valuable  to 
her  side  at  the  net  and  the  man  at  the  back  of  his 
court,  unless  he  can  work  his  way  in  and  support 
his  partner  in  the  volleying  position,  when  both 
might  hold  the  attack  safely  together.  The  diffi- 
culty is  in  getting  the  woman  up  to  the  net  safely. 


English  Prefer 
Man  at  the 

Net 


Parke  and 
Dixon  Have 
Come  to 
American 
Ideas 


Man  Can 
Sometimes 
Join  Partnef 

at  Net 


252      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Difficult  to  Get 
There  When 
She  Serves 


Woman 
Should  Cross 
Over 
Sometimes 


When  her  man  partner  serves,  there  is  no  ques- 
tion but  that  her  place  is  at  the  net  and  she  can 
take  up  her  stand  there  before  the  ball  is  put  into 
play.  Similarly,  when  he  is  the  striker-out,  she 
can  take  the  same  position  safely  and  he  can  sup- 
port her  by  his  first  return. 

But  when  the  woman  serves  and  when  she 
is  the  striker,  I  believe  that  the  man's  place  is  at 
the  middle  of  the  base-line  to  cover  any  return 
that  the  other  side  can  make.  For  the  dangerous 
run  that  the  woman  must  make  toward  the  net 
without  being  caught  half  way  up  with  the  ball 
at  her  feet,  a  strategic  stroke  must  be  made  that 
will  give  her  the  needed  time,  and  this  is  not  al- 
ways afforded  by  the  return  of  the  adversaries. 
If  both  of  the  opponents  are  back  in  their  court, 
perhaps  the  safest  way  to  secure  the  desired  posi- 
tion is  to  drive  deep  into  the  woman's  corner  on 
the  other  side  and  have  your  partner  run  up  be- 
hind this  drive. 

If  the  other  woman  is  on  the  same  side  of 
the  court  as  your  partner,  this  can  be  done  at  the 
first  opening,  but  if  they  are  diagonally  opposite, 
it  is  always  safer  to  have  her  cross  over  to  the 
side  opposite  her  woman  opponent,  and  then  make 
the  run  to  the  net  on  the  first  deep  drive  into  the 
woman's  corner.  If  the  woman  on  the  other  side 
is  playing  at  the  net,  this  chance  is  not  open,  and 
the  next  alternative  is  to  lob  deep  over  the  wom- 
an's head  and  your  partner  can  then  run  in  under 
this  lob  unless  the  man  on  the  other  side  is  an 
exceptionally  good  smasher,  when  it  might  be 
dangerous  to  lob  at  all.  However  that  may  be, 


MIXED  DOUBLES 


253 


one  of  these  two  devices  should  be  used  and  ma- 
noeuvered  for  until  your  partner  can  reach  the  net 
safely,  after  which  a  new  situation  presents  it- 
self. 

With  the  woman  at  the  net,  I  believe  that  the 
tactical  position  is  sound,  and  if  the  other  woman 
has  also  reached  the  net,  then  it  is  a  matter  of 
better  tennis  on  even  terms  or  better  strategy  that 
ought  to  win.  With  the  woman  against  you  at 
the  base-line  and  your  partner  at  the  net,  the  odds 
are  all  in  your  favor,  of  course,  so  long  as  you 
can  prevent  the  opposing  woman  from  running 
in.  Unless  she  be  exceptionally  clever  at  passing, 
a  deep  drive  into  her  corner  ought  to  let  you  fol- 
low it  up  safely,  and  with  both  yourself  and  your 
partner  at  the  net  together,  victory  is  almost  cer- 
tain with  the  ball  kept  on  the  woman's  side  of  the 
court,  and  about  even  if  the  opposing  man  gets  a 
chance  at  the  play. 

With  both  women  in  the  volleying  position, 
the  play  between  the  two  men  generally  is  diag- 
onally across  the  court,  and  it  should  be  the  aim 
of  the  clever  player  to  keep  his  drives  well  over  in 
front  of  his  partner,  so  that  from  her  position  she 
will  be  able  to  cover  as  much  territory  as  possible. 
To  play  to  the  other  corner  leaves  the  "open 
diagonal"  of  the  court  wide  open  and  limits  the 
partner's  usefulness  to  covering  a  very  small 
sector  of  the  court. 

When  the  opponent  follows  the  same  tactics 
and  simply  tries  to  outdrive  you,  a  splendid  varia- 
tion is  to  work  him  far  out  to  the  outside  of  his 
court  to  meet  a  diagonal  drive  and  then  to  lob 


With  Both 
Women  at 
Net,  Better 
Tennis  Wins 


Men  Drive 
Diagonally  to 
Each  Other 


A  Variation 
With  a  Lob 


254      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Often  Drives 
Opponents 
Out  of 
Position 


Have  Partner 
Cross  Under 
Lob 


Leaves  Court 
Open  for  a 
Kill 


deep  and  low  over  his  partner's  head  and  follow 
the  play  up  to  the  net.  The  effect  of  this  play  is 
to  bring  the  man  on  the  other  side  directly 
behind  his  partner  leaving  them  doubled  up  and 
the  other  side  of  the  court  entirely  unguarded. 

If  you  follow  this  play  up  to  the  net  quickly, 
the  court  will  be  wide  open  for  a  kill  and  nothing 
but  a  lob  or  a  brilliant  passing  stroke  will  save 
the  other  side  from  losing.  The  greatest  danger 
of  this  play  is  that  the  man  opponent  will  be  able 
to  cross  quickly  enough  to  smash,  but  if  the  lob  is 
low  and  well  placed  to  the  side  of  the  court  he 
will  find  it  very  difficult  to  get  there  in  time,  es- 
pecially if  he  was  far  over  to  the  other  side  before. 

I  have  found  it  a  splendid  variation  to  have 
my  own  partner  cross  the  court  under  this  lob. 
Let  us  follow  this  play  and  see  how  its  works  out. 
Both  women  are  at  the  net  and  the  men  diagonally 
opposite  each  other  back  and  driving  deep.  In 
your  right  corner,  you  lob  deep  and  low  straight 
down  the  right  alley  over  the  opposing  woman's 
head  and  call  to  your  partner  to  cross  over  under 
the  lob.  The  man  on  the  other  side  must  cross 
over  to  handle  the  lob  and  will  probably  have  to 
play  it  off  the  ground,  so  you  can  cross  over  at 
the  base-line  as  soon  as  your  partner  has  safely 
crossed  at  the  net.  Unless  the  woman  on  the  other 
side  also  crosses  she  will  be  hopelessly  out  of  the 
play  and  the  entire  right  side  (the  left  as  you  face 
them)  of  your  opponents'  court  will  be  wide  open 
for  your  next  return. 

There  are  many  other  variations  of  play  for 
mixed  doubles,  but  success  in  this  game  depends 


MIXED  DOUBLES 


255 


largely  on  getting  your  woman  partner  up  to  the 
net,  and  keeping  her  there  safely  so  her  position 
covers  as  much  of  the  court  as  possible.  Natur- 
ally, the  woman  who  volleys  well  is  much  the 
stronger  partner,  and  to  select  one  who  volleys 
badly  is  to  court  defeat. 

The  service  is  a  big  advantage  in  mixed 
doubles,  and  the  man  should  always  serve  first  as 
he  ought  to  win  his  own  service  game  seventy  per 
cent,  of  the  time  with  evenly  matched  teams.  The 
struggle  usually  develops  around  the  winning  of 
the  games  in  which  the  women  serve  and  both  of 
the  men  are  expected  to  win  their  own  service 
games. 


Success  Hangs 
On  Getting 
Woman   Up 
to  Net 


256      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Should 
Woman  Play 
at  the  Netf 


English 
Combinations 
Find  This  an 
Advantage 


OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS: 

Should  the  woman  in  mixed  doubles  play  at  the 
net  or  the  base-line? 


R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND :    Net. 

T.  C.  BUNDY  :    At  the  net  if  she  can  volley  at  all. 

K.  H.  BEHR  :    At  net. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER  :    I  should  worry ! 
R.  D.  LITTLE  :   At  the  net  if  she  is  able. 

H.  H.  HACKETT:  I  don't  qualify  at  this  branch  of 
the  game. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT  :    At  the  net  and  rather  close. 

J.  C.  PARKE:  At  the  net  if  she  can  volley,  and  if 
she  can't  volley,  then  at  the  net  and  let  her  learn. 

C.  P.  DIXON  :    The  combinations  over  here  with  the 
lady  at  the  net  have  done  wonderfully  well,  and  show 
that  if  the  lady  is  only  a  fair  volleyer,  the  advantage  is 
with  them. 

R.  L.  MURRAY  :    At  the  net  if  she  can. 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :    At  the  net. 

W.  M.  WASHBURN  :  At  the  net  if  she  can  volley ; 
otherwise  not. 

ELIA  FOTTRELL:    At  the  net. 

CLARENCE  HOBART:    Net,  if  she  is  any  good  there. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST:    Wherever  she  is  best. 
J.  R.  STRACHAN  :    At  the  net. 

C.  R.  GARDNER  :  If  she  can  volley,  at  the  net.  Much 
depends  on  what  the  opponents  are  sending  over  to  her. 

A.  S.  DABNEY:  Base-line  unless  an  exceptionally 
good  volleyer. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :    Net  is  usually  better. 

F.  C.  IN  MAN  :    Base-line. 
W.  F.  JOHNSON  :  At  the  net. 

N.  W.  NILES  :    At  the  net  if  she  can  volley  or  keep 


MIXED  DOUBLES 


257 


from  being  hit  by  her  opponents'  drives;  this  merely  as 
against  being  placed  there  by  her  partner  with  the  hope 
that  their  opponents  will,  for  fear  of  hurting  her,  refrain 
from  shooting  fast  drives  her  way.  In  either  case,  if 
tactics  work  out  as  planned,  I  believe  a  very  unfair  ad- 
vantage is  taken  as,  of  course,  a  strip  of  court  is  deliber- 
ately ruled  off  from  play.  If  her  partner's  service  is  such 
that  it  can  be  returned  with  speed  and  is  driven,  as  it 
should  be,  at  or  near  her  standing  at  the  net,  and  she 
consistently  missing,  is  in  danger  of  being  hit,  I  believe 
it  is  her  partner's  duty  to  put  her  back  on  the  base-line 
rather  than  trust  that  the  opposing  side,  seeing  her  dan- 
ger, will  change  the  direction  of  their  shots. 

T.  R.  PELL:     Net. 

ROBERT  LERov :  I  don't  know.  As  a  general  thing, 
I  should  say  at  the  base-line  in  the  left-hand  corner. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR  :   Yes,  if  she  is  at  all  used  to  net  play. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD  :  At  the  net,  if  she  is  able  to  volley 
at  all. 

J.  J.  ARMSTRONG:    At  net,  if  able;  few  are  able. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN:    Net. 

W.  M.  HALL:   At  net,  if  any  good  there  at  all. 

RICHARD  HARTE:  It  depends  on  the  woman;  if 
she  can  play  net  and  volley  to  the  opposite  woman  well, 
it  gives  one  at  once  a  very  strong  position. 

DEAN  MATHEY:  Depends  upon  the  dame  you  are 
playing  with.  Ordinarily,  I  would  say  right  on  top  of 
the  net. 

R.  C.  SEAVER:    At  the  net,  if  possible,  always. 

G.  C.  SHAFER:    At  net. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL:    Always  at  the  net. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY:  This,  of  course,  depends  entirely 
on  the  ability  of  the  woman.  Ordinarily  I  should  by  all 
means  advocate  the  playing  of  the  woman  at  the  net. 
The  very  fact  that  she  is  at  the  net  disconcerts  the 
opposing  players.  He  has  at  least  to  try  to  keep  the  ball 
away  from  her.  This  is  sometimes  easy  enough  to  do 
but  it  is  not  so  easy  as  playing  the  ball  back  anywhere, 


Niles  Mixes 
Gallantry 
With  Tennis 


Nearly  All 
Favor  Net 
Position 


"Depends  on 
the  Dame" 
Says  Mathey 


258      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Should 
Woman  Get 
Easier 
Service? 


Nearly 
All  Agree 
That  He 
Should  Not 


which  can  be  done  if  the  lady  is  not  at  the  net. 

I.  C.  WRIGHT:  Net,  if  she  is  equal  to  it.  Few  are, 
however. 

W.  C.  GRANT  :     She  should  play  net. 

Should  a  man  in  high-class  mixed  doubles  ease 
up  on  his  service  for  the  opposing  woman  f 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND:    No,  No,  No. 
T.  C.  BUNDY  :    No ;  it's  more  or  less  an  insult  to  the 
opponents. 

K.  H.  BEHR:    Yes. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER:     Are  you  playing  ping  pong  or 
tennis  ? 

R.  D.  LITTLE:    No. 
H.  H.  HACKETT:   No. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT  :   Certainly  not. 
J.  C.  PARKE:    Rubbish. 

C.  P.  DIXON:    Why  should  he? 

R.  L.  MURRAY:     Certainly,  if  necessary  to  win. 

G.  M.  CHURCH:     I  don't  think  he  should  in  very 
high-class  mixed  doubles. 

W.  M.  WASHBURN:    No. 

ELIA  FOTTRELL:    No. 

CLARENCE  HOBART:    Of  course  not. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST  :   Why  ?   Is  he  out  to  win  or  to  be 
polite?    When  he  eases  up  on  the  opposite  lady,  he  puts 
his  own  partner  in  bad. 

J.  R.  STRACHAN  :    Not  in  high-class  play. 

C.  R.  GARDNER:  No.  His  duty  is  to  use  all  his 
powers  to  win  for  his  partner's  sake,  if  not  for  his  own. 

A.  S.  DABNEY  :  No,  if  he  did  it  would  be  a  question 
of  ethics,  and  that  plays  no  part  in  a  game  where  a  man 
is  trying  to  deliver  his  best  strokes  which  still  preserve 
perfect  fairness  and  sportsmanship. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :    No. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :    No. 
W.  F.  JOHNSON:    No. 


MIXED  DOUBLES  259 

N.  W.  NlLES :     No.  Harte  and 

T.  R.  PELL:    No.  Whitney 

ROBERT  LEROY:    No.  Differ  from 

,,    ~  -..T  the  Others 

A.  M.  SQUAIR:    No. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:    No. 
J.  J.  ARMSTRONG:    He  should  not. 
LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :    No. 
W.  M.  HALL:    No. 
RICHARD  HARTE  :     Yes,  by  all  means. 
DEAN  MATHEY:    No. 
R.  C.  SEAVER:    No. 
G.  C.  SHAFER  :   No. 
S.  H.  VOSHELL:    No. 
E.  H.  WHITNEY  :   Yes,  a  little. 
I.  C.  WRIGHT:    If  at  a  house  party. 
W.  C.  GRANT  :   Certainly  not.   It  is  part  of  the  game 
and  is  perfectly  fair. 


260      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Healthy 
Respect  for 
an  Honorable 
Opponent 


Learning 
Something 
from  the 
Other  Man 


XVIII. 

ETHICS  AND  ETIQUETTE 

THERE  IS  NOT  another  sport  in  the  whole 
category  that  develops  and  brings  out  a 
more  healthy  respect  for  an  honorable  op- 
ponent than  lawn  tennis.  One  is  in  such  close 
personal  relation  with  the  adversary  all  the  time 
during  match  play,  that  he  is  certain  to  learn  a 
great  deal  of  the  character  of  the  man  he  is  op- 
posing during  the  course  of  a  few  sets.  And  when 
the  match  is  over  the  manner  in  which  he  meets 
you,  whether  you  be  a  winner  or  a  loser,  will  shed 
some  further  light  on  the  subject. 

If  you  have  been  playing  against  a  stranger, 
it  is  a  safe  guess  that  you  have  learned  something 
new  from  him  and  he  something  from  you  by  the 
time  the  game  is  over.  You  may  have  beaten  him 
badly,  but  in  all  the  great  variety  of  strokes  that 
he  has  played  during  those  three  or  four  sets, 
there  were  surely  some  of  them  that  were  new  to 
you,  or  played  in  a  manner  that  was  different  from 
what  you  had  seen  before.  If  you  have  learned 
nothing  new  from  his  play,  he  must  have  been  a 
very  inferior  player  or  you  a  very  poor  observer. 

After  twenty  years  of  tournament  play,  I 
found  that  I  seldom  played  a  match  without  learn- 
ing something  new  from  my  opponent's  style  of 
hitting  the  ball.  The  ability  to  learn  and  gain 


ETHICS  AND  ETIQUETTE 


261 


from  observation  of  others'  play  is  of  inestimable 
value  to  any  ambitious  tennis  player,  and  all 
should  cultivate  it. 

At  the  end  of  even  the  closest  match,  no  mat- 
ter if  it  has  been  lost  by  the  merest  fluke,  there 
should  be  no  feeling  of  rancour  on  the  part  of 
either  the  winner  or  the  loser,  if  the  match  has 
been  played  honorably.  No  one  can  win  all  of  the 
time,  and  it  does  the  best  players  a  world  of  good 
to  be  beaten  occasionally.  It  teaches  them  fresh 
ideas,  gives  them  new  incentives  and  ambitions. 
Furthermore,  there  is  no  interest  in  any  game  if 
you  are  always  the  winner;  when  the  result  is  a 
foregone  conclusion,  it  is  almost  unnecessary  and 
generally  uninteresting  to  play  the  match. 

But  there  are  occasional  times  when  an  ad- 
versary cannot  be  considered  an  honorable  oppo- 
nent and  then  it  requires  the  greatest  self-control 
to  lose  gracefully.  Fortunately,  such  players  are 
exceedingly  rare  in  lawn  tennis,  because  of  the 
spirit  of  honor  that  pervades  its  players  and  the 
quick  ostracism  that  has  followed  the  few  back- 
sliders who  have  fallen  from  grace. 

Not  very  many  years  ago,  I  remember  hear- 
ing a  certain  man  who  was  very  far  from  popular, 
explain  how  he  came  to  beat  another  player  who 
was  always  thought  to  be  considerably  better  than 
he.  Amazed  at  the  result,  some  of  us  were  asking 
how  he  came  to  beat  this  man,  and  his  reply  was : 
"Oh,  I  managed  to  throw  him  off  his  game  in 
several  ways.  His  service  was  the  hardest  thing 
to  handle,  but  every  once  in  a  while  when  he  got 
them  in  too  fast  for  me,  I  would  just  hold  up  my 


Win  or  Lose, 
There  Should 
Be  No 
Rancour 


The  Few 

Backsliders 

Ostracised 


One  Man's 
Method  of 
Winning 


262      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Minor  Ways  of 
Dishonesty 


An  Instance  of 
Bad  Methods 


Not  Fair 
to  Hurry 
Opponents 


hand  and  say  'Not  ready !'  and  make  him  serve  it 
over  again/' 

Now,  this  may  be  an  exaggerated  case,  but 
there  are  a  number  of  such  minor  ways  of  dis- 
honesty in  which  the  technical  rules  of  the  game 
can  be  beaten.  Not  being  ready  for  the  service 
is  one,  for  no  umpire  can  insist  that  you  were 
ready ;  claiming  a  "let"  for  some  imaginary  inter- 
ference is  another,  but  the  umpire  has  better  con- 
trol over  this  infraction ;  calling  out  loudly  to  dis- 
concert an  opponent  as  he  is  about  to  smash  is 
another  adopted  by  some  players  who  lack  the 
respect  of  their  contemporaries. 

I  well  remember  another  instance  of  this 
kind  which  occurred  when  I  was  playing  an  im- 
portant tournament  match  against  the  same  play- 
er whose  transgression  was  cited  before.  I  got 
within  one  stroke  of  victory  and  he  tossed  a  short 
lob,  which  seemed  certain  to  be  killed.  In  sheer 
desperation,  my  opponent  shouted  out  as  the  ball 
was  falling  close  to  the  net,  "He'll  miss  it,  he'll 
miss  it!"  as  loud  as  he  could,  with  the  desired 
effect,  for  I  did  miss  the  smash  as  a  result,  al- 
though the  trick  did  not  ultimately  save  the  match 
for  him. 

It  is  considered  not  only  fair  and  generous 
but  required  by  the  ethics  of  the  game  that  the 
opponent  be  given  ample  time  to  prepare,  even  to 
shift  position  if  he  wishes,  between  the  delivery 
of  the  first  and  second  services,  and  if  your  op- 
ponent tries  to  hurry  you  unreasonably  in  this 
regard,  you  are  fully  entitled  to  hold  up  your  hand 


ETHICS  AND  ETIQUETTE 


263 


to  show  you  were  not  ready  for  the  second  service 
and  make  him  deliver  it  again. 

In  the  same  way,  you  are  entitled  to  walk 
back  to  position  with  reasonable  deliberateness  at 
the  end  of  a  rally  before  taking  the  next  service, 
and  your  opponent  should  not  be  allowed  to  force 
you  to  hurry  when  he  finds  perhaps  that  you  are 
out  of  breath.  This  is  one  of  the  sly  tricks  that 
are  sometimes  attempted  by  a  few  players  of 
doubtful  ethics,  but  they  are  easily  checked  by  a 
demand  for  reasonable  preparation  before  each 
service  is  delivered.  The  honorable  player  will 
not  take  advantage,  on  the  other  hand,  of  either 
of  these  unquestionable  rights.  To  do  that  would 
be  just  as  bad  as  the  other  extreme. 

One  should  be  courteous  also  in  knocking 
idle  balls  directly  back  to  his  opponent,  not  in  his 
general  direction  so  that  he  will  have  to  walk  a 
little  extra  distance  each  time  to  get  balls  to  serve. 
I  have  seen  players  sometimes  sullenly  knock  the 
balls  back  to  the  other  side  of  the  court  without 
the  slightest  regard  for  the  other  man,  when  a 
little  ordinary  courtesy  would  have  dictated  a 
better  direction. 

But  such  instances  are  rare,  and  the  eti- 
quette of  lawn  tennis  is  pretty  well  understood  by 
all  of  its  players  and  lived  up  to  religiously  as  a 
matter  of  personal  honor  and  honesty.  Neverthe- 
less, there  are  a  host  of  fine  points  that  often  come 
up  to  trouble  the  conscience  of  a  man  during 
match  play  and  a  frank  discussion  of  the  doubt- 
ful points  is  certain  to  make  the  conditions  sur- 
rounding tournaments  more  equal. 


You  Are 
Entitled  to 
Play 
Deliberately 


Knocking  Back 
Idle  Balls 


Some  Doubtful 
Points  in 
Ethics 


264      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Lob  in  the  Sun 
if  the  Other 
Man  Does 


This  State  of 
Mind  Bothers 
Many 


Most 

Tournament 
Players 
Frankly  Do  So 


For  instance,  I  asked  one  of  the  best  players 
in  the  country  not  long  ago  if  he  considered  it 
fair  to  intentionally  lob  in  the  face  of  the  sun,  so 
that  his  adversary  might  have  the  disadvantage 
of  facing  it,  and  make  his  smashing  more  diffi- 
cult. His  reply  was:  "I  do,  if  the  other  fellow 
does." 

Here  is  a  state  of  mind  that  bothers  many 
players;  they  are  not  certain  whether  their  con- 
science approves  of  certain  questionable  things 
during  match  play,  but  if  the  antagonist  uses 
these  means  they  would  follow  suit.  This  leaves 
the  matter  in  a  debatable  state,  so  that  either 
might  refrain  from  the  same  ruse  and  accuse  the 
other  afterward  of  taking  an  unfair  advantage. 

On  this  particular  point,  nearly  all  tourna- 
ment players  consider  it  perfectly  legitimate  to 
take  advantage  of  the  position  of  the  sun.  Even 
the  rules  themselves  have  been  framed  to  equalize 
this  advantage,  for  you  will  find  that  the  rule 
governing  the  changing  of  sides  during  a  set  re- 
quires that  never  more  than  two  games  in  suc- 
cession shall  be  played  from  the  same  side  of  the 
net,  and  any  advantage  that  may  accrue  from 
having  the  sun  or  wind  at  the  back  will  be  divided 
as  equally  as  possible.  The  rules  go  even  further 
than  this,  and  prevent  two  successive  games  after 
deuce  in  any  set  from  being  played  from  the  same 
side,  by  requiring  the  players  to  change  sides 
after  the  odd  instead  of  the  even  games.  This  is 
the  reason  that  this  rule  was  framed  as  it  is,  so 
that  neither  player  should  have  any  distinct  ad- 
vantage due  to  the  wind  or  sun  or  other  court 


ETHICS  AND  ETIQUETTE 


265 


conditions,  for  the  necessary  two  games  in  suc- 
cession after  the  score  had  reached  five-all,  six- 
all,  or  any  other  deuce  point  in  the  set.  A  set 
cannot  be  won,  therefore,  because  of  such 
conditions,  although  a  game  can. 

Frankly,  most  of  the  best  tournament  play- 
ers do  take  advantage  of  the  sun  and  the  wind 
whenever  possible.  When  their  back  is  toward 
the  sun,  they  lob  more  often  than  when  facing  it, 
so  as  to  gain  by  their  adversary's  inability  to 
smash  with  the  sun  in  his  eyes.  They  drive  with 
the  wind  and  lob  against  it,  if  they  consider  that 
good  tactics;  the  ethics  of  these  tactics  are  gen- 
erally considered  to  be  good. 

Certainly,  every  player  selects  the  weakest 
point  in  his  opponent's  armour  of  strokes  for  at- 
tack, and  no  one  questions  his  right  to  do  so.  If 
he  smashes  poorly,  the  wise  tournament  player 
feeds  lobs  to  him ;  if  his  backhand  stroke  is  weak 
or  erratic,  he  is  given  the  ball  on  this  side,  and  if 
he  is  poor  at  volleying  or  playing  off  the  ground, 
a  distinct  effort  is  made  to  force  him  into  that 
part  of  the  court  where  he  will  have  to  play  the 
strokes  he  is  least  expert  in. 

Another  fine  point  in  ethics  comes  up  in  tak- 
ing advantage  of  the  physical  condition  of  an  ad- 
versary. Your  opponent  may  be  out  of  condition 
when  a  match  starts  and  you  may  soon  learn  of 
this  advantage  you  hold  over  him;  or  he  may 
start  fit  and  become  more  exhausted  by  his  play 
than  you  who  have  husbanded  your  strength  bet- 
ter. Under  these  conditions,  how  far  is  it  per- 
missible to  deliberately  "play  for  his  wind" — that 


Entitled  to 
Advantage  of 
Sun  or  Wind 


Other  Weak 
Points  Always 
Attacked 


Playing  to 
Tire  Out  the 
Adversary 


266      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


The  Cafe  of 
Doherty  vs. 
Ward 


Exhaustion 
Beat  the 
American 


Wise 

Generalship 
to  Husband 
Your  Strength 


is,  to  play  to  win  by  endurance  rather  than  su- 
periority of  strokes? 

As  in  the  question  of  lobbing  against  the  sun, 
a  great  majority  of  the  tournament  experts  feel 
that  this  is  perfectly  legitimate,  and  it  would 
clear  the  atmosphere,  I  feel,  to  have  this  free  dis- 
cussion of  the  matter  so  that  none  of  the  others 
should  be  held  back  from  taking  the  same  ad- 
vantage when  it  offers.  When  Holcombe  Ward 
met  H.  L.  Doherty  in  the  Davis  Cup  International 
matches  at  Wimbledon  in  1905,  he  captured  the 
first  two  sets  by  fast  rushing  to  the  net  and  volley- 
ing the  returns  of  the  English  champion.  Do- 
herty, however,  believed  that  he  could  not  keep 
up  this  steady  rushing  and  must  soon  "shoot  his 
bolt/'  so  he  played  well  within  himself,  waiting 
for  the  American  to  "crack."  His  plan  succeeded, 
as  history  shows  to  the  regret  of  the  American 
hopes  for  International  supremacy  that  year,  for 
after  the  first  two  sets,  Ward  was  exhausted  and 
could  not  physically  keep  up  the  gruelling  net- 
rushing,  with  the  result  that  Doherty  won  the 
next  three  sets  in  comparatively  easy  fashion,  on 
better  physical  condition,  although  clearly  out- 
played in  the  first  two. 

It  is  considered  perfectly  legitimate  to  make 
use  of  such  an  advantage,  and  wise  generalship 
to  husband  your  strength  for  the  endurance  test 
at  the  first  sign  of  physical  distress  on  the  part  of 
the  adversary.  In  the  final  round  at  Newport 
some  years  ago,  I  found  it  impossible  to  lob  with 
safety  against  Dwight  Davis  during  the  early  part 
of  the  match.  As  the  struggle  drew  out  tQ  a  fifth 


ETHICS  AND  ETIQUETTE 


267 


set,  however,  physical  condition  began  to  count. 
My  opponent  was  a  very  heavy  man  who  felt  the 
strain  more  than  I  did,  so  I  played  safe,  with  the 
result  that  toward  the  end  of  the  match  I  could 
lob  with  perfect  safety,  as  Davis  was  unable  to 
smash  successfully  after  he  tired.  That  weak- 
ness saved  the  match  for  me;  physical  condition 
turned  the  tables  in  my  favor,  just  as  it  reversed 
the  result  the  next  day  in  the  challenge  round 
against  Whitman. 

Some  question  has  been  raised  as  to  just  how 
far  lawn  tennis  players  should  resort  to  deception 
—that  is,  deception  regarding  intentions  in  play, 
in  direction  of  strokes,  in  motions  of  the  arms, 
body  or  racket,  and  in  counter  deceptions  to  offset 
such  deceit.  Little  carries  this  to  the  extreme 
in  his  theories,  and  his  book  dwells  constantly  on 
the  fine  points  raised  by  these  tactics.  Personally, 
I  feel  that  this  is  a  perfectly  legitimate  part  of  the 
strategy  of  the  game,  and  perhaps  the  highest 
point  of  skill  among  the  most  expert  players.  If 
all  deception  were  omitted,  the  mere  making  of 
strokes  would  become  much  more  mechanical,  and 
much  of  the  variety  would  be  taken  from  the 
game.  Possibly,  Little  may  dwell  too  much  on  the 
element  of  deception  in  strategy,  but  I  am  a  firm 
believer  in  its  value  and  legitimacy. 

How  far  will  good  ethics  permit  this  decep- 
tion in  play  to  be  carried  ?  Certainly,  beyond  the 
use  of  shifting  the  eyes,  beyond  "covering"  the 
direction  of  a  stroke  by  false  motions,  beyond 
dodging  to  one  side  or  another  to  deceive  an  ad- 
versary as  to  your  position,  to  your  shifting  posi- 


Big  Men  Tire 
in  Long 
Matches 


Deception 
in  Play 
Perfectly 
Legitimate 


How  Far 
Should 
Deception  Be 
Carried? 


268      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Serving  to  the 
Woman  in 
Mixed  Doubles 


Attacking  the 

Woman 

Opponent 


tion  when  his  eyes  are  on  the  ball  and  unable  to 
follow  your  movements,  and  to  other  similar 
means  of  keeping  the  enemy  in  doubt  of  your  in- 
tentions, or  better  yet,  wrongly  informed.  Should 
it  include  such  a  device  as  stamping  on  the  ground 
to  imitate  a  quick  move  when  an  opponent  is  look- 
ing up  to  smash  a  lob  ?  Beals  Wright  used  to  use 
this  maneuver  successfully,  and  I  do  not  remem- 
ber ever  hearing  it  criticized. 

Two  fine  points  in  etiquette  naturally  come  up 
for  approval  or  disapproval  that  are  surely  within 
the  doubtful  limits.  Should  a  man  player  serve 
or  smash  or  drive  as  hard  as  possible  toward  a 
woman  opponent?  It  is  not  unusual  in  mixed 
doubles  for  the  man  to  moderate  his  service 
a  trifle  in  serving  to  his  woman  antagonist,  but 
this  is  not  always  done,  particularly  when  the 
women  in  the  match  are  of  the  highest  class.  Still 
it  is  done  often  even  among  players  of  this  class. 
It  seems  to  be  a  matter  of  courtesy  rather  than 
ethics,  but  it  is  always  a  doubtful  matter  in  tourna- 
ment play,  and  sometimes  causes  bad  feeling  when 
the  man  on  one  side  of  the  net  uses  this  advantage 
and  the  other  does  not.  Expert  women  players 
sometimes  resent  the  slight  of  inferiority  and  I 
have  known  them  to  take  the  other  view. 

The  same  question  comes  up  in  mixed  dou- 
bles when  the  man  has  an  opportunity  to  score 
by  keeping  the  woman  on  the  other  side  of  the  net 
constantly  under  fire,  and  by  avoiding  the  attack 
of  her  man  partner,  manages  to  win  the  match. 
Some  players  feel  it  a  matter  of  good  ethics  in 
mixed  doubles  to  divide  the  attack  with  fair 


ETHICS  AND  ETIQUETTE 


269 


equality,  directing  a  full  share  of  it  toward  the 
man  opponent,  but  as  a  rule  tournament  experts 
play  to  win  in  mixed  doubles  as  in  the  other 
branches  of  the  game. 

The  rules  are  very  specific  and  all  decisions 
have  been  consistent  in  refusing  to  postpone  a 
match  because  one  of  the  contesting  players  was 
injured  during  it,  and  there  is  a  strong  feeling 
that  advantage  should  not  be  taken  of  the  dis- 
cretionary power  in  the  referee's  hands  by  which 
a  player  can  gain  a  short  respite  in  case  of  a  fall 
or  injury  to  himself,  his  racket  or  his  clothes.  The 
rules  also  are  very  precise  as  to  the  resting  period 
between  sets,  but  there  has  been  a  good  deal  of 
carelessness  in  enforcing  this  provision,  except  in 
the  championship  matches. 

It  is  apparent  that  if  one  player  is  more  ex- 
hausted by  the  severity  of  the  play  than  the  other, 
a  longer  resting  period  than  the  rules  allow  will 
equalize  this  disadvantage,  and  since  it  is  legiti- 
mate to  play  for  this  advantage,  it  is  certainly 
wrong  to  try  to  offset  it  by  unlawful  means  such 
as  extending  the  period  for  rest  between  the  sets. 
The  ethics  of  this  side  of  the  game  are  rather  clear 
in  that  once  the  match  has  been  started,  it  should 
be  played  through  to  its  conclusion  without  fur- 
ther interruption  than  a  strict  interpretation  of 
the  rules  permits.  Breaking  a  racket,  injury  from 
a  fall  or  collision  or  any  similar  accident  should 
not  be  allowed  to  offset  any  advantage  that  the 
opponent  has  secured  in  the  score  or  in  better 
physical  condition. 

Before  the  match  begins,  however,  a  differ- 


The  Question 
of  Postponing 
Matches 


Delay  Should 
Not  Be 
Granted  for 
Rest 


270      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Refusing  to 
Take  a  Hollow 
Victory 


A  Test 
Case  of 
Postponement 


When  Should 
a  Let  Be 
Claimed? 


ent  situation  arises,  and  most  players  are  reluctant 
to  force  an  adversary  who  is  sick  or  incapacitated 
to  begin  a  scheduled  match  in  order  to  secure  a 
hollow  victory.  Just  as  the  U.  S.  N.  L.  T.  A.  re- 
fused to  challenge  for  the  Davis  Cup  this  year 
because  the  British  players,  both  Australian  and 
English,  were  tied  up  on  account  of  the  war;  in 
the  same  spirit  that  made  the  American  polo  team 
last  year  volunteer  a  postponement  to  the  British 
Challengers  for  the  International  Polo  Cup  when 
one  of  their  best  players  was  hurt  in  practice  only 
a  day  or  two  before  play  was  to  begin ;  in  just  this 
same  spirit  of  good  sportsmanship,  lawn  tennis 
players  do  not  want  to  force  an  adversary  to  start 
a  match  under  conditions  of  great  temporary  in- 
equality. But  there  must  be  some  limit  to  such 
indulgences  and  some  rules  to  draw  the  line,  so 
once  a  match  is  started,  it  is  the  invariable  rule 
that  it  must  be  played  out  to  the  end  or  defaulted 
if  one  player  is  incapacitated. 

A  test  case  of  this  came  up  some  years  ago 
in  the  challenge  round  for  the  women's  national 
championship,  when  Miss  Marie  Cahill,  the  cham- 
pion, suddenly  had  a  cramp  in  her  leg  in  the 
middle  of  the  challenge  round  for  her  title.  She 
refused  to  continue  play,  and  the  committee  very 
rightfully  insisted  on  defaulting  her  title  to  the 
challenger,  despite  the  protests  of  Miss  Cahill. 

When  should  a  let  be  claimed  ?  This  is  a  nice 
point  that  hangs  very  much  on  the  conscience  of 
the  player.  The  rules  state  very  clearly  under 
what  circumstances  a  let  shall  be  allowed,  but 
most  umpires  are  inclined  to  take  the  word  of  a 


ETHICS  AND  ETIQUETTE 


271 


player  claiming  to  have  a  point  played  over  again. 

If  you  were  clearly  interfered  with  by  a  pass- 
ing spectator  or  other  outside  influences  that  are 
recognized  by  the  rules,  you  are  entitled  to  make 
the  claim,  but  it  is  the  worst  of  all  ethics  to  try 
for  a  point  and  losing  it,  then  to  make  a  claim  that 
the  point  should  be  played  over  again.  If  con- 
vinced that  you  are  entitled  to  replay  the  point, 
stop  at  once,  making  the  claim  before  you  lay 
yourself  open  to  the  accusation  of  trying  to  get 
two  chances  to  win  the  same  point. 

Such  cases  do  not  come  up  often  in  tourna- 
ment play  because  outside  influences  are  kept  from 
interfering  with  the  players,  but  the  ethics  of  the 
game  are  just  as  important  in  practice  play  as  in 
big  matches  where  there  are  umpires  to  decide 
such  doubtful  questions. 

One  of  the  most  difficult  points  for  all  play- 
ers to  decide  in  the  ethical  side  of  the  game  is  how 
to  take  a  wrong  decision  of  an  umpire  on  ques- 
tions of  fact.  We  find  occasionally  the  type  of 
player  who  is  quick  to  take  advantage  of  every 
decision  in  his  favor,  right  or  wrong,  and  to  in- 
stantly dispute  the  umpire,  even  to  appeal  to  out- 
siders or  his  opponent,  when  he  thinks  an  error 
has  been  maae.  Such  men  soon  find  themselves 
unpopular  among  the  other  players,  and  ostra- 
cism is  sometimes  the  only  way  to  cure  them  of 
their  disagreeable  traits. 

The  broad-minded  player  usually  takes  the 
view  that  the  umpire  is  honest  and  doing  the  best 
he  can ;  he  knows  that  he  is  fallible  like  any  other 
human  being,  and  he  hopes  that  the  errors  he  may 


Never  Try  for 
Point  and  Then 
Claim  a  Let 


Ethics  as 
Important  in 
Practice  as 
Match  Play 


How  Should 
One  Take  an 
Umpire's 
Wrong 
Decision? 


272      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Most 

Embarrassing 
When  in  Your 
Favor 


A  Sample 
of  Fine 
Sportsmanship 


make  during  a  match  will  even  themselves  up  in 
the  long  run. 

To  be  put  in  the  position  of  seeing  a  doubt- 
ful or  clearly  wrong  decision  in  your  own  favor 
is  perhaps  the  most  unpleasant,  and  this  calls  for 
generosity  or  diplomacy.  Your  diplomatic  oppo- 
nent in  these  circumstances  invariably  has  not 
seen  the  ball  strike  and  is  perfectly  willing  to 
abide  by  whatever  the  umpire  thinks,  since  he 
knows  it  is  in  his  favor,  but  your  honorable  an- 
tagonist gives  up  the  point.  I  have  seen  many 
remarkable  instances  of  generous  opponents  who 
refused  to  take  advantage  of  such  an  error  but 
who  were  broad  enough  not  to  embarrass  the  um- 
pire by  openly  reversing  his  decision. 

One  ex-champion  got  the  benefit  of  a  wrong 
decision  at  the  critical  part  of  a  big  Newport 
match  some  years  ago,  but  before  he  allowed  the 
point  to  be  recorded  in  his  favor,  he  called  to  his 
opponent : 

"Was  that  good?" 

"I  couldn't  be  sure;  it  looked  out  to  me," 
from  the  antagonist. 

"Are  you  sure  that  ball  was  good,  Mr.  Um- 
pire?" 

"It  looked  good  to  me,"  from  the  umpire. 

A  moment's  hesitation  and  then  the  ex-cham- 
pion went  back  to  his  base-line  and  served  a  double 
fault.  And  his  opponent  knew  instantly  that  he 
had  thrown  the  next  point  away  intentionally, 
for  he  spoke  of  it  after  the  match. 

That  is  the  spirit  of  true  sportsmanship  that 
shows  the  highest  ethics  in  the  game,  I  take  it. 


ETHICS  AND  ETIQUETTE  273 

Such  instances,  and  there  are  plenty  of  them  on    Highest 


record,  demonstrate  the  broad  character  that  de-    %h™  °f 

the  Game 

velops  from  the  spirit  of  fair  play  that  lawn 
tennis  breeds. 


274      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Should  You 
Lob  in  Face 
of  the  Sun? 


Nearly  Atl 
9™  *  Should 


OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS: 

Do  you  consider  it  good  ethics  to  lob  in  the  face 
of  the  sun? 

R-  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND:    No. 

T.  C.  BUNDY  :    Lob  when  that  would  be  the  natural 
return  if  there  were  no  sun. 

K.  H.  BEHR  :   Yes,  if  the  other  man  does. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER  :    Yes. 
R.  D.  LITTLE:    Certainly. 
H.  H.  HACKETT:    Yes. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT:    Yes. 

J.  C.  PARKE:     Certainly. 

C.  P.  DIXON  :    In  a  match,  yes. 

R.  L.  MURRAY:     No,  unless  there  is  no  other  play 
possible. 

G.  M.  CHURCH:    Yes. 
W.  M.  WASHBURN:    Yes. 

ELIA  FOTTRELL:    No,  only  when  forced  to. 
CLARENCE  HOBART:     Of  course. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST  :   Are  you  trying  to  win  the  match 

It  ig  njcer  tQ  hit  the  Qther  man  off  the  court> 

without  some  exercise  of  intelligence  the  "brains" 
person  could  never  beat  the  "brawn"  gentleman. 
J.  R.  STRACHAN:    No. 

C.  R.  GARDNER:    No,  but  in  some  cases  necessary. 
A.  S.  DABNEY  :  Yes. 
G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :    Yes. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :    Yes,  but  seldom  happens;  most  tour- 
nament courts  are  faced  correctly. 

N.  W.  NILES:    Yes. 
T.  R.  PELL:    Yes. 
ROBERT  LEROY:    Yes. 
A.  M.  SQUAIR:    Yes. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:    I  do. 


ETHICS  AND  ETIQUETTE  275 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :    Yes.  Harte  Says 

W.  M.  HALL:    Yes.  Play  as  if 

RICHARD  HARTE:      No;  play  as  you  would  were     There  Were 
there  no  sun.  N°  Sun 

DEAN  MATHEY:    Yes. 
R.  C.  SEAVER:    Yes. 
G.  C.  SHAFER:    Yes. 
S.  H.  VOSHELL:    Yes. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY:    Certainly. 
I.  C.  WRIGHT:    Yes. 

W.  C.  GRANT  :   It  is  a  fair  advantage ;  your  opponent 
has  the  same  advantage. 

Do  you  consider  it  good  ethics  to  lob  persistently 
to  an  opponent  when  he  is  off  in  smashing? 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND:    No.  Should  You 

T.  C.  BUNDY  :    Yes,  indeed,  if  a  match.  Lob  to  a  Bad 

K.  H.  BEHR:    Yes.  Smasher? 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER  :    Yes. 
R.  D.  LITTLE:    Certainly. 
H.  H.  HACKETT:    Yes. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT:    Yes. 

J.  C.  PARKE:     Certainly. 

C.  P.  DIXON  :    Certainly. 
R.  L.  MURRAY  :    O.  K. 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :    Yes. 
W.  M.  WASHBURN:    Yes. 

ELIA  FOTTRELL:    Yes.  Agaln>  the 

CLARENCE  HOBART  :     Of  course.  Experts  Agree, 

E.  B.  DEWHURST:     Same  as  to  the  question  about  Williams 
lobbing  in  the  face  of  the  sun.  Dissenting 

J.  R.  STRACHAN:    Yes. 

C.  R.  GARDNER  :    Yes,  the  same  as  putting  chop  on 
a  ball  if  he  hates  chops. 
A.  S.  DABNEY  :   Yes. 
G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.:    Yes. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :    Yes. 


276      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 

Champion's  N.  W.  NILES:    Yes.    In  playing  to  win,  as  tourna- 

is  the  Only  ment 

Negative  T    R    pELL.     yes 

Answer  _,  T    -^  -*r 

ROBERT  LERov:    Yes. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR:    Yes. 
G.  F.  TOUCHARD:    I  do. 
J.  J.  ARMSTRONG:    Yes. 
LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :     Yes. 
W.  M.  HALL:    Yes. 
RICHARD  HARTE:    Yes. 
DEAN  MATHEY:    Yes. 
R.  C.  SEAVER:    Yes,  if  you  care  to  win. 
G.  C.  SHAFER:    Yes. 
,  S.  H.  VOSHELL:    Yes. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY:    Certainly. 
I.  C.  WRIGHT:    Yes. 
W.  C.  GRANT:    Yes. 


Do  you  consider  it  good  ethics  to  intentionally  play 
to  exhaust  an  opponent  when  he  seems  to  be 
tiring  or  out  of  physical  condition  f 

Should  You  R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND :    Yes,  because  you  have  per- 

Tryto  Exhaust      haps  tired  him  by  your  ^  efc> 

T.  C.  BUNDY:    The  best  tactics;  let  him  stay  out  of 
tournaments  if  out  of  condition ;  would  be  unsportsman- 
like to  play  into  his  hand. 
K.  H.  BEHR:    Yes. 
F.  B.  ALEXANDER  :    Yes. 
R.  D.  LITTLE:    Certainly. 
H.  H.  HACKETT:   Yes. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT  :  Yes,  if  it  is  a  big  tournament  match. 

Parke  and  J.  C.  PARKE  :    No,  not  if  it  means  an  alteration  from 

Dixon  Disagree      your  usual  game. 

re  C.  P.  NIXON  :   Yes,  one  is  entitled  to  make  the  most 

of  one's  superior  physical  condition. 

R.  L.  MURRAY  :  O.  K.  also  in  tournament.  Although 


ETHICS  AND  ETIQUETTE 


277 


give  him  a  chance  to  rest  all  he  wants  if  he  hurts  himself. 
G.  M.  CHURCH:    Yes. 
W.  M.  WASHBURN:   Yes. 
ELIA  FOTTRELL:    Yes. 
CLARENCE  HOBART:    Of  course. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST:     Same  as  to  the  question  about 
lobbing  in  the  face  of  the  sun. 

J.  R.  STRACHAN:    Yes. 

C.  R.  GARDNER:  Part  of  the  game  is  condition,  a 
big  part  of  it. 

A.  S.  DABNEY:    Yes. 
G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :    Yes. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :    Yes. 

W.  F.  JOHNSON  :  Any  legitimate  style  of  play  which 
assists  in  winning  is  good  ethics. 

N.  W.  NILES:    Yes. 

T.  R.  PELL:  Yes,  all  in  the  game;  his  condition  is 
his  fault  and  he  deserves  to  lose  if  he  can't  stand  the 
strain.  So  to  keep  him  running  to  tire  him  out  is  per- 
fectly fair. 

ROBERT  LERov:    Yes. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR:    Yes. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:     I  certainly  do. 
J.  J.  ARMSTRONG:    Yes. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :  Yes,  I  believe  confidence  is 
half  of  what  is  known  as  "tennis  ability". 

W.  M.  HALL:    Yes. 

RICHARD  HARTE  :   Yes. 

DEAN  MATHEY:    Yes. 

R.  C.  SEAVER:  That's  part  of  the  game  if  it's  a 
tournament  match. 

G.  C.  SHAFER  :  Yes,  beat  him  anyway  you  can,  with- 
out breaking  the  rules,  or  being  ungentlemanly  in  bear- 
ing and  talk. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL:    Yes. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY  :   Most  assuredly. 

I.  C.  WRIGHT:    Yes. 

W.  C.  GRANT:  Yes,  tennis  is  a  question  of  endur- 
ance as  well  as  execution  of  the  strokes. 


All  But  Parke 
Agree  That 
it  is  Fair 


Opponent 
Deserves  to 
Lose  if  He 
Can't  Stand 
the  Strain 


278      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


XIX. 


Importance  of 
Selecting  a 
Good  Racket 


Cut  Strokes 
Require  an 
Open  Mesh 


O 


RACKETS,  BALLS,  SHOES,  ETC. 

F  ALL  THE  implements  of  the  game,  the 
racket  of  course  is  the  one  that  is  most 
important  to  the  player.  Individual  taste 
must  govern  each  man  in  the  selection  of  his 
rackets,  but  there  are  some  points  in  common  that 
all  agree  on.  Tight  stringing  is  essential  to  suc- 
cess in  all  match  play,  but  there  is  such  a  thing 
as  being  too  tight.  Experienced  players  often 
find  their  rackets  too  tight  when  they  first  come 
from  the  shop  and  it  takes  several  days'  play  to 
ease  up  on  the  tension  enough  to  make  the  cut 
strokes  take  well  on  them. 

Cut  strokes  depend  for  their  success  largely 
on  a  longer  contact  between  the  stings  and  the 
ball  than  do  other  strokes,  and  the  tighter  the 
strings  are  the  shorter  will  be  the  contact,  as  the 
ball  flies  away  too  fast  on  its  course  from  a  very 
tightly-strung  racket.  Too  small  a  mesh  in  the 
stringing  also  will  make  it  difficult  to  get  much 
twist  or  cut  on  the  ball. 

As  the  ball  rolls  across  the  strings,  every 
other  string  (those  where  the  cross  strings  are 
under  the  long  strings)  rubs  against  the  rough  sur- 
face of  the  ball  and  makes  it  revolve.  If  the  mesh 
of  the  racket  is  very  small  these  will  be  so  close 
together  that  they  will  not  grip  the  surface  but 


RACKETS,  BALLS,  SHOES,  ETC. 


279 


slide  over  like  a  smooth  board  and  the  ball  will 
get  less  spin. 

For  dirt  court  play,  a  coarser  gut  is  prefer- 
able to  that  used  for  grass  court  play.  On  turf, 
the  fine  strings  will  not  cut  so  quickly  as  where 
the  sharp  sand  is  picked  up  by  the  ball  and  rubbed 
on  the  strings,  and  also  the  ball  becomes  slightly 
heavier  from  the  moisture  in  the  grass  and  re- 
quires the  greater  resiliency  of  the  thinner 
strings. 

But  in  any  case,  a  good  racket  is  essential 
for  even  beginners  at  the  game.  Nothing  will 
handicap  the  learner  more  surely  than  poor  tools 
for  his  work,  and  a  good  racket  is  sure  to  give 
him  a  good  start. 

The  weight  of  the  racket  depends  somewhat 
on  the  size  of  the  player  and  his  physical  strength. 
The  average  weight  in  use  by  tournament  players 
varies  from  fourteen  to  fourteen  and  one-half 
ounces.  Dirt  courts  require  a  slightly  heavier 
racket  than  grass  but  half  an  ounce  is  easily 
enough  for  this  difference.  This  seems  like  split- 
ting hairs  somewhat,  but  half  an  ounce  in  a  tennis 
racket  is  a  very  material  difference.  Women  gen- 
erally use  lighter  rackets,  theirs  most  often  vary- 
ing from  thirteen  to  fourteen  ounces. 

The  weight  should  be  evenly  balanced,  so 
that  the  racket  is  carried  easily  in  the  hand  and 
can  be  brought  up  quickly  into  striking  position 
without  too  much  jerk  on  the  wrist.  Just  what 
this  balance  should  be  is  hard  to  describe,  but 
experienced  players  balance  a  racket  critically  be-. 


Coarser  Gut 
for  Dirt  Court 
Play 


Best  Weight 
for  a  Racket 


Weight  Should 
Be  Evenly 
Balanced 


280      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Size  of  the 

Handle 

Important 


Large  Handles 
Weaken  the 
Grasp 


Beware  of 
Fancy  Grips 


fore  buying  it,  and  form  their  own  opinions  from 
the  way  it  feels. 

The  size  of  the  handle  that  should  be  used 
is  of  considerable  importance,  but  as  in  the  ques- 
tion of  weight  it  depends  largely  on  the  taste  of 
the  player,  and  to  some  extent  on  the  size  of  his 
hand.  It  is  a  safe  rule  to  lay  down,  however, 
that  when  the  thumb  and  first  finger  are  wrapped 
around  the  handle  at  its  lower  end  where  you 
grasp  it  that  they  should  overlap  each  other  by 
at  least  an  inch. 

Large  handles  generally  have  a  tendency  to 
weaken  the  grip  of  the  average  player  and  I  would 
strongly  recommend  a  small  handle.  Among  the 
best  tournament  players  the  most  popular  size  is 
a  handle  5j4  inches  in  circumference,  but  some 
prefer  larger.  Personally,  I  believe  this  size  is 
the  best,  but  I  would  prefer  to  go  under  rather 
than  over  it  in  selecting  a  racket,  as  the  smaller 
handle  gives  a  firmer  grip  and  better  control.  It  is 
easy  to  measure  the  circumference  with  the  edge 
of  a  handkerchief  or  a  piece  of  cord  and  a  ruler. 

It  is  well  to  beware  of  fancy  grips  on  rackets. 
There  are  a  great  variety  of  these  in  the  stores, 
but  the  safest  handle  to  select  is  that  of  cedar  with 
an  octagonal  grip,  not  sharp  on  the  edges,  but 
with  rough  or  "combed"  wood  for  the  hand.  Some 
players  have  a  tendency  to  perspire  freely  in  the 
hand  while  playing  and  find  it  difficult  for  this 
reason  to  prevent  the  racket  from  slipping  occa- 
sionally while  in  play.  Electric  tape  or  surgeon's 
adhesive  plaster  is  sometimes  wrapped  around  the 
handle  to  prevent  this  slipping,  but  I  have  never 


RACKETS,  BALLS,  SHOES,  ETC. 


281 


found  it  a  success,  generally  enlarging  the  handle 
unnecessarily,  and  in  hot  weather  becoming  too 
sticky.  Rubber  handles,  cork  handles  and  fancy 
shaped  handles  seldom  prove  to  be  of  advantage, 
and  it  is  better  to  get  used  to  the  standard  shape 
and  learn  to  grip  that  properly  than  to  experiment 
with  odd  shapes  or  surfaces. 

The  rules  are  very  clear  regarding  the  size 
and  weight  of  the  balls,  which  are  very  closely 
prescribed.  Poor  balls  that  are  off  in  size  or 
weight  will  be  found  a  great  handicap,  and  it  is 
very  bad  practice  to  play  with  even  good  balls 
after  they  become  damp  so  as  to  be  too  heavy. 
Dirt  courts  cut  the  covers  and  stitches  of  the  balls 
rapidly,  particularly  when  the  surface  is  gritty, 
and  the  balls  become  light,  soft  and  flabby  under 
these  conditions,  so  that  old  balls  hurt  one's  play. 

The  net  should  always  be  at  the  right  height 
while  in  use.  A  sagging  or  high  net  is  an  abom- 
ination, and  a  few  hours  of  practice  over  a  low 
net  will  do  an  incalculable  amount  of  damage, 
which  will  become  apparent  soon  after  in  a  tend- 
ency to  hit  the  top  band  frequently  when  playing 
over  a  net  of  the  correct  height. 

Great  care  should  be  taken  that  courts  are 
marked  out  properly,  for  a  few  inches  difference 
in  the  length  or  breadth  of  a  court  will  throw  the 
player's  calculation  off  quickly  and  train  the  eye 
to  the  wrong  distances.  The  lines  should  be  two 
inches  wide  in  the  marking;  extra  wide  lines 
and  very  narrow  ones  being  equally  annoying.  A 
standard  width  of  line  is  very  desirable  so  that 
the  player  can  become  accustomed  to  a  certain 


Balls   Should 
Be  Right  in 
Size  and 
Weight 


Nets  Should 
Be  Always 
Correct  Height 


Never  Play  on 
Courts  That 
Are  Marked 
Wrong 


282      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Difference  of 
Opinion  as  to 
Shoes 


"Sneakers" 
Save  Much 
Weight 


Other   Wearing 
Apparel 


white  line  before  him  always  and  always  find  it 
the  same. 

There  is  considerable  difference  of  opinion 
regarding  the  selection  of  rubber-soled  shoes  for 
tennis.  The  larger  number  of  the  tournament 
players  use  light  canvas  low  shoes,  commonly 
called  "sneakers,"  and  find  them,  if  fitting  snugly, 
a  great  help  to  light-footedness  and  agility  in  get- 
ting about  the  court.  Some  players,  however, 
insist  that  these  thin  shoes  burn  the  feet  and 
blister  them,  and  that  a  heavy-soled  tennis  shoe  is 
preferable. 

Vaile  in  his  "Modern  Lawn  Tennis",  carried 
his  aversion  to  heavy  shoes  so  far  that  he  cal- 
culated that  the  average  English  player  carried 
twelve  ounces  more  weight  on  each  foot  than  the 
man  who  wears  a  "sneaker."  Allowing  five  steps 
per  second,  he  continues,  the  player  with  the  heavy 
shoe  lifts  13,500  pounds  more  in  an  hour,  which 
would  be  quite  a  drain  on  strength,  the  more  so 
when  a  long  match  often  lasts  from  two  to  three 
hours. 

Shoes  should  be  tight  without  pinching.  A 
loose  shoe  is  far  worse  than  a  tight  one,  since  its 
free  play  soon  works  blisters  on  the  feet.  Shoes 
always  work  larger  in  use,  and  they  should  fit 
rather  tight  when  new  so  they  will  not  slip  on  the 
feet  later. 

All  tennis  clothes  should  fit  comfortably  and 
not  distract  the  player's  attention  while  he  is  play- 
ing. A  tight  or  loose  belt  that  is  continually  need- 
ing adjusting  is  a  constant  source  of  annoyance 
and  a  shirt  that  works  out  from  under  the  belt  is 


RACKETS,  BALLS,  SHOES,  ETC. 


283 


also  distracting.  Tennis  shirts  are  now  made  with 
short  sleeves  that  are  fine  for  match  play,  for  a 
rolled  up  sleeve  is  often  in  the  way,  and  the  flop- 
ping kind  that  R.  F.  Doherty  used  to  play  with 
are  enough  to  take  any  one's  eyes  off  the  ball 
when  the  wind  blows. 


Flopping 

Shirt-Sleeves 

Bothersome 


284      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


OPINIONS  OF  THE  EXPERTS: 


What  weight  racket  do  you  use?    What  circum- 
ference of  handle  at  the  end? 


What  Size  and 
Weight  for 
Racket? 


From  14  to 
i4l/2  Oz.  the 
General  Rule 


R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND:    14%,  5%+  ZO  tape. 

T.  C.  BUNDY:    14  oz.,  5%. 

K.  H.  BEHR:    14%  oz.    Don't  know  circumference. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER:     14%,  5^  handle. 

R.  D.  LITTLE  :   14%  oz.,  5%  increased  by  tape  wrap- 
ping. 

H.  H.  HACKETT:    Hackett  and  Alexander.    5%. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT:    14  to  14%,  5%. 

J.  C.  PARKE  :    14%  oz.,  5%  inches. 

C.  P.  DIXON  :    14%  oz.,  5%,  if  anything  prefer  even 
shorter. 

R.  L.  MURRAY:    14%  to  15  oz.,  largest  size. 

G.  M.  CHURCH:    Weight,  14%.    Handle,  5%. 
W.  M.  WASHBURN:    14%  oz.,  5^  in. 

ELIA  FOTTRELL:    Around  14%  oz.,  5%  in.  handle. 
CLARENCE  HOBART  :     14  and  14%,  5  in. 

E.  B.  DEWHURST:    14  oz.,  5%  inches. 

J.  R.  STRACHAN:     14  oz.,  5^  inches,  not  counting 
the  tape. 

C.  R.  GARDNER:    14%  oz.,  5^  in.  handle. 

A.  S.  DABNEY  :    14  oz.,  circumference  5%  inches. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :     14  oz.,  5%  in.,  I  think. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :     14%  oz.,  5^  inches. 
W.  F.  JOHNSON:    14  oz.,  5%  inches. 
N.  W.  NILES  :    14%  oz.,  5%  to  5%  in. 
T.  R.  PELL:    14%  oz.,  5%  in.  handle. 
ROBERT  LERov :    13)4  to  14  oz.,  5%  inches. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR  :    14  oz.  best  for  me.    14%  I  can  use 
also  but  as  my  game  is  more  "net"  than  "back"  the 


\ 


RACKETS,  BALLS,  SHOES,  ETC. 

lighter  racket  is  better.  A  back  court  player  should  use 
heavier  racket  than  a  net  player. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:    14  or  14%  oz.,  5%  in. 

J.  J.  ARMSTRONG:     14  oz.,  medium  grip. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN:     14  oz.,  5^  in. 

W.  M.HALL:14oz.,  5#. 

RICHARD  HARTE:    14%  oz.,  5%  inch  handle. 

DEAN  MATHEY:    14  oz.,  5%  in- 

R.  C.  SEAVER:  14.  Do  not  know  just  what  I  do 
use  for  a  circumference.  I  like  the  old  small  handle 
racket  better  than  the  large  handle. 

G.  C.  SHAFER  :     14%  oz.,  big  handle. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL:    14%  oz.,  5^  with  tape. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY:    14%  oz.  racket,  5%  inch  handle. 

I.  C.  WRIGHT:     14%  oz.,  5%  in.  handle. 

W.  C.  GRANT:  Weight  14%  oz.  even  balance,  5% 
inches  circumference. 


285 

Handles 
Generally  51A" 
Around 


Do  you  believe  in  a  large  or  small  handle  for  the 
average  player? 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND:    Small, 
K.  H.  BEHR:    Small. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER  :    As  large  as  is  comfortable. 
R.  D.  LITTLE:    Fairly  large. 

H.  H.  HACKETT:    Small. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT:    Large  gives  better  balance. 
J.  C.  PARKE:     Small. 

C.  P.  DIXON  :   Moderate ;  smaller  rather  than  larger. 
R.  L.  MURRAY  :    Large,  better  average. 

G.  M.  CHURCH  :    Medium. 

W.  M.  WASHBURN:    It  depends. 
ELIA  FOTTRELL:    Large. 
CLARENCE  HOBART  :     Medium. 
E.  B.  DEWHURST:     Medium. 
J.  R.  STRACHAN  :   Large. 
C.  R.  GARDNER:    Large. 

A.  S.  DABNEY  :  No  difference ;  question  of  individual 
taste. 


Should 

Average  Player 
Use  Large  or 
Small  Handle? 


286      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Gardner 
Thinks  it 
Depends  on 
What  He 
Likes 


Large  for  Net 
Play,  Small  for 
Back-Court 


Which  Are 
Best: 

"Sneakers"   or 
Thick  Solesf 


G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.:    Depends  on  what  he  likes. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :    Large. 
W.  F.  JOHNSON:    Large. 

N.  W.  NILES:    Medium  large. 
T.  R.  PELL:   Large. 
ROBERT  LERov:    Large. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR:    Rather  small,  say  5-inch  handle. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:     Small. 

J.  J.  ARMSTRONG:    According  to  size  of  hand. 
LEONARD  BEEKMAN:    Small. 
W.  M.  HALL:    Medium. 
RICHARD  HARTE:    Medium. 
DEAN  MATHEY:    Medium. 

R.  C.  SEAVER:    Large  for  a  good  net  player,  small 
for  a  back-court  player. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL:   Large. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY  :    Large. 
I.  C.  WRIGHT:    Medium. 

W.  C.  GRANT  :   It  depends  on  the  size  of  the  player's 
hand. 

Do  you  think  thin  "sneakers"  or  heavy-soled  shoes 
are  better  for  hard  play? 

R.  N.  WILLIAMS,  2ND:     Sneakers. 
T.  C.  BUNDY:     Spikes  for  turf;  sneakers  for  hard 
courts. 

K.  H.  BEHR:    Latter. 

F.  B.  ALEXANDER  :    Depends  on  the  player. 
R.  D.  LITTLE:    Heavy. 

H.  H.  HACKETT:    Thin  sneakers. 

B.  C.  WRIGHT:    Heavy-soled  shoe. 
J.  C.  PARKE:    Heavy-soled. 

C.  P.  DIXON  :    I  find  heavy-soled  the  best.    The  feet 
are  thereby  better  protected. 

R.  L.  MURRAY:    Heavy-soled  shoes. 

G.  M.  CHURCH:    Sneakers  are  worth  at  least  half- 
fifteen  when  playing  on  a  hard  court. 

ELIA  FOTTRELL:    Heavy-soled  shoes. 


RACKETS,  BALLS,  SHOES,  ETC. 


28f 


CLARENCE  HOBART:     Heavy-soled  shoes  and  thick     Opinions 
socks.  Evenly 

E.  B.  DEWHURST  :    Thin  are  lighter  but  harder  on     D™ded  on 
the  feet.  ™* 

J.  R.  STRACHAN:    Heavy-soled  sneakers. 
C.  R.  GARDNER:     Sneakers,  as  they  are  lighter  and 
more  flexible. 

A.  S.  DABNEY:    Heavy  shoes. 

G.  P.  GARDNER,  JR.  :    I  prefer  heavy-soled. 

F.  C.  INMAN  :    Heavy  sole,  and  a  shoe  to  support  in- 
step more  than  a  sneaker  does. 

W.  F.  JOHNSON  :    Fairly  heavy. 

N.  W.  NILES:  I  prefer  high  "sneakers".  Heavy- 
soled  shoes  feel  clumsy. 

T.  R.  PELL:    Sneakers. 

ROBERT  LERov:  I  use  sneakers  and  heavy  socks 
usually. 

A.  M.  SQUAIR:  Heavy-soled  shoes  better.  Also 
heavy  socks. 

G.  F.  TOUCHARD:    Heavy-soled  shoes  always. 
J.  J.  ARMSTRONG:    Sneakers. 

LEONARD  BEEKMAN  :    Heavy-soled. 

W.  M.  HALL  :  Lighter  the  better,  if  they  hold  the 
court. 

RICHARD  HARTE:     Sneakers  for  match  play;  heavy     "Sneakers"  for 
soles  for  ordinary  use.     The  latter  are  the  more  com-     Match  Play 
fortable  but  are  the  heavier  and  consequently  make  the 
player  slower. 

DEAN  MATHEY:  Sneakers,  if  the  arch  does  not 
suffer. 

R.  C.  SEAVER:  Heavy-soled  shoes  give  one  much 
more  stability  on  court  and  more  confidence ;  light  shoes 
throw  me  off  my  balance  and  spoil  many  well-directed 
shots. 

G.  C.  SHAFER:     Heavy-soled  shoes. 

S.  H.  VOSHELL  :    The  lighter  the  shoe  the  better. 

E.  H.  WHITNEY:    Thin  sneakers. 

I.  C.  WRIGHT:    Heavy-soled  shoes  and  heavy  socks. 

W.  C.  GRANT  :  For  hard  courts,  thick  soles ;  me- 
dium thickness  for  grass  courts 


288      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


XX. 


Good  Practice 
Must  Be 
Based  on 
Sound  Theory 


Vaile' s  Ideas 
Not  All 
Original 


W 


LAWN  TENNIS  THEORIES 

HILE  IT  IS  no  doubt  true  that  too  much 
theory  and  too  little  practice  make  a 
poor  combination,  good  practice  must 
be  based  on  sound  theory — or  at  least,  it  ought  to 
be,  despite  the  exceptions  to  this  rule  that  Brookes 
and  a  few  other  players  have  furnished. 

As  the  game  progresses,  new  theories  are 
sure  to  be  propounded,  and  some,  like  the  Ameri- 
can twist  service,  may  have  a  revolutionizing 
effect.  Sound  theorists  are  as  valuable  to  the 
game  as  good  players,  and  I  am  not  in  accordance 
with  those  who  would  dismiss  without  considera- 
tion the  views  of  a  critic  because  he  is  not  a  good 
player  himself.  Mr.  Vaile  is  as  much  entitled  to  a 
hearing  as  the  most  expert  player. 

However,  Vaile's  theories  are  not  all  original 
with  him,  nor  are  they  all  safe  to  accept  on  their 
face.  His  sweeping  condemnation  of  the  English 
method  of  gripping  the  racket  is  not  justified  by 
the  results  of  matches  on  record.  We  cannot  for- 
get the  admitted  superiority  of  the  Doherty  broth- 
ers so  soon  as  that. 

Nor  can  one  approve  the  idea  that  Brookes  is 
a  sound  model  to  copy  for  young  players  who  are 
learning  the  game.  By  nearly  every  other  au- 
thority on  record,  the  great  Australian  is  con- 


LAWN  TENNIS  THEORIES 


289 


sidered  a  player  whose  success  has  defied  the  ac- 
cepted laws  of  good  form. 

The  Vaile  theory  that  there  is  only  one  way 
to  play  the  backhand  stroke,  as  it  is  shown  by 
Vaile  himself  and  Theodore  Pell,  may  also  be 
questioned  with  propriety.  Brookes,  whom  he 
takes  as  a  model,  does  not  play  this  stroke,  nor 
did  Wilding,  or  Larned  or  any  of  the  other  really 
great  players  on  record.  Most  observers  believe 
Larned's  backhand  stroke  better  than  Pell's,  and 
Wilding's  more  effective  also. 

The  most  remarkable  feature  of  Vaile's  recent 
book,  however,  is  the  apparent  effort  to  assume 
credit  for  the  centre  theory.  He  republishes  Max 
Decugis's  preface  to  his  French  edition  in  which 
Decugis  refers  to  "Vaile's  famous  centre-theory" 
with  no  denial  of  the  authorship.  This  sounds 
strange  to  Americans,  who  remember  well  the 
theory  as  developed  by  R.  D.  Wrenn  as  far  back 
as  1895,  and  who  were  fully  familiar  with  it  as 
expounded  in  a  previous  book  published  in  1904 
by  the  present  author. 

Vaile's  first  exposition  of  this  theory  came  in 
1905  in  the  London  "Field,"  and  F.  W.  Payn  in 
his  "Secrets  of  Lawn  Tennis"  (page  70),  de- 
clares :  "Anyone  who  cares  to  look  at  the  article 
in  question  will  find  that  Mr.  Paret's  book  was  the 
fountain-head  from  which  it  proceeded  in  a  singu- 
larly undiluted  form."  Certainly,  before  Vaile 
knew  anything  of  lawn  tennis,  the  theory  was  well 
worked  out  in  America,  and  certainly  before  he 
published  anything  about  it,  it  had  been  fully  ex- 
pounded in  print. 


More  Than 
One  Way  to 
Play  the 
Backhand 


Where  Did  the 
Centre  Theory 
Originate? 


British   Ideas 
on  the  Subject 


290      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Payn's  Views 

Narrowly 

English 


Five  Points 
Disputed 


Decugis 
Controverts 
Payn's  Claim 


Payn's  abuse  of  Vaile  in  the  three  books  he 
published  was  not  all  justified,  to  be  sure,  and  he 
cannot  be  considered  a  critic  of  unbiased  mind. 
His  opinions  were  too  narrowly  English  to  rec- 
ognize the  virtue  in  any  other  theories  but  his 
own.  In  five  distinct  points  he  took  violent  issue 
with  the  present  author,  and  in  each  of  the  five 
theories  criticised,  the  great  majority  of  the  pres- 
ent-day experts  (as  a  glance  over  the  opinions 
expressed  in  this  volume  by  the  representative 
players  of  America,  and  two  of  the  greatest  Eng- 
lish players,  will  prove  beyond  question)  have 
decided  against  him. 

The  five  points  in  dispute  were  ( 1 )  the  value 
or  worthlessness  (as  Payn  claimed)  of  the  centre 
theory;  (2)  whether  or  not  the  American  twist 
service  would  pay  the  average  player;  (3)  wheth- 
er the  drop-stroke  with  top-spin  can  be  hit  harder, 
and  still  kept  in  court,  than  the  straight  stroke 
without  twist;  (4)  whether  the  woman  in  mixed 
doubles  should  play  at  the  net  or  at  the  base-line ; 
and  ( 5  )  whether  the  English  formation  in  doubles 
with  the  partner  of  the  striker-out  at  the  service- 
line,  is  sound. 

The  soundness  of  the  centre  theory  is  admit- 
ted now  by  a  very  great  majority  of  the  world's 
best  players,  even  by  the  English  exponents  of 
modern  play.  Decugis,  the  French  ex-champion, 
declares  that  this  alone  permitted  him  to  win  the 
covered  court  championship  of  England  from 
Gore  in  the  finals,  and  Gore  is  one  of  the  two  or 
three  Englishmen  who  were  cited  by  Payn  as  the 


LAWN  TENNIS  THEORIES 


291 


men  whose  play  would  absolutely  annihilate  the 
centre  theory  if  used  against  them. 

The  practical  value  of  the  American  twist 
service  to  the  average  player  was  raised  again  re- 
cently in  the  series  of  questions  placed  before  the 
leading  players  of  the  country  for  use  in  this  vol- 
ume, and  of  the  thirty-six  opinions  secured,  nine- 
teen declared  with  me  that  it  does  not  pay  the 
average  player;  thirteen  think  that  it  does,  and 
four  answers  were  more  or  less  doubtful  in  char- 
acter. Parke,  the  best  of  the  English  players,  re- 
plied unqualifiedly  "No." 

I  think  it  has  been  proven  beyond  dispute 
since  Payn's  book  was  published  that  the  drop- 
stroke  does  permit  greater  speed  within  the  same 
length  because  of  the  characteristic  curve  on  the 
ball.  The  general  impression  is  that  the  straight 
stroke  permits  more  speed  but  lacks  the  control  of 
the  ball  played  with  top-spin,  but  it  is  this  very 
control  that  permits  the  player  to  hit  the  ball,  par- 
ticularly from  a  low-bounding  return,  with  great- 
er speed  and  still  keep  it  in  the  court,  than  one 
with  no  spin  to  bring  it  down  to  earth. 

On  the  question  of  where  the  woman  should 
stand  in  playing  mixed  doubles,  there  is  to-day 
hardly  any  diversity  of  opinion,  and  Payn  would 
find  himself  hopelessly  at  odds  now  with  the  best 
experts.  Out  of  thirty-seven  opinions  secured  on 
this  point  from  the  leading  players,  thirty  support 
the  position  taken  by  the  present  writer  (i.  e.f 
that  the  woman  should  play  at  the  net),  and  only 
three  side  with  Payn,  four  answers  being  non- 
committal. 


Value  of 
American 
Twist  Services 


Drop-Stroke 
Does  Permit 
Greater  Speed 


Payn  Swamped 
on  the  Mixed 
Doubles 
Question 


292      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OP  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


Even  English 
Ideas  Now  Do 
Not  Support 
Him 


Soundness  of 
Doubles 
Formation 
Still  in  Dispute 


Even  English  opinions  do  not  support  his  posi- 
tion. Parke's  characteristic  reply  is:  "At  the 
net  if  she  can  volley,  and  if  she  can't  volley,  then 
at  the  net  and  let  her  learn."  Dixon  replies :  "The 
combinations  over  here  with  the  lady  at  the  net 
have  done  wonderfully  well,  and  show  that  if  the 
lady  is  only  a  fair  volleyer,  the  advantage  is  with 
them." 

I  personally  played  mixed  doubles  in  English 
tournaments  as  far  back  as  1898  with  this  style, 
and  the  English  girl  partners  with  whom  I  played 
looked  at  me  in  astonishment  when  I  asked  them 
to  go  up  and  volley,  and  my  opponents  were  equal- 
ly amazed  at  the  manoeuver.  But  times  have 
changed  and  Dixon  tells  us  now  that  the  Ameri- 
can style  is  winning  abroad. 

The  last  point  of  controversy,  as  to  the 
soundness  of  the  English  formation  for  doubles, 
is  open  to  more  dispute  than  any  of  the  others,  but 
only  a  small  minority  of  Americans  support  the 
contention  that  it  is  sound.  Twenty-six  of  the  ex- 
perts consulted  condemn  the  position  of  the 
partner  of  the  striker-out  at  the  service-line,  while 
only  six  believe  it  to  be  sound,  five  answers  being 
doubtful. 

However,  this  cannot  be  said  to  prove  con- 
clusively the  claim  I  have  advanced,  for  recent 
International  tests  have  somewhat  undermined  the 
theory.  Doust  and  Jones,  playing  for  Australasia, 
beat  McLoughlin  and  Hackett  in  the  International 
matches  of  1913,  the  winners  using  this  forma- 
tion; while  Brookes  and  Wilding  again  adopted 
the  same  formation  in  the  matches  of  1914  and 


LAWN  TENNIS  THEORIES 


293 


beat  McLoughlin  and  Bundy,  the  best  team  we 
had  to  offer. 

Vaile  advances  the  same  contention,  that  the 
English  position  is  unsound,  and  cites  a  number 
of  historical  instances  among  the  best  players 
where  he  believes  it  has  proven  so.  The  chief  sup- 
port of  the  soundness  of  the  play  has  come  from 
the  success  of  the  Doherty  brothers  against  all- 
comers with  this  position,  but  Vaile  declares  that 
they  were  forced  to  give  it  up  by  American  and 
Australian  teams.  Beals  Wright,  who  played  on 
four  International  teams,  says :  "I  have  seen  the 
foremost  English  teams  driven  from  this  posi- 
tion." 

However  that  may  be,  more  recent  successes 
over  here  of  later  Australian  teams  that  have  suc- 
ceeded with  it  do  not  strengthen  this  contention. 
Personally,  I  still  hold  to  my  first  position  that 
the  formation  should  prove  the  undoing  of  any 
team  opposed  to  a  pair  of  fast  volleyers  from  the 
close  net  position,  if  other  skill  is  equal. 

Curiously  enough,  Parke  declares  in  this  vol- 
ume that  he  has  never  seen  this  "formation,"  but 
photographs  reproduced  herein  should  refresh  his 
memory  in  this  respect. 

I  have  advanced  in  this  volume  what  I  be- 
lieve to  be  a  new  theory  regarding  the  use  of  the 
eyes — the  necessity  and  practice  of  looking  away 
from  the  ball  before  it  is  hit.  I  shall  not  be  sur- 
prised if  it  is  disputed,  because  at  first  it  seems 
to  revolutionize  all  the  previously  established  in- 
structions on  the  game.  But  I  have  taken  much 


Vaile  Believes 
the  English 
Position 
Unsound 


Recent  Results 
Do  Not 
Strengthen 
This 
Contention 


New  Theory 
on  Looking 
Away  from 
the  Ball 


294      METHODS  AND  PLAYERS  OF  MODERN  LAWN  TENNIS 


McLoughlin's 
Book  Supports 
This  Principle 


Does  Success 
Vindicate  Bad 
Methods? 


The  Ideal 
Styles  to 
Follow 


pains  to  fortify  the  argument  before  it  was  put  in 
print. 

Vaile  repeatedly  insists  that  the  player  must 
not  only  keep  his  eyes  on  the  ball,  but  even  advises 
him  to  watch  that  part  of  the  ball  he  intends  to 
hit.  McLoughlin,  in  his  recent  book,  also  gives 
the  same  advice,  yet  both  weaken  their  own  con- 
tention by  other  statements.  Vaile  (p.  125)  says : 
"As  a  matter  of  fact,  nobody  watches  the  ball  onto 
his  racket,  nor  indeed  as  near  to  it  as  he  should/' 

McLoughlin  (p.  124)  cites  an  instance  of 
practical  play  that  helps  greatly  to  support  my 
claim.  Telling  of  his  match  against  Brookes  in 
Australia  in  1909,  and  the  great  difficulty  he  had 
in  trying  to  discover  which  way  Brookes  was 
placing  his  service,  he  found  that  he  got  informa- 
tion from  his  eyes  before  the  ball  or  racket  showed 
him  its  direction. 

Williams,  in  his  introduction  to  McLoughlin's 
book,  advances  a  theory  that  is  rather  difficult  to 
accept.  He  says  of  the  Calif ornian :  "It  seems  to 
me  that  success  is  a  complete  vindication  of  the 
methods  he  has  chosen."  But  McLoughlin  him- 
self later  on  in  the  book  admits  that  his  backhand 
stroke  is  all  wrong,  and  that  his  grip  could  be 
improved  upon. 

To  consider  all  of  his  methods  good  to  follow 
because  they  have  won,  seems  as  dangerous  as 
recommending  beginners  to  copy  JBrookes's  style. 
It  would  seem  to  me  much  better  if  we  asked 
young  players  to  copy  Larned  in  his  passing 
strokes,  McLoughlin  in  his  service,  Alexander  in 
his  forehand  drive,  Pell  in  the  backhand  drive  and 


LAWN  TENNIS  THEORIES 


295 


Clothier  in  his  volley.  To  accept  all  of  Mc- 
Loughlin's  play  as  good  because  he  has  been  suc- 
cessful seems  likely  to  lead  ambitious  novices  into 
pitfalls  by  trying  to  follow  the  same  methods. 

It  is  a  very  easy  matter  to  condemn  the 
faults  of  players  shown  in  action  photographs,  and 
such  condemnation  is  not  always  just.  Instan- 
taneous photographs  of  fast  action  cannot  always 
be  relied  upon.  One  picture  of  McLoughlin  just 
starting  a  forehand  stroke,  and  two  of  Williams 
starting  backhand  strokes  have  been  severely 
criticised  by  Vaile  because  in  each  case  the  wrong 
foot  is  forward. 

But  in  each  instance  it  seems  apparent  that 
the  player  was  "stepping  into"  the  stroke,  and  if 
the  camera  had  been  snapped  a  fraction  of  a  second 
later  the  other  foot  would  have  advanced  and 
would  then  have  appeared  forward  before  the 
stroke  was  completed.  The  habit  of  "stepping 
into"  the  stroke  is  not  always  approved,  to  be  sure, 
but  the  Doherty  brothers  recommend  it  and  many 
fine  players  have  succeeded  with  it. 


Action 
Photographs 
Often 
Deceptive 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


AN  INITIAL  FINE  OF  25  CENTS 

WILL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
THIS  BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  SO  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY  AND  TO  $1.OO  ON  THE  SEVENTH  DAY 
OVERDUE. 


i,.B    6    1 


DE 


2U98Z 


MAY  28  1947 


T)  LD 


£€0^t 


LD  21-100m-12,'43  (8796s) 


7301 


LIBRARY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 


LOAN  DEPT 


LD  62A-50m-2,'64 
(E3494slO)9412A 


General  Library     § 
University  of  California 
Berkeley 


U.C.  BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


CQOM15MM1L 


